ATHARVA-VEDA SAMHITA Publication of this book, was made possible by a grant from the U, S. Information Service: ATHARVA-VEDA SAJMHITA WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY Late Professor of Sanskrit tn Tale University, Knight of the Kojal Prussian Order Pour le Minte, Corresponding Member of the Imperial Russian Academy qf Sciences, of the Institute of France, and of the Royal Prussian Acadetry ef Sciences, Foreign Meniber of the Royal Academy det Lincet qf Rome, Honoraiy Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, of the Royal Asiatic Soaety qf Great Britain and Ireland, and of the German Oi rental Society, etc., Editor-in-Ghief of The Century Dictionary, an Encyclopaedic Lexicon of the English Language. Vol. I MOTILAL BANARSIDASS DELHI PATNA :: VARANASI 19^ .©MOTILAL BANARSIDASS Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-6 Nepali Khapra, Varanasi-1, U.P. Bankipur, Patna, Bihar. Price Rs. 30 for 2 Vols Pnnted m India by Shanti Lai Jam, Sbn Jainendra Press, Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-6 and published by Sundar Lai "Jam, ' Mdblal Banarsidass, Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar, Delbi-6. ENTS Portrait of Whitney, facing page . . Facsimile of Kashminan text, birch-bark leaf 187 a, just before page Prefatory and biographical and related matter Paragraphs in heu of a preface,by Whitney Announcement of this work Statement of its plan and scope and design The purpose and limitations and method of the translation . . . ■ Editor’s preface . . Whitnej’s labors on the Atharva-Veda The edition of the text or the “ F irst volume ” Relation of this work to the “ First volume ” And to this Senes External form of this work Its general scope as determined by previous promise and fulfilment Of the critical notes in particular Scope of the work as transcending previous promise Evolution of the style of the work Partial rewriting and revision by Whitney Picking up the broken threads Relation of the editor’s work to that of the author m Parts for which the author is not responsible The General Introduction, Part I by the editor The same, Part II elaborated in part from tlie author’s material The editor’s special introductions to the eighteen books, 11 -xi\ The special introductions to the hjmns additions by the editor His bibliography of previous translations and discussions contained in The paragraphs beginning with the word “Translated ’ . • Added special introductions to the hymns of book xviii etc Other editorial additions at the beginning and end of hymns Other additions of considerable extent The seven tables appended to the latter volume of this work Unmarked minor additions and otlier minor changes The marked minor additions and other minor changes The revision of the author’s manuscnpL Venfication . Accentuation of Sanskrit words Cross-references Orthography of Anglicized proper names Editorial short-comings and the chances of error ^ I'c PAGE xliu 471 xvu-lxi XVll-XXl xvn xvm xix xxin-xln XXIII xxm XXIV x\iv XXIV XXV XXVI xxvn xxvii XXV 11 XXV 111 xxvni xxvaii XXIX XXIX XXX x\x XXX xxxi xxxn XXXI 1 xxxn XXXlll XX\1\’ XXMV V\XV XXXV XXXV XXXV X Contents of Prefatory and Related Matter The biographical and related matter . . . General significance of Whitney’s work ... Need of a systematic commentary on the Rig-Veda . . The Century Dictionary of the English Language Acknowledgments . Human personality and the progress of science . The same in English verse and in Sansknt verse Biographical and related matter Bnef sketch of Whitney’s life by the editor . . . Estimate of Whitney’s character and services* by the editor Select list of Whitney’s wntings by Whitney General Introduction, Part I by the editor G eneral Premises ... . . . . Scope of this Part of the Introduction Scope of the reports of the variant readings The term “ manuscnpts ” often used loosely for “ authorities ” Which authorities are both manuscnpts and oral reciters Diflttculty of verifying statements as to authonties I Readings of European manuscripts of the Vulgate recension Reports include mss collated, some before, and some after pul Interpretation of the records of the Collation-Book . . . a Readings of Indian manuscripts of the Vulgate . . . . . By “ Indian mss ” are meant those used by S P Pandit His reports not exhaustive 3 Readings of Indian oral reciters of the Vulgate By “ Indian oral reciters ” are meant those employed by S P Pandit Errors of the eye checked by oral reciter^ . 4. Readings of the Emdu commentator . . . The cntical value and the range of his variant readings . Excnreus; Was he identical with Sayana of the Rig-V eda? 5 Readings of the Pada-pa^ . . . ... Reported in Index Verborum, and smce published in full Illustrations of its defiaencies . . .... In verb-compounds and vanous other combinations 6 The Pratifakhya and its commentary . - , ... Character of Whitney’s editions of the Pratigakhyas , . Their bearing upon the orthography and criticism of the text Utihzatiofi of the Atharvan Prati9akh)'a lor the present work 7 The Anukramanls: “ Old ” emd “ Major ” . More than one AnukramanI extant • • The PaQcapatalika or “ Old Anukr ” or “ Quoted Ahukr''” Manuscnpts thereof ... .... The Brhatsarvanukramani or “ Major Anukr ” Manuscnpts thereof . . • • , • • Text-cnbcal value of the Anukramanls The author of the Major Anukr. as a cntic of meters His statements as to the seers of the hymns (quasi-authorship) FACB XXXVl • XXXVll • xxxvil s xxxviu xxxvm xl • xli-xhi * * xliu-bd * xlui « xlvu Ivi • • Ixih-cvii Ixin-bdv bail • bail Ixiv Ixiv Ixiv Ixiv-lxv ion Ixiv # Ixv Ixvi • bcvi • Ixvi lxvi-4xvii It bm Ixvi * Irvn-bcnii Ixvii Ixviii bdx-lxx ba\ box Ixix-lxx Ixx-lxxi • • - Ixx bcx Ixxi bod-lxxiv t • Ixxi • Ixxi • bcxn • Ixxii Ixxii • Ixxiu Ixxiii Ixxiv Cmitents of General Introduchon, Part I. XI PAGE The Blaupika-Sutra and the Vaitana-Sutra The work of Garbe and Bloomfield and Caland Beanng of Sutras upon criticism of structure and text of Samhita Grouping of mantra-material in Sutra and in Samhita compared Many difficulties of the Kaugika yet unsolved Value of the Sutras for the exegesis of the Samhita Kaugika no good warrant for dogmatism in the exegesis of Saihhita Integer vitae as a Chnstian funeral-hymn ... Secondary adaptation of mantras to incongruous ritual uses Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippalada recension Its general relations to the Vulgate or ^aunakan recension The unique birch-bark manuscript thereof (perhaps about A d 1519) Roth’s Kashmirian nagarl transcript (Nov 1874) . Arrival (1876) of the birch-bark original at Tubingen Roth’s Collation (June, 1884) of the Paippalada text Roth’s autograph nagarl transcript (Dec 1884) . The facsimile of the birch-bark original (1901) Roth’s Collation not exhaustive . . . , Faults of the birch-bark manuscript . . , Collation not controlled by constant reference to the birch-bark ms. . Such reference would have ruined the birch-bark ms . . s Care taken in the use of Roth’s Collation Word-division Kashminan readings not controlled directly from the facsimile Provisional means for such control the Concordance (pages 1018-1023) Excursus • The requirements for an edition of the Paippalada . . 1 A rigorously precise transliteration 2 Marginal references to the Vulgate parallels) 3 Index of Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin 4 Accessory matenal conjectures, notes, translations Readings of the parallel texts The texts whose readings are reported The method of reporting aims at the utmost accuracy Completeness of the reports tar from absolute Reports presented in well-digested form . . . Ixxiv-lxxix Ixxiv . Ixxv . Ixxv . Ixxvi Ixxvii Ixxvii Ixxvill Ixxvill . Ixxix-lxxxix . boox Ixxx Ixxxi Ixxxi Ixxxi Ixxxii Ixxxii Ixxxill Ixxxill bcxxiv bcxxiv Ixxxv Ixxxv IxAXV Ixxxvi Ixxxm Ixxxvii Ixxxv 11 Ixxxviii Ixxxix-xci Ixxxix Ixxxix xc xc Whitney’s Commentarj further discussion of its critical elements xci-xcm Comprehensiveness of its array of parallels . . • xci Criticism of specific readings ^ci Illustrations of classes of text-errors . • • *cu Auditory errors Surd and sonant Twin consonants . . . xcii Visual errors Haplography xciii Metrical faults Hypermetric glosses, and so forth xciii Blend-readings . , xcni . Whitney’s Translation and the interpretative elements of the Commentary xciv'— xcix The translation general principles governing the method thereof xciv The translation not pnmanly an interpretation, but a literal version xciv A literal version as against a literary one . Interpretative elements captions of the hjmns . . . Jtcv xii Contents of General Introductio7i, Part /. PAGE Interpretations by Whitney . . - , xcv Exegetical notes contributed by Roth xcvi The translation has for its underlying text that of the Berlin edition x'cvi This is the fact even in cases of comgible corruptions xcvi Cases of departure from the text of the Berlin edition . xcvii Whitney’s growing skepticism and correspondmgly rigid literalness xcvii Poetic elevation and humor xcviii 13 Abbreviations and signs explained . xcix-cvi General scope of the list . it includes not only ^ xcix The downnght or most arbitrary abbreviations, but also xcix The abbreviated designations of books and articles xcix Explanation of arbitrary signs Parentheses, square brackets . ... . c Ell-brackets ( L J ) 5 hand ..... c Small circle , Italic colon; Clarendon letters, a, b, c, etc c Alphabetic list of abbreviations ... c 14 Tabular view of translations and native comment . cvi-cvii Previous translations — Native comment. . cvi Chronologic sequence of previous translations and discussions . cvu General Introduction, Part II partly from Whitney’s material cix-cbci General Premises . . ... cix Contents of this Part . cix Authorship of this Part cix I Descnption of the manuscripts used by "Wlntney . cix-cxvi The brief designations of his manuscripts (sigla codicum) cix Synoptic table of the manuscripts used by him . . cx Table of the Berlin manuscnpts of the Atharva-Veda cx Whitne} ’s critical descnption of his manuscnpts Manuscnpts used before publication of the text (B P M W E I H , Bp Bp cxi Manuscnpts collated after publication of the text (O R T K , Op D. Kp ) cxiv 2. The stanza pam no devir abhistaye as opemng stanza . . cxvi-cxvii As mitial stanza of the text in the Kashminan recension cxvi As mitial stanza of the Vulgate text cxvi 3. Whitney’s Collation-Book and his collations . cxvii-cxix Descnption of the two volumes that form the Collation-Book cxvii Whitney’s fundamental transcnpt of the text cxvii Collations made before publication of the text . cxviii The Berlin collations . . - cxviii The Pans and Oxford and London collations cxviii Collations made after publication (made in 1875 or later) . cxviii Haug, Roth, Tanjore, Deccan, and Bikaner mss . . • ^ cxviii Other contents of the Collation-Book . ^ cxvin 4 Repeated verses m the manuscnpts . • cxix-cxx Abbreviated by prafika w’lth addition of ity eka etc . . cxix List of repeated verses or verse-groups ... . . cxix Further details concerning the pratlka and the addition . . . cxix Contents of General Introdicction^ Part II. Xlll 5. Refrains and the like m the manuscripts ... . . Wntten out m full only m first and last verse of a sequence Treated by the Anukramanl as if unabbreviated . . . Usage of the editions in respect of such abbreviated passages . PAGE cxx-c\xi cxx cxx cxxi 6. Marks of accentuation m the manuscnpts . cxxi-cxxiii Berlin edition uses the Rig-Veda metiiod of marking accents . . . cxxi Dots for lines as accent-marks . . cxxi Marks for the independent svanta ... . cxxii Honzontal stroke for svqnta . . . cxxii Udatta marked by vertical stroke above, as m M aitrayani CKXii Accent-marks in the Bombay edition . . . cxxii Use of a circle as avagraha-sign . cxxii 7 8 Orthographic method pursued in the Berlm edition Founded on the usage of the mss , but controlled by the Pratigakhya That treatise an authority only to a certain point Its failure to discnminate between rules of wholly different value Items of conformity to the Prati^akhya and of departure therefrom . Transition-sounds as m tan-t-sarvan Final -n before 5- and j- as in pagyan janmani Final -n before c- as in yan9 ca Final -n before t- as m tans te Final -t before 9- as in asmac charavah Abbreviation of consonant groups as m pankti . . Fmal -m and -n before 1- as in kan lokam Visarga before st- and the like as in npu stenah The kampa-figures i and 3 ... , The method of marking the accent ... . . Metrical form of the Atharvan Samhita Predominance of anustubh stanzas . Extreme irreg^ilanty of the metrical form Apparent wantonness m the alteration of Rig-Veda material To emend this irregularity into regulanty is not licit . CXXII i-cxxvi cxxiii CXXlll CXXlll cxxiv cxxiv cxxiv CXXIV cxxiv CXXV cxxv CXXV CXXVl CXXVl cxXvi CXXVl-CXXVll CXXVl CXXVll CXXVII CXXVll 9 Divisions of the text Summary of the various divisions The first and second and third “ grand divisions ” cxxvii-cxl c±icvn CXXVll 1 The (unimportant) division into prapathakas or * lectures ’ Their number and distribution and extent Their relation to the anuvaka-divisions 2. The (fundamental) division into kandas or ‘ books ’ 3 The division into anuvakas or ‘ recitations ’ Their number, ^nd distribution over books and grand divisions Their relation to the hymn-divisions in books xiii — xvni 4 Th€ division into suktas or ‘ hymns ’ The hjTnn-divisions not everywhere of equal v5lue 5* The division into rcas or ‘verses ’ 6 . Subdivisions of verses avasanas, padas, and so forth cxxvin CXXV 111 CXXVlll cxxix cxxix cxxix cxxx cxxxi cxxxi CXXXI cxxxn XIV Conie7tts of Ge^ural hitroductio7i^ Part II. PACK Numeration of successive verses in the mss. . Groupings of successive verses into units requinng speaal mention Decad-suktas or ‘ decad-hymns ’ .... Artha-suktas or ‘ sense-hymns ’ . . . . Paryaya-suktas or * penod-hymns ’ . . Differences of the Berlin and Bombay numerations in books vii and xix. Differences of hymn-numeration m the paryaya-books Whitney’s criticism of the numbenng of the Bombay edition . . . Suggestion of a preferable method of numbenng and ating Differences of verse-numeration . . ... .... Summations of hymns and verses at end of divisions . . ... The summations quoted from the Paficapatahka . .... Indication of extent of divisions by reference to an assumed norm Tables of verse-norms assumed by the Paficapatalika The three “ grand divisions ” are recognized by the Paficapatalika . 10 Extent and structure of the Atharva-Veda Samhita . . . . Limits of the Onginal collection . ... . . Books XIX. and xx are later additions . . . The two broadest pnnaples of arrangement of books 1 -xviii. . . . I Miscellaneity or unity of subject and 2 length of hymn . . The three grand divisions (I , II., Ill ) as based on those principles The order of the three grand divisions ... . . . . . Principles of arrangement of books within the grand dmsion . 1 Normal length of the hymns for each of the several books .... 2 The amount of text in each book Table J . . . Arrangement of the hymns within any given book ... Distnbution of hymns according to length in divisions I. and II. and III Tables (i and 2 and 3) for those divisions (see pages cxhv-cxlv) Grouping of hymns of book xix. according to length Table (number 4) for book xix . Summary of the four tables Table number 5 Extent of AV Samhita about one half of that of RV First grand division (books i -vii ) . short hymns of miscellaneous subjects Evidence of fact as to the existence of the verse-norms Express testimony of both Anukramanis as to the verse-norms One verse is the norm for book vii . ..... Arrangement of books within the division 1 With reference to the normal length of the hymns Excursus, on hymn xix. 23, Homage to parts of the Atharva-Veda Exceptional character of book vii . . • • Book vii a book of after-gleanings supplementing books i -vi .... 2 Arrangement of books with reference to amount of text R^sum^ of conclusions as to the arrangement of books 1 -vii . Departures from the norms by excess Critical significance of those departures - . Illustrative examples of critical reduction to the norm - i Arrangement of the hymns within any given book of this division . cxxxu cxxxu cxxxu CXXXlll cxxxm cxxxiv cxxxiv cxxxvi CXXXVl CXXXVll cxxxvm cxxxviii cxxxvm cxxxix cxxxix cxl-clxi cxl cxli cxlll cxhi , cxIii cxlll cxlll cxlm cxliii cxlll 1 cxlvi cxlvi cxlvi cxivii cxlvu cxlvii cxlvn cxlviii cxlviii cxlix cxlix d cll clll clll dll dill dm dm cliv Contents of the Main Body of this Work xv PAcn Second grand division (books vui.-xu.) long hymns of miscellaneous subjects civ Their hierabc character mingled prose passages . civ Table of verse-totals for the hymns of division II . , clvi General make-up of the material of this division . . . clvi Order of books within the division . negative or insignificant conclusions . civii Order of hymns within any given book of this division . clvii Possible reference to this division in hymn xix 23 civii Third grand division (books xiii -xviii ) books showing unity of subject jclviii Division III represented in Paippalada by a single book, book xviii clix Names of the books of this division as given by hymn xix 23 clix Order of books within the division . . . . clix Table of verse-totals for the hymns of division III . . clix Order of hymns within any given book of this division clx The hymn-divisions of books xiii -xvni and their value clx CioSs-references to explanation of abbreviations and so forth clxii To explanation of abbreviations (pages xcix-cvi) clxii To explanation of abbreviated titles (pages xcix-cvi) clxii To explanation of arbitrary signs (page c) clxii To key to the designations of the manuscripts (pages cix-cx) . . clxii To sjmoptG tables of the manuscripts (pages cx-cxi) clxii To descnptions of the manuscripts (pages cxi-cxvi) . . clxii To table of titles of hymns (volumie VIII., pages 1024-1037) . ... clxii The Atharva-Veda Samhita. Translation and Notes . . . 1-1009 I. First Grand Division — Books I -VII . . . . 1-47° Seven books of short hymns of miscellaneous subjects [For table of the titles of the 433 hymns, see p 1024] [Volume VII. ends here With book vii.] r [Volume VIII. begins here with book viii ] a Second Grand Division — Books VUI -Xn. ... . ... 471-707 Five books of long hymns of miscellaneous subjects [For table of the titles of the 45 hymns, see p, 1034] 3. Third Grand Divi ion —Books XIH -XVm 708-894 Six books of long hymns, the books showing umty of subject [For table of the titles of the 1 5 hymns, see p. Book xiii . hymns to the Ruddy Sim or Rohita (seer; Brahman) . . 708-737 Bobk XIV wedding verses (seer Savitrl Surya) . 738-768 Book XV tlie Vratya (seer — ') . 7 ^ 9 ~ 79 ^ Book xvi . Pantta (seer Prajapati ^) . • • 792-S04 Book xvii prayer to the Sun as Indra and as Vishnu (seer Brahman) 805-812 Book xviii funeral verses (seer Atharvan) ... . 813-894 4 Snp^jxenienL — Book XIX . . . • . 895-1009 After-gleanings, chiefly from the traditional sources of division I. [For table of the titles of the 72 hymns, see p 1036] Paippalada excerpts concerning book xx. . 1009 XVI Contents of Appended Auxiliary Matter PAGE Indexes and other auxiliary matter 1011-1046 t The noE-metneal passages of the Atharvan Samhita . . . ion Tabular list jqjj 2 Hymns Ignore^ by the Kaupika-Sutra . . 1011-1012 Tabular list . . 1012 3 The two methods of citing the Kaupika-Sutra 1012 Tabular concordance • . 1012 4 The discrepant hymn-numbers of the Berlin and Bombay editions 1013 Tabular concordance . 1013 5 Paippallda passages corresponding to passages of the Vulgate 1013-1023 Primary use of the table, its genesis and character 1013 Incidental uses of the table 1013 Vulgate grand division III and Paippalada book xviii 1014 Conspectus of the contents of Paippalada book xviii 1015 Explanation of the table . . 1016 Manner of hsing the table . , 1017 Tabular concordance . . 1 01 7-1 023 6 Whitney’^ English captions to his hymn-translations . 1024-1037 They form an important element in his interpretation of this Veda 1024 In tabular form, they give a useful conspectus of its subject-matter 1024 Table of hjmn-titles of Division I , books i -vii . 1024-1032 [Stop-gap the division of this work into two separately bound volumes] 1033 Table of hymn-titles of Division II , books viii-xii 1034 Table of hjTnn-titles of Division III , books xiii -xviu . . 1035 Table of hymn-tides of the Supplement, book xix. io 3 ^J °37 7 The names of the seers of the hymns . • 1038-1041 Whitney’s exploitation of the MajOr Anukramani 103S Doubtful points . . ^^3^ Entire books of division III asenbed ’each to a single seer . 103^ Value of these ascnptions of quasi-authorship 103 ^ Prominence of Atharvan and Brahman as seers t °39 Hymns of Atharvan and hymns of Augiras possible contrast I 039 Consistency m the ascnptions ^°39 Palpably fabneated ascriptions Alphabetical index of seer-names and of passages asenbed to them 1040-1041 8 Brief index of names and thmgs and words and places . 1042-1044 An elaborate index uncalled for here • Alphabetical list of names and things Alphabetical list of Sanskrit words io 44 List of AV passages • g Additions and corrections 1044-1046 Omissions and errors not ea^ to rectify m the electrotype plates . 1045 PARAGRAPHS IN LIEU OF A PREFACE BY WHITNEY I LAnnouncement of this work. — The following paragraphs from the pen of Professor Whitney, under the title, “ Announcement as to a second volume of the Roth-Whitney edition of the Atharva-Veda,” appeared about two years before Mr Whitney’s death, m the Proceedings for Apnl, 1892, appended to the Journal of the American Oiienial Society, volume xv , pages clxxi-cbi.xiii They show the wa} in which the labor done by Roth and Whitney upon the Atharva-Veda was divided betiseen those two scholars Moreover, they state bnefly and clearly the mam purpose of Whitnej’s commentary, which IS, to give for the text of this Veda the vanous readings of botli Hindu and European authorities (living or manuscnpt), and the variants of the Kashmirian or Paippalada recension and of the corresponding passages of other Vedic texts, together with references to, or excerpts from, the ancillary works on meter, ritual, exegesis, etc They are significant as showing that in Mr Whitney’s mind the translation was entirely subordinate to the critical notes Most significant of all — the last sentence makes a clear disclaimer of finality for this work by speaking of it as “ material that is to help toward the study and final comprehension of this Veda ” — C R L J When, in 1855-6, the text of the Athan^a-Veda was published by Professor Roth and myself, it was styled a “first volume,” and a second volume, of notes, indexes, etc., was promised. The promise was made in good faith, and with every intention of prompt fulfilment; but circumstances have deferred the latter, even till now. The bulk of the work was to have fallen to Pro- fessor Roth, not only because the bulk of the work on the first volume had fallen v to me, but also because his superior learning and ability pointed him out as the one to undertake it. It was his absorption in the great labor of the Petersburg Lexicon that for a long series of years kept his hands from the Atharva-Veda — except so far as his working up of its material, and definition of its vocabulary, was a help of the first older toward the understand- ing of it, a kind of fiagmentary translation. He has also made important contributions of other kinds to its elucidation : most of all, by his incitement to inquiry after an Atharva-Veda in Cash- mere, and the resulting discovery of the so-called Paippalada text, now well known to all Vedic scholars as one of the most important finds in Sanskrit literature of the last half-century’’, and of which xvu xviii Paragraphs in luti of a Preface by Whitney the credit belongs in a peculiar manner to him. I have also done something in the same direction, by publishing in the Society’s Journal m 1862 (Journal, voL vii.) the Atliarva-Veda Prati9akhya text, translation, notes, etc., and in 1881 L Journal, vol. xii.J the Index Verborum — which latter afforded me the opportunity to give the pada-readings complete, and to report in a general way the corrections made by us in the text at the time of its fiist issue. There may be mentioned also the index of pratlkas, which was published by Weber in his Indische Shidun, vol iv, in 1857, from the slips written by me, although another (Professor Ludwig) had the tedious labor of preparing them for the press. I have never lost from view the completion of the plan of pub- lication as originally foraied. In 1875 ^ spent the summer in Germany, chiefly engaged in further collating, at Munich and at Tubingen, the additional manuscnpt material which had come to Europe since our text was printed; and I should probably have ' soon taken up the work senously save for having been engaged while in Germany to prepare a Sanskrit grammar, which fully occupied the leisure of several following years At last, in 1885-6, I had fairly started upon the execution of the plan, when failure of health reduced my working capacity to a minimum, and rendered ultimate success very questionable. The task, however, has never been laid wholly aside, and it is now so far advanced that, barnng further loss of power, I may hope to finish it in a couple of years or so; and it is therefore proper and desirable that a public announcement be made of my intention. LStatement of its plan and scope and design, j — My plan includes, in the first place, critical notes upon the text, giving the various readings of the manuscripts, and not alone of those collated by myself in Europe, but also of the apparatus used by Mr. Shankar Pandurang Pandit in the great edition with commentary (except certain parts, of which the commentary has not been found) which he has been for years engaged in pnnting in India. Of this extremely \vell-edited and valuable woik I have, by the kind- ness of the editor, long had in my hands the larger half; and doubt- less the whole will be issued in season for me to avail myself of it throughout Not only his many manuscripts and frot?'tyas (the living equivalents, and in some respects the superiors, of XIX Plan aiid Scope and Desig'n of this Work manuscripts) give' valuable aid, but the commentary (which, of course, claims' to be “ Sayana’s ”) also has very numerous various readings, all worthy to beireported, though seldom offering anything bett^f-than the text of the manuscripts. Second, the readings of the B|l|5palada version; in those parts of the Veda (much the larger half) for which there is a corresponding Paippalada text; these were furnished me, some years ago, by Professor Roth, in whose exclusive possession the Paippalada manuscript is held. Further, notice of the corresponding passages in all the other Vedic texts, whether Samhita, Brahmana, or Sutra, with report of their various readings. Further, the data of the Anukramanl respecting author- ship, divinity, and meter of each verse. Also, references to the ancillary literature, especially to the Kau 9 ika and Vaitana Sutras (both’ of which have been competently edited, the latter with a translation added), with account of the use made in them of the hymns and parts of hymns, so far as this appears to cast any light upon their meaning. Also, extracts from the printed commentary, wherever this seems worth while, as either really aiding the under- standing of the text, or showing the absence of any helpful tradi- tion. Finally, a simple literal translation; this was not originally promised for the second volume, but is added especially in order to help “float” the rest of the matenal. An introduction and indexes will give such further auxiliary matter as appears to be called for. The design ot the volume will be to put together as much as possible of the material that is to help toward the study and final comprehension of this V eda, |_TIxe purpose and limitations and method of the translation. — In a critique pub- lished some SIX years earlier, m 1886, in the American Jo^trt^al of Philology, vii. 2-4, Whitney discusses several ways of translating the Upanishads His remarks on the second "way” leave no doubt that, in making his V^da-translation as he has done, he fully recognized its provisional character and felt tliat to attempt a defimtive one would be premature. His descnpbon of the “third way,” mutatis mutandis, is so good a statement of the principles which have governed him in this work, that, in default ot n bettor one, it is here reprinted — C R L J One way is, to put one’s self frankly and fully under the guia- ?-nce of a narive interpreter. . . . Another way w'ould be, to give a conspectus, made as full as possible, of all accessible native inter- pretations — in connection with which tre.atm>ent, one could hardly XX Paragraphs in lieu of a Preface by Whitney avoid taking a position of critical superiority, approving and con- demning, selecting and rejecting, and comparing all with what appeared to be the simple meaning of the text itself. This would be a very welcome labor, but also an extremely difficult one; and the preparations for it are not yet sufficiently made ; it may be looked for^vard to as one of the results of future study. A third way, leading in quite another direction, would be this : to approach the text only as a philologist, bent upon making a version of it exactly as it stands, representing just what the words and phrases appear to say, without intrusion of anything that is not there in recognizable form: thus reproducing the scripture itself in Western guise, as nearly as the nature of the case admits, as a basis whereon could afterward be built such fabric of philo- sophic interpretation as should be called for ; and also as a touch- stone to which could be brought for due testing anything that claimed to be an interpretation. The maker of such a version would not need to be versed in the subtleties of the later Hindu philosophical systems ; he should even carefully avoid working in the spirit of any of them. Nor need he pretend to penetrate to the hidden sense of the dark sayings that pass under his pen, ta comprehend it and set it forth; for then there would inevitably mingle itself with his version much that was subjective and doubt- ful, and that every successor would have to do over again. Work- ing conscientiously as Sanskrit scholar only, he might hope to bnng out something of permanent and authoritative character, which should serve both as help and as check to those that came after him. He would carefully observe all identities and paral- lelisms of phraseology, since in texts like these the word is to no small extent more than the thing, the expression dominating the thought the more the quantities are unknown, the less will it answer to change their symbols in working out an equation. Of all leading and much-used terms, in case the rendering could not be made uniform, he would maintain the identity by a liberal quotation of the word itself in parenthesis after its translation, so that the sphere of use of each could be made out in the version somewhat as in the original, by the comparison of paraltel pas- sages ; and so that the student should not run the risk of hawng a difference of statement which might turn out important cohered from his eyes by an apparent identity of phrase — or the contrary^ Purpose^ Limitations^ aftd Method of the Translaho7i xxi Nothirig, as a matter of cburse, would be omitted, save particles whose effect on the shading of a sentence is too faint to show in the coarseness of translation iiito a strange tongue ; nor would anything be put in withoubexact indication of the intrusion. The notes would be prevailingly linguistic, references to parallel pas- sages, with exposition of correspondences and differences. Sen- tences grammatically difficult or apparently corrupt would be pointed out, and their knotty points discussed, perhaps with suggestions of text-amendment. But it is needless to go into further detail ; every one knows the methods by which a careful scholar, liberal of his time and labor toward the due accomplish- ment of a task deemed by him important, will conduct such a work. EDITOR’S PREFACE Whitney’s labors on the Atharva-Veda. — As early as March, 1851, at Berlin, during Whitney’s first semester as a student in Germany, his teacher Weber was so impressed by his scholarly ability as to suggest to him the plan of editing an important Vedic text ^ The impression produced upon Roth in Tubingen by Whitney during the following summer semester was in no wise diffeneht, and resulted m the plan for a joint edition of the Atharva-Veda.^v,, Whitney’s preliminary labors for the edition began accordingly upon his return to Berlin for his second winter semester His fundamental autograph transcript of the Atharva-Veda Samhita is contained m his Collation-Book, and appears from the dates of that book® to have been made m the short interval between October, 1851, and March, 1852 The second summer in Tubingen (1852) was doubtless .pent partly in studying the text thus copied, partly m planning with Roth the details of the method of editing, partly in helping to make the tool, so important for further progress, the index of Rig-Veda pratikas, and so on; the concordance of the four principal Samhitas, in which, to be sure, Whitney’s part was only “a secondary one,” was issued under the date November, 1852 During the winter of 1852-3 he copied the Prati^akhya and its commentary contained in the Berlin codex (Weber, No 361), as is stated in his edition, p 334 As noted below (pp xliv, 1 ), the collation of the Pans and Oxford and London manuscripts of the Atharvan Samhita followed in the spring and early summer of 1853, just, before his return (in August) to America The copy of the text for the printer, made with exquisite neatness in na^ari letters by Mr. Whitney’s hand, is still preserved The Edition of the text or “ First volume.” — The first part of the work, containing books 1 -xix of the text, appeared in Berlin with a provisional preface dated February, 1855 The provisional preface announces that the text of book xx will not be given in full, but only the Kuntapa-hymns, and, for the rest of it, merely references to the Rig-V eda , and promises, as the principal contents of the second part, seven of the eight items of accessory material enumerated below — This plan, however, was changed, ^ See the extract from Weber’s letter, below, p xli\ ,The text was the Taittirlja Aranyaha ® See the extract from Roth’s letter, below, p xhv ® See below, p cxvii will XXIV Editor's Preface and the second part appeared in f^ct as a thin Heft of about 70 pages, giving book xx m full, and that only To it was prefixed a half-sheet containing the definitive preface and a new title-page The definitive preface is dated October, 1856, and adds an eighth item, exegetical notes, to the promises of the provisional preface. The new title-page has the words “Erster Band Text,” thus implicitly promising a second volume, in which, according to the definitive preface, the accessory material was to be published. Relation of this work to the << First volume** and to this Series. — Of the implicit promise of that title-page, the present work is intended to complete the fulfilment As most of the labor upon the first volume had fallen to Whitney, so most of the labor upon the projected “ second ” was to have been done by Roth In fact, however, it turned out that Roth’s very great services for the criticism and exegesis of this Veda took a different form, and are embodied on the one hand in his contributions to the St Petersburg Lexicon, and consist on the other in his brilliant discovery of the Kashmirian recension of this Veda and his collation of the text thereof 'with that of the Vulgate. Nevertheless, as is clearly apparent (page xvii), Whitney thought and spoke of this work^ as a “ Second volume of the Roth-Whitney edition of the Atharva-Veda,” and called It “our volume” in writing to Roth (cf p Ixxxvi) , and letters exchanged between the two friends in \ 894 discuss the question whether the “ second volume ” ought not to be published by the same house (F Dummler’s) that issued the first m 1856 It would appear from Whitney’s last letter to Roth (written April 10, 1894, shortly before his death), that he had determined to have the work published in the Harvard Senes,* and Roth’s last letter to Whitney (dated April 23) expresses his great satisfaction at this arrangement This plan had the cordial approval of my friend Henry Clarke Warren, and, while still in relatively fair health, he generously gave to the University the money to pay for the printing External form of this work. — It is on account of the relation just explained, and also in deference to Whitney’s express wishes, that the size of the printed page of this work and the size of the paper have been chosen to match those of the “ First volume ” The pages have been numbered continuously from i to 1009, as if this work were indeed one volume ; but, since it was expedient to separate the work into two halves in binding, I have done so, and designated those halves as volumes seven 1 In a letter to the editor, dated March 28, 1881, speaking of Roth’s preoccupation with Avestan studies, Whitney says “I fear I shall yet be obliged to do AV ii alone, and think of setting quietly about it next year” Again, June 17, 1881. he wntes- “I have begun work on \ol lu of the AV , and am resolved to put it straight through ” ' XXV General Scope of this Work and eight of the Harvard Oriental Series.^ The volumes are substan- tially bound and properly lettered ; the leaves are open at the front , and the top IS cut without spoiling the margin The purpose of the ‘inexpen- sive gilt top is not for ornament, but rather to save the volumes from the injury by dirt and discoloration which is so common with ragged hand- cut tops. The work has been electrotyped, and will thus, it is hoped, be quite free from the blemishes occasioned by the displacement of letters, the breaking Dff of accents, and the like. General scope of this work as determined by previous promise and fulfil- ment. — Its general scope was determined in large measure by the promise of the definitive preface of the “ First volume ” The specifications of that promise were given in eight items as follows : 1. Excerpts from the Pratigakhya , 5 Excerpts from the AnukramanI , 2. Excerpts from the Pada-patha , 6 General introduction , 3 Concordance of the AV with other Sainhitas , 7 Exegetical notes 4 Excerpts from the ritual (Kaugika), 8 Critical notes *1 ^ Of the above-mentioned promise, several items had meantime been more than abundantly* fulfilled by Whitney In 1862 he published the Prati9akhya (item i), ^text, translation, notes, indexes, etc. Of this treatise only excerpts had been promised In i88r followed the (unprom- ised) Index Verborum,^ m which was given a full report of the pada- readings (item 2). The Table of Concordances between the several Vedic Samhitas (1852) and the Index of pratikas of the Atharva-Veda (1857), — the first in large measure, the second in largest measure, the ^work of Whitney, — went far toward the accomplishment of the next item (item 3) Pupils of the two editors, moreover, had had a share in its fulfilment In 1878 Garbe gave us the Vaitana-Sutra in text and translation, and that was followed in 1890 by Bloomfield’s 'text of the Kaugika-Sutra The inherent difficulties of the latter text and the excellence of Bloom- field’s performance make us regret the more keenly that he did not give ns a translation also The material for report upon the ritual uses of the verses of this Veda (preparative for item 4) was thus at hand. ^ For conscience sake I register my protest agamst the" practice of issuing works in gratui- tously confusing subdivisions, as Bande and Halften and Abtetlungen and Ltefemttgen — In this connection, I add that the page numbers of the main body of this nork, which are of use chiefly to the pressman and the binder and are of minimal consequence for purposes of cita- tion, have been relegated to the inner comer of the page, so that the book and hj-mn, which are of prime importance for purposes of finding and citation, may be conspicuously and con\en- lently shown in the outer comers I hope that such regard for the convenience of the users of technical books may become more and more common unth the makers of such books ^ The published Index gives only the words and references It is made from a much fuller manuscript Index, written by Whitney on 1721 quarto pages, which quotes the context in which the words appear, and which for the present is m my hands XXVI _ Editor s Preface While making his London collations in 1853 (see below, p Ixxii), Whit- ney made also a transcript of the Major AnukramanI, and subsequently he added a collation of the Berlin ms thereof (preparative for item 5) — In the course of his long labors upon Atharvan texts, Whitney had naturally made many observations suitable for a general introduction (item 6) Roth had sent him a considerable mass of exegetical notes (item 7) — Furthermore, dunng the decades m which Whitney had concerned himself with this and the related texts, he had noted in his Collation-Book, opposite each verse of the Atharvan Samhita, the places in the other texts where that verse recurs, in identical or in similar form, in whole or m part , thus making a very extensive collection of concord- ances, with the Atharvan Samhita as the point of departure, and providing himself with the means for reporting upon the variations of the parallel texts with far greater completeness than was possible by means of the Table and Index mentioned above under item 3. The critical notes. — Of all the eight promised items, the one of most importance, and of most pressing importance, was doubtless the eighth, the critical notes, in which were to be given the vanous readings of the manuscripts. In his Introductory Note to the Atharvan Pratigakhya (P 338 : year 1862), Whitney says . The condition of the Atharvan as handed down by the tradition was such as to impose upon the editors as a duty what m the case qf any of the other Vedas would have been an almost inexcusable liberty — namely^, the emendation of the text- readings in many places In so treating such a text, it^is not easy to hit the pre- cise mean between too much and too little , and while most of the alterations made were palpably and imperatively called for, and while many others would have to be made in translating, there are also a few cases in which a closer adherence to the manuscript authorities might have been preferable The apparatus for ascertaining in any given passage just what the mss read was not published for more than two decades. Complaints on this score, however, were surely estopped by the diligence and effectiveness with which both editors employed that time for the advancement of the cause of Indie philology In his Introduction to the Index Verborum (p. 2 : year 1880), Whitney says ' There will, of course, be differences of opinion as to whether tins [^course of pro- cedure J was well-advised — whether they [_the editors_J should not have contented themselves with giving just what the manusenpts gave them, keeping suggested alterations for their notes , and, yet more, as to the acceptableness of part of the alterations made, and the desirableness of others which might with equal reason have been made . It is sought [_in the IndexJ simply to call attention to all cases in which a published reading differs from that of the manusenpts, as veil as to those comparaUvelj infrequent ones where the manuscripts are at \ anance, and to furnish the means . . for determining m any particular case what the manusenpts actually read Partial Rewriting and Revision by Whitney xxvii Thus the eighth item oi the promise also (as well as the second) was ful- filled by the Index. — Desirable as such critical notes may be in con- nection with the Index, a report of the variants of the European mss. of the Vulgate recension in the sequence of the text was none the less called for. The report is accordmgly given in this work, and includes not only the mss. of Berlin, Paris, Oxford, and London, collated before publishing, but also those of Munich and Tubingen, collated twenty years after (see below, p. xliv, note 5, p. Ixiv). Scope of this work as transcending previous promise. — The accessory material of this work, beyond what was promised by the preface of the text-edition, is mentioned m the third paragraph of Whitney’s “Announce- ment,” p xviii, and includes the reports of the readings of the Kashmirian recension and of S P. Pandit’s authorities, extracts from the native com- mentary, and a translation For the first, Roth had performed the long and laborious and difficult task of making a careful collation of the Paippalada text, and had sent it to Whitney In his edition published in Bombay, S. P Pandit had given for the Vulgate recension the variants of the authorities (Indian : not also European) accessible to him, and including not only the variants of manuscripts, but also those of living reciters of the text. The advance sheets of his edition he had sent in instalments to Whitney, so that all those portions for which Pandit pub- lished the comment were in Whitney’s hands in time to be utilized by him, although the printed date of Pandit’s publication (1895-8) is sub- sequent to Whitney’s death Evolution of the style of the work. — To elaborate all tne varied matenal descnbed in the foregoing paragraphs into a running commentary on the nineteen books was accordingly Whitney’s task, and he was “fairly started” upon it in 1885-6. As was natural, his method of treatment became somewhat fuller as he proceeded with his work. There is in my hands his prior draft of the first four or five books, which is relatively meagre in sundry details. It was not until he had advanced well into the second grand division (books viii — xii.) that he settled down into the style of treatment to which he then adhered to the end. Partial rewriting and revision by Whitney. — Thereupon, in order to carry out the early books in the same style as the later ones, it became neces- sary to rewrite or to revise the early ones. He accordingly did rewrite the first four (cf. p. xcviii below), and to the next three (v., vi , vii ) he S^ve a pretty thorough revision without rewriting ; and at this point, apparently, he was interrupted by the illness which proved fatal The discussion of the ritual uses in book viii (supplied by me) would doubt- less have been his next task. Not counting a lot of matter fdr his General Introduction, Whitney’s manuscript of his commentary and translation. xxvili Editors Preface as he 4 eft it at his death in 1894, consisted of about 2500 folios Had Whitney lived to see it printed, the editor of this Senes would probably have read one set of proofs, and made suggestions and criticisms freely on the margins, which the author would then have accepted or rejected without discussion ; and the whole matter, in that case a very simple one, would have been closed by a few lines of kindly acknowledgment from the author in his preface Picking up the broken threads. — It is, on the other hand, no simple matter, but rather one of peculiar difficulty and delicacy, to edit such a technical work as this for an author who has passed away, especially if he has been the editor’s teacher and friend The difficulty is increased by the fact that, in the great mass of technical details, there are very many which have to be learned anew by the editor for himself, and others still, which, through long years of labor, have grown so familiar to the author that he has hardly felt any need of making written memoranda of them, and which the editor has to find out as best he can. Relation ^of the editor’s work to that of the author, — Although Whit- ney’s manuscript of the main body of the work was written out to the end, it was not systematically complete Thus he had written for book 1. (and for that only) a special introduction, showing that he meant to do the like for the other eighteen Of the General Introduction as it stands, only a very few parts were worked out, for some parts there were only rough sketches ; and for very many not even that And in unnumbered details, major and minor, there was opportunity for long and patient toil upon the task of systematically verifying all references and statements, of revising where need was, and of bnnging the whole nearer to an ideal and unat- tainable completeness What these details were, the work itself may show. But besides all this, there was the task of carrying through the press a work the scientific importance of which called for the best typo- graphical form and for the utmost feasible accuracy in printing. Parts for which the author is not responsible. — No two men are alike in the various Endowments and attainments that make the scholar ; and, m particular, the mental attitude of any two towards any given problem is wont to differ It is accordingly not possible that there should not be, among the editonal additions to Whitney’s manuscript or changes therein, many things which he would decidedly have disapproved They ought certainly therefore to be marked in such a way that the reader may easily recognize them as additions for which the editor and not the author is responsible , and for this purpose two signs have been chosen, L J* which are like incomplete brackets or brackets without the upper hori- zontal strokes, and which may be called “ ell-brackets ” and suggest the XXIX Parts for which the Author is not responsible initial letter of the editor’s name (cf p c) Besides the marked additions, there are others, like the paragraphs beginning with the word “Trans- lated,” which are not marked. It is therefore proper to give a general systematic account of the editorial additions and changes. The General Introduction. — This consists of two parts : the first, by the editor , the second, elaborated m part from material left by the author. — Part I. — Besides the topics which unquestionably belong to the General Introduction and are treated m Part II , there are a good many which, but for their voluminousness, might properly enough have been put into the editor’s preface. Such are, for example, the discussions of the vari- ous cntical elements which form the bulk of Whitney’s Commentary. I have printed them as Part I. of the General Introduction, The form of presentation is, I trust, such that, with the help of the Table of Con- tents, the student will be able to find any desired topic very quickly. The General Introduction : Part II. — Certain general statements con- cerning the manuscripts and the method of editing, and concerning the text of the Atharva-Veda Samhita as a whole, must needs be made, and are most suitably presented in the form of a general introduction prefixed to the mam body of the work For this Introduction, Whitney left a considerable amount of miaterial Parts of that material were so well worked out as to be nearly or quite usable for printing : namely, the brief chapter, 8, on the metrical form of the Samhita, and (most fortunately •) nearly all of" the very important chapter, i, containing the description of his manuscripts. The like is true, as will appear from the absence of ell- brackets, of considerable portions of chapter lO, on the extent and struc- ture of the Samhita — Chapters 2 and 3 (concerning the stanza no devir abhistaye and the Collation-Book) might have been put in Part I., as being from the editor’s hand , but, on the ground of intrinsic fitness, they have been put immediately after the description of the mss For chapters 4 and 5 and 6 (on repeated verses, on refrains, and on accent-marks) and chapter 9 (on the divisions of the text), Whitney left sketches, brief and rough, written with a lead-pencil and written (it would seem) in the days of his weakness as he lay on a couch or bed I have made faithful use of these sketches, not only as indicating in detail the topics that Whitney most desired to treat, but also as giving, or at least suggesting, the language to be used in their treatment Nevertheless, they have been much rewritten in parts, and in such a way that it is hardly feasible or even worth while to separate the author’s part from the editor s. The final result must pass for our joint work. The sketch for chapter 7 (on the orthographic method of the Berlin text) was also a lead-pencil draft , but it was one that had evidently been made years before those l^st mentioned, and its substance was such as to need only recasting in XXX Editor s Preface form, and expansion, — a work which I have carried out with free use of the pertinent matter m Whitney’s Pratigakhyas (cf p. cxxiii, note) To revert to chapters 9 and 10 (on the divisions of the text, and on its extent and structure), they are the longest of all, and, next after chap- ter I (on the mss), perhaps the most important, and they contain the most of what is new. After putting them once into what I thought was a final form, I found that, from the point of view thus gained, I could, by further study, discover a good many new facts and relations, and attain to greater certainty on matters already set forth, and, by rewriting freely, put very many of the results in a clearer light and state them more con- vincingly. The ell-brackets distinguish in general the editor’s part from the author’s If, m these two chapters, the latter seems relatively small, one must not forget its large importance and value as a basis for the editor’s further studies. With the exceptions noted (chapters 2 and 3), it has seemed best, m elaborating this part of the General Introduction, to restrict it to the topics indicated by Whitney’s material, and not (in an attempt at sys- tematic completeness) to duplicate the treatise which forms Bloomfield’s part of the Gruiidn.s$. Bloomfield’s plan is quite different ; but since a considerable number of the topics are indeed common to both, it seemed better that the treatment of them in this work should proceed as far as possible independently of the treatment in the Gntndnss The editor’s special introductions to the eighteen books, ii.-^iz. — Since Whitney’s manuscript contained a brief special introduction to the first book, it was probably his intention to write one for each of the remaining eighteen. At all events, certain general statements concerning each book as a whole are plainly called for, and should properly be cast into the form of a special introduction and be prefixed, one to each of the sev- eral books These eighteen special introductions have accordingly been wntten by the editor, and are, v/ith some trifling exceptions (cf pages 471-2, 739, 792, 794, 814) entirely from his hand The paiydya-\\yri\x\% (cf p 471) and the divisions of the pa-tyaya-xix-^X.^xvaS. (pages 628, 770, 793) called for considerable detail of treatment , similarly the discrepancies between the two editions as respects hymn-numcration (pages 589, 610) and the /^z;9'5>'rt-divisions (pages 771, 793) , hkevise the subject-matter of boojc xviii (p S13) , while the supplementary book xix., on account of its peculiar relations to the rest of the text and to the ancillary treatise^, called for the most elaborate treatment of all (p 895). The special introductions to the hymns: editor’s biMi'j^Tapby of previous t'^ansiations and discussions. — These arc contain :n the poragmphs begin- ning V ith the "^verd TiViti'^lafcd — In the iT.troauct.on to each rjmn, in ^ p-vigrapli immediately followlnr; the AnukramauT exccqjls, and usual’)' XXXI Parts for which the Author is not responsible between a statement as to where the hymn is “ Found in Paipp.” or in other texts, and a statement as to how the hymn is “ Used in Kau9 Whitney had given in his manuscript a statement as to where the hymn had been previously translated by Ludwig or Grill or some other scholar. For Weber’s and Henry’s translations of whole books, he had apparently thought to content himself by referring once and for all at the beginning of each book to the volume of the Indtsche Stndicn or of the Traduction. By a singular coincidence, a very large amount of translation and explana- tion of this Veda (by Deussen, Henry, Griffith, Weber, Bloomfield, see the table, p cvii) appeared within three or four years after Whitney's death >The version of Griffith, and that alone, is complete. As for the partial translations and discussions, apart from the fact that they are scatteied through different periodicals and independent volumes, their multiplicity is so confusing that it would be very troublesome in the case of any given hymn to find for oneself just how many of the translators had discussed it and where. I have therefore endeavored to give with all desirable completeness, for every single one of the 588 hymns of books i-xix (save li 20-23), ^ bibliography of the translations and discussion^ of that hymn up to the year 1898 or thereabout. For some hymns the amount of discussion is large* cf. the references for iv. 16, v. 22 ; ix 9; X 7, xviii I, xix. 6 At first blush, some may think it ‘^damnable iter- ation” that I should, for hymn-translations, make reference to Griffith some 588 times, to Bloomfield some 214, to Weber some 179, or to Henry some 167 times; but I am sure that serious students of the work will find the references exceedingly convenient. As noted above, they are given in the paragraphs beginning with the word “ Translated ” Although these paragraphs are almost wholly editorial additions, I have not marked them as such by enclosing them in ell-brackets. I have always endeavored to give these references in the chronological sequence of the works concerned (see the table with dates and explana- tions at p evil) These dates need to be taken into account in judging Whitney’s statements, as when he says all the translators ” understand a passage thus and so Finally, it is sure to happen that a careful com- parison of the views of the other translators will often reveal a specific item of interpretation which is to be preferred to Whitney’s Here and there, I have given a reference to such an item ; but to do so systematic- ally IS a part of the great task which this work leaves unfinished Added special introductions to the hymns of book xviii. and to some others. — The relation of the constituent material of the four so-called “hymns of book xviii to the Rig-Veda etc is such that a clear synoptic statement of the provenience of the different groups of verses or of single verses is in the highest degree desirable ; and I have therefore endeavored to give such xxxii Editor's Preface a statement for each of them, grouping the verses into Parts ” according to then provenience or their ritual use or both An analysis of the structure of the single hymn of book xvii also seemed to me to be worth giving Moreover, the peculiar contents of the hymn entitled « Homage to parts of the Atharva-Veda ” (xix. 23) challenged me to try at least to identify its intended references, and although I have not succeeded entirely, I hope I have slated the questionable matters with clearness I have ventured to disagree with the author’s view of the general signifi- cance of hymn 111 26 as expressed in the caption, and have given my reasons m a couple of paragraphs The hymn for use with a pppd-shell amulet (iv 10) and the hymn to the lunar astenstns (xix 7; also gave occasion for additions which I hope may prove not unacceptaole. Other editorial additions at the beginning and end of hymns. — Whitney’s last illness put an end to his revision of his lyprk before he reached the eighth book, and reports of the ritual uses of the hymns of that book from his hand are insufficient or lacking I have accordingly supplied these reports for book viii , and further also for x 5 and xi. 2 and 6, and in a form as nearly like that used by Whitney as I could; but for viii. 8 (“army rites ”) and x 5 (“water-thunderbolts ”), the conditions warranted greater fulness ^ Whitney doubtless intended to give, throughout his entire work, at the end of anuvdkas and books and piapdthakas, certain statements, in part summations of hymns and verses and m part quota- tions from the Old Anukramani In default of his final revision, these stop at the end of book vii. (cf p 470), and from that point on to the end I have supplied them (cf pages 475, 48 1, 516, 737, and so on) Other additions of considerable extent. — Of the additions in ell-brackets, the most numerous are the brief ones , but the great difficulties of books xviii. and xix have tempted me to give, in the last two hundred pages, occasional excursuses, the considerable length of which will, J hope, prove warranted by their interest or value The notes on the following topics or words or verses may serve- as instances * twin consonants, p 832 ; afijoydndis, p 844; su-^dnsa, p 853 , diiat, p. 860, dva ctkstpan^ P ^75 > the piipttdhdna (“ eleven dishes "), p 876 , vdnyd etc , p 880 ; sai^igntya, p 886 ; on xviii 4. 86-87 J 7* 4 J ^ 4 > 26 3 ; 44 7 > 45* 2 {suhdr etc), 47 8; 55. i, 5, The seven tables appended to tne latter volume of thisy^ork. — The list of non-metncal passages is taken from the mtroduction to Whitney s Index Verborum, p 5. — The list of hymns ignored by Kaugika, p. ion, is taken from memoranda in Whitney’s hand-copy of Kau9ika The I It may here be noted that, for the short hymns (books i-vii ), the ntual uses are given m the prenxcQ introductions , but that, for the subsequent long hymns, they are usually and more conveniently given under the verses concerned Pm'ts for winch the Author is not responsible xxxiii / concordance of the citations of Kaugika by the two methods, I have made for those who wish to look up citations as made m the Bombay edition of the commentary The same purpose is better served by^writ- ing the number of each adhydya^ and of each kandikd as numbered from the beginning of its own ad/iydya, oil the upper right-hand corner of each odd page of Bloomfield’s text — The concordance of discrepant Berlin and Bombay hymn-numbers I have drawn up to meet a regret- table need — The concordance between the Vulgate and Kashmirian recensions is made from notes in the Collation-Book, as is explained at p Iaxxv, and will serve provisionally for finding a Vulgate verse in the fac- simile of the Kashmirian text — The table of hymn-titles is of course a mere copy of Whitney’s captions, but gives an extremely useful con- spectus of the subjects in general — The index of the names of the seers IS a revised copy of a rough one found among Whitney’s papers To it I have prefixed a few paragraphs which contain general or critical ' observations The unmarked minor additions and other minor changes. — These are of two classes The first includes the numerous isolated minor changes about which there was no question, namely the correction of mere slips, the supplying of occasional omissions, and the omission of an occasional phrase or sentence Of the mere slips in Whitney’s admirable manu- script, some (like “ thou has ” at ii lO 6, or the omission of “ be brought ” near the end of the note to ii 13 3) are such as the care of a good proof- reader would have set right ; but there were many which could be recog- nized as slips only by constant reference to the original or to the various books concerned Such are “ cold ” instead of “ heat ” for ghransd at ^111 I 52 and 53, “hundred” (life-times) for “thousand” at vi 78 3 ; “Mercury” for “Mars” at xix 9 7; “kine” for “bulls” at 111 9 2 and “cow” for “bull” at 1 22 i; vdcdn for ^vdgdn at xviii 2 13 At vi. 141 3 his version read “so let the A9Vins make,” as if the text were tmutdvi acvtud. At the end of the very first hymn, Whitney’s statement was, “The Anukr ignores the metncal irregularity of the second pada”, here I changed “ ignores ” to “ notes ” — He had omitted the words “the parts of ” at iv 12 7, “a brother” at xviii i 14; “which is very propitious ” at xviii 2 31, “ the Fathers ” at xviii 2 46 Such changes as those just instanced could well be left unmarked. The second class has to do with the paragraphs, few in number, the tecasting or rewriting of which involved So' many minor changes that It was hardly feasible to indicate them by ell-brackets The note to xviii 3 60 is an example Moreover, many notes in which the changes are duly marked contain other changes which seemed hardly worth marking, as at XIX 49 Dr 55. I • cf p S06, XXXIV Editor s PrefcLce The marked minor additions and other minor changes In a work like this, involving so great a mass of multifarious details, it was inevitable that a rigorous revision, such as the author could not ^give to it, should detect many statements requiring more or less modification. Thus at xix 40 2, the author, in his copy for the printer, says: “We have rectified the accent of swnedhds , the mss and SPP. have siimidJids"' In fact, the edition also has smn/d/ids, and I have changed the statement thus : “Lin the editionj we Lshould havej rectified the accent Lso as to readj sumedfids"' The changes in the last two books are such that it was often best to write out considerable parts of the printer’s copy afresh : yet it was desirable, on the one hand, to avoid rewriting ; and, on the other, to change and add in such a way that the result might not show the uncleamess of a clumsily tinkered paragraph To revise and edit between these two limitations is not easy; and, as is shown by the example just given, there is no clear line to be drawn between what should and what should not be marked As noted above, it is evident that all these matters would have been very simple if the author could have seen the work through the press The revision of the author’s manuscript. Verification. — The modifica- tions of the author’s manuscript thus far discussed are mostly of the nature of additions made to carry out the unfinished parts of the author’s design, and are the modifications referred to on the title-page by the words “ brought nearer to completion ” The work of revision proper has included a careful verification of every statement of every kind m the commentary so far as this was possible, and a careful comparison of the translation with the original This means that the citations of the parallel texts have been actually looked up and that the readings have been com- pared ailew in order to make sure that the reports of their variations from the Atharvan readings were correct This task was most time-consuming and laborious ; as to some of its difficulties and perplexities, see below, p Ixiv. Verification means further that the notes of Whitney’s Collation- Book and of the Bombay edition and of Roth’s collation of the Kashmirian text were regularly consulted to assure the correctness of the author’s reports of variants within the Atharvan school ; further, that the text and the statements of the Major AnukramanI were carefully studied, and, in connection therewith, the scansion and pada-division of the verses of the Samhita; and that the references to the Kau9ika and Vaitana Sutras were regularly turned up for comparison of the sutras with Whitney s statements Many technical details concerning these matters are given on pages bdv ff. of the General Introduction Since the actual appearance of Bloomfield and Garbe’s magnificent facsimile of the birch-bark manuscnpt Meaning of '■'‘Revised and brought nearer to Completio7i ” xxxv of the Kashmirian text antedates that of this work, the reasons why the* facsimile was not used by me should be consulted at p. Ixxxv. Accentuation of Sanskrit words. — In the reports of the readings of accented texts, the words are invariably accented The Kashmirian text is reckoned as an unaccented one, although it has occasional accented pas- sages The author frequently introduces Sansknt words, in parentheses or otherwise, into the translation, and usually indicates their accent. The editor has gone somewhat farther : he has indicated in the transla- tion the accent of the stems of words which happen to occur m the voca- tive (so saddnvasy ii 14 5), except in the cases of rare words whose proper stem-accent is not known (examples in li. 24) ; and, in cases where only one member of a compound is given, he has indicated what the accent of that member would be if used independently (so -nithd at xviii. 2. 18, as part of sahdsranitJia ; -ksitra at iii. 3 4, as part of anyaksetrd , cf. ii 8 2) Cross-references. — Apart from the main purpose of this work, to serve as the foundation of more nearly definitive ones yet to come, it is likely to be used rather as one of consultation and reference than for consecu- tive reading. I have therefore not infrequently added cross-references from one verse or note to another, doing this even in the case of verses which were not far apart : cf., for example, my reference from vii 80. 3 to 79 4 or from vi 66. 2 to 65. i. Orthography of Anglicized proper names. — The translation is the princi- pal or only part of this work which may be supposed to interest readers who are without technical knowledge of Sanskrit. In order to make the proper names therein occurring more easily pronounceable, the author has disregarded somewhat the strict rules of transliteration which are fol- lowed in the printing of Sanskrit words as (Sanskrit, and has written, for example, 'IPushan and Purandhi instead of Pusan and Puramdhi, sometimes retainmg, however, the strange diacntical marks (as in Angiras orVaruna) where they do not embarrass the layman. To follow the rules strictly would have been much easier , but perhaps it was better to do as has been done, even at the expense of some inconsistencies (cf Vntra, Vntra, Vrtra, Savitar) Editorial short-comings and the chances of error. — Labor and pains have been ungrudgingly spent upon Whitney’s work, to ensure its appearance m a form worthy of its great scientific importance , but the work is exten- sive and IS crowded with details of such a nature that unremitting care is needed to avoid error concerning them. Some striking illustrations of this statement may be found in the foot-note below,^ Despite trifling / ^ Thus in the first line of his note on xix. 50 3, the rather -wrote iareyut instead of iarena, tal mg tai.yus from the word iramedta'-ely below iarema in the text This sense disturbing error was octfloohed by the author and by Dr Ryder, and once by me also, althongh discovered XXXVl Editor^ s P^'eface inconsistencies of orthography or abbreviation, I trust that a high degree of accuracy m the real essentials has been attained, I dare not hope that my colleagues will not discover blemishes and deficiencies m the work, but I shall be glad if they do' not cavil at them India has much to teach the West : much that is of value not only for its scientific interest, but also for the conduct of our thought and life It is far better to exploit the riches of Indian wisdom than to spend time or strength m belittling the achievements of one’s fellow-workers or of those that are gone. The biographical and related matter. — The First American Congress of Philologists devoted its session of Dec 28, 1894 to the memory of Whitney The Report of that session, entitled The Whitney Memorial Meeting,” and edited by the editor of this work, was issued as the first half of vol- ume XIX of the Journal of the American Oriental Society The edition was of fifteen hundred copies, and wap distributed to the members of the Oriental Society and of the American Philological Association and of the Modern Language Association of America, to the libraries enrolled on their lists, and to some other recipients Besides the addresses of the occasion, the Report contains bibliographical notes concerning Whitney’s hfe and, family, and a bibliography of his writings, but since, strictly speaking, it contains no biography of Whitney, I have thought it well to give in this volume (p. xliii) a brief sketch of his life ; and in preparing it, I have made use, not only of the substance, but also, with some freedom, of the form of statement of the autobiography which ‘'A^itney published in 1885 (see p lx) Moreover, since the people into whose hands this work will come are for the most part not the same as those who received the Report, it has been thought advisable to reprint therefrom the editor’s Memorial Address (p. xlvn) as a general estimate of Whitney’s character and services, and to give, for its intrinsic usefulness, a select list of his writings (p Ivi), which is essentially the hst prepared by Whitney for the “Yale Bibliographies” (List, 1893) at last m time for correction — At xix, 27 7 , 1 had added suryam as the Kashminan reading for the Vulgate suryam, simply because Roth’s Collation gave suryam , but on looking it up in the facsimile, last line of folio 136a, I found, after the plates were made, that the birch bark leaf really has suryam and that the sbp was Roth’s — In regard to xix. 24 6 b, the Fates seemed to have decreed that error should prevail Here the manuscripts read vSyittam This is reported m the fobt-note of the Berhn edition as viphtam (ist error) The editors intended to emend the ms reading to vafandm, which, however, is misprinted in the text as va^diiam (2d error) [^The conjecture i/flfawa/Tr, even if ngbtly printed, is admitted to be an unsuccessful one 1 In the third line of his comment, Whitney wrote, “ The vdfdndm of our text ” etc (3d error) This I corrected to vafandm, and added, in a note near the end of the paragraph, that the ronjectore was “ Misprinted vafdnam ” My note about the mispnnt was rightly pnnted in the second proof, but in the foundry proof, by some mishap, it stood “hEspnnted vafdnam ” (4th error) The fourth error I hope to amend successfully in the plate Gemral Significance of Whitney 's Woi'k xxxvii General significance of Whitney’s work Its design, says Whitney (above, p xix, Aiinotmccnieni), is “ to put together as much as possible of the material that is to help toward the study and final comprehension of this Veda ” Thus expressly did the author disavow any claim to finality for his work As for the translation, on- the one hand, the Announcement shows that he regarded it as wholly subordinate to his commentary , and I can give no better statement of the principles which have guided him m making it, than is found in the extracts from a critical essay by Whitney which I have reprinted (above, p. xix), and from which moreover we may infer that he fully recognized the purely provisional character of his trans- lation. I am sorry that infelicities of expression in the translation, which are part and parcel of the author’s extreme literalness (see p. xciv) and do not really go below the surface of the work, are (as is said below, p xcviii) the very things that are the most striking for the non-technical reader who examines* the book casually As for the commentary, on the other hand, it is plain that, taking the work as a whole, he has done just what he designed to do Never before has the material for the critical study of an extensive Vedic text been so comprehensively and systematically gathered from so multifa- rious sources The commentary will long maintain for itself a place of first-rate importance as an indispensable working-tool for the purposes which it is designed to serve I have put together (below, pages xcii- xciii) a few examples to illustrate the ways in which the commentary will 1 prove useful A variety of special investigations, moreover, will readily suggest themselves to competent students of the commentary, and the subsidiary results that are thus to be won (the “by-products,” so to say), are likely, I am convmced, to be abundant, and of large interest and value Furthermore, we may confidently 'believe that Whitney's labors will inci- dentally put the whole discipline of Vedic criticism upon a broader and firmer basis Need of a systematic commentary bn the Rig-Veda. — Finally, Whitney seems to me to have made it plain that a similar commentary is the indis- pensable preliminary for the final comprehension of the Rig-Veda That commentary should be as much better and as much wider in its scope as it can be made by the next generation of scholars, for it will certainly not be the work of anyone man alone It is a multifarious work for which many elaborate preparations need yet to be made Thus- the parallel passages from the Rig- Veda and the other texts must be noted with completeness on the margin of the Rik Samhita opposite the padas concerned , for this task Bloomfield's Vedic Concordance is likely to be the most important single instrument. Thus, again, Brahmana, ^rauta, Grhya, and other texts appurtenant to the Rig-Veda, together with Epic and later texts, XXXVlll Editors Preface should all be systematically read by scholars familiar with Vedic themes and diction, and with an eye open to covert allusion and reference, and should be completely excerpted with the Rik Samhita m hand and with constant references made opposite the Rik verses to the ancillary or illus- trative passages which bear upon them. It is idle folly to pretend that this last work would not be immensely facilitated by a large mass of translations^ of the more difficult texts, accurately made, and provided with all possible ingenious contrivances for findmg out quickly the rela- tions between the ancillary texts and the fundamental ones Thus to have demonstrated the necessity for so far-reaching an undertaking, may prove to be not the least of Whitney’s services to Vedic scholarship The Century Dictionary. — Doubtless much of the best of Whitney’s strength through nearly ten of his closing years was given to the work devolving on him as editor-in-chief of TJie Century Dictionary^ an Encyclo- pedic Lexicon of 'the English Language (see p lx, below) But for that, he might perhaps have brought out this commentary himself. Since I, more than any one else, have personal reasons to regret that he did not do so, there is perhaps a peculiar fitness in my saying that I am glad that he did not Whoever has visited for example the pnnting-offices which make the metropolitan distnct of Boston one of the great centers of book- production for Amenca, and has seen the position of authority which is by them accorded to that admirable work, and has reflected upon the powerful influence which, through the millions of volumes that are affected by its authority, it must thus exercise in the shaping of the growth of our English language, — such an one cannot fail to see that Whitney was broad-minded and wise in accepting the opportunity of superintending the work of its production, even at the risk of not living to see the appear- ance of the already long-delayed Atharva-Veda Perhaps his most potent influence upon his day and generation is through his labors upon the Century Dictionary Acknowledgments. — I desire in the first place to make public acknowl- edgment of my gratitude to the late Henry Clarke Warren of Cambridge He had been my pupil at Baltimore , and, through almost twenty years of intimate acquaintance and fnendship, we had been associated in our Indian studies To his enlightened appreciation of their value and poten- tial usefulness is due the fact that these dignified volumes can now be issued ; for during his lifetime he gave to Harvard University m sundry I Roth wntes to Whitney, July 2, 1893 Tch begreife mcht, •me em junger Mann, statt nach •wertlosen Dingen zu greifen, mcht heber sich an die Uebersetzung und Erkldrung ernes Stuckes aus Taittiriya Brahmana oder Maitrayanl Samhita wagt , mcht um die minutiae des Rituals zu erforschen, sondern um den Stoff, der zwischen diesen Dingen steckt, zuganghch zu machen und zu erlautem Auch in den Medizinbuchern gabe es •viele Abschmtte, die verstanden und bekannt zu werden verdienten. Acknowledgments xxxix instalments the funds with which to pay for the printing of Whitney’s commentary. Whitney was professor at Yale ; the editor is an alumnus of Yale and a teacher at Harvard, and Warren was an alumnus of Harvard. That the two Universities should thus join hands is a matter which the fnends of both may look upon with pleasure, and it furnishes the motif for the dedication of this work But I dm glad to say that learning, as well as money, was at Mr. Warren’s command for the promotion of science. Before his death there was issued his collection^ of translations from the Pali which forms the third volume of this Series and is entitled “Buddhism in Translations,” a useful and much-used book Moreover, he has left, in an advanced state of preparation for press, a carefully made edition and a partial translation of the Pali text of Buddhaghosa’s famous encyclopedic treatise of Buddhism entitled “The Way of Purity” or Visuddhi-Magga It is with gladness and hope that I now address myself to the arduous and happy labor of carrying Mr Warren’s edition through the press. Next I desire to express my hearty thanks to my former pupil. Dr Arthur W. Ryder, now Instructor in Sanskrit at Harvard University, for his help in the task of verifying references and statements and of reading proofs He came to assist me not long after the close of his studies with Professor Geldner, when I had got through with a little more than one third of the mam body of Whitney’s commentary and translation For books i— vii , I had revised the manuscript and sent it to press, leav- ing the verification to be done with the proof-reading and from the proof- sheets Dr Ryder’s help began with the verification and proof-reading of the latter half of book vi , but from the beginning of book viii , it seemed better that he should forge ahead and do the verification from the manuscript itself, *and leave me to follow with the revision and the supplying of the missing portions and so on His work proved to be so thoroughly conscientious and accurate that I was glad to trust him, except of course m cases where a suspicion of error was aroused in one or both of us. A few times he has offered a suggestion of his own , that given P 739 IS so keen and convincing that greater boldness on his part would not have been unwelcome To my thanks I join the hope that health and other opportunities may long be his for achieving the results of which his literary sense and scholarly ideals give promise Mrs Whitney, upon turning over to me her husband’s manuscript of this work, together with his other manuscnpt material therefor, was so kind as to lend me a considerable number of his printed books, some of which, in particular his copy of the Kaugika Sutra, have been a great convenience by reason of their manuscript annotations It is a pleasure to be able to make to Mrs Whitney this public expression of my thanks xl E.dito7's Preface f To my neighbor, Miss Maria Whitney, I am indebted for the loan of the medallion from which the noble portrait of her brother, opposite page xlm, has been made The medallion is a replica of the one in the Library of Yale University, and is a truthful likeness Of an occasional fnendly turn from Professors Theobald Smith, Georo-e F Moore, and Bloomfield, and from Dr George A Grierson, I have already made note (see pages 242, 756, 983, 243) Professors Bloomfield and Garbe allowed me to reproduce here a specimen leaf from their beautiful facsimile of the Kashmirian text Professors Cappeller and Hopkins and Jacobi were so good as to criticize my Sanskrit verses ^ In particular, I thank my colleague,' Professor Morris H Morgan, for his kindness in putting the dedication into stately Latin phrase It is with no small satisfaction that I make public mention of the admirable work of the Athenasum Press (situated m Cambridge) of Messrs Ginn and Company of Boston. The Hindus sometimes liken human effort to one wheel of a cart Fate, indeed, may be the other , but our destiny, they say, is not accomplished without both elements, just as there is no progress without both wheels It is so with a book good copy is one wheel , and a good printing-office is the other Whitney’s long expe- rience was guarantee for the prior requisite, and the other I have not found lacking The way has been a long one, with plenty of places for rough jolting and friction, but the uniform kindness and the alert and intelligent helpfulness of all with whom I have had to do at the Press have made our progress smooth, and I am sincerely grateful Human personality and the progress of science. — Had Whitney lived to see this work m print and to write the preface, his chief tribute of grateful acknowledgment would doubtless have been to his illustnous preceptor and colleague and fnend whose toil had so largely increased its value, to Rudolph Roth of Tubingen Whitney, who was my teacher, and Roth, who was my teacher’s teacher and my own teacher, both are passed away, and Death has given the work to me to finish, or rather to bnng nearer to an ideal and so unattainable completeness They are beyond the reach of human thanks, of praise or blame but I cannot help feeling that even in their life-time they understood that Science is concerned only with results, not with personalities, or (in Hindu phrase) that the Goddess of Learning, Sarasvatl or Vac, cares not to ask even so much as the names of her votaries , and that the unending progress of Science is indeed like the endless flow of a river ^ These, I trust, vnll not be -wholly unpleasmg to my pundit-fnends in India, "Who, as lucjr •will find the thought in part un-Indian, \ti11 not, I hope, forget that it -was pnmanly and design- edly conceived in Occidental form Their great master, Dandm, has a kmd word for men m my case at the close of the first chapter of his Poetics BRIEF SKETCH OF WHITNEY’S LIFE BY THE EDITOR William Dwight Whitney was born at Northampton, Massachusetts, February 9, 1827, and died at New Haven, Connecticut, on Thursday, June 7, 1894, aged sixty-seven years and nearly four months He was son of Josiah Dwight and Sarah (Williston) Whitney The father, Josiah Dwight Whitney (1786-1869), was born in Westfield, oldest son of Abel Whitney (Harvard, 1773) and of Clarissa Dwight, daughter of Josiah Dwight The mother was daughter of the Rev Payson Williston (Yale, 1783) of Easthampton, and sister of the Hon Samuel Williston, the founder of Williston Seminary The father was a business man in Northampton, and later manager, first as cashier and then as president, of the Northampton Bank, and was widely and honorably known for his ability and integrity William was one of a goodly family of children, of whom may be named, as devoted to scientific and literary pursuits, the eldest, Josiah Dwight Whitney (Yale, 1839), for a long time the head of the Geological Survey of California and from 1865 to 1896 Professor of Geology m Harvard University, Miss Maria Whitney,' the first incumbent of the chair of Modern Languages in Smith College , James Lyman Whitney (Yale, 1856), since 1869 a member of the Administrative Staff of the Boston Public Library and its head from 1899 to 1903, and Henry Mitchell Whitney (Yale, 1864), from 1871 to 1899 Professor of English ui Beloit College Whitney made his preparation for college entirely in the free public schools of his native town, entered the Sophomore class of Williams Col- lege in 1842, and was graduated in 1845 He then spent three full years in service m the bank, under his father Early in 1848 he took up the study of Sanskrit In the spring of 1849 he left the bank, spent the summer as assistant in the Geological Survey of the Lake Superior region, and m the autumn went for a year to New Haven, to continue ms Sanskrit studies under Professor Edward E Salisbury and in com- pany with James Hadley, and to prepare for a visit to Germany, already planned On May 22, 1850, he was elected a corporate member of the A-mencan Oriental Society He sailed (for Bremen) September 20, 1S50 The next three winters were passed by him in Berlin and the summers of 1851 and 1852 in Tubingen, chiefly under the instruction of Professors xllll ^ V Sketch of Whitneys L ifc Albrecht Weber ^ and Rudolph Roth respectively, but algo of Professor Lepsius and others Already during his first summer with Roth, the edition of the Atharva-Veda was planned^ In October, 1851, he began copying the Berlin manuscripts of the text, and finished that work in March, 1852 Leaving Berlins m March, 1853, he stayed seven weeks in Pans, three in Oxford, and seven in London (collating Sanskrit manu- scripts), and then returned to America, arriving in Boston August 5 _ Before quitting Germany, he received an invitation to return to Yale College as Professor of Sanskrit, but not until August, 1854, did he go there to remain His election was dated May 10, 1854, so that his term of service exceeded forty years The events of such a life as his are, so far as they concern the outside world, little else than the succession of classes instructed and of literary labors brought to a conclusion It may be noted, however, that very soon after their marriage, Mr and Mrs Whitney went, partly for health and partly for study,^ to spend somewhat less than a year in France and Italy (November, 1856 to July, 1857), passing several months at Rome In 1873 he took part in the summer campaign of the Hayden exploring expedition in Colorado, passing two full months on horseback and under canvas, coursing over regions which in good part had been till then untrodden by the feet of white men, and seeing Nature in her naked grandeur — mounting some nine times up to or beyond the altitude of 14,000 feet In the summer of 1875 Mr Whit- ney visited England and Germany,® mainly for the collection of further 1 In a letter to Salisbury from "Weber (see JAOS in 215), dated Berlin, March 29, 1851, Weber writes “I have alread) had the pleasure of instructing two of jour countiymen in Sansknt, Mr Wales and Mr Whitney Mr Whitney certainly entitles us to great hopes, as he combines earnestness and diligence with a sound and cntical judgment I hope to induce him to undertake an edition of the Taittirlya-Aranyaka, one of the most interesting Vedic Scrip- tures ” Whitney’s fellow -student was Dr Henry Ware Wales (Harvard, 1838), who had already, nearly two years before, by a will dated Apnl 24, 1S49, provided for the endowment of the Wales Professorship of Sansknt in Harvard University, which was established in due course January 26, 1903, and to which the editor of these volumes was elected March 23, 1903. 2 This appears from the following portion (see JAOS m 216 cf also p 501) of an interest- ing letter from Roth, dated Tubingen, August 2, 1S51 “I have had for a scholar, through/this summer, one of your countrymen, Mr ^^^lltney of Northampton Through the winter, he will reside in Berlin, in order to collect there whatever can be found for the Atharva\eda, and then return here with what is brought together We shall then together see what can be done for this "Veda, hitherto without a 'claimant, which I consider as the most important next to the Rigveda.” Cf Roth’s letter of November 18, 1894, JAOS xix 100 ® The date given on p 1 is not quite correct see p exvm < The AV Pratika index (Ind Stud , vol n see p 62) is dated Pans, Maj, 1S57 £ In particular, Munich and Tubingen (cf JAOS x,p cxviii, = PAOS for Nov 1S75) At that time, the editor of these volumes was residing at Tubingen as a pupil of Roth and as one of the little group to which belonged Garbe, Geldner, Kaegr, and Lindner \\ hitney s arrival (July 6) was a great event and was hailed with delight. It maj be'added that it was the pnn- lege of Whitney and mvsclf to take part in the memorable feast given at Jena by Bohlhngk on his sixtieth birthday, June i r, 1S75, in celebration of the completion of the great Sansknt Lexicon. V Brief Sketch of Whitney s Life xlv material for the Atharva-Veda Irt 1878 he went to Europe with his wife and daughters, to write out his Sanskrit Grammar and carry it through the press, and spent there fifteen months, chiefly at Berlin and Gotha Of Whitney's scientific writings, the 'most important ones^ (since they are scattered among many other bibliographical items pages Ivi to Ixi) may here be briefly enumerated in several groups of related works. — I The edition of the Atharva-Veda, the Alphabetisches Verzeichniss der Versanfange der Atharva-Samhita , the Atharva-Veda Pratigakhy^j the Index Verborurh , to which must now be added the two present volumes of critical commentary and translation In the same general category belongs his Taittirlya Prati9akhya As a part of the fruit of his Sanskrit studies must be mentioned also the Surya-Siddhanta , and, finally, his Sanskrit Grammar, with its Supplement, The Roots, Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Language — 2 His chief contribu- tions to general linguistics are comprised in his Language and the Study of Language and in the two series of Oriental and Linguistic Studies and in his Life and Growth of Language Here may be mentioned fiis article on “ Language " in Johnson’s Cyclopaedia (vol 11 , 1876) and that on “Philology” m the Encyclopaexlia Bntannica (vol xviii , 1885) — 3. His principal text-books are his G'etpian Grammars (a larger and a smaller) and Reader and Dictionary, his Essentials of English Grammar, and his French Grammar. Important a^ an influence upon the conservation and growth of the English language is his part in the making of The Century Dictionary (see p xxxviii) Of Whitney’s minor writings, those which he included in the Yale Bibliographies (p Ivi, below) extending to 1892, with a few others, are enumerated in the List below A much fuller list, compnsing 360 numbers, was published in the Memorial Volume, pages 1 21-150 One reason for putting some of the lesser papers into the last-mentioned list was to show the versatility of Mr. Whitney’s mind and the wide range of his interests Mr Whitney’s services to science were recognized by scholars and learned corporations Thus he received the honorary degree of Doctor of Philosophy from the University of Breslau in 1861 ; that of Doctor of Laws from Williams College m 1868, from the College of William and Mary (Virginia) in 1869, from the University of St Andrews (Scotland) in 1874, from Harvard in 1876, and from the University of Edinburgh in 1889 He was a member of the American Philosophical Society (Phila- delphia) and of the National Academy of Sciences (Washington) He was an honorary member of the Oriental or Asiatic societies of Great * Some estimate of their general significance is given below, pages li to liu. xlvi Brief Sketch of Whitiiefs Life Britain and Ireland, of Japan, of Germany, of Bengal, of Peking, and of Italy, and of the Philological Society of London. He was a member or correspondent of the Royal Academy of Berlin, of the Royal Irish Academy, of the Imperial Academy of St Petersburg, of the Institute of France, of the Royal Academy in Turin, of the Lincei in Rome, of the Royal Danish Academy, and so on. He was a Fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh In i88i he was made a Foreign Knight of the Prussian Order pour le mdrite, being elected to fill the vacancy occasioned by the death of Thomas Carlyle. On the 27th of August, 1856, Mr. Whitney married Miss Elizabeth Wooster Baldwin, daughter of Roger Sherman and Emily (Perkins) Baldwin of New Haven Mr Baldwin, a lawyer of the highest rank, had been Governor of Connecticut and Senator in Congress, and inherited his name from his grandfather, Roger Sherman, a signer of the Declara- tion of Independence, and one of the committee charged with drawing It up Miss Baldwin was a great-great-granddaughter of Thomas Clap, President of Yale from 1740 to 1766 Mr and Mrs Whitney had six children, three sons and three daughters. The daughters, Marian Parker and Emily Henrietta and Margaret Dwight, with their mother, survive their father; as does also one son, Edward Baldwin, a lawyer of New York City, Assistant Attorney-General of the United States from 1893 to 1897. He marned Josepha, daughter of Simon Newcomb, the astron- omer, and one of their children, born August 26 tRqq, bears the name of his grandfather, William Dwight Whitney MEMORIAL* ADDRESS Delivered by the Editor at the First American Congress of Philologists , Whitney Memorial Meeting, December, i8g4 AN ESTIMATE OF WHITNEY’S CHARACTER AND SERVICES Ladies and Gentlemen, — There are some among us who can remember the time when “ascertain condescension in foreigners” easily gave us pain There was little achievement behind us as a people to awaken us to national self-consciousness and to a realizing sense of our own great possibilities Time is changing all that The men have come, and some, alas ! are already gone, of whose achievements we may well be proud wherever we are In the battles for the conquests of truth there are no distinc- tions of race It needs no international congress to tell us that we belong to one great army But to-night — as the very titles of these gathered societies show — Science bas marshalled us, her fifties and her hundreds, as Amencans We look for the centunon, for the captain of the fifties , and he is no more ! And we call, as did David, lamenting for Abner, “ Know ye not that there is a prince and a great man fallen this day in Israel,” yea, and like Jonathan, “m the midst of the battle?” It is in the spint of generous laudation that we are assembled to do honor to our illustrious countryman And it is well We may praise him now , for he is gone But I cannot help thinking of a touching legend of the Buddha Nigh fifty years he has wandered up and down in Ganges-land, teaching and preaching And now he is about to die Flowers fall from the sky and heavenly quires are heard to sing his praise “ But not by all this,” he answers, — “ but not by all this, O Ananda, is the — Teacher honored , but the disciple who shall fulfil all the greater and lesser duties, — by him is the Teacher honored ” It is fitting, then, tliat we pause, not merely to praise the departed, but also to consider the significance of a noble life, and the duties and responsibilities which so g^eat an example urges upon us, — in short, the lesson of a hfe of service It would be vain to endeavor, within the narrow limits which the present occasion imposes, to rehearse or to characterize with any completeness the achievements that make up this remarkable hfe Many accounts ^ of it have been given of late in the public prints Permit me rather to lay before you, by way of selection merely, a few facts concerning Mr Whitney which may serve to ilhistrate certain essential features of his character and fundamental motives of his life. And indubitably first in importance no less than in natural order is the great fact of his heredity William Dwight’Whitney was born, in 1827, at Northampton, Massachu- setts, and m his veins flowed the best blood of a tjpical New England community, of the Dwights and the Hawleys, — heroes of the heroic age of Hampshire His stock 'vas remarkable for sturdy vigor, both of body and of intellect, and was in fact tliat genuine aristocracy which, if it be true to its traditions, ■wnll remain — as for generations ^ Most notable among them is the one by Professor Thomas Day Se}mour of Yale, in the “American Journal of Philology,” vol 15 TtlVIl xlvlii Memorial Addi'ess by the Editor It has been — one of the pnme guarantees of the permanence of democrac} m America. Few places m this land have produced a proportionate!) greater number of distinguished people than has Northampton Social advantages were thus added to those of birth, and to all these in turn the advantages of dwelling in a region of great natural beaut) It was in William Whitney’s early infancy that his fatlier mo\ed into a dwelling built on the precise site of the Jonathan Edwards house This dwelling was the second in a row of SIX neighbonng houses, all of which could boast of more or less notable occu- pants In the first lived Dr Seeger, who was educated at the same school and time as Schiller, at “ the Solitude ” Be)ond the Whitne)s’ was the house in which lived Lewis S Hopkins, the father of Edward W Hopkins, the Sansknt scholar of Bryn Mawr The fourth was the original homestead of the Timothy Dwights, in winch the first Yale President of that name, and Theodore, the Secretary of the Hartford Convention and founder of the New York “ Daily Advertiser,” were born, both grandsons of Jonathan Edwards The adjoining place was the home of the elder S)lvester Judd, and of his son Sylvester, the author of “ Margaret and the sixth house was occupied by the I.ahan political exile, Gherardi, and later by Dr William Allen,ex-President of Bow’doin College Whitney was a mere boy of fifteen wiien he entered Williams College as a sopho- more Three years later (in 1845) easily outstnpped all his classmates and graduated with the highest honors , and with all that, he found ample time to range the wooded hills of Berkshire, collecting birds, which he himself set up for the Natural History Society The next three or four years were spent by him as clerk m the Nordi- ampton Bank, with accounts for his work, German and Swedish for his studies, orni- thology and botany for his recreations, and music for his delight, — unless one should rather say that all was his delight These oft-mentioned studies in natural history I should not linger over, save that their deep significance has hardly been adverted upon m public They mean that, even at this early age, Whitney showed the stuff which dis- tinguishes the genuine man of science from the jobbers and peddlers of learning They mean that, with him, the gift of independent and accurate observation was inborn, and that the habit of unprejudiced reflection upon what he himself saw was easily acquired This brings us to a critical penod in the determination of his career In the ency- clopedias, Whitney is catalogued as a famous Indianist, and so indeed he was But it was not because he was an Indianist that he was famous Had he devoted his life to the physical or natural sciences, he would doubtless have attained to equal, if not greater eminence Truly, it is not the ivhat, but the hom f That he did devote himself to Indology appears to be due to several facts which were in themselves and in their con- comitance accidental First, his elder brother, Josiah, now the distinguished professor of geology m Harvard University, on his return from Europe in 1847, had brought with him books in and on many languages, and among them a copy of the second edition of Bopp’s Sansknt Grammar Second, it chanced that the Rev. George E Day, a college- mate at Yale of Professor Salisbury, was Whitney’s pastor And third, he met with Eduard Desor There is m possession of Professor Whitney' of Harvard a well-wom volume of his father’s called the Family Fact-book. It is, I am sure, no breach of confidence if I say, in passing, tliat tins book, with its vaned entries in all vaned moods and by divers gifted hands, is the reflex of a most remarkable family life and feeling In it, among many other things, are bnef autobiographic annals of the early life of Willnm Whitne), and in its proper place the following simple entry' “In the winter of 1S4S-49 com- menced the study of Sansknt, encouraged to it by Rev George E Day In June, 1S49, went out with Josiah to Lake Supenor as ‘assistant sub-agent’ on the Geological An Estimate of Whitney'? Character and Services xlix Survey.” To William Whitney were mtrusted the botany, the barometrical observations, and the accounts. And although the ornithology was not formally mtrusted to him, there is abundant evidence that he was habitually on the look-out for the birds, with keen eye and with attentive ear He mus^ already, in the spnng, have made substantial progress by himself in Sanskrit, for his article (almost the first that he published) entitled “ On the Sansknt Language,” a translation and abndgment of von Bohlen, appeared in the August number of the “ Bibliotheca Sacra ” for 1849, and must there- fore have been finished before he left home. With him, accordinelv, he took his brother’s copy of Bopp Besides the two brothers, there was a third man-of-power in the little company that spent the summer among the swamps and mosquitoes of the great copper region That man was Eduard Desor, already a young naturalist of distinction, and afterward famous both in science and in public life in Switzerland He had come only a short time before, with Agassiz, and as his fnend and intimate associate in scientific undertakings, from Neufchitel to Cambridge. He was by nature full of the purest love for science , and that love had been quickened to ardent enthusiasm by his own work, and by his mtercourse with other bnght minds and eager workers whom he had known in Pans and Neufchitel and in the Swiss glacier-camps of Agassiz Small wonder if the intimate relations of that summer’s camp-life in common gave opportunity for potent influence of the brilliant young Huguenot upon the brilliant young Puntan. It is to Desor, and to his words and example, that my Cambndge colleague attributes in laigc measure his brother’s determination to devote himself to a life of science rather than to busmess or to one of the learned professions. That the chosen department was Sansknt may be ascnbed in part to the accident of the books throvm in his way , in part to the interest of the language and antiquities of India, intnnsically and as related to our own , and in part to the imdemable fascination which the cultivation of the virgm soil of an almost ' untrodden field has for a mmd of unusual energy, vigor, and originality William Whitney has left a full and interesting journal of this summer. Tuesday, July 24, while waiting for the uncertain propeller to come and rescue them from the horrible insect pests, he wntes from Copper Harbor “ For my part, I intend attacking Sansknt grammar to-morrow,'” And then, on Wednesday “ I have, after all, managed to get thro the day without having recourse to the Sansknt, but it has been a narrow escape ” And five weeks later, from Carp River . “Another day of almost inaction, roost intolerable and difficult to be borne How often have I longed for that Sanski it grammar which I so foolishly sent down before me to the Sault I ” The autumn of 1849, accordingly, found him at New Haven, and m company witn Professor -Hadley, studjdng under Edward Elbndge Salisbury, the Professor of the Arabic and Sansknt Languages and Literature The veteran Indologist of Berim, Pro- fessor Weber, has said that he and Professor Roth account it as one of their fairest honors that they had Whitney as a pupiL To have had both a Whitney and a Hadley at once is surely an honor tliat no American teacher m the departments here represented this evening can match. In a man whose soul was beclouded with the slightest mist of false pretension or of selfishness, we may well imagine that the progress of such pupils might easily have occasioned a pang of jealousy. But Mr Salisbury’s judgment upon them illuminates his own character no less than that of his pupils when he saj’s, “ Their qmdeness of perception and unerring exactness of acquisition soon made it evident that the teacher and the taught must change places ” We have come to the transition period of Whitney’s life. He is still a pupil, but sdready also an incipient master. “ 1850, Sept 20. Sailed for Germany m the steamer 1 Memorial Address by the Editor Washington Spent three winters in Berlin, studying especially with Dr Weber and two summers in Tubingen, Wurtemberg, with Professor Roth ” Thus runs the entry m the Fact-book A few lines later we read “ Leaving Berlin m April, 1853, stayed six weeks in Pans, three in Oxford, and seven m London (collating Sanskrit manuscnpts), and then returned in the steamer Niagara, amving in Boston Aug 5 ” Such is the modest record that covers the three momentous years of the beginning of a splendid scientific career For m this bnef space he had not only laid broad and deep founda- tions, by studies in Persian, Arabic, Egyptian, and Coptic, but had also done a large part of the preliminary work for the edition of the Atharva-Veda, as witness the volumes on the table before you, which contain his Berlin copy of that Veda and his Pans, Oxford, and London collations Meantime, however, at Yale, his honored teacher and faithful friend. Professor Salis- bury, “ with true and self-forgetting zeal for the progress of Oriental studies ” (these are Mr Whitney’s ovm words), had been diligently prepanng the way for him , negotiating with the corporation for the establishment of a chair of Sanskrit, surrendermg pro tanto his own office, and providing for the endowment of the new cathedra ; leaving, in short, no stone unturned to msure the fruitful activity of his young colleague Nor did hope wait long upon fulfilment , for m 1856, only a tnfle more than two years from his induc- tion, Whitney had, as jomt editor with Professor Roth, achieved a most distinguished service for science by the issue of the edtito prtnceps of the Atharva-Veda, and that before he was thirty. In September, 1869, — that is to say, in the very month in which began the first college year of President Eliot’s admimstration, — Whitney was called to Harvard It reflects no less credit upon Mr Eliot’s discernment of character and attainments than upon Mr Whitney’s surpassing gifts that the youthful president should turn to him, among the very first, for aid in helping to begin the great work of transforming the provincial college into a national university The prospect ot 'lOsing such a man was matter of gravest concernment to all Yale College, and in particular to her faithful benefactor, Professor Salisbury Withi n a , week the latter had provided for the endow- ment of Mr Whitney’s chair upon the ampler scale made necessary by the change of the times , and the considerations which made against the transplanting of the deeply rooted tree had, unhappily for Harvard, their chance to prevail, and Whitney remained at New Haven It was dunng nis studies under Mr. Salisbury, in May, 1850, that he was elected a member of the American Oriental Society Mr. Salisbury was the life and soul of the Society, and, thanks to his learning, his energy, and his munificence, the organization had already attained to “ standing and credit in the world of scholars ” Like him, Mr Whitney was a steadfast believer in the obligation of which the very existence of these assembleiLsocieties is an acknowledgment, — the obligation of professional men to help in “ co-operative action in behalf of literary and scientific progress and, more than that, to do so at real personal sacnfice The first meeting at which Mr Whitney was present was held October 26, 1853 More than thirty-three years passed, and he wrote from the sick-room “It is the first time in thirty-two years that I have been absent from a meeting of the American Oriental Society, except when out of the country ” His first communication to the Society was read by Mr Salisbury, October 13, 1852 , and his last, m March, 1S94, at the last meet- ing before his death Of the seven volumes, vi.-xii , of the Society’s Journal, more than half of the contents are from his pen, to say nothing of his numerous and important papers m the Proceedings In 1857, the most onerous office of the Society, that of An Estimate of Whitneys Character and Services li Coitesponding Secretary, which from the beginning earned with it the duty of editing the publications, was devolved upon him, and he bore its burdens for twenty-seven years Add to this eighteen years as Librarian and six as President, and we have an I aggregate of fifty-one years of oflScial service. The American Philological Association, too, IS under deep obligation to Whitney He was one of its founders, and, veiy fit- tingly, Its first president For many years he was one of the most constant attendants at Its meetmgs, a valued counsellor, and one of its most faithful helpers and contnbutors Some might think it a matter of little importance, but it is certainly a significant one, that, after paying his Onental Society assessments for about thirty-five years, at last, and when facing mortal illness, he paid over the considerable sum required to make himself a life member A little later, — for the candle still burned, — and with strictest injunction of secrecy dunng his lifetime, he sent to the Treasurer his check for a thousand dollars of his modest savings, to help toward defraying the Society’s expenses of publication, and in the hope that it might serve as a “ suggestion and encouragement to others to do likewise ” Added to all this was his service in keeping up the very high sciefitinc standard of the Society’s publications. The work of j'udging and selecting required wide knowledge, and the making of abstracts irfuch labor , while the revision or recasting of the papers of tyros unskilled m wnting demanded endless painstaking, not always met by gratitude and docility All this cost him a lavish bestowal of time, of which hardly any one m the Society knew, and that for the reason that he took no steps to have them know So exemplary was his freedom from self-seeking in all his relations with the Society The rehearsal of the titles of Mr Whitney’s books and treatises would give to this address too much the character of a bibliographical essay, and, besides, it would merely tend to impress hearers who are accustomed to count volumes rather than to weigh them His distinguishing qualities, as reflected in his work, are everywhere so palpable that it is not hard to describe them Perhaps the most striking and pervading one IS that which Professor Lounsbury calls his “ thorough intellectual sanity ” In read- ing his arguments, whether constructive or critical, one can hardly help exclaiming, How near to first principles are the criteria of the most advanced theories and high- stepping deliverances ’ With him, the impulse to pnek the bubble of windy hypothesis upon the diamond-needle (as the Hindus call it) of hard common-sense was often irre- sistible, and sometimes irresistibly funny Witness this passage from his boyish journal “ On entering the river [the St Mary’s], we found ourselves in an archipelago of small islands, which stretches from the Sault down to the foot of the Georgian Bay sa}'s [that] actually visited thirtj'-six thousand such islands, . which in my opinion IS a whopper To have done it, he must have stopped upon ten a day, eveiy day for ten jears ” This may seem tnviii In fact, it is typical. It is in essence the same kind of treatment that he gave in later life to a^iy loose statement or extravagant theory, although printed in the most dignified journal and propounded by the most redoubtable authority Breadth aiM thoroughness are ever at war with each other in men, for that men are finite The gift of both in large measure and at once, — this marks the man of genius That the gift was Wliitney’s is clear to any one who considers the versatility of his niind, the vanousness of his work, and the quality of his results As professor of Sanskrit, technical work in grammar, lexicography, text-criticism, and the like, lay nearest to him , but with all this, he still found strength to illuminate by his insight many questions of general linguistue theorj^ the origin of language, phonetics, the difficult subject of Hindu astronomy and the question of its denvation, the method and lii Memorial Address by the Editor technique of translation, the science of religion, mythology, linguistic ethnology, alpha- betics, and paleography, and much else Astonishing is the combination of" technical knowledge in ^Mdely diverse fields which appears in his elaborately annotated translation of the famous Sanskrit astronomical treatise called Suryasiddh^ta, and which, again, he brought to bear upon his criticisms of earher and later attempts to determine the age of the Veda by its references to solar eclipses, and by its alleged imphcations resjiecting the place of the equinoctial colures But not onl> in respect of contents were Whitney’s writings of conspicuous ment , he had also the sense of form and proportion, — that sense for lack of which the writings of many a scholar of equal learning are almost nugatorj’ At twenty-two, his Enghsh style had the charms of simplicity, clearness, and vigor, and they held out to the last. And what could be more admmable than his beautiful essaj, — a ventable classic, — “The Vedic Doctrine of a Future Life”? H;s subjects, indeed, if treated senously, do not lend themselves to the graces of rhetorical or ornate writing , and his concise and pregnant periods sometimes mock the flippant or listless reader. But his presenta- tion, whether of argument or of scientific generalization, is always a model of lucidity, of orderly exposition, and of due subordination of the parts This was a matter on w'hich he felt deeply , for his patience was often sorely tried by papers for whose sloven- liness in diction, arrangement, and all the externals of which he was a master, the authors fondlj thought that their erudition was forsooth an excuse. Indeed, for the matter of printer’s manuscript, more than once has Boehtlingk, the Nestor of Indianists, taxed him home with making it too good, declaring it a wicked sin to put time on such things, though playfully admitting the while that he had killed off with his own desperate copy I cannot remember how many luckless type-setters in the office of the Russian Academy Where there was so much of the best, it is not feasible to go into details about all. Yet I cannot omit mention of some of his masterpieces Very notable is his “ Language and the Study of Language,” — a work of wide currency, and one which has done more than any other in this country to promote sound and intelligent views upon the subjects concerned It deals with pnnnples, with speculative questions, and with broad gener- alizations, — the very things m which his mastery of material, self-restraint, even balance of mind, and rigorous logic come admirably into play. Of a wholly different type, but not one whit inferior withal, are his Pratigakhyas. These are the phonetico-grammatical treatises upon the text of the Vedas, and are of prime importance for the establishment of the text. Their distinguishing feature is minutice, of marvellous exactness, but presented in such a form that no one v/ilh aught less than a tropical Oriental contempt for the value of time can make anything out of them as they stand Whitney not only out-Hindus the Hindu for minutim, but also such is hts command of form — actually recasts the whole, so that it becomes a book of easy reference As for the joint edition of the Atharva-Veda, it is a most noteworthy fact that it has held its oivn now for thirty-eight years as an unsurpassed model of what a Vcdic text- edition ought to be His “Index Verborum to the Atharva-Veda,” a work of wonderful completeness and accuracy, is much more than its name implies, and ma\ not pass with- out brief mention, inasmuch as its material formed the basis of his contnbutions to the Sanskrit-German lexicon published by the Impenal Academy of Russia. This great seven-volumed quarto, whose steady progress through the press took some three and twent\ years, is the Sanskrit Stephanus Americans may well be proud of the fact that to Whitney belongs the distinguished honor of being one of the four “faithful All Estimate of Whitneys Character and Services liii collaborators” who, next to the authors, Boehthngk and Roth, contnbuted most to this monumental work < Of all his technical works, his “ Sanskrit Grammar,” with its elaborate supplement, “The Roots, Verb-forms, and Pnmary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Language,” forms the crowning achievement Here he casts off the bonds of tradition wherever they might hamper his free scientific procedure, and approaches the phenomena of language in essentially the same spint and attitude of mind as that in which Darwin or Helmholtz grappled the problems of their sciences The language is treated historically, and as the product of life and growth , and the work is filled with the results of scores of minute and far-reaching special mvestigations The amount of material which is here subjected to ngorous and original methods of classification and scientific induction is enormous , and none but those who were familiar with his writing-table can well realize the self-restraint that he used in order to bring his results into moderate compass In all these technical works there is little that appeals to the popular imagination, and absolutely nothing to catch the applause of the groundlings ; but much, on the other hand, to win the confidence of the judicious It was therefore natural that Whitney should be sought as editor-in-chief for w'hat is in every sense by far the greatest lexicographical achievement of Amenca, “ The Century Dictionaty ” And despite the ability and size of the editonal staff, w'e may well believe that this office was no sinecure , for the settlement of the principles of procedure demanded the full breadth of learning, the largeness of view, and the judicial temper of a master mind Among the great body of his countrymen, this will be Whitney’s best-known monument Mr Whitney was a genuine lover of nature and of the world out of doors no less than of his books, and so, with his keen sense of humor and love of fun, he was a charming companion for the woods and hills Physical courage, too, abounded, often with a daring impulse to meet bodily risk and danger, as when he climbed the so-called Look-off Pine, about one hundred and thirty feet high, a monarch overtopping the primeval forests of the Ontonagon River, and broke off its top as a trophy , or as when, mth his brother, he indulged in the youthful escapade of passing the forbidden point of the spire of Strasburg Cathedral by clambering out and around the point of obstruction on the outside, and of mounting thence toward tlie summit as far as there was any opening within the spice large enough to contain a man’s bod} He was intensely American, in the best sense of the word , and his patnotism, aside from its loftier mani- festations (of which a moment later), showed itself in some lesser wa}'s not unpleasing to recall In descnbing his passage through the wilds of the Detroit River, he sa}s in that youthful journal, “There was little difference in the appearance of the two sides; but I endeavored to persuade m}self that the Amencan offered evidence of more actiie and successful industry than the British ” I venture to quote in part the words and in part the substance of a recent letter from one of his old pupils There is no one, said this pupil, whose privilege it was to know him more mtimatel}, who could not speak of the deep tenderness underhung his ordinary reserve, of his profound sympath} with difficult}* and misfortune, and of his ever-steadfast loyalties Of the last a touching illustration is found in his remembrance of the Schaal family, in whose house auf dein Grabcn he lodged during his Tubingen summers of 1851 and 1S52 Nearl} forty ^ears later he wTOte to this pupil, then in Tubingen, asking liTm to seek out the Schaals, and ta be the bearer of kindly messages to them Fraulein Schaal spoke of the delight her mother and herself had felt at the messages Sent them by the professor w’ho had become so celebrated, but who had not forgotten them, and showed the MSitor Professor Whitney’s room, all unchanged, a tjpical liv Memorial Address by tlie Editor SiudenUnzimnierj in the middle, a long plain table, and by it an uncushioned arm-chair That, said she, was Professor Whitney’s chair, and in it he used to sit for hours at that table, almost without movmg When he moved the chair more than a little, I knew that it was time for me to take him his mug of beer, and perchance a bit of bread. And, as a very small girl then, I wondered at the table, which was covered with little bits of paper, which he had arranged in a certain order, and v/as very particular that no one should disturb The only adornment which he had in the room was an Amencan flag draped over the mirror; and on the Fourth of July he said he would work an hour less than usual, as it was the anhiversary of Amencan independence The flag was the symbol of a true passion; and in his toils for truth he felt that he was working, first for the welfare, and second for the glory of his country And as for the latter, how many an Amencan student in Germany has been proud of the generous recognition of Whitney’s success ! Years ago, continues the letter, I was exchangmg a few words with a famous Onentalist The Herr Professor kindly asked me from what part of Amenca I came New Jersey, I told him, and his face grew very blank I know Connecticut, said he. And he knew Connecticut, as did his colleagues, largely because he knew Whitney So much for the letter of a lovmg and beloved pupil It suggests withal -an inqiury What was the secret of Whitney’s great productivity ? In the first instance, — it is almost needless to say, — his native gifts But it is far from true that native gifts are always fruitful Next to them came his power of dis- cerning what was the really important thing to do, and his habit — self-imposed, and enforced with Spartan rigor — of doing something every working-day upon that really important thing, and, above all, of doing that something first Such was his regulanty that even the dire necessity — which arose m 1882 — of moving from one dwelling- house into another did not break it “ Even moving,” he writes, “ I expect to find con- sistent with regular doses of Talavakara, etc ” The “ art of judicious slighting ” was a household word in his family, a weapon of might , its importance to the really great is equalled only by its perilousness m the hands of the unskilful. His plans were formed wdth circumspection, with careful counting of the cost, and then adhered to with the utmost persistence, so that he left behind him nothing fragmentary. We may change Goldsmith’s epitaph to suit the case, and say that Whitney put his hand to nothing that he did not carry out, — nthil quod incepit non perfecit And what shall I say of the lesser virtues that graced him? As patient as the earth, say the Hindus. And endless patience was his where patience was in place And how beautiful was his gentleness, his kindness to those from whom he looked for nothmg again, his gratitude to those who did him a service I And how especially well did the calm dignity which was ever his wont become him when he presided at the meetings of learned societies! How notable the brevnty with which he presented his papers! No labored reading from a raanuscnpt, but rather a simple and faale account of results An example, surely ^ He who had the most to say used in proportion the .least time in saying it And this was indeed of a piece with his most,exemplaty habit, as editor of the publications of the Oriental Soaety, of keeping his own name so far in the background. For how genmne was his modesty of bearing, of speech, and of soul ! And in narmony therewith was his reverence for thmgs hallowed He coanted not himself to have attained, This doughty toOer on the paths of truth ; And scorned rot them who lower heights had reached An Estimate of Whitneys Character and Services Iv As was his attitude toward things sacred, so aiso was it toward those who went before him in science He did not speak sneenngly of what they, with lesser light, had achieved And to him Aristotle was none the less a giant because some dwarf on s giant’s shoulders can see farther than the giant himself If I may cite my own words used on a former occasion, Whitnej’s life-work sho\?S three important lines of activity, — the elaboration of strictly technical works, the preparation of educational treatises, and the popular exposition of scientific questions The last two methods of public service arfe direct and immediate, and to be gainsaid of none , yet even here the less immediate results are doubtless the ones by which he would have set most store As for the first, some may incline to think the value of an edition of the Veda or of a Sansknt grammar — to say nothing of a Pratigakhya — extremely remote , they certainly won for him neither money nor popular applause , and jet, again, such are the very works in which we cannot doubt he took the deepest satis- faction. He realized their fundamental character, knew that they were to play their part m unlocking the treasures of Indian antiquity, and knew that that antiquity has its great lessons for us modems ; further, that the history of the languages of India, as it has indeed already modified, is also yet to modify, and that profoundly, the whole teaching of classical and Germanic philology, both in m^od and m contents , and that the history of the evolution of religions m India is destmed to exert a powerful influence for good upon the development of religious thought and life among us and our children He labored, and other men shall eqter into his labors. But it is this “faith, the assurance of things hoped for,” — rirtorts iXm^ojuivwv ^darami, — which is one of the most vital attnbutes of the true scholar. In the autumn of 1886 came the beginning of the end, an alarming disorder of the heart Adhering closely to a stnctly prescnbed physical regimen, he labored on, according to his wavering strength, heaping, as it were, the already bnmming measure of his life-work. His courage, his patient learning of the art of suffenng, his calm serenity m facing the ever-present possibility of sudden death, — this was heroic. And through it all forsook him not the two grand informing motives of his life, — the pure love of truth, and an all-absorbing passion for faithful service. W ith this love of truth, this consuming zeal for service, with this public spirit and broad humanity, this absolute truthfulness and genuineness of character, is not this life an inspiration and an example more potent by far than years of exhortation? Is not this truly one of the lives that make for nghteousness ? And what then? On the tympanum of the theatre at Harvard are inscnbed in the Vulgate version those noble words from the book of Daniel • — QVI AVTEM DOCTI FVERINT FVLGEBVNT QVASI SPLENDOR FIRMAMENTI -T QVI AD IVSTITIAM ERVDIVNT M\T.TOS I QVASI STELLAE IN PERPETVAS AETERNITATES We may say them of him ; And they that be wise shall shme as the brightness of the irmament j and they that turn many to nghteousness, as the stars for ever and ever. SELECT LIST OF WHITNEY’S WRITINGS This list is reprinted with unimportant modifications from the one com- piled by Whitney and published at New Haven, 1893, as his part of the Bibliographies of the Present Officers of Yale University It consists of about 1 50 numbers , a much fuller list (of about 360 numbers) is given in the Memonal Volume mentioned above, p xxxvi. The articles (about a score) repnnted in his Oriental and Linguistic Studies (First senes, 1873 : Second series, 1874) are marked by the note “Reprinted in Studies’’ with an added 1. or li. The abbreviations are for the most part as explained below, pages ci- cvi; but for the non-technical reader, several of the most frequently cited serials may here be noted : Journal of the American Onental Society (JAOS ) ; Transactions of the Amencan Philological Association (APA ) ; American Journal of Philology (AJP ) ; North American Review (N Amer. Rev) 1849 On the grammatical structure of the SansknL (Translated and abridged from von Bohlen) Bibliotheca Sacra, vi 471-486 1860 A comparison of the Greek and Latin verbs Ibid^ vil 654-668 1862 Tabellansche Darstellung der gegenseitigen Verbaltnisse der Sanbitas des Rik, Saman, weissen Yajus und Atharvan Ind Stud , 11 321-368 1863 On the mam results of the later Vedic researches in Germany JAOS in 289-328 Repnnted in Studies, 1 1864 On the history of the Vedic texts Ibtd , iv 245-261 1866 Bopp's Comparative accentuation of the Greek and Sansknt languages Ibid 195-218 On the Avesta, or the sacred scnptures of the Zoroastnan religion Ibid , \ 337 - 3 ^ 3 - Repnnted in Studies, 1 1866 Contnbutions from the Atbarva-Veda to the theory of Sansknt verbal accent Ibid , V 385-419 Translated into German in Kuhn and Schleicher’s Beiirage z tergl Sprachforschiing, 1 187—222 1855-66 Atharva-Veda-Sanhila, herausgegeben von R Roth und W D Whitney i, 1855, 2, 1856, roy 8°, 458 pp 1857 Alphabetisches Verzeichniss der Versanfange der Athan’a-Samhita Ird Stud,iv 9-64 1868 The Bntish in India. /Icto Englander, xvi 100-141 Repnnted in Studies, 11 1859 China and the Chinese. Ibtd,%w\ 111-143 Repnnted in J’/wa'i.'r, 11 On the Vedic doctrine of a future life. Bibliotheca Sacra, x\i 404-420 Repnnted in Studies, 1 1880 Translation of the Surja Siddhanta, a text-book of Hindu astronomy vith notes, and an appendix JAOS 141-498 [Both translation and notes are entircl) by Pro- fessor Whitnej, though in the vrork itself this fact is •acknowledged only in the words assisted by the Committee of Publication ”] 1881 China and the West sVevs Englander, xix 1-3: Repnnted in Studies, u Muller's History of Vedic literature. Christian Exaninerflxx 251-281 Repnnted in Studies, L - Ivi For tfie Years 1849-1871 Ivii 1861 On Lepsms’s Standard Alphabet JA OS vu 299-332 Review of Soule and Wheeler’s Manual of English pronunciation and spelling JVeto Englander y xix 913-929 1862 The Atharva-Veda-Prati9akhya, or ^aunaklya Caturadhyayika text, translation, and notes JAOS vii 333-616 1863 On the views of Biot and Weber respecting the relations or the Hindu and Chinese systems of astensms , with an addition, on Muller’s views respecting the same subject Ibid , vm 1-94 1861-1863 The foUowmg articles in Appleton's New American Cyclopcedta, ist ed Persia, Language and Literature of, xiu 324-328 — Sansknt, xiv 6ri-6i6 — Semitic Race and Languages, xiv 760-762 — Synac Language and Literature, xv 547-549 — Tura- nian Race and Languages, xvi 42-43 -•-Turkish Language and Literature, xvi 63-66 — Veda, XVI 280 — Zendavesta, xvi 810-81 1. — Zoroaster, xvi 834-835 1864 Bnef abstract of a senes of six lectures on the Pnnciples of Linguistic Saence, delivered at the Smithsonian Institution m March, 1864 Smithsonian Reportiax 1864, pp 95-116 1865 On the Jyotisha observation of the place of the colures, and the date denvable from it JRAS x. 316-331. On Muller’s second senes of lectures on the Saence of Language. N Amer Rev , c. 565-581 Repnnted m Studies, l I s the study of language a physical science ? Ibid , ci 434-474 1866 On Lepsius’s Standard Alphabet a letter of explanations from Prof Lepsius, with notes by W D Whitney JAOS vui 335-373 Reply to the stnctures of Prof Weber upon an essay respecting the astensmal system of the Hindus, Arabs, and Chinese. Ibtd , viii 382-398 1867 Language and the Study of Language, twelve lectures on the pnnaples of linguistic science New York, 12®, xi -f 489 pp Translated into German by Prof Julius Jolly, 1874, Munchen (Ackermann), 8°, xxix -f 713 pp , — into Netherlandish by J Beckenng Vinckers, 2 vols , 1877-81, Haarlem (Bohn), 8°, xvi -f 436 pp and iv -f 476 pp The value of linguistic saence to ethnology New Englander, xxvi 30-52 Languages and dialects N Amer Rev , civ 30-64 On the testimony of language respecting the unity of the human race Ibid , cv 214-241 Key and Oppert on Indo-European philology. Ibtd , cv 521-554. Repnnted in Studies, 1 The aim and object of the Sheffield Saentific School Annual Statement for 1867-8, pp 9-21 1868 The translation of the Veda. N Amer Rev , cvi 515-542 Repnnted in Studies, 1 On A M Bell’s Visible Speech Ibtd , cvii 347-358 Repnnted m Studies, u 1869 On Muller’s Chips from a German Workshop, I , II Ibid, cix. 544 - 55 ^ Repnnted m Studies, 11 A Compendious German Grammar, with supplement of exercises New York, 1 2°, xvi -f 252 + 5 ^PP "70 A German Reader, in prose and verse, with notes and vocabulary New York, 12°, ^ + 523 PP Muller on the Saence of Rehgion Nation, No 276, Oct 13 On comparative grammars N Amer Rev , cxi 199-208 1871 On the nature and designation of the accent in Sansknt. Trans APA for 1869-70, pp 20-45 On the present condition of the question as to the ongin of language Ibid , pp 84-94 Repnnted in Studies, 1. On Cox’s Mythology of the Aryan Nations N Amer Rev , cxn 218—229 Repnnted in Studies, n On Muller’s translation of the Rig-Veda. Ibtd , cxm 174—187 Repnnted in Studies, 1 Language and Education Ibtd , cxm 343-374 Repnnted in Studies, 1 On Muller’s lectures on the Saence of Language, 6th ed Ibtd , cxm 430-441 Repnnted m Studies, i Iviii Select List of Whitney's Writings 1871 Examination of Dr Hang's views respecting Sanskrit accentuation JAOS x nn \x r = Proc for May > PH ^ The Taittiri)a-Prati9akhya, with its commentary, the Tnbhashyaratna text, translation, and notes JAOS ix 1-469 ’ 1872 Sfeinthal on the Origin of Language Amer Rev, cxiv 272-308 Reprinted m Studies, 1 Jacolliot’s Bible in India Independent, May 2 Stnetures on the views of August Schleicher respecting the nature of language and kin- dred subjects 7r<7w for 1S71, pp 35-64 Reprinted m n 1873 Oriental and Linguistic Studies the Veda, the Avesta, the Science of Language New York, 12°, ix-f4i7pp [First senes ] On matenal and form in language Trans APA for 1S72, pp 77-96 Notes to ColebrQoke’s Essay on the Vedas Pp 103-132 of vol i of the second edition of Colebrooke’s Essays, London, 8° Intercollegiate emulation Nation, No 399, Feb 20 On the U S Geological Survej of the Temtones Amer Journal of Science for Dec , VI 463-466 Hall’s Recent Exemplifications of False Philology The New York Times, Feb 26 Hall’s Modem English Ibid , Dec 6 The Hayden Expedition (letters from Colorado) The New York Tribune, extra No 14, Dec. 30 Text-books for the study of Sansknt The (Yale) College Courant, Dec. 13 Reprinted, with corrections and additions, June 27, 1874 La question de I’anusaara Sansent Mimotres de la Sociiti de Linguistique de Paris, vol 2 (187s), pp 194-199 1874 On Darwinism and language N Amer Rev , cxix 6r-88 Oriental and Linguistic Studies Second series The East and West; Rehgion and Mythology, Orthography and Phonology, Hindu Astronomy New York, 12®, XI -f 432 pp Who shall direct the national surveys? Nation, No 464, May 21 On Peile’s Greek and Latin Etymology Trans Philol Soc of London for 1873-4, PP 299-327 On the Chinese sieu as constellations. JAOS x., pp Ixxxii-lxxxv, = Proc for May On recent discussions as to the phonetic character of the Sansknt anusvSra Ibid , pp Ixxxvi-lxxxvm On the Sansknt accent and Dr Haug Ibid , pp ciii-cv (for Oct) 1876 The Life and Growth of Language an outlme of linguistic saence (International Saentific Senes, vol 16 ) New York, 12®, ix + 326 pp Translated into German by Prof A Leskien, 1876, 12®, xv + 350 pp , Leipzig (Brockhaus) , — into French, 1876, 8®, vu -f 264 pp , Pans (Bailliire) , into Italian by Prof F d’Ovidio, 1876, 8®, xxi - 1 - 389 pp, Milan (Dumolard) , — into I^etherlandish by G Veldennan, 1879, 274 pp I Arnhem (Quint) , — into Swedish by G. Stjemstrom, 1880, 12°, viu + 320 PP » Stockholm (Bjorck) or 8/ May n Fcr tlie Years 1871-1885 lix 1876 Muller's Rig-Veda and commentary New Englatider, xxxv 772-791 Language Article in Johnson's New Universal Cyclopmdta, u. 1633-1641. The system of the Sanskrit verb Proc APA , pp 6-8, m Trans for 1876 1877 Essentials of Enghsh Grammar, for the use of Schools Boston, 12°, xi + 26o"pp A botamco-philological problem Ttans APA for 1876, pp 73-86 On Cockneyisms Proc APA , pp 26-28, in Trans for 1877. On the current explanation of the middle endings m the Indo-European verb JA OS X , pp, cxlui-cxlv, = Proc f*r May Douse on Gnmm’s Law Nahon, No 631, Aug 2 1878 On the relation of surd and sonant Trans. APA for 1S77, pp 41-57 The pnnaple of economy as a phonetic force /ltd,pp 123-134. On the denvative conjugations of the Sansknt verb JAOS x, pp clxviu-clxx, = Proc for May 1879 A Sansknt Grammar, including both the classical language and the older dialects, of Veda and Brahmana Leipzig (Breitkopf u Hartel), 8°, xxiv -f 486 pp Second ed , revised and extended, ibid , 1889, xxvi -f 552 pp Third ed , tbtd., 1S96 Translated into German by Prof H Zimmer, tbtd , 1879, 8°, xxviii + 520 pp 1880 Collation of a second manusenpt of the Atharva-Veda Prati9akhya JAOS x 156-171 Logical consistency m views of language AJP l 327-343 Muller’s Sacred Books of the East Independent, Nov 1 1 Sayce on the Saence of Language Nation, No 774, Apr 29 On the rules of external combmation in Sansknt JAOS xi , pp xxxu-xxxiv, = Proc for May On the transliteration of Sansknt Ibtd , xi , pp li-hv, = Proc for Oct. 1881 Index Verborum to the published text of the Atharva-Veda. Ibtd , xu 1-383 On the so-called S iience of Religion Princeton Rev , Ivu 429-452 On inconsistency m views of language Trans APA for 1880, pp 92-112 What IS articulation ? AJP w 345-350 On Lepsius’s Nubian Grammar Ibtd , u. 362-372. 1882 On mixture in language Trans APA for 1881, pp. 5-26 General considerations on the Indo-European case-system Ihd for 1882, pp 88-100 Eggehng’s translation of the (Jatapatha-Brahmana. AJP m 391-410 The cosmogomc hymn. Rig- Veda x 129 JAOS xi , pp ax-cxi, = Proc for May Further words as to surds and sonants, and the law of economy as a phonefip force Proc APA , pp 12-18, in Trans for 1882 Le prUtendu Henotheisme du VUda. Revue de Plltstoire des Religions (Pans), vi 1 29-143 1883 On the Jaiminiya- or Talavakara-Brahmana JAOS xi , pp cxliv-cxlviu, = for May Isaac Taylor’s The Alphabet Science, Sept 28 The vanous readmgs of the Sama-Veda. jAOS xi , pp clxxxiv-clxxxv, = Proc for Oct 1884 The vaneties of predication Trans APA for 1883, pp 36-41. The study of Hindu grammar and the study of Sansknt AJP. v 279-297 On E Kuhn’s Ongin and Language of the Transgangetic Peoples Ibtd , v 88-93 On the classification of certain aonst-forms in Sansknt JAOS xl, pp ccxvm-ccxx, = Proc for Oct On the etymology of the Sansknt noun vrata Ibid, pp ccxxix-ccxxxi 1886 On combination and adaptation as illustrated by the exchanges of pnmary and secondary suffixes Trans APA for 1884, pp 111-123 The roots, verb-forms, and pnmary denvatives of the Sansknt language A supplement to his Sansknt Grammar, by W D Leipzig (Breitkopf u Hartel), 8°, xiv + 250 pp Translated into German by Prof H Zimmer, ibtd , 1S85, 8°, xv -P 252 pp The SIS- and ja-aonsts (6th and 7th aonst forms) in Sansknt AJP vu 275-284 Numencal results from indexes of Sansknt tense- and conjugation-stems JAOS x:u„ pp xxxu-xxxv, = Proc for May lx Select List of WIntney s W7‘itings 1886 On Professor Ladwig’s views respecting total eclipses of the sun as noticed in the Rig Veda. Ibtd , xin , pp lxi-lx\n (for Oct ) Philology, pt I — Science of language in general Article in the L»cycl Bnt xvin 765-7S0 LEdited Forty years’ record of the class of 1845, Williams College New Ha%en, 8°, XU1+ 196 pp Pages 175-1S2 contain an autobiographical sketch Although bnef, It IS of importance because it is trustworthy J 1886 Hindu eschatology and the Katha Upanishad /AOS xni , pp ciii-cviii, = for Ma> A Practical French Grammar, wath exercises and illustrative sentences from French authors New York, 12°, xiii + 442 pp The roots of the Sansknt language Trans APA for 1SS5, pp 5-29 The Upanishads and their latest translation A/P ni 1-26 TJie following articles in Appleton's Ncvi American Cyclopadta, 2d ed Alphabet, 1 348- 351 — Africa, Languages of, 1 lyr — Ar)an Race and Language, i 799-802 ■*887 The method of phonetic change in language Proc APA , pp 33-35,10 Trans for 1886 The Veda. Century Aragazme, xxxm 912-922 'Notes on part IV of bchroder’s edition of the Maitrayani-Samhita- /AOS xm,pp ccxxvi-ccxxMii, = Proc for Oct 1888 On the second volume of Eggehng’s translation of the ^atapatha-Brahmana Ibtd xiv, pp vi-xi (for Oct ) 1889 On the r and ar forms of Sanskrit roots Ibid xn , pp cxlvm-cl (for Oct) 1890 Bohthngk’s Upanishads A/P xi 407-439 1891 Translation of the Katha Upanishad Trans APA for 1S90, pp SS-112 Open letter to the members of the American Onental Society Pn\"ately printed New Ha\en, S®, 8 pp L 1889-91 The Century Dictionary An Encyclopedic Lexicon of the English Language Prepared under the supenntendence of William Dwight Whitney, Ph D, LLD, Professor of Comparative Philology and Sansknt in Yale Unnersity Published by The Century Co, New York In six volumes, royal quarto Pages x\tu + 7046 (= 21,138 columns) + 30 J LThe preface to the first volume is dated May ist, 1SS9 supplementary note to preface is dated October ist, 1S91 The actual work began, of course, long before the pnor date The “supenntendence” of the Lexicon naturally involved very far- reaching thought and planning (p Im, above) , but, in addition to this, the proofs of every one of the 21,138 columns were read by Mr Whitney himself See The Century Magazine, xxxix. 31 5 J 1892 On Delbruck’s Vedic Syntax A/P xui 271-306 Max Muller and the science of language a cnbcism New York, 12°, lu -f 79 pp \_Mr IVhitruy's list closes here The /allowing titles are added by the editor J Announcement as to a secono volume of the Roth-Whltney edition of the Atharva-Veda, /AOS XV , pp clxxi-clxxiu, = Proc for April On the narrative use of imperfect and perfect in the Brahmanas Trans APA for 189-, PP 5—34 Review of F Max Muller’s Vedic Hymns, Translated. (Sacred Books of the East, vol 32 ) The New World for June, pp 349 - 35 * 1893 Select list of Whitney’s wntings. (Essentially the same as that just given see aoove, p Ivi ) The native commentary to the Atharva-Veda Festgrnss an Roth (Stuttgart, Komham- mer), pp 89-96 The Veda m Panini- Gtornale della Societa Asiatica lialiana, vu. 243-254. For tJie Years 1885-1894 Ixi 1898 Simplified spelling A symposium on the question “ Is simplified spelling feasible as proposed by the English and Amencan Philological Societies ^ ” XI The Americatt Anthropologist, April On recent studies m Hindu grammar AJP xiv 1 71-197 On recent studies m Hindu grammar JA OS xvi , pp xii-xix, = Proc for April 1894 Examples of spbradic and partial phonetic change in English Brugmann und Streit- berg’s Indogermamsche Forschiingen, iv 32-36 On a recent attempt, by Jacobi and Tilak, to determine on astronomical evidence the date of the earUest Vedic period as 4000 b c JAOS xvi , pp Ixxxu-xciv, = Proc for Maich j On the third volume of Eggehng’s translation of the Catapatha-Brahmana, with remarks on " soma = the moon ” Ibtd , xvi , pp xcv-ci \_Posthnviously pitbUshed J 1905 Atharva-Veda Samhita translated, with a cntical and exegetical commentary Revised and brought nearer to completion and edited by C R L Cambndge, Mass , roy 8°, cbui + IV + 1046 pp (Vol’s vii and viu of the Harvard Oriental Senes ) GENERAL INTRODUCTION, PART I. BY THE EDITOR General Premises Scope of this Part of the Introduction. — As stated aboye, p xxix, this Part contains much that might, but for its voluminousness, have been put into a preface The mam body of the present work consists of transla- tion and commentary Of the latter, the constituent elements are mainly text-critical, and their sources may be put under ten headings, as follows : 1 yulgate European mss 6 Vulgate Pratigakhya and its comm 2 Vulgate Indian mss 7 Vulgate The Anukramanis 3 Vulgate Indian reciters 8 Vulgate. Kaugika and Vaitana 4 Vulgate Commentator’s readings 9 Kashminan recension. Paippalada ms 5. Vulgate Pada-readings. 10 Parallel texts. Of these sources, nine concern the Atbarva-Veda, and the tenth concerns the parallel texts Of the nine concerning the Atharva-Veda, eight qon- cern the Vulgate or Caunakan recension, and the ninth concerns the Kashmirian or Paippalada recension Of the eight concerning the Vul- gate, the first four concern both the samhtta- and the pada-pathas} and the second four concern the ancillary texts Partly by way of indicating what may fairly be expected m the case of each of these elements, and partly by way of forestalling adverse criti- cism, It will be well to make certain observations upon them senatim, under the ten headings Under an eleventh, I desire to add something to what was said in the preface, p xxxvii, about the commentary as a whole; and, under a twelfth, to add a few necessary remarks concerning the translation Under a thirteenth, the explanation of abbrenations etc ^ay be put , and finally, under a fourteenth, a tabular view of previous translations and comments Scope of the reports of variant readings. — By “ variant readings aro here uieant departures from the printed Berlin text ^ Absence of report means ^ Doubtless the padapStha also is an ancillary text, and these headings are therefore not qvivte logical , but they will serve “ Here it is to be noted that, by reason of br#»akage of type, the last part of the “run” (as tke pnnters say) is not always like the hrstf^n other words, that not every copy of the Berlin edition IS like every other (cf note to 1 18 4) Ixiv General Introduction, Part I. : by tJie Editor in general that the mss present no true variants, albeit Whitney does not rehearse every stupid blunder of every ignorant scribe There is of course no clear line to be drawn between such blunders and true variants * and in this matter we must to a certain degree trust the discrimination of the learned editors The term “manuscripts” often used loosely for “authorities,” that is, manuscripts and oral reciters — S P. Pandit, in establishing his text, relied not only upon the testimony of written books, but also upon that of living reciters of the Veda Accordingly, it should once for all here be premised that Whitney in the sequel has often used the word “ manu- scripts” (or “ mss ”) when he meant to include both mss. and reciters and should have used the less specific word “ authonties.” I have often, but not always,^ changed “mss.”^ to “authorities,” when precise conformity to the facts required it. The difficulty of verifying statements as to the weight of authority for a given reading may be illustrated by the following case. At iii lo 12 c, Whitney’s first draft says, “ The s of vy asaJuinia is demanded by Prat, ii 92, but SPP. gives inTiis text vy dsalianta, with the comm,, but against the decided majority of his mss , and the minority of ours (H.O , and per- haps others : record incomplete),” The second draft reads, “ SPP gives in his text vy as-, against the decided majonty of all the mss ” Scruti- nizing the authorities, written and oral, for the samiiita (since for this vari- ant /r?(/ A9S-,and Ap Ixvili Geiieral Introduciimi^ Part I. : by iJie Editor siuvd 7 mevii (that is stuvan emi . ct. Pestg-russ, p 90-91) an untranslaiable- siiivaft ne^nl: here, it is true, one of the wildest blunders of' the pada- kara was before him ; but even a modicum of insight should have kept him out of that pitfall. Again, he seems never to have observed that past passive participles with a preposition accent- the preposition (cf. Gimfimar, § 1085 a), and accordingly takes samvhas at xviii 3 30 as if it were sdvivrias Despite accent and^pada-kara, he takes rajasd, p -sd/i^ at XI 2 25, as instr of 7 'djas f And so on. The text used by the commentator is nevertheless notably different from that given by the mss used for the Berlin edition, and from that given by S P Pandit’s authorities. In books i— iv. Whitney counts over three hundred peculiarities of the commentator's text, and in the Fest~ gimss he gives several lists of them. He has intended in the present work to report all variants of the commentator’s text throughout, and I trust that those which may have escaped his notice (or his and mine) will prove to be few indeed Was the commentator of the Atharva-Veda identical with tfie Sdyanaof the Rig~Veda? — I suggest that it might prove to be an interesting and by no means fruitless task to institute a systematic and critical comparison of the Madhavlya-vedartha-prakaga (or RV -bhdsya) with the bhdsya on the AV , with special reference to the treatment of the accent in the two- works, and to the bearings of these comparisons upon the question of the identity of the Sayana of the RV. with the “Sayana” of the AV. The latter ^ does indeed sometimes heed his accents , but the occasions on which he takes notice of them expressly are of utmost ranty (see W’s note to xix 139 and mine to verse 4). If, by way of comparing the two comments, we take the accusative plural yamdrdjnas, we find that at RV x 16 9 Sayana explains it quite rightly as a possessive compound, rdjd yesdm, tan , while at AV xviii 2 46, on the other hand, in the half-verse addressed to the dead man, ‘by a safe (?) road, go thou to the Fathers who have Yama as their king, dpanparma pathd yamdrdjnah pitrn gac/ia, “ Sayana ” makes of the very same form a gen sing, and renders *by a safe road belonging to king Yama {iasya svabhutetia mdrgena) go thou to the Fathers ’ Evidently, so simple a matter as the famous distinction between indra-^atm and the blasphemous ludra-gatni (cf. Whitney on TPr xxiv. 5 , Weber, Ind Stud. IV 368) was quite beyond his ken. Such bungling can hardly be the work of a man who knew his Rig-Veda as the real Sayana did. 1 A remark in his comment on u.4 r (Bombay ed , zro**), to the effect that the is a kind of tree familiarly known m Benares, suggests the surmise that his bha^a may have been wntlen m that aty 5- Readings of tJie Pada-patha Ixix 5. Readings of the Pada-patha These were reported m the Index, and have since been published in full. — As elsewhere noted, these have been reported m the Index Verboncm m such wise (see IndeXy p 4) as to enable us to determine the pada-ioxvsx of every item of the Atharvan vocabulary An index, however, is an incon- venient vehicle for such information, and the complete pada-pdiha, as published by S P Pandit, is accordingly most welcome Some of his occasional errors of judgment in the establishment of that text are pointed out by Whitney m the places concerned , but the pada-pdtJia has deeper- seated faults, faults which are doubtless original with its author and not simple errors of transmission ^ Here again I may make a suggestion, namely, that a critical and systematic study of the palpable blunders of the pada-patha would be an interesting and fruitful task Even pada- text of books 1 -xvm stands on a very different plane from that of the RV (cf Geldner, Ved Stud, ill 144). A critical discussion of its char- acter is not called for here , but several illustrative examples may be given Illustrations of the defects of the Pada-patha. — Verb-compounds give occasion for several varieties of errors Thus, first, as respects accentua- tion, w'e find, on the one hand, incorrect attribution of accent to the verbal element (cf v 22 1 1) , and, on the other, denials of accent which are quite intolerable, as at xiv 2 73 (j/I d agaman instead of dodgainan) and xiv I 9 {ydt . savitd adaddt . where ^akalya resolves aright savitd ddaddt) ^ Secondly, as respects details of division, we find gross violation of the rule The rule (a very natural one) for compounds with finite verb-forms IS that the preposition, if accented, is treated as an independent word and has the vertical mark of interpunction (here represented by a colon) after it , but that, if accentless (proclitic), it is treated, not as an inde- pendent word, but as making a word-unit with the verb-form, and is accordingly separated therefrom only by the minor mark of separation Or avagraha Qiqtq represented by a circle) Thus iaAV i i, we have ui , rajnaya and pari°ydntt Such a division as ni°rainaya or pan : ydntt would be wholly erroneous ; and yet we find errors of the first type at 74 2 isdimjnapaydmi), 1 14 2 {I'cpao^ekinia), xiii 3 ^7 ipMhdti), xvm ^58 {pdndhkhaydtdi), 4 53 {yi°dadhat)^ ^ The pada-iext of book xix , ■which swarms ■with blunders (cf p SpS* end, S96, top), is clearly very different both in character and ongin from ihe pada te\t of books 1 -x\nii - If Whitney is right in supposing that vi 1 3 is a spoiled j^d} alrt the first pada of which ends unth saviift, then I belies e that the accentlessness of sdiisat is to be regarded as pointing to a false resolution and that the/ofl'a text should be amended to fiosdtisat, but cf \u 73 7 c and Qakalya’s resolution of its RV parallel ® In some of these cases, the rationale of the error is discernible cf the notes, especially the note to xui 3 17. Ixx iremrai introduction^ Part I. : by tlie Editor Various combinations. — The combination oi e qx o (final or initial) with other vowels gives rise to errors. Thus at viii 2.21 cd = i 35 4 cd, i^nu {=le dim) is resolved by the pada-kara as id dim, and the comm, follows him in both instances In matters concerning the combmation of accents he is especially weak, as when he resolves saptdsydni into sapid dsydni at iv. 39 10 (see note). The errors in question are of considerable range, from the venial one of not recognizing, at xiv i 56, that dnvar- itsye means dnu • variisye,^ to the quite inexcusable ones of telling us that yd stands iox ydh in the verse x. 10 ^2, yd evdm viduse dadics, id etz , or that mdyd stands for mdydh as subject of jajne in viii 9 5. Perhaps his idi . ydin : eit 19 €)2LX^^siiivdn: iieini (yi 28 3), already noticed (p Ixvii) in another connection, may be deemed to bear the palm Beside the former we may put his resolution 2 of sSmaivdm { = sdtitdi ivdm), at iv. 10. 6, mto sSind: ivdin. 0. The Praticakhya and its Commentaay Character of Whitney’s editions of the Pratigaktiyas. — In the preface to his edition of the Taittirlya Sarahita, Weber speaks with satisfaction of the service rendered him in the task of editing that Samhita by Whitney’s critical edition of the appurtenant Pratigakhya Whitney’s edition of that treatise is indeed a model , but even his earlier edition of the Atharvan Prati9akhya was buttressed by such elaborate studies of those actual facts which form the topics of the Praticakhya, and by such complete collections of the different classes of those facts, that he could speak with the utmost authority m criticism of the way in which the maker of the Praticakhya, or of the comment thereon, has done his work, and could pronounce weighty judgment concerning the beanng of the treatise in general upon the constitution of the Atharvan text. Bearing of the Atharvan Pratacalrhya upon the orthography and criticism of the text. — First, as for the orthography, a discussion of the importance of the Praticakhya for that purpose is superfluous for any student acquainted with the nature of the treatise , but the orthographic method pursued by the editors of the Berlin text and the relation of that method to the actual prescnptions of the Praticakhya are made the subject of a special chapter, below, p cxxiii — Secondly, the treatise does bear upon the general criticism of the text That it ignores the nineteenth book is a weighty fact among the items *of cumulative evidence respecting the onginal make-up of the text and the supplementary character of that ^ Cf the contusion between p 3 tv rsabhds and fatn vrsabhii at xix 27 i, Bombay ed 2 Cf note to XIX 50 i, where nirjahy'dsth a tdm drupadi jaht, doubtless mcanmg nir ja t ajid a sintdm drupadi jaht, is resolved as ttih jahySh tina 6. Tlie Pratigdkhya and its Com77zentary Lxxi book : see p. 896, line 6 In matters of detail also, the treatise or its comment is sometimes of critical value . thus the non-mclusion of tdas pade among the examples of the comment on APr 11 72 (see note) arouses the suspicion that vi 63 4 (see note) was not contained in the commentator’s AV text. I Utilization of the Atharvan Pratic^hya for the present work. — Whit- ney’s edition is provided with three easily usable indexes (not blind indexes) : one of Atharvan passages, one of Sanskrit words, and a general index. The first gives in order some eight or nine hundred Atharvan passages, and gives nearly twelve hundred references to places in the Pratigakhya or the comment or Whitney’s notes, in which those passages are discussed Whitney has transferred the references of the first index with very great fulness, if not with absolute completeness, to the pages of his Collation-Book, entering each one opposite the text of the verse concerned Very many or most of them, after they have once been util- ized in the constitution of the text of the Samhita, are of so little further moment as hardly to be worth quoting in the present work , the rest will be found duly cited in the course of Whitney’s commentary, and their value IS obvious 7. The Annkramanis : and “Major” • More than one Anukramani extant. — At the date of the preface to the Berlin edition, it was probably not clearly understood that there was more than one such treatise The well-known one was the Major Anu- kramanl, the text of which was copied by Whitney from the ms in the British Museum in 1853, as noticed below, p Txxii In making hisj fun- damental transcript of the Atharvan text, certain scraps, lookingj like extracts from a similar treatise, were found by Whitney m the colophons of the several divisions of the mss which he was transcribing, and were copied by him m his Collation-Book, probably without recognizing their source more precisely than is implied m speaking of them as “bits of extract from an Old Anukramani, as we may call it” (see p cxxxviii) The Pancapatalika The Critical Notice in the first volume of the Bombay edition made it clear that the source of those scraps is indeed an old Anukramani, and that it is still extant, not merely as scattered fragments, but as an independent treatise, and that its name is Pailca- patalika That name is used by “Sayana” vhen he refers to the treatise m his comm, to 111 10 7 In the mam body of this vork the treatise is ' usually styled the “quoted Anukr ” or the “old Anukr ” The word “old” means old with icference to the Major Anukramani, and since Lxxii Genej'al Introduction, Part I: by the Editor the dependence of the latter upon the former is now evident (see p 770, ^4, end, p 793, ^ I, end) it appears that the word «oId" was rightly used The excerpts from the treatise, scattered through Whitney’s Collation-Book, have been gathered together on six sheets by him I was tempted to print them off together here for convenience, but several considerations dissuaded me * they are after all only fragments; they are all given in their proper places in the mam body of this work , and, finally, the Bombay editor (see his Critical Notice, pages 17-24) gives perhaps more copious extracts from the original treatise than do the colophons of Whitney’s mss For some of the excerpts in their proper sequence and connection, see below, pages 770-1, 792-3, and cf pages 632, 707, 737» 814 Manuscripts of the Pancapatalika. — Doubtless S P. Pandit had a com- plete ms of the treatise in his hands ; and, if its critical value was not exhausted by his use of it, it may yet be worth while to make a cnti- cal edition of this ancient tract It is not unlikely that the ms which S. P Pandit used was one of those referred to by Aufrecht, Caialogtis caialogorunty p. 315, namely. Nos 178-9 (on p 61) of Kielhom’s Ry)ort on the seaixh for Sanskrit mss in tJie Bombay Presidency during the year 1880-81 Both are now listed in the Catalogue of the collections of mss deposited in the Deccan College (Poona), p. 179 According to Garbe’s Verzeichniss der Indischen Handschriften (Tubingen, 1899), p 9*^> Roth made a copy of the treatise from a Bikaner ms , which copy is now in the Tubingen Library The Brhatsarvanukramani. — This treatise is usually styled m the sequel simply “the Anukr,” but sometimes “the Major Anukr The excerpts from the treatise which are given at the beginning of the mtr^ ductions to the several hymns in this work are taken from Whitney s ndgari transenpt which he made in London m 1853 on the occasion of his visit there to make his London collations (p xliv) The transcript IS bound in a separate volume; and the edited excerpts are so nearly exhaustive that relatively little work remains for an editor of the treatise to do Manuscripts of the Brhatsarv^ukramanl. — Whitney made his tran senpt from the Polier ms m the British Museum which is now numbere 548 by Bendall in his Catalogue of the Sanskrit mss m the Bntts i Museum of 1902. The ms forms part of Polier’s second volume described beIow% p cxiii, under Codex I ; and it is the one from which was raa e " the ms transcribed for Col Martin and numbered 235 (see again p. cxiii). Whitney after\vards, presumably in 1875, collated his London transcript with the Berlin ms described by Weber, Verzeichniss, vol li , p 79, No 1487, and added the Berlin readings m violet ink. The Ixxili 7. TJie Aittikramanis : '‘"Old'" and ""Major" Berlin mst bears the copied date samvat 1 767 (a d 1 7 1 1 ) it is characterized by Weber, Ind Stud xvii. 178, as “ pretty incorrect ” , but my impres- sion IS that it IS better than the ms. of the British Museum Text-critical value of the Anukramanis. — The most important ancillary treatise that an editor needs to use m establishing the text of the sainfnid, IS the Prati9akhya , but the Anukramanis are also of some importance, especially for the settlement of questions concerning the subdivisions of the text (cf, for example, pages 61 1, 628 or note to iv ii 7), as has been practically shown by S P Pandit in his edition, and in his Critical Notice, pages 16-24 — The pronouncements of the Anukramanis con- cerning the verse-norms of the earlier books (see p cxlviii) are also of value in discussing general questions as to the structure of the smninid In particular questions, also, the statements of the Major Anukr are some- times of critical weight Thus 111 29, as it stands in our text, is a hymn of 8 verses ; but our treatise expressly calls it a sadrca, thus supporting most acceptably the critical reduction (already sufficiently certain see note to vs 7) of the hymn to one of 6 verses, the norm of the book — Here and there are indications that suggest the surmise that the oj-der of verses (cf p 739) or the extent of a hymn (cf p 768), as contemplated by the Anukr , may be different from that of our text — Its statements as to the “deity” of a given hymn are sometimes worth considering in determining the general drift of that hymn , and its dicta regarding the “seers” of the hymns are of interest in certain aspects which are briefly noticed below, pp 1038 ff — Then too, the manuscripts of the Anukr. may sometimes be taken as testimony for the readings of the cited p 7 ’aiikas (cf note to IV 3 3) And it happens even that the authority of the Major Anukr may be pressed into service at x 5 49 (see the notes) to determine which pair of verses (whether viii 3 12-13 or vii 61 1-2) is meant by the ydd agua iti dvi of the mss (see below, p cxx : and cf the case at xix 37 4) The author of the Major Anukramani as a critic of meters. — The author shows no sense for rhythm His equipment as a critic of meters hardly goes beyond the rudimentary capacity for counting syllables Thus he calls ii 12 2 jagatl , but although pada a has 12 syllables, its cadence has T^ojagatl character whatever To illustrate the woodenness of his methods, "we may take ii 13 i : this he evidently scans asii-fii 10-4-12 =44, and accordingly makes it a simple Ui^inbh, as if the “extra” syllable m d could offset the deficiency in c > For the spoiled c of the Vulgate, the Bpp reading ptbatm auirtain (which is supported by MS ) suggests the remedy, and if we accept that as the true Atharvan form of the verse, it is then an example of the mingling (common m one and the same verse of acatalectic jagatl padas with catalectic forms thereof So far, indeed Ixxiv General Introduction^ Part /. ; by the Editor IS he from discerning matters of this sort, that his terminology^ is quite lacking in words adequate for their expression ^ If the author of the Major Anukr showed some real insight into Vedic meters, his statements might, as can easily be seen, often be of value in affecting our critical judgment of a reading of the samhitd or in deter- mining our choice as between alternative readings The contrary, rather, IS wont to be the case Thus at iv 15 4, his definition, virdipiirastdd- brhail, implies the division (given also by the pada-m^'&) 10-}- 8 8 + 8, thus leaving the accentless parjanya stranded at the beginning of a pada > An excellent illustration of the way m which he might help us, if we could trust him, is offered by iv 32 3 b, which reads tdpasd ynjd vi jahi gdtrun Here Ppp makes an unexceptionable Uistnbh by readingy^z/zJ//^, and the author of the Anukr says the verse is iristubh His silence respecting the metrical deficiency in the Vulgate text would be an addi- tional weighty argument for judging the Ppp reading to be the true Athan^-an one, if only we could trust him — as we cannot Cf end of W's note to iv 36 4 Such as it IS, his treatment of the meters is neither even nor equably careful Thus he notes the irregularity of vii 112 i, while in treatmg the repetition of the very same verse at xiv 2 45 (see note), he passes over the bimnktvam in silence Throughout most of the present work, Whitney has devoted considerable space to critical comment upon the treatment of the meters by the Anukr Considering the fact, however, that the principles which underlie the procedure of the Hindu are so radically different from those of his Occidental cntic, no one will be likely to find fault if the cnticisms of the latter prove to be not entirely exhaustive His statements as to the seers of the hymns. — The ascriptions or quasi- authorship, made by the author of the Major Anukr and given m the Excerpts, are set forth in tabular form at p 1040 and are critically dis- cussed at p 1038, which see 8. The Kaucika-Sutra and the Vaitana-Sutra The work of Garhe and Bloomfield and Caland — As elsewhere mentioned (p xxv), the Vaitana has been published in text and translation by Garbe, and the text of the Kaucika (m 1S90) by Bloomfield Since 1890, a good deal of further critical work upon the Kaugika has been done by ^ For the reader’s convenience it may be noted that verses deficient bj one or two s}Ilables, respectively, are called by him mcrt and vtraj , and that \erses redundant by one or two are called Ihurtj and svarSj 8. Tlie Kdii^ika-Sutra and the VditdnaSutra Ixxv Bloomfield^ and by Caland.^ — The value of these Sutras is primarily as a help to the understanding of the ritual setting and general purpose of a given hymn, and so, mediately, to its exegesis From that aspect they will be discussed below (p. Ixxvii) . Meantime a few words may be said about their value for the criticism of the structure of the Samhita. Bearing of the ritual Sutras upon the cnticism of the structure and text of the Samhita. — Bloomfield himself discusses this matter in the intro- duction to his edition of Kaugika, p xli. He there points out instances m which briefer mdependent hymns have been fused into one longer composite hymn by the redactors of the Samhita, and shows that the Sutras recognize the composite character of the whole by prescribing the employment of the component parts separately Thus (as is pointed out also by Whitney), iv. 38 is made up of two independent parts, a gambling-charm (verses 1-4) and a cattle-charm (verses 5-7) The Sutra prescribes them separately for these wholly different uses, the former with other gambling-charms , and to the latter it gives a special name. Bloomfield’s next illustrations, which concern vii 74 and 76, have in the meantime given rise to the critical question whether vii 74 1-2 and 76 r-2 did not form one hymn for Kecava ® The mss of the Sutras may sometimes be taken as testimony for the readings of the cited pratikas The like was said (p Ixxiii) of the mss of the Anukramanls The mss. of the Kauqika (cf Bloomfield’s Introduction, p. xxxix) are wont to agree with those of the Vulgate, even m obvious blunders. Grouping of mantra-material in Sutra and in Samhita compared Many instances might be adduced from the Kaugika which may well have a direct bearing upon our judgment concerning the unitary character of hymns that appear as units in our text To cite or discuss them here would take us too far afield, and I must content myself once more with a suggestion, namely, that a systematic study of the grouping of the mantra- material in the ritual, as compared with its grouping in the Samhita, ought to be undertaken At Kaug 29 1-14 the verses of AV v 13 are brought in for use, all of them and in their Vulgate order The like is true of AV lx 5 i_6 at Kaug 64 6-16 Whether it would lead to clear-cut ^ See his seven Contributions to the interpretation of the Veda (beloiv, p ci), his Hymns of the A V (SBE xlii ), and his reMew of Caland’s Zaubemtnal (Gottingiscbe gelehrte Anzeigen, 1902. no 7) ^ See his Alitndtsches Zaubemtual, and his eight papers Znr Exegese und Kritik der rituellcn Sutras (ZDMG h -Ivii ) Of the papers, those most important for the Kau9ika are the ones contained in vol Im See also WZKM viii 367 “ See Bloomfield’s note, SBE xlu 55S , Whitney’s introduction to vii 74, and me note added ) me at p 440, top, and Caland’s note 5 to page 105 of his Zanber/ituat Hymn 76 of the t in ed IS in no wise a unity see the introduction thereto Ixxvi General Introduction Part I . . by the Editor results is doubtful , but the relation of the two groupings is a matter no less important than it is obscure The obscurity is especially striking in book xviii , where the natural order of the component rites of the long funeral ceremony is wholly disregarded by the diaskeuasts in the actual arrangement of the verses of the Samhita Thus xviii 4 44, which accom- panies the taking of the corpse on a cart to the pyre, ought of course to precede xviii 2 4, which accompanies the act of setting fire to the pile See my remark, below, page 870, lines 7-9, and my discussion, pages 870-1, of ‘'Part III” and “Part V” of xviii 4 As is noted at xviii I 49 and 2 I, the ritual group of verses that accompany the oblations to Yama in the cremation-ceremony wholly disregards even so important a division as that between two successive anuvaka-\i'jrc\rv^ It is pointed out on p 848 that verse 60 of xviii 3 is widely separated from what appears (most manifestly and from various criteria) to be its fellow, to wit, verse 6 Many difficulties of the Kaueika yet unsolved — It will very likely appear that Whitney has misunderstood the Kau^ika here and there , as also, on the other hand, he has m fact here and there corrected the text or the interpretation of Garbe or of Bloomfield At the time of Whit- ney’s death, Bloomfield’s chief contributions (SBE xlii ) to the interpre- tation of Kau^ika had not yet appeared,-' nor yet those of Caland As I have more than once said, no one ought to be so well able to give a trust- worthy translation of a difficult text as the man who has made a good edition of it , and for this reason one must regret that Bloomfield did not give us — m the natural sequence of the sutras — as good a version as he was at the time able to make, instead of the detached bits of inter- pretation which are scattered through the notes of SBE xlii Caland observes, in the introduction to his ZaitbernUial^ p IV, that in using the Kau^ka he soon found that, in order to comprehend even a single passage, it is necessary to work through the whole book The like is, of course, equally true of the Pratigakhya A commentator upon the Samhita who wishes (as did Whitney) to combine in his comment the best of all that the subsidiary treatises have to offer, cannot of course stop to settle, en passant, a multitude of questions any one of which may require the investigation of a specialist Thus Whitney, in his note to X 5 6, said m his ms for the printer, "The Kaug quotes the common pratlka of the six verses at 49 3, in a witchcraft-ceremony, in connection with the releasing of a bull” If Caland is right {ZaubejTii2ial, p 171), the hocus-pocus with the “water-thunderbolts” does not begin until 49 3, and the svayam is to be joined to the preceding sutra (ZDMG Ini 21 1), and the letting loose of the bull (49 i) has nothing to do with the uses of x 5 This is just the kind of error which we cannot fairly 8. The Kdufika-Sutra and the Vditdna-Sutra Ixxvii blame Whitney^fof^ making Special difficulties ot this sort should' have been settled for him by the sutra-specialists, just as h^had settled the special difficulties of the Prati^akhya when he edited that text. Value of the ritual Sutras for the exegesis of the Samhita. — Estimates of the value of these Sutras as casting light upon the original meaning of the mantras have differed and will perhaps continue to differ. The opinion has even been held by a most eifnhent scholar that there is, on the whole, very little in tlie Kaugika which really elucidates the Samhita, and that the Kaugika is in the mam a fabrication rather than a collection of genuine popular practices The pnncipal question here is, not whether this opinion is right or wrong, but rather, to what extent is it right or wrong It IS, for example, hard to suppose that, upon the occasion con- templated m kandika 79 of the Kaugika, a young Hindu, still in the hey- day of the blood, would, at such an approach of a climax of feeling as is implied m the acts from the talpdroha 7 ia to the actual mdhiiva^ia (79 9) inclusive, tolerate — whether patiently or impatiently — such an accom- paniment of mantras as is prescribed in sutras 4 to 9 Whatever philo- logical pertinence may be made out for them (cf Whitney’s note to xiv 2 64), their natural impertinence to the business in hand seems almost intolerable To this it may be answered that the Sutra often represents an ideal prescnption or ideate Vorschnft} compliance with which was not expected by any one, save on certain ceremonial occasions, the extreme formality of which was duly ensured by elaborate preparation and the presence of witnesses The data of the Kdugika no sufficient warrant for dogmatism, in the exegesis of the Samhita. — There is every reason to suppose that the actual text of the samhitas is -often a fragmentary and faulty record of the antecedent (I will not say original) oral tradition , and that the stanzas as we find them have often been dislocated and their natural sequence faulted by the action of the diaskeuasts It is moreover palpable that questions of original sequence, so far from being cleared up, are often complicated all the more by the comparison of the sequences of the ritual texts (see p Ixxv). In these days of rapid travel and communi- ^fion, it IS hard to realize the isolation of the Indian villages {grdvias) ^ad country districts (janapadas) in antiquity. That isolation tended to ’ I owe this suggestion to Professor Delbruck of Jena, who was my guest while I had this chapter m hand and was so kind as to criticize it As a curious parallel to the case abo\e Cited, he told me of the verses prescribed for use in the Brudergemeine of Count Zinzendorf : Mem mir von Cott verliehcncs Weibl Anitzt besteig* ich delnen Leib Empfange mcincn Samcn In Gottes Namen Amen Ixxviii General Inh'odtiction^ Part I. : by the Editor conserve the individuality of the several localities in respect of the details, for example, of their nuptial and funeral customs, so that the local diversities are sometimes expressly mentioned {iiccdvaca janapadadharma giamadhaimag ca • AGS i 7') Astonishingly conservative as India is (see my remarks in KarpuramafijarT, p 206, 2, p 231, note 2), it can nevertheless not be doubtful that her customs have changed in the time from the date of the hymns to that of the ritual books. Evidently, there are divers general considerations which militate strongly against much dogmatism in the treatment of these matters ^ Integer vitae as a Christian fimeral-hymn. — During the last twenty-four years, I have often been called to the University Chapel to pay the last tribute of respect to one or another departed colleague or friend On such occasions, it frequently happens that the chapel choir sings the first two stanzas of the Horatian ode (i 22), integer viiac scelensqne purus, to the solemn and stately music of Friedrich Ferdinand Flemming Indeed, so frequent is the employment of these words and this music, that one might almost call it a part of the “ Funeral Office after the Harvard Use ” The onginal occasion of the ode, and the relation of Horace to Aristius Fuscus to whom it is addressed, are fairly well known The lofty moral sentiment of the first two stanzas, however seriously Horace may have entertained it, is doubtless uttered in this connection m a tone of mock-- solemnity Even this fact need not mar for us the tender associations made possible by the intrinsic appropnateness of these two pre-Chnstian stanzas for their employment m a Christian liturgy of the twentieth cen- tury But suppose for a moment that the choir were to continue singing on to the end, even to Lalagen amabo, dnlce loqnentem f what palpable, what monstrous ineptitude ' If only the first two stanzas were extant, and not the remaining four also, we might never even suspect Horace of any amere-pensde in writing them , and if we were to interpret them simply m the light of their modern ritual use, how far we should be from apprehending their original connection and motive ! Secondary adaptation of mantras to incongruous ritual uses. — Let no one say that this case is no fair parallel to what may have happened in India. On the contrary instances — in no wise doubtful and not a whit less striking — of secondary adaptation of a mantra to similarly incongru- ous uses in the ritual may there be found m plenty This secondary association of a given mantra with a given practice has often been i Caland’s sketch of the funeral ntes is a most praisenorthj and interesting one, and his descnption of the practices \^hich he there sets forth in orderly and lucid sequence is 17611 north the while, but his descriptions are taken from many sources difiemg widuj in place and time, and It is on mary grounds improbable that the ntuai as he there depicts it was e\er earned out in an} given place at any given tine. Jxxix 8. The Kd7igika- Sutra and the Vdttaita-ShfrA determined by some most superficial semblance of verbal pertinence m the mantra, when in fact the mantra had no intrinsic and essential pertinence to the practice whatsoever For example, CGS prescribes the verse dksa 7 i for use when the bride greases the axle of the wedding-car ; here, I think, there can be no doubt ^ that the prescription has been suggested • by the surface resemblance of dhsa/i ‘ they have eaten ’ to dksa7n * axle ’ Or, again, to take an example which has been interestingly treated hy Bloomfield, the verses xiv 2 59-62 doubtless referred originally to the mourning women, who, with dishevelled hair, wailed and danced at a funeral , and they were presumably used originally as an expiation for such noisy proceedings Secondarily, they have been adapted for use jn connection with the wedding ceremonies, “in case a wailing arises," and doubtless for no better reason than that they contained the word for “wailing”, and they have accordingly been placed by the diaskeuasts among the we^lding verses, where we now find them. See Bloomfield, AJP XI 341^ 338 : and cf vii 466 9. Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippalada Recension of the 'Atharva-Veda Samhita General reianons of this recension to the Vulgate or ^aunakan recension.- — Just as, on the one hand, the minute differences between two closely related manuscripts of the same recension (for example, between Whit- ney’s P. and M ) represent upon a very small scale the results of human fallibility, so, upon the other hand, do the multitudinous and pervading differences between the general readings of the manuscripts of the Vul- gate and those of the birch-bark manuscript of the Kashminan recension truly represent in like manner the fallibility of human tradition, but on a very large scale The (^aunakan or Vulgate recension represents one result of the selective process by which the Indian diaskeuasts took from the great mass of mantra-material belonging to the oral tradition of them school a certain amount, arranging it in a certain order ; the Kash- niirian recension represents another and very different result of a similar process Since the birch-bark manuscript has thus far maintained its character a unique, we shall perhaps never know how truly it represents the best Kashmirian tradition of this Veda, it is quite possible that'that tradition was vastly superior to the written reflex thereof which we possess in the ^ I had hesitatingly advanced this view, below, in my note to xviii 4 61 , and I am pleased to see now that Bloomfield had unhesitatmgly given it as his own opinion long before, at AJP. * 1*341 ^ Further reference is made to these general relations below, at p 1013. Ixxx General Introduction^ Part /. : by the Editor < birch-bark manuscript, and which, although excellent in many places, is extremely incorrect in very many Systematic search will doubtless reveal the fact that the Paippalada recension, even in the defective form in which it has come down to us, often presents as its variant a reading which IS wholly different, but which, as a sense-equivalent, yields nothing to the Vulgate m its claim for genuineness and originality • thus for the Vulgate readings tdtas (x 3 8), tydya (x 7 31), yd ca (x 8 10), kstprdm (xii I 35), amd ca (xii 4 38), respectively, the Paipp presents the sense- equivalents tasmdty jagdma, yota, osain, and grhcsu The material selected by the makers of the two recensions is by no means coincident The Kashmirian text is more rich in Brahmana pas- sages and in charms and incantations than is the Vulgate ^ The coinci- dent material, moreover, is arranged in a very different order in the two recensions (cf p 1015); and it will appear in the sequel that even the coincident material, as between the Kashminan and the Vulgate forms thereof, exhibits manifold differences of reading, and that the Kashmirian readings are much oftener pejorations than survivals of a more intelligent version This, however, is not always the^case thus, of the two recensions, the Kashmirian has the preferable reading at xii 2 30 d Or again, at v 2 8 and XIV. i. 22, the Kashmirian recension agrees with the Rig-Veda, as against the Vulgate, and, at xi 2 7, with the Katha reading In this connection it is interesting to note that the conjectures of Roth and Whitney for the desperate nineteenth book are often confirmed in fact by the Kashmirian readings : instances may be found at xix. 27. 8 ; 32 4, 5, 8 , 44. 2 ; 46 3 (two) ; 53 5 > 56 4 The unique birch-bark manuscript of the PSippaldda text. — This .is described by Garbe in his Verzetchniss as No 14 It consisted of nearly three hundred leaves, of which two are lost and eight or more are defec- tive They vary in height from 14 to 21 centimeters, and in width, from II to 16; and contain from 13 to 23 lines on a page The ms is dated sa7nvat 95, without statement of the century If the year 4595 of the Kashmirian loka-kdla is meant, the date would appear to be not far from AD 1519 A description of the ms, with a brief characterization of some of its peculianties, was given by Roth at Florence in Sep 1878, and is published in the Atti del IV Congrcsso tntc} naztoiiale dcgh Orten- tahsti, 11 89-96 Now that the facsimile is published, further details are uncalled for A specimen of the plates of the facsimile is given m the latter volume of this work The plate chosen is No 341 and gives the obverse of folio 187, a page from which have been taken several^ of the illustrative examples in the paragraphs which follow. 1 So Roth in the Attt (p 95), as cited on this page 9* Readings of tJie Kashmirian or Paippalada Recension Ixxxi Roth’s Kashmirian nagari transcript (Nov. 1874) A nagarl copy of the original birch-bark manuscript was made at ^rinagara in 1873. This copy IS No 16 of Garbe’s Verzetc/mtss, and we may call it Roth’s Kash- mirian nagarl transcript. It came into Roth’s hands at the end of November, 1874. The year of its making appears from Roth’s essay, Per Atharvaveda in Kaschmiry pages 13-14; and the date of its amval m Tubingen, from p ii of the same essay With great promptness, Roth gave an account of it in his essay, just mentioned, which was pub- lished as an appendix to an invitation to the academic celebration of the birthday (March 6, 1875) of king^ — It would appear that Roth’s Kashmirian transcript was not the only one made from the birch-bark onginal in India . S. P Pandit seems also to have had one ; for he cites the Paippalada in his .edition, vol iv., p 369 The copy used by him is doubtless the nagari copy procured by Buhler, and listed as VIII i of the collection of 1875-76, on p. 73 of the Catalogue of the Deccan Col- lege manuscnpts See also Garbe’s Verzeic/miss, under No. 17, for the descnption of another copy (incomplete) Arrival of the birch-bark original in 1876 at Tubingen. — 1 he original seems to have come into Roth’s hands in the early summer of 1876 The approximate date of its arrival appears from Whitney’s note to p xiii of the pamphlet containing the Proceedings of the Am Oriental Society at the meetings of May and Nov., 1875, and May, 1876 (— JAOS. x,p. cxix) : “As these Proceedings [that is, the pamphlet just mentioned] are going through the press, it is learned from Professor Roth that the original of the Devanagarl copy, an old and somewhat damaged ms in the Kashmir alphabet, on highly fragile leaves of birch-bark, has reached him, being loaned by the Government of India, which had obtained possession of it. It corrects its copy in a host of places, but also has innumerable errors of its own. It is accented only here and there, in passages ” Roth’s CoUatioii (endedf June, 1884) of the P&ippalS.da text. — This is ■written on four-page sheets of note-paper numbered from i to 44 (but sheet 6 has only two pages) ; the pages measure about 5 X 8^ inches, and there are some 9 supplementary pages (see p Ixiocii, top), sent in answer to specific inquiries of Whitney. As appears from the colo- phon added by Roth (see below, p. 1009), this Collation was finished June 25, 1884 Since Roth’s autograph transcript described in the next paragraph was not made until some months later, I see little chance of €rror in my assuming that Roth made his Collation for Whitney from his ^^s^hminan nagarl transcript, and that he used*" the birch-bark original to 1 My copy of BotVs essay was given me by my teacher, the author, Feb. s6, 1875 Ixxxii General Introduction^ Part /. ; by tJte Editor some extent to control the errors of the copy ^ Occasional suspicions of error in the Collation were not unnatural, and they led Whitney to ask Roth to reexamine the manuscnpt upon certain doubtful points Whitney’s questions extend over books i. to v, and others were noted, but never sent Roth’s answers form a valuable supplement to his Collation, and end in April, 1894. Roth’s autograph nagari transcript (Dec. 1884). — The end of the Colla- tion which Roth made for Whitney was reached, as just stated, June 25, 1884 After the following summer vacation, Roth made a new transcript from the birch-bark, as appears from his letter to Whitney, dated Jan ii, 1893 “Von Paippalada habe ich devanagarl Abschnft, aber nicht voll- standig Die mit Vulgata gleichlautenden Verse, die nur durch Fehler Eckel erregen, habe ich bios citiert, z B die vielen aus RV , nehme mir aber doch vielleicht noch die Muhe, sie nachzutragen Ich habe an der Abschnft unermudlich vom 19 Sept bis 28 Dez 1884 geschneben und diese Leistung als eine ungewohnliche betrachtet ” This transcript is doubtless far more accurate than the one used for the Collation The badness of the latter and the fragility of the birch-bark original were doubtless the reasons that determined Roth to make his autograph nagari transcnpt * see p Ixxxv, top P j The facsimile of the Tubingen birch-bark manuscript (1901). — A mag- nificent facsimile of the birch-bark manuscript has now been published by the care and enterprise of Bloomfield and Garbe ^ The technical perfection of the work is such as to show with marvellous clearness not only every stroke of the writing and every correction, but even the most delicate vemings of the bark itself, with its injunes and patches Even if other things were equal, the facsimile is much better than the original, inas- much as a copy of each one of 544 exquisitely clear and beautiful chromo- photographic plates, all conveniently bound and easy to handle and not easily injured and accessible in many public and private libraries through- out the world, is much more serviceable than the unique original, 1 In some cases, fragments of the birch-bark onginal seem to have become lost after itoth’s Kashmirian nagari transcnpt was made, so that the latter, and the two other Indian copies mentioned on p Ixxxi, have thus become now our only reliance Thus for avtvrdhat of the Vul- gate at 1 29 3 b, Roth reports as Paipp vanant abhibhr^at, and adds “nur m der Abschnft vorhanden ” This must have stood on the pnor half of line 12 of folio 3 b of the birch-bark ms , but a piece of it is there broken ^ut 2 The Kashmirian Atharva-Veda (School of the Plippaladas) Reproduced by chromo- photography from the manuscnpt in the University Libraiy at Tubingen Edited under the auspices of the Johns Hopkins Uhnersity in Baltimore and of the Ro}al Eberhard Karls- Universit} in Tubingen, Wurttemberg, by Maunce Bloomfield, Professor in the Johns Hopkins University, and Richard Garbe, Professor m the Unuersity of Tubingen Baltimore The Johns Hopkins Press 1901 The technical work by the firm of Martin RommeU&Co, Stuttgart 9. Readings of tfie Kashmiria^i or Pazppaldda Recensiozi Ixxxiii written on leaves of birch-bark, fragile with age, easily injured, requiring the utmost caution m handling, and accordingly practically inaccessible except to a very few persons but other things are not equal ; for the transitory advantage of the brilliantly heightened contrast of color which IS gained by wetting the birch-bark original, and which passes away as soon as the leaf is dry, is converted into a permanent advantage by the chromophotographic process, in which the plates are made from the freshly wetted original Moreover, the owner of a facsimile is at liberty to use it at home or wherever he pleases, and to mark it (with pen or pencil) as much as he pleases The facsimile may therefore truly be said to be in many respects preferable to the original Roth’s Collation not exhaustive. — Now that the superb facsimile is published, it is possible for a competent critic to test Roth’s Collation m respect i, of its completeness, and 2 of its accuracy. As, first, for its completeness, it is sufficiently apparent from several expressions used by Roth,^ that he saw plainly that it would be the height of unwisdom to give with completeness the Kashmirian variants as incidental to a work like this one of Whitney’s, whose mam scope is very much broader Roth was a man who had a clear sense of the relative value of things — a sense of intellectual perspective , and he was right, Faults of the birch-bark manuscript. — The birch-bark manuscript is indeed what we may call in Hindu phrase a veritable ‘ mine of the jewels of false readings and blunders,’ an apapdtjiaskhalitaratndkara, a book in which the student may find richly-abounding and most instructive illus- trations of perhaps every class of error discussed by the formal treatises on text-criticism Thus it fairly swarms with cases of haplography (the letters assumed, on the evidence of the Vulgate, to be omitted, are given hn brackets) * idm fpd (^dle saivavirds suvlrd [ar/sZaz/// d] abln sah caicina thdiva dhnrjd prati \it\stha gdlc, folio 54 b^-^ = 111 12 i c, d, 2 a , 'Vcnaikdic yathd ya^aJi : \_yatJtd yagas] soviapitkc, folio i 87 a‘ 5 -‘^ = x 3 22 b, 21 a; ^Uye ca \iiica]ksast, folio i87a''=x. 3 18 b , apa stcdavP vdsama- tham gothavi nta \ta]skaram, folio 158 b* = xix 50 5 a, b Confusions as l^etween surd and sonant (cf p 749, p. 57) and between aspirate and non- ^spirate and between long and short vowels are so common as hardly to be worth reporting cf asasc nos pan dhthi san'dn rdtil aadkasa/j, ::xhich ‘s found at folio I58b+ = xix 50 7a, b, and exemplifies all three cases ^ ’ Such are •' Verse, die nur durch Fehler Eckel erregen,” p Kx'iu . “ On ) trouve, il ost vrai. ^ bonnes parties, imis d’autres sent telloment detiguiees, qu’on a besom de conjecture* S'lnsuombrcptnir arn\er a un texte jisible," p 96. “das Kauderwelsch,” "gnrze Ztilen So un^iclier diss imn nicht emnnl die V/urtcr trennen kanii ” p Ixxwi To judge from for we might suppose that tlm ms at this poirt wtis nniten oun bv a senbe at the dictation of a reciter uiih a bad cold in bis head Ixxxiv General Introduction^ Part /. ; by tJie Editor {dh fox dy t for t, k for g). — Of variety in the character of the Kash- mirian variants there is no lack Thus we see the omission of a needed twin consonant (cf. p. 832) in yad [d]andena, folio 9 rb 5 = v 5 4a, inter- esting phonetic spellings in mahlyam of folio 264 b ^ for inahyam of ill 15 I d, and in e te rdtny anadvahas of folio 158 a ^7 for ye te rdtry anadvdlias of xix 502a, inversion in the order of words in sa me ksatram ca rdsthram ca of folio i 87 a 4 = x 3. 12c Not one of these examples was reported, though probably all were noticed, by Roth, In his Collation for V 6, he notes for verses 1 1— 14 “ unwesentliche Differenzen,” without specifying them. We may regret his failure to report such an interesting reading as yathdhani qatruhdsanyy folio 3 b * 4 , where qatriihd is a correct equivalent of the qatnihas of the Vulgate, i 29 50, but with such a blun- der as asdni in the very next word, and such grammar as ayam vacah m the preceding pada, we cannot blame him In an incomplete collation, there is no hard and fast line to be drawn between what shall be reported and what shall not. Collation not controlled by constant reierence to the birch-bark ms. — Secondly, as for the accuracy of Roth’s Collation in the variants which he does give, — I do not suppose that Roth attempted to control his Kashmirian ndgari transcript (No. 16, Garbe) on which he based his Collation, by constant reference to the original Thu§ far, I have hardly come upon inaccuracies myself ; but it is not improbable that occasional slips ^ on his part may yet come to light It is proper here, therefore, partly by way of anticipating ill-considered criticism, to explain the situation Such reference would have ruined the birch-bark ms. — As any one can see from the table, pages 1018 to 1023, the Kashmirian correspondents of the Vulgate verses are to be found in the birch-bark manuscript in an entirely different order Thus, if we take for example the six Vulgate verses 111 12 i, 6, 8 , 13 i , 14. i ; 15 i, we shall find their Kashmirian correspondents at the following places (leaf, side* line) respectively : 54 b 2, 276 b 7 , 225 a 10, 50 a I, 32 b S, 264 b 5 From this it is evident that the mechanical process of referring, as one proceeds verse by verse through the Vulgate, to the parallel verses of the birch-bark original, for the pur- pose of checking step by step the transcript used for the Collation, would have involved an amount of handling of the fragile birch-bark leaves (nearly 300 in number) which would have ruined them The leaves are now about 400 years old, and some idea of their fragility may be gained from the remarks in the preface to the facsimile, page II It was doubt- less this difficulty that impressed upon Roth the necessity of making a copy which should be at once accurate, and also strong enough to endure 1 Such as suryatti at p xxxvi, foot-note. q. Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippaldda Recension Ixxxv handling without injury. To copy the birch-bark leaves in their proper order is a process by which they need suffer no harm , and this is pre- cisely what Roth did (see p. Ixxxii) as soon as possible after finishing the pressing task of making the Collation for Whitney P *°45 J Care taken in the use of Rothes Collation. Word-division. — In carrying this work through the press, I have constantly and with the most scrupu- lous pains utilized Roth’s original Collation and his supplementary notes thereto, endeavoring thus to check any errors concerning the Kashmirian readings that might have crept into Whitney’s copy for the printer Since Roth’s system of transliteration differs considerably from Whitney’s, the chances for mistakes arising through confusion of the two systems were numerous ; and I have taken due care to avoid them It may here be noted that Whitney’s system transliterates anusvara before a labial by m and not by md but that in printing the Kashmirian headings, I have followed the Collation in rendering final anusvara by vt (or n)y save before vowels. Furthermore, in making use of Roth’s Collation, Whitney has habitually attempted to effect a satisfactory word-division In many cases this is hardly practicable ; and in such cases it was probably a mistake to attempt it. For examples, one may consult the readings at V 2 q 2 ,* syatamo , vi. 44 2,saroganain, 109 i,jivatavd yati , 129 ■^yVrkse sdrpitah intending vrksesv dr-, vii. 70. i, drstd rdjyo, intending drstdd dj- The Kashmirian readings have not been verified directly from the fac- simile by the editor. — As the facsimile appeared in 1901, it is proper for me to give a reason for ray procedure in this matter In fact, both my editorial work and the printing were very far advanced ^ in 1901, so that a change of method would in itself have been questionable, but an entirely sufficient and indeed a compelling reason is to be found in the fact that It would have been and still is a task requiring very much labor and time to find the precise place of the Kashmirian parallel of any given verse of the Vulgate, a task which can no more be done cn passant than can the task of editing a Prati9akhya, — all this apart from the difficulties of the Carada alphabet Provisional means for finding Vulgate verses in the facsimile. — Vffiitney noted m pencil in his Collation-Book, opposite each Vulgate passage hav- ing a Kashmirian parallel, the number of the leaf of the Kashmirian text on which that parallel is found, adding a ov b X.o indicate the obverse or the reverse of the leaf. These numbers undoubtedly refer to the leaves of Roth's Kashmirian nagarT transcript (No 16, Garbe) from which Roth ^ I am sotT) to obsenc that the third (posthumous) edition of his Grammar (see pages 51S-9) ’Misrepresents him upon this point " The main part of this book uas in type as far as page 614 (xi i le) in Dec. 1901 The remainder (as far as p 100 ^, the end) ivas in t^-pe Dec. 13, 1902 Ixxxvi General Introdtichon^ Part /. ; by tJie Editor made his Collation , but as there was no prospect of their being of any use, Whitney has not given them in this work One of Roth’s first tasks, after the arrival of the birch-bark original, was doubtless to find the place therein corresponding to the beginning of each leaf of his Kashmirian nagarl transcript These places he has indi- cated by writing over against them on the side margin of the bark leaf the number of the leaf (with a or b) of that transcript This was most fortunate , for the added numbers, in Roth’s familiar handwnting, although sometimes faint or covered up by a patch used in repairing the edges of the bark leaf, are for the most part entirely legible in the facsimile and it has given me much pleasure dunng the last few days (to-day is April 21, 1904) to assure myself of the fact which I had previously surmised, that these pencilled numbers afford us an exceed- ingly useful, albeit roundabout, means of finding the place of any Kash- mirian parallel in the facsimile, — useful at least until they are superseded by the hoped-for edition of an accurate transliteration of the facsimile with marginal references to the Vulgate Whitney’s pencilled reference- numbers were arranged by Dr Ryder in the form of a table, which I have recast and given below see pages 1013 ff What ought an “ edition ” of the Kashmirian text to be ? — 1 his question was privately discussed by Whitney and Roth in the letters ^ exchanged between them in 1893 Whitney hoped that all that was peculiar to the Kashmirian text might be pnnted in transliteration in the Kashminan order and interspersed with references to the Vulgate parallels of the remainder, also in the Kashmirian order, the whole to form an appendix ^ Under date of Feb 14, Whitney suggests to Roth “ Why not give a Paipp text, as an appendix to our volume [“ our volume ” means the present "work], noting m their order the parallel passages by reference only, and vmting out in full, interspersed with the former, the remainder^” — Roth makes answer, March 14 “Ich will nur wunschen, dass Ihre Gesund- heit so lange Stand halte, urn das Werk zu Ende zu fuhren Weil das aber als ein glucklicher Fall zu betrachten 1st, nicht als erne sichere Voraussicht, so wunschte ich alle Erschwemngen, also auch die Frage von einer Pubhkation der Paippal Rec ganzlich beseitigt zu sehen ” — Whitne), June i6, expresses the hope that Roth may reconsider the matter, i because “a text of such primary imjiortance will and must be published, in spite of its textual condition,” and 2 because “ there will, so far as I can see, no other opportunity present itself of producing it so modestly and unpretendingly, or in a method adapted to its imperfect state the occasion is an ideal one” — Roth ansuers, July 2 “Mem lieber Freund, das 1st kein erfreulicher Bencht, welchen Ihr Brief vom 16 Juni uber Ihre Erlebnisse erstattet Und ich sehe namentlich daraus, dass Sie die Geduld sich erworben haben, die durch Uebung im Leiden kommt In einer Ausgabe der Paipp musste das ganze gedruckt werden, \on A bis Z Wie wird sich das Kauderwelsch gedruckt ausnehmen ? ganze ZeUen so unsicher, dass man nicht emmal die Worter trennen kann Daran bessem, was ja das einzige Verdienst ware, durfte man nicht . Fur Sie wird die einzige angemessene Sorge in diesem Augenblick sein, wieder gesund zu werden, alsdann die zweite, den Atharvan ans Licht zu bringen ” — Whitney ^v^tes, Aug 25 “ I gi\e up with reluctance the hope of the further inclusion of Paipp in our edition , but 1 will not bother you further with remonstrances or suggestions ” 9- Readings of the Kashmirian or Paippalada Recension Ixxxvii to the present work Roth’s hope was that Whitney’s strength might hold out long enough for him to finish this work without such a burden- some addition. Neither hope was fulfilled , and at that time, doubtless, even the thought of a facsimile reproduction was not seriously enter- tained Bloomfield’s difficult task of secuiing the needed funds once accomplished, the next step, unquestionably, was to issue the facsimile without any accessory matter That too is now an accomplished fact; but the facsimile, apart from its large paleographic interest, is still, in default of certain accessories, a work of extremely limited usefulness. As to what should next be done, I have no doubt 1 . A rigorously precise transliteration. — First, the whole text, from A to izzard (as Roth says), should be printed in a rigorously precise trans- literation Conventional marks (other than those of the original), to indi- cate divisions between verses and padas and words, need not be excluded from the transliteration, if only -the marks are easily recognizable as insertions of the editor. As to minor details, I am in doubt In the prose parts, the translit- eration might correspond page for page and line for line with the birch- bark original : the metrical parts might either be made to correspond in like manner line for line with the original , or else they might be broken up so as to show fully the metrical structure (and at the same time, with a little ingenuity, the Kashinirian vowel-fusions), in which case the begin- ning of every page and line of the bark leaves should be duly indicated by a bracketed number in its proper place In case the transliteration corresponds with the original line for line throughout, then the obverse and reverse of each bark leaf might well be given together m pairs, the obverse above, and the reverse below it, on each page of the translitera- tion, since this would be especially convenient and would yield a page of good proportion for an Occidental book 2. Marginal references to the Vulgate parallels. — Secondly, on the mar- gin throughout, and opposite every Kashminan verse that corresponds to a verse of the Vulgate, should be given the reference to the place m the Vulgate where the corresponding Vulgate verse is found 3* Index of Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin. — Thirdly, in an appendix should be given, in the order of the Vulgate text, an index of all the Vulgate verses thus noted on the margin, with a reference to the birch-bark leaf and side (obverse or reverse — a or b') and line where its Kashmirian correspondent may be found These I conceive to be the essential features of a usable edition of the Kashmirian text, and I hold them to be absolutely indispensable. The text is often so corrupt that one cannot emend it into intel- ligibility without sacrificing too greatly its distinctive character. All Ixxxviii Geiieral Introductimi^ Part I. : hy tJie Editor conjectures, accordingly, should be relegated to a second and separately bound volume 4. Accessory matenal : conjectures, notes, translations. — The accessory matenal of the second volume should be arranged m the form of a single series of notes and in the sequence of the Kashmirian original, and it should have such numbers and letters at the outside upper corners m the head-lines, that reference from the original to the notes and from the notes to the original may be made with the very utmost ease and celerity This accessory material should comprehend all conjectures as to the more original Kashmirian form of manifestly corrupt words or passages, in so far as they point to readings not identical (compare the next paragraph) with those of the Vulgate; indications of word-division, especially the word-division of corrupt phrases and the resolution of the very frequent double sandhi ; a running comment, proceeding verse by verse, giving any needed elucidatory matter, and explaining the rationale of the blun- ders of the Kashmirian version where feasible (as is often the case), point- ing out in particular its excellences, and the many items in which it serves as a useful corrective of the Vulgate or confirms the conjectural emendations of the latter made in the edition of Roth and Whitney , — and all this m the light of the digested report of the vanants of the parallel texts given by Whitney in the present work and in the light of the other parallels soon to be made accessible by Bloomfield’s Vedic Con- cordance. An occasional bit of translation might be added m cases where the Kashmirian text contains something peculiar to itself or not hitherto satisfactorily treated For the cases (hinted at in the preceding paragraph) where corrupt Kashminan readings point simply to readings identical with those of the Vulgate, a simple reference to the latter will sometimes suffice to show the true reading and sense of what the Kashmirian reciters or scribes have corrupted into gibberish. Thus the Kashmirian form of xii 3 36 b, found at folio 226 b^ 3 , \% yavantah kdmdn savntdii pnrasihdt Apart from the aspiration (overlooked by Roth) of the prior dental of pnrastdt, each of these four words by itself is a good and intelligible Vedic word , but taken together, they yield far less meaning than do the famous Jabberwock verses of Through the Looking-glass,^ Their presence m the Kashminan text IS explained by their superficial phonetic resemblance to the Vulgate pada ydvantah kdvtdh sdin atltrpas idn, of which they are a palpable and wholly unintelligent corruption It is evident that, with the Vulgate before us, conjectural emendation of the Kashminan text in such cases * For the sake of fathers to whom English is not vernacular, jt may be added that this Classic of English and American nurseries is the work of Charles Lutwidge Dodg->on (“Lewis Carroll") and is a pendant to Alice's Adi-entures tn IVofdcrland 9. Readings of the Kashmirian or Pdippaldda Recension Ixxxix is an entirely gratuitous procedure. And as for such grammar as kene- dam bhmmr nikaiak (a feminine noun, with neuter adjective pronoun and masculine predicate participle: folio i86a‘s = x 2 24*^), — to mend that would be to rob the Kashmirian text of its piquancy; and why should we stop with the genders, and not emend also the senseless niha- to the intelligible vilii-} Let all this be done, and we have the Vulgate text pure and simple. 10. Readings of the Parallel Texts The texts whose readings are reported. — The principal texts included in these reports are of the Samhitas, the Rig-Veda, Taittirlya, Maitrayam, Vajasaneyi-, Sama-Veda, and Atharva-Veda ; of the Brahmanas, the Aitareya, Kausitaki, Taittirlya, Catapatha, Paficavih9a, and Gopatha ; of the Aranyakas, the Aitareya and Taittirlya , of the Upanishads, the Kausitaki, Katha, Brhadaranyaka, and Chandogya ; of the Q!rauta-Sutras, the A9valayana, Cahkhayana, Apastamba, Katyayana, and Latyayana ; of the Grhya«Sutras, the Aqvalayana, ^ankhayana, Apastamba, Hiran- yake9i-, Paraskara, and Gobhila. Other texts are occasionally cited : so the Kathaka and the Kapisthala Samhita, and the Jaiminlya Brah- mana; and the names of some others may be seen from the List of Abbreviations, pages ci ff. I have added references to some recently edited parallel texts, without attempting to incorporate their readings into the digested report of the variants such are the Mantra-patha, von Schroeder’s “Kathahandschriften,” and Knauer’s Manava-Grhya-Sutra. Von Schroeder’s edition of Kathaka i came too late The information accessible to Whitney concerning the then unpublished Black Yaj’us texts was very fragmentary and inadequate, this fact must be borne in mind in connection with implied references to the Kathaka and Kapisthala (cf. his notes to 111 17 , 19 , 20 , 21 , v 27 , vii 89) The method of reporting the readings aims at the utmost possible accu- racy. — Whitney has constantly striven for three things * that his repdrts should be characterized, i and 2 , by the utmost attainable accuracy and completeness , and, 3 , that they should be presented in a thoroughly well-digested form First, as to the accuracy, little need be said. It may be well to remind the reader, however, that Whitney has used the most methodical precision in this matter, and that, accordingly, if, under n given AV verse, he cites a parallel text without mention of variant, his silence is to be rigorously construed as meaning positively that the parallel text reads as does the AV verse in question. As a matter of fuct, I believe that it will be found possible in nearly every case to recon- struct the parallel texts with precision from the data of Whitney’s reports xc General Introd^ichon, Part /. .* by the Editor It needs here to be noted that Whitney, in reporting variants from the MaitrayanT, has disregarded what are (as explained by von Schroeder m his introduction, pages xxviii-xxix) mere orthograpTiical peculiarities of that text Accordingly, at in 14 3, he treats the na {=nas) d gata of MS as if it were na d gata Again, the MS correspondent of 111 19 3 has, in samhita, svdn, and in pada, svdn , Whitney vep&rts sndn, and quite propel ly, although it is neither the one thing nor the other So at 11 34 3, he reports tdn, although MS has, in s , tdu, and in p , tdn The completeness of the reports far from absolute. — Secondly, as for its completeness, it may be asked whether Bloomfield’s great work, the Vedic Concordance, will not show Whitney’s paraUels to be far from exhaustive To thisT reply that the primary purpose of Bloomfield’s Concordance is to give the concordances, and to do so with as near an approach to com- pleteness as possible, even for the less important texts, a task of which the preliminaries have required the assiduous labor of years. In Whit- ney’s work, on the other hand, the giving of concordances is only one of many related tasks involved in his general plan, and is, moreover, only incidental to the discussion of the variants I have tested the two works by comparison of random verses m the proof-sheets, and find (as I expected) that Bloomfield does indeed give very many references which are not given by Whitney, but that these references (apart from the Kathaka) are concerned prevailingly with the Jiumerous subsidiary or less important texts which fall within the purview of the Concordance Whitney had excerpted all the texts, so far as published (see the list, above), which were of primary importance for his purpose The parallels to which Bloomfield’s additional references guide us will have to be reckoned with in due course by Whitney’s successors*, but I surmise that they are not likely upon the whole greatly to affect the sum of our critical judgments respecting the Atharvan text ^ The reports are presented in well-digested form. — Thirdly, as to the form of the reports It is one thing to give numerical references to the places where the padas and their variant^ are to be found ^ It is another to rehearse, in full for each text concerned, the readings containing variants , and the result of this process is in a high degree space-consuming and repetitious for the author, and time-consuming and confusing for the user. It is yet another and a ver}’’ different thing to compare these readings carefully, to note the points of agreement, and to state briefly and clearly the points on which they differ,^ The result of this last procedure is a I In spue of its intnnsic importance, such is the case, I believe, with the CB, to which V»Tiitne\ makes, I think, rather meagre reference - And It IS a large achievement to do it on such a scale as does the Concordance. 3 Whoever doubts it, let him take so verj simple a case as .A.V ii 29. 3 or iv 14 r, wnte out the AV text in full and then the three parallel Yajus texts beneath it, compare them, ’ lo. Readings of the Parallel Texh xci well-digested report of the variants which is easily and quickly usable for the purpose of critical study I call especial attention to this valuable feature of Whitney’s work, partly because of its practical importance, and partly because it shows the author’s power of masterly condensation and of self-restraint. II. WMtney^s Commentary : Further Discussion of its Critical Elements Comprehensiveness of its array of parallels. — I have already called attention (p xxxvii) to the fact that the Commentary expressly disavows any claim to finality; and have spoken briefly of its importance as a tool, and of its comprehensiveness In respect of the comprehensiveness of its array of parallels, it answers very perfectly one of the requirements set by Pischel and Geldner in the Introduction (p x\x) to the Vedische Studien “ Das gesamte mdische Altertum kann und muss der vedischeh Exegese dienstbar gemacht werden. In vorderster Lime wollen auch wir den Veda aus sich selbst erklaren durch umfassenderes Aufsuchen der Parallelstellen und Combinieren zusammengehoriger aber m Verschie- denen Teilen des Veda zerstreuter Gedanken ” That Whitney’s work will ’ prove to be an instrument of great effectiveness in the future criticism and exegesis of the Veda I think no one can doubt It will easily be seen that often, m the cases where the older attempts have failed, the fault is' to be laid not so much to the learning and ingenuity of the scholars Con- cerned, as to the lack of powerful tools. Such a powerful "tool is this, such IS Bloomfield’s Concordance , and other such helpful tools aje sure to be invented and made in the next few decades The pratlka-vadL^^^s of Pertsch, Whitney, Weber, Aufrecht, and von Schroeder are admirable, and without them Whitney’s work could not have been made Their main use is to make feasible the systematic comparison of the texts one With another This is what Whitney has done here, with the Atharvan text as starting-point, and the results of his comparison he before us m the conveniently digested reports of the varian^ * Criticism of specific readings. — Examples abound showing how the reports may be used for this purpose They enable us to recognize the corruptness of a reading, which, although corrupt, is nevertheless to be deemed the genuine Atharvan reading, as in the case of ydg cdrati at ■Qnderscore in red ink the points of difference, and then state them mth brevilj and clearness Then let him examine Whitney’s reports, and I think he will freely admit that they are indeed well-digested and are models of masterly condensation XIore difficult cases are ii i 3, 13 i « in 10 4, 12 7 , 19 6, vu 83 2, 97 I , XIV 2 71 The amount and intricacy of possible %aria- tion is well exemplified by vi. 117. i Perhaps Whitney has erred in the direction of oxer- condensation in his note to vii 29. 2. XCll General Inlrodtiction^ Part I. . by the Editor iv, 5 5 over against the yd^ ca cdraii of RV vii 55 6 , or, again, to dis- cover with certainty the true intention (cf TB 11 4 7’°) of a lot of waver- ing variants, as m the case of those that disguise the svdravo mtidh of XIX 42 I They show us that the vastly superior tradition of the RV corrects that of the AV in many places (cf. the accentless asahania of XI I 2) , but that the AV occasionally scores a point even against the RV, as in the case of magh^u at xiv i 13 (RV aghdsti), or as in the case of ndu . . . nan at xviii i 4 (RV no nan) What a puzzle is the phrase (xiv 2 72) jamydnti ndv dgravah^ ‘The, unmarried [plural] of us two [dual] seek a wife,’ by itself, involving, as it does, a breach of the mathematical axiom that the whole is greater than any of its parts ' but the comparison of RV. vii 96 4, with its mi for nan, teaches us that the error lies in the nan, even if it does not show us with certainty how that error is to be emended Even with all the array of variants, we are (as Whitney notes at iv 8 i , vi 22 3,31 3) at times forced to the conclu- sion that certain verses were hopelessly spoiled before ever any of the various text-makers took them in hand Illustrations of classes of text errors 1 have already hinted at the variety of special investigations to which the mass of critical material here assembled invites The various occasions of probable error in the trans- mission of Indie texts have not yet been made the object of a systematic and formal treatise Here we have, conveniently presented, the very material needed for such an advance in the progress of Vedic criticism By grouping suspected readings into clearly defined classes, it will become possible to recognize suspected readings as real errors with a far greater degree of certainty than ever before Illustrations of this matter are so abundant as easily to lead us far afield , but several may be given ^ Auditory errors. — A most striking example of a variation occasioned by the almost complete similarity of sound of two different readings is presented by the pmtltya of AGS 111. 10 ii, as compared with the praticah of AV vi 32 3 Compare dydvi of HGS i 15 3, with jydm of AV vi 42 I — Confusion of surd and sonant is exemplified in the variant version of part of the familiar RV hymn, x 154, given at jAV xvin 2 14, where we have ydbliyo niddfin pradhdv ddin, ‘for whom honey [is] on the felly’ This may or may not be the genuine Atharvan reading, but It is certainly an unintelligent corruption of the piadhdvati of the RV and it is very likely that we have the same blunder at vi 70 3, where the occasion for the corruption is palpable- The simplification of twin consonants is exemplified at xvm 3 3, where the editors of the Berlin ^ Others, taken from the Kashmirian text, are given above, p Ixxxm -Confusions of surd and sonant are discussed bj Roth, ZDMG xlvm 107 cf note to 13 3, below The Kashminan text svvarms vvith them. II. JVkil7iey's Couwieiitary xciii text gave, with the support of all the mss then accessible, the reading jlvdm Hdbhyas * that this is an error for mrtdbliyas is shown beyond all doubt by the TA variant mrtdya jivdm (cf. the note on p 832) Visual errors. — Several classes of errors are chargeable to “ mistakes of the eye” Confusions such as that between pdhi 2xA ydhi are simple enough, and are sometimes to be controlled by the evidence of oral reciters (cf p Ixvi), but, considering the fragmentariness of our knowl- edge of Indie paleography, who may guess all the more remote occasions for error of this kind — Of errors by haplography, yd dste ydg cdrqti (just mentioned) is a good type this is undoubtedly the true Atharvan reading, and it is undoubtedly wrong, as is shown by the meter, and -/the comparison of RV , which h 3 .s ydg ca edmit. cf notes to iv 5 5 , vi 71 i ; VII. 81 I, XIX. 42 3,^55 3 For a most modern case, see note to xiii 2 35. Metrical faults. Hypermetric glosses and so forth Our suspicions of hyperraetne words as glosses are often confirmed by the downright absence of those words m the parallel texts Instances are * hdstdbhydm at AV iv. 13 7 (cf RV x 137 7); dev 6 at RV x 150. 4^ (cf RV 111. 2. 8), asmdbhyam at TS 11 6 122 (cf. nah at RV. x 15.4), tindm at AV. XIV 2 40 (cf RV. X 85 43) — On the other hand, the damaged meter of our text often suggests a suspicion that some brief word has fallen out or that some briefer or longer or otherwise unsuitable form has been substituted for an equivalent suitable one ; and the suspicion is borne out by the reading of the parallel texts Thus in div 6 [vd] vistia utd vd prihtvydy mahd lya] visna urdr antdriksdt, the bracketed vd's, miss- ing at AV vii 26 8, are found in their proper places in the TS and VS. parallels. pdttt and lyj'ts of AV xviii 2 55 quite spoil the cadences of a and c, which cadences are perfect in their RV original at x 174 Blend-readmgs. — The blend-readings, as I have called them, stand in yet another gioup A good example is found, at AV xiv 2 18 (see note), in prajdvati virasflr dcvrkdmd syoiid , its genesis is clear, as is also the intrusive character of syond, when we compare the Kashmirian Tea.dir\g prajdvati viraszlr dcv 7 'kdmd with that of the RV , virasilr dcvdkatftd syofid (i I syllables)! Tbie like is true of asj'd at VS \ii 73 » dgativta tdmasas pdrdm asyd : cf the oft-recurring dtdrisifja tduiasas pdrd 7 n asyd with agaiwia iaiztasas pdz’aui of the Kathaka, xvi 12, p 235^ — The above-given examples suffice to show how rich is the material gathered in this work for an illuminating study of the fallibilities of human tradition in India. ^ Heije BoUensen long ago proposed {Orient itnd Occident, 11 4S5) athetize ebhavat. XCIV General Introdnrfinn, Part I. by the Editor 12. Whitney’s Tnux&iation and the Interpretative Elements of the Commentary The Translation : general principles governing the method thereof. — The statements concerning the principles involved in the translating of the Upanishads, as propounded by Whitney in his review of a translation of those texts, apply — mutatis mutandis — so well to the translation of this Veda, that I have reprinted them (above, p xix * cf p xxxvii) , ^and to them I refer the reader. The translation not primarily an interpretation, but a literal version. — Whitney expressly states (above, 'p xix) that the design of this work is “to put together as much as possible of the material that is to help towaid the study and final comprehension of this Veda”, accordingly, we can hardly deny the legitimacy of his procedure, on the one hand, in making his version a rigorously literal one, and, on the other, in restrict- ing the interpretative constituents of the work to narrow limits He recognized how large a part the subjective element plays m the business of interpretation , and if, as he intimates, his mam purpose was to clear the ground for the interpreters yet to come, his restriction was well motived. It is, moreover, quite in accord with his scientific skepticism that he should prefer to err on the side of telling less than he knew, and not on the side of telling more than he knew a fact which is well illus- trated by his remark at viii 9 18, where he says, “The version is as lit- eral as possible , to modify it would imply an understanding of it ” A literal version as against a literary one Let no one think that Whitney was not well aware of the differences betu^een such a version as he has given here, and a version which (like that of Gnffith) makes con- cessions to the demands of literar}’’ style and popular interest VTiitney’s version of xviii i 50, as given below, reads: ‘Yama first found for us a track; that is not a pasture to be borne away; where our former Fathers went forth, there [go] those bom [of them], along their own roads ’ With this compare his version of 1859 (O and L S , i , p 5 ^)- Varna hath found for us the first a passage, that’s no possession to be taken from us, Whither our fathers, of old time, departed, thither their offbpnng, each his proper pathvray Each version has its own quality; each method has its justification* to niaKC a complete translation after the second method, one must inevitab!) wane the consiacration of philological difficulties, a thmg by no means licit for Whitney m such a work as this The aciniin-blc \ersion of Griffith 12. W/iztney s Translation xcv illustrates the advantages of the second method,- and also its inherent limitations ^ Interpretative elements, captions of the hymns. — The preponderating elements of the commentary are of a critical nature, and these have been discussed by me at length in chapters i to ii of this Part I of the Gen- eral Introduction (above, pages Ixiv to xciii) ; of the interpretative elements a few words need yet to be said And first, it should be expressly stated that the English titles of the hymns (the captions or headings printed in Clarendon type throughout, just before the Anukramanl-excerpts) con- stitute, for the books of short hymns at least, a most important part of the interpretative element of this work They have evidently bhen formu- lated by Whitney with much care and deliberation, and are intended %■ him to give briefly his view of the general purport of each hymn In a few cases these captions were lacking, and have been supplied by me from his first draft (so at i 35) or otherwise (so at 11 12; v 6, vii 109 cf books XV , XVI , and xviii , and p 772, end) These captions are given in tabular form near the end of the work see volume viii , p 1024. Interpretations by Whitney. — Where the text is not in disorder, a ngor- ously literal version is in many (if not m most) cases fairly intelligible without added interpretation The need of such additions Whitney has occasionally, but perhaps not often, recognized Thus after rendering the padas 12 3 ab by the words ‘ when the kine, embracing the tree, sing the quivering dexterous reed,’ he adds, “that is, apparently, ‘when the gut- string on the wooden bow makes the reed-arrow whistle ' ” Similarly at vi 125 I The text speaks at xviii i 52 of an offense done pnmsdid Whitney renders ‘ through humanity,' and adds “that is, through'*^ human frailty” Cf note to vii 33 i It may be noted in this place (for lack of a better one) that Whitney, in reporting the conjectures or interpretations of his predecessors, passes over some m silence Sometimes this appears to have been done inten- tionally and because he disapproved them Thus at iv 37 3, he notes m his first draft the suggestions of BR and OB concerning ava^jasdm ; ’ It would be idle presumption in me to praise the work of a man uhose knowledge of the literature and customs and spirit of India is so incomparably greater than my own , but I maj be allowed to repeat the judgment of my revered and beloved fnend, M Auguste Barth, con- cerning Griffith’s Veda-translations Elle [the RV translation] se presente ainsi sans aucun appareil savant, ce qui, du reste, ne \eut pas dire qu’elle n’est pas sa\ante L’autcur, qui a longtemps dinge le Benares College, a une profonde connaissance des langues, des usages, de I esprit de I’Inde, et, pour maint passage, on aurait tort de ne pas tenir grandement conipte tie cette ^erslon en apparence sans pretentions (Reeue de I'histoirc des religions, jear 1S03, ^'tvii 181) Eiie translation] mdnte Ics mSmes cloges (Ibidem, jear 1809 xxxix 25) ^ Ily a cunous coincidence, “through human frailty” is preasely the rendenng given b) Griffith xcvi Gemral Introduction^ Part I . : by the Editor but ignores them in his second Similarly, at ii 14 3, he omits mention of a translation of the verse given by Zimmer at p 420 Ezegetical notes contributed by Roth It appears from the letters between Roth and Whitney that the former had written out a German version of this Veda, and that, although it was complete, its author did not by any means consider it as ready for publication. In order to give Whitney the benefit of his opinion on doubtful points, Roth made a brief commentary upon such selected words or phrases (m their proper sequence) as seemed to him most likely to present difficulties to Whitney The result IS a parcel of notes, consisting of 250 pages m Roth’s handwriting, which IS now in my keeping From these notes Whitney has incorpo- rated a considerable amount of exegetical matter into his commentary. It IS yet to be considered whether the notes contain enough material unused by Whitney to warrant their publication, if this should appear upon other grounds to be advisable The translation has for its underlying text that of the Berlin edition. — With certain exceptions, to be noted later, the translation is a literal ver- sion of the Vulgate Atharvan text as given in the Berlin edition For the great mass of the text, this is, to be sure, a matter of course It is also a matter of course in cases where, in default of helpful variants to suggest an emendation of a desperate line, we are forced to a purely mechanical version, as at xii i 37 a, * she who, cleansing one, trembling away the serpent,’ or at vi 70 2 ab Even in the not infrequent cases where (in spite of the lack of parallel texts) an emendation is most obvious, Whitney sticks to the corrupted text in his translation, and reserves the emendation for the notes Thus, at iv. 124, dsrk te dsthi rohatii mansdm ^ndnsiiut rotiatiit he renders ‘let thy blood, bone grow,' although the change of dsrk to asthnd would make all in order. The translation follows the Berlin text even in cases of corrigible corrup- tions. — On the other hand, it may seem to some to be not a matter of course that Whitney should give a bald and mechanically literal version of the true Atharvan text as presented in the Berlin edition in those very numerous cases where the parallel texts offer the wholly intelligible read- ings of which the Atharvan ones are palpable distortions. Granting, however, that they are, although corrupt, to be accepted as the Atharvan readings, and considering that this work is primarily a technical one, his procedure in faithfully reproducing the corruption in English is entirely justified. A few examples may be given Whitney renders tdm tvd bhaga sdn>a ij johavlini (111. 16 5) by ‘on thee here, Bhaga, do I call entire,’ although RVVS hzvQ johavUt, ‘on thee does every one call.’ At v. 2 8, /wwf cid vi^ain aniavat tdpasvan is rendered ‘may he, quick, rich in fervor. XCVll 12 . Whitneys Translation send(?) all,- although it is a corruption (and a most interesting one) of the very clear line duraq ca avrnod dpa svdk. So puniddmaso (vii 73 I), ‘of many houses,’ although the ^rauta-Sutras pumta- mdso At RV, VI 28 7 the cows are spoken of as ‘drinking clear water and cropping good pasture/ suydvasam nqdntlh: the AV. text-makers, at IV. 21. 7, corrupt the phrase to -se niqdntihy but only in half-way fashion, for they leave the RV. accent to betray the character of their work. Even here Whitney renders by * shining {piqaiitili) in good pasture ’ The AV, at xviii 4, 40, describes the Fathers as dslndm Urjam iipayt sdcante, Whitney is right m rendering the line by ‘ they who attach themselves unto a sitting refreshment,* although its onginal intent is amusingly revealed by HGS , which has {jnsantdin) mdsl 'ntdm^ urjam uta ye hhajantei ‘and they who partake of this nourishment every month ’ For other instances, see the notes to iv. 21. 2a; iii. 3 i ; iv. 16 6 {piqantas for nisduias), 8 (ydnino ) ; 27 7 (yidttdm ) ; vi. 92. 3 {dhdvatu ) ; ii 35 4 , iii. 18 3 , iv 2 6 ; 15 5 , vii. 2 1 I ; and so on Cases of departure from the text of the Berlin edition. — These are always expressly started by Whitney. They include, first, cases in which the Berlin edition does, not present ^he true Atharvan.text. An example may be found at xix 64 i, where the editors had emended wrongly to dgre and the version implies dgne At xix 6. 13, the editors, following the suggestion of the parallel texts, had emended to chdnddtisi the ungram- matical corruption of the AV c/tdndo ha {jajntre tdsindt ) ; but since Whitney held that the latter reading “has the best right to figure as Atharvan text,” his intentionally ungrammatical English ‘meter were born from that ’ is meant to imply that reading Here are included, secondly, cases in which the Berlin reading, although it has to be recognized as the true Atharvan reading, ‘is so unmanageable that Whitney has in desp^r translated the reading of some parallel text or an emended reading. Thus at vii 57. 2 c it is assumed that 7 ibht id asyo 'bhd asya rdjatah is, although corrupt, the true Atharvan reading. The corruption is indeed phonetically an extremely slight distortion, for the RV has nbhd id asyo 'bhdyasya rdjatah, and from this the translation is made — Other categories might be set up to suit the slightly varying relations of mss and edition and version cf xix 30. i , xviii a 87; and so on Whitney’s growing skepticism and correspondingly rigid literalness. — At xiii 4 54, Whitney says : “Our rendering has at least concinnity — unless, indeed, in a text of this character, that be an argument against Its acceptance ” The remark is just; but one docs not wonder that its author has been called dcr grossc Skeptiker dcr Sptacinvisscnschaft That ^ Perhaps the corruption is yet deeper seated, and covers. an onginal nasi nesr I'lrjan xcviii Geiieral Introduction^ Part /. .* by the Editor his skepticism grew with the progress ot his work is clear from a com- parison of the unrevised with the revised forms (cf p xxvii) of the early books. Thus at vi 57. 2, as a rendering of jalasdy his manuscript at first read ‘ healer ’ ; but on the revision he has crossed this out and put the Vedic word untranslated in its stead. With his skepticism, his desire for rigid literalness seems to have increased At 11 33 5, the first draft trans- lates prdpada very suitably by ‘ fore parts of the feet ’ , but the second renders it by * front feet ’ Similarly, at vi. 42 3, there is no reasonable doubt that pdrsnya prdpadeiia ca means [I trample] ‘ with heel and with toe ’ (cf viil 6 15; vi 24 2) ; but again he renders by ‘ front foot ’ At in. 157, his prior draft reads * watch over our life ’ : ‘ life ’ is an unim- peachable equivalent of ‘vital spirits’ ox prdnds , but the author has changed it to ‘breaths’ in the second draft His presumable motive, a wish to leave all in the least degree doubtful interpretation to his successors, we can understand , but we cannot deny that he sometimes goes out of his way to make his version wooden Thus he renders bhr^ when used of skins or amulets (viii. 6 1 1 , $. 13) by ‘ bear ’ instead of ‘wear’ At iv 21 i, he speaks of cows as ‘milking for Indra many dawns,’ although ,‘ full many a morning yielding milk for Indra’ can hardly be called too free Cl his apt version of dttardm-nitarain sdmdm abxii i. 33, ‘from one year to another,’ with that given at in 10 i y 17.4, ‘each further summer’ In a charm to r^d the grain of danger, vi 50. I d, ‘ make fearlessness for the gram ' is needlessly inept It is easy for Sanskritists, but not for others, to see that ‘ heroism ’ (vityd), as used of an herb at xix. 34 8, means its ‘virtue’ (and so he renders it at xii, I 2); that ‘bodies’ of Ag^i at xix 3 2 are his ‘forms’ (pvds or ghords ) ; and so on ; but to others, such versions will hardly convey the intended meaning The fact that svasiibhiSy in the familiar refrain of the Vasisthas, is a plural, hardly justifies the infelicity of using such a plural^ as ‘well-beings’ to render it at iii 16 7; and some will say the like of ‘ wealfulnesses ’ (iv. 13 5), ‘wealths,’ and ‘marrows’ It lies entirely beyond the province of the editor to make alterations in matters of this kind It is perhaps to be regretted that these infelici- ties, which do not really go below the -surface of the work, are the very things that are the most stnking for persons who examine the book casu- ally and without technical knowledge; but the book is after all primarily for technical study. Poetic elevation and humor. — The places in which the AV rises to any elevation of poetic thought or diction are few indeed Some of the funeral verses come as near it as any (among them, notably, xv’in 2 5®) » and some of the philosophic verses (especially of x 8 under Deussen s sympathetic treatment) have an interest which is not mean The motive 12. Whitiiey s Trdnslatioii xcix of xix. 47 is an exceptionally coherent and pleasing one I presume that the idea of sending the fever as a choice present to one’s neighbors (v 22. 14) IS intended to be jocose. Witchcraft and healing are serious businesses If there is anything else of jocular tone in this extensive text, I do not remember that any one has recognized and noted it The gravity of Whitney’s long labor is hardly relieved by a gleam of humor save in his introduction to li. 30 and his notes to vi 16. 4 and 67. 2 and X 8. 27, and the two cited at p. xcvii, line 4 from end, and p. xciv, 1. 23. 13. Abbreviations and Signs explained General scope of the fist. — The following list is intended not only to explain all the downright or most arbitrary abbreviations used in this work, but also to explain m the shortest feasible way all such abbreviated designations of books and articles' as are more or less arbitrary. The former generally consist of a single initial letter or group of such letters ; the latter, of an author’s name or of the abbreviated title of a work. The downright abbreviations. — These are for the most part identical with those used by Whitney in his Grammar and given and explained by him on p XXVI of that work : thus AA = Aitareya-Aranyaka. — Whit- ney’s omission of the macron proper to the A in AA , AB , ACS , AGS., BAU , and TA was doubtless motived by a purely mechanical considera- tion, the extreme fragility of the macron over a capital A, that he has not omitted it in Apast or Ap is a pardonable inconsistency — The sigla codi- cum are explained at p cix, and only such of them are included here as have noore than one meaning : thus, W = Wilson codex and also = Whitney Abbreviated designations of books and articles. — For these the list is intended to give amply sufficient and clear explanations, without follow- ing strictly any set of rules of bibliographers. In the choice of the des- ignations, brevity and unambiguousness have been had chiefly in mind — An author’s name, without further indication of title, is often used arbi- trarily to mean his most frequently cited work Thus « Weber” means Weber’s hidische Studien With like arbitrariness are used the names of Bloomfield, Caland, Florenz, Griffith, Gnil, Henry, Ludwig, Muir, Winternitz, and Zimmer : cf the list — Where two coordinate reference- numbers, separated by a comma, are given (as in the case of Bloomfield, Grill, and Henry), the first refers to the page of the translation, and the second to the page of the commentary Of similar numbers, separated by “or” (as on p. 286), the first refers to the original pagination, and the second to the pagination of the reprint ^ ^ Here let me protest against the much worse than useless custom of giving a new pagina non or a 'double pagination to separate repnnts If an author in citing a reprinted article does c Gemral Introduchmi^ Part /. .* hv tJte Editor Explanation of arbitrary signs. — The following signs (and letters) are used in the body of this work more or less arbitranly. Parentheses are used in the translation to enclose the Sanskrit original of any given English word (see above, p xx), such indications being often most acceptable to the professional student. For numerous instances, see xii. i, where the added bhfimi or prtinvi (both are added in vs. 7) shows which of these words is meant by the English earth. They are also used to enclose an indication of the gender (m. f. n ) or number (du. pi ) of a Vedic word whose gender or number cannot otherwise be shown by the version. Square brackets are employed to enclose some of the words inserted in the translation for v/hich there is no express equivalent in the original. Ell-brackets, or square brackets minus the upper horizontal stroke (thus : [_ J ), were devised by the editor to mark as portions of this work for which Whitney is not responsible such additions or changes as were made by the editor (cf. p xxviii, end) These types were devised partly because the usual parentheses and brackets were already employed for other purposes, and partly because they readily suggest the letter ell, the initial of the editor’s name. Hand. — In order to avoid the expense of alterations in the electro- plates, all considerable additions and corrections have been put together on pages 1045-46, and reference is made to them in the proper places by means of a hand pointing to the page concerned (thus, at p. 327, line 1 1 : See p. 1045) The small circle (thus : o ) represents the avagtaha or division-mark of the pada-toyX’s,. This use of the circle is common in the mss (as explained at p cxxii) and has been followed m the Index Vcrbomnt (seep 4) The Italic colon (/) is employed as equivalent of the vertical stroke used m nagan to separate individual words or padas. Both circle and colon are used in the note to vi. 131. 3 I regard both the circle and the colon as extremely ill adapted for the uses here explained. The letters a, b, c, d, e, f, etc., when set, as here, in Clarendon type, are intended to designate the successive padas of a Vedic stanza or vers*. Alphabetic list of abbreviations. — The dov,Tiright abbreviations and the abbreviated designations of books and articles follow here, all in a single alphabetically arranged list. not give each reference thereto in duplicate, or if his reader does not have at hand both the original and the rcpnnt {and either of these cases is exceptional), the seeterof a otation is sure to be baffled m a-largc proportion of the instances concerned. It is anuzing that any author or editor can be so heedless as to tolerate this evQ practice. 13 * Abbreviations and Signs explained ci AA. - Aitareya-Aranyaka, Ed Bibl Ind. 1876. AB s= Aitareya-Brahmana* Ed. Th Auf- recht Bonn. 1879 Abh = Abb andl ungen A^S. = Agvalayana- (Jrauta- Sutra, Ed Bibl Ind 1874 In the ed , the 1 2 adhyiyas of the •work are divided into two Hexads {satkas), a Prior and a Latter, and the numbenng of those of the Latter begins anew with i In Whitney’s citations, the numbers run from 1 to xlL thus (in his note to iv 39 9) A^S II li 14 4 IS ated as vui, 14 4 AGS, = A^valayana-Grhya-Sutra. Ed F Stender in Sanskrit and German Leipzig. 1864-5. Ed also m Bibl Ind. i86g AJP. = American Journal of Philology. Ed B L Gildersleeve. Baltimore. 1880- Ak = Akademie. Araer = American Anukr. = Anukraraanl nr, sometimes the author of it ApQS or Ap ^ Apastamba-(^rauta-Sutra. Ed R. Gdrbe in Bibl Ind. 1882- 1902. 3 vol’s. ApGS. = Apastambrya-Grhya-Sutra. Ed. M. Wintemitz. Vienna. 1887 APr. = Atharva-Veda Prati9akhya. Ed D Whitney in JAOS (vii 333- 615) 1862 Text translation, and elaborate notes Aufrecht Das XV Buch des AV Text translation, and notes Ind Stud. 1. 1 21-140 1849 See below, p 769 AV = Atharva-Veda. AV = also Athar- va-Veda-Samhit^" "Ed. by R. Roth and W. D. Whitney Berlm 1855-6 Ed. also by Shankar Pandurang Pandit Bombay. i895-,8 4 vol’s. -av. = -avasana . see explanation following In the excerpts from the Anukr., the Sanskrit eka-, dvt~, trj~, etc, constantly recumng m composition with avasSna and poda^ are abbreviated by the Arabic nu- merals I, 2, 3, etc Thus, at p 727, the excerpt ^-cv 6 -p atyasU may ^ read as t>y’*x>asdHd iase>adS 'tyadth B = Brahmana BAU = Brhad-Aranyaka-Upanisad Ed Otto Bohthngk Leipzig 1889 Other ed’s Calc , Bo , Poona Baudhayana = Baudhayana-Dharma-Qas- tra Ed E Hultzsch Leipzig 1884 Bergaignp see Rel Vdd Bergai^ne-Henry, Manuel = Manuel pour dtudier le Sanscrit vddique By A. Bergaigne and V Henry Pans 1890. Bibl Ind = Bibliotheca Indica, as desig- nation of the collection of texts and translations published by the Asiatic Society of Bengal m Calcutta Bl. = Bloomfield Bloomfield (without further designation of title) = Hymns of the AV , together with extracts from the ntual books and the commentanes, translated by Mau- nce Bloomfield Oxford 1897. This book is vol xlii of SBE. In this work Bl sums up a very large part, if not all, of his former “ Contnbu- tions ” to the exegesis of this Veda, which he had published in AJP (■vu,, xn, xu., xvu ), JAOS (xuu, XV , XVI. — PAOS. included), ZDMG (idviu ) The“Contn- butions " are ated by the abbreviated des- ignations given) of the penodicals concerned Bloomfield, Atharvaveda= his part, so en- titled, of the Grundriss 1899. Bo = Bombay. BR = Bohthngk and Roth’s Sanskrit- Worterbuch Pubhshed by the Impe- rial Russian Academy of Sciences St Petersburg. 1852-1875. Seven vol’s Often called the (Major) (St ) Peters- burg Lexicon Cf OB Caland (without further indication of title) = Altmdisches Zauberritual Probe einer Uebersetzung der wichtigsten Theile des Kau^ika-Sutra (kandikJs 7- 52) By W. Caland. Amsterdam 1900 From the Verhandelingen der Konmkhjke Ak van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam. Deel III No 2 Caland, Todtengebrauche = Die Allindi- schen Todten- und Bestattungsgebrau- che. Amsterdam 1896. Seep 813. General Introd^lctl 07 l^ Part /. .* by tJie Pditor • • ai Calana, Totenverelirung = Ueber Toten- verehrung bei emigen der Indo-Ger- maniscben V olker Amsterdam 1888 Caland, Pitrmedha-Sutras = The Pitrme- dha-Sutras of Baudhayana, Hiranyake- gin, Gautama. Leipzig. 1896 Calc = Calcutta or Calcutta edition. = ^atapatha - Braimana. Ed A Weber. Berlin 1855 = ^aiikha^yana- ^rauta-Sutra Ed A. Hillebrandt BibL Ind. 1888. QGS = ^ahkbayana-Grhya-Sutra. Ed. H Oldenberg in Ind Stud (xv 1-166) 1878 Skt and German ChU. = Chandogya-Upamsad Ed O. Bohtlingk Leipzig 1889 Skt. and German. Ed also in Bihl. Ind , Bo , and Poona. CoUatiou-Book = manuscript volumes con- taining Whitney’s fundamental tran- script of the AV text and his collations, etc For details, see p cxvu comm = the commentary on AV (as- cribed to Sayana and published in the Bombay ed) , or, the author thereof Dag. Kar =: Daga Karmani, a paddhati to certain parts of the Kaug. See Bl’s introduction, p xiv Delbruck. Altindische Syntax. Halle. 1888 Denkschr = DeuKschnften Deussen, Geschichte = Allgemeine Ge- schichte der Philosophic mit besonderer Berucksichtigung der Religionen By Paul Deussen. Leipzig The first vol. (part I, 1894 part 2, 1899) treats of the philosophy of the Veda and of the Upanisads Deussen, Upanishads = Sechzig Upani- shad’s des Veda aus dem Sanskrit ubersetzt und mit Einlcitungen und Anmerkungen \ crsehen. Leipzig 1897 Dhanvantan = uhanvantarlja- Nighantu Some references are to the Poona ed ; Roth’s references are, I presume, to his tnmscnpt described bj Garbe, Vcrzcichniss der (Tubingcr) Indischcn Handschnften, No 230. ^ au = dual ed = edition (of) or editor or edited by or in. et al = et alibi f or fern = feminine. Festgruss an Bohtlingk = Festgruss an Otto von Bohtlingk zum Doktor-Jubi- laum, 3 Februar 1888, \on semen Freunden Stuttgart 1888 Festgruss an Roth = Festgruss an Rudolf von Roth zum Doktor-Jubilaum, 24. August 1893, von seinen Freunden und Schulem Stuttgart 1893 Florenz = his German translation of AV. VI 1-50, with comment, m vol xu of Bezzenberger’s Beitrage Gottmgen. 1887. See below, p 281. GB = Gopatha-Brahmana. Ed BibL Ind 1872 Geldner : see Stthenzig Ludzr and Ved. Stud Ges = Gesellschaft GGA. = Gottingische Gelehrte Anzeigen GGS = Gobhila-Grhya-Sutra Ed Fned- rich Knauer. Leipzig 1885 Text, transk, and comment in 2 parts Grammar or (Skt) Gram or Gr. = Whit- ney’s Sanskrit Grammar, 2d ed Leip- zig and Boston. 1889 There is a 3d ed (1896), which is essentiallv a re- pnnt of the 2d Grassmann = Rig-Veda. Uebersetzt etc. Leipzig 1876—7. 2\ol’s Gnfnth = The hymns of the AV., trans- lated, with a popular commentary By RalphT. H Gnffith Benares and Lon- don. 1895-6 2vol’s CLp xc%, above. Grill = Hundert Lieder des AV By Julius Gnll. 2d ed Stuttgart 1S88 Trans- lation and comment Grohmann = Medicinisches aus dem AV , mit besonderem Bezug auf dcnTakman In Ind. Stud (ix. 381-423) 1865 Grundnss = Grundnss der Indo-Anschen Philologie und Altcrtumskunde. Be- grundet von Georg Buhlcr. Fortgesetzt von F Kielhorn Slrassburg 1S96-. Gurupujakaumudl = Fes'gabe zum funf- zigjahrigcn Doclorjubilaum, Albrecht 13 . Abbreviations and Signs explained ciii Weber dargebracbt von seinen Freun- den und Schulem Leipzig. 1896. h. = hymn or hymns Hala’s Saptagataka • reference is made to A Weber’s treatise thereon (Leipzig 1870) and to his edition thereof (Leip- zig. 1881)^ Hardy = Die Vedisch - brahmanische Pe- riode der Religion des alten Indiens By Edmund Hardy Munster in West- phalia 1893 Henry (without further indication of title) = Victor Henry’s French translation of books vii -xiii of the AV , with com- mentary It appeared in 4 vol’s (Pans, Maisonneuve) as follows book xiii., 1891 ; book vii , 1892 , books viii -ix , 1894, books x-xii, i8g6 For pre- cise titles, see below, pages 388, 471, ^ 562, 708 HGS = Hiranyake(ji-Grh)ra-Sutra. Ed J Kirste Vienna 1889 Hillebrandt, Veda-Chrestomathie Berlin 1885 Hillebrandt, Ved Myth = his Vedische Mjthologie, Breslau 1891-1902 Hillebrandt, Ritual-litteratur = his part of the Grundnss 1897. IF = Indogermanische Forschungen Ed. by Brugmann and Streitberg Strass- burg 1 892- IFA = Anzeiger fur Indogermanische Sprach- und Altertumskunde “ Bex- hlalt” to IF Index Verborura = Whitney’s Index Ver- bonim to the published Text of the A.V Issued as JAOS , vol xii New Haven, Conn. 1881 Ind Streifen = A Weber’s Indische Streifen Berlin and Leipzig 1868 1S69 ^879 3 vol’s fnd Stud = Indische Studien. Ed AI- ^'rccht Weber Volume 1 (Berlin 1S49- 50) to volume xviu (Leipzig. 1S9S9 = Journal Asiatique Publid par la Socidtd Asiatique Parts 1S22- Cttcd by senes, vol , and page jAOS = Journal of the Amencan Oriental Societ} New'Ha\cn Conn 1843- JB. = Jaiminlya-Brahmana Cited from Whitney’s transcript, described by him at JAOS xi , p. cxliv, = PAOS. for May, 1883 JR AS. = Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. London i 834- JUB = Jaiminiya- Upanisad - Brahmana, Ed H Oertel in JAOS (xvi 79-260) . 1896 (presented, 1893), Text, transl, notes K = Kathaka , or^ someitmes the codex K. Von Schroeder’s ed of book i of the Kathaka appeared in Leipzig, 1900 Kap = Kapisthala-Samhita KathaB = Katha-Brahmana see below, p 903. IT 2. Katha-hss = Die Tubinger Katha-Hand- schriften und ihre Beziehung zum TA. By L von Schroeder Sb der k. Ak. der Wiss in Wien. Vol 137 Vienna 1S98 Kaug = The Kaugika-Sutra of the AV. With extracts from the commentanes of Danla and Kegava Ed Maurice Bloomfield. Issued as vol xiv of JAOS 1 890 F or concordance of two methods of Citing this text, see p 1012 KB = KausTtaki-Brahmana Ed B Lind- ner Jena 1S87 KBU. = Kausitaki- Brahmana -Upanisad Ed E B Cowell Bibl Ind 1861 Text and translation KQS = Katyayana-Qrauta-Sutra Ed A. Weber Berlin 1859 Keg = Kegava or his scholia on Kaug See Bl’s introd , p xvi Kuhn’s Pah-gram = Beitrage zur Pah- grammatik von Ernst W A Kuhn Berlin 1875 KZ =Zcitschnftfurvergleichende Sprach- forschung begrundet \ on Th Aufrecht und A Kuhn Berlin (Now Gutersloh ) 1851- Lanman, Noun-Inflection = Noun - Inflec- tion m the Veda By C K Lanman In JAOS (X 325-601) iSSo Lanman,(Skt) Reader = Sanskrit Rcade*-, with Vocabulary and Notes B\ C R Lanman Boston iSSS CIV Gemral Introdtiction^ Part I. : by the Editor L^S. = Latyayana - ^rauta - Sutra. Ed. BibI Ind 1872. Ludwig (without further inoicanon of title) = vol. iii. of bis Der Rigveda in 6 vol’s Prag 1876^8 Vol’s L-u. contain the translation* of the RV., and iv-v. contain the comment- Vol 111. (1878) contains many translations from AV. and is entitled Die Mantra-ht- teratur und das alte Indien als Emleitung znr Ueb des RV. — Where reference to the transL of the RV. equivalent (in vol L or iL) of an AV. passage is intended, that fact IS made dear (as at p 118 top, 113, 248, etc.). Ludwig, Kritik des RV.-textes : see p 860. m = masculine, Macdonell, Ved. Mythol. = his Vedic My- thology in the Grundriss 1897. MB = Mantra- Brahmana (of the SV.) Cited from ed in periodical called Usha. Calcutta. 1891. MBh. = Maha-Bharata, Citations refer to Bo ed (or ed’s), or to both Bo and Calc. ed’s. M^m Soc. Ling = Mdmoires de la Sociftd de linguistique de Paris MGS. = Manava-Grhya- Sutra, Ed, F. Knauer. St. Petersburg. 1897. MP.= Mantra-Patha • or, the Prayer Book of the Apastambins. Ed. M. Winter- nitz, Oxford. 1897. Part of the ma- terial of MP. had already been given in the work cited below undet Winter- nitz, Hochzeitsrtiuell, -as explained also bdow, p. 738 MS = Maitrayanl-Samhita. Ed. L. von Schroeder, Leipzig. 1881-6 Muir (without further mdication of title) = OST , which see. Muir, Metrical Translations from Sanskrit Writers London. 1879 N = North, n. = note ; or, sometimes neuter. Naigeya-kan^ of SV. * see below, under SV. Naks iirNaks K =Nak5atra-Kalpa, See Bl’s introd- to Kaug., p xix. Noun-Inflection ; see above, unaer Lan- man. O and L S = Onental and Linguistic Studies By W. D. Whitney New York 1873 1874 2 vol’s OB = Otto Bohthngk’s Sansknt-Worter- buch in kurzerer Fassung St Peters- burg 1879-89 Seven vol’s Often called the Minor (St) Petersburg Lexicon Cf BR. Oldenberg, Die Hymnen des RV. Band I Metrische uhd textgeschichthche Pro- legomena. Berlin. 1888 Oldenberg, Die Religion des Veda. Ber- lin 1894- Omina und Portenta : see under Weber. OST. = Original Sanskrit Texts Trans- lated by John Muir. London, 1868- 73 5 vol’s. p = pada-patha, -p (as in 3-p , 4-p ) = p 5 da (in the sense of subdivision of a stanza)* see expla- nation above, under -av. Paipp = Paippalada or Kashmirian AV. For details concerning the collation and its sources and the birch-bark original and the facsimile, see above, pages bcxx ff Pan = Panini’s Grammar • • Pandit, Shankar Pandurang: see below, under SPP. PAOS = Proceedings of the American Oriental Society They were formerly issued (with pagina- tion in Roman numerals to distinguish them from the Journal proper) as-appen- Hit-pc to be bound up"^th the volumes of the Journal, but they were also issued m separate pamphlets as Proceedings for such and such a month and year The citations below are so given that they can. readily be found in either issue. Parig, = AV. Parigista : cf. Bl’s introd. to ICaug., p. XIX. PB = Paficavinga-Br^mana or T^dya- Maha-brahmana, Ed. Bibh Ind. 1 870— 74. 2 vol's, Peterson, Hymns from the RV. Ed with Sayana’s comm., notes, and a transl by Peter Peterson. Bombay. 1888 PeL Lex. = the Major St Petersburg Lexi- con See BR. cv 13. Abbreviations and Stg-ns explained Pet. Lexx = the two St Petersburg Lexi- cons, Major and Minor See BR and OB PCS. = Paraskara-Grhya-Sutra Ed A F Stenzler Leipzig. 1876 1878 Skt and German Pischel, Gram der Prakrit-sprachen — his part, so entitled, of the Grundriss. 1900. Pischel, Ved Stud . see below, under Ved. Stud. p m = pnma manu Poona ed = ed. of the Ananda-A^rama Senes Ppp = Paippalada AV see above, under Paipp Prat or Pr = Prati9akhya of the AV . see above, under APr. Proc = Proceedings R = Roth , <7/*, sometimes the codex R Rajan. = Rajanighantu Cited no* doubt from Roth’s own ms , now Tubingen ms 176 There is a Poona ed Rel V^d = Abel Bergaigne’s La Rehgioir vddique d’apr^s les h)rmnes du RV. Pans 1878-83. 3 vol’s Bloomfield made an Index of RV. passages there- in treated Pans 1897. Rev. = Review Roth, Zur Litteratur und Geschichte des Weda. Stuttgart 1846 Roth, Ueber den Atharva Veda. Tubin- gen 1856 Roth, Der Atharvaveda in Kaschmir. Tubingen 1875 Roth, Ueber gewisse Kurzungen des Wortendes im Veda. Verhandlungen des VII. Intemationalen Onentalisten- Congresses Vienna. 1887. Roxburgh, Flora Indica: the citations by vol and page refer to Carey’s ed of 1832 ; but these can easily be found in the margin of the Calc repnnt of 1874. RPr. or RV. Prat. = RV. Pratigakhya. Ed Max Muller. Leipzig 1869 Also W A Regnier m JA = Rig-Vcda or Rig-Veda-Samhita Ed, Th Aufrecht Also by Max MuUer. RW = Roth and Whitney s = samhita-patha. Sachsische Ber. = Benchte der konml. O Sathsischen Ges der Wiss SB = Sadvin9a-Brahmana Cited pre- sumably from ed of JIbananda Vidya- sagara. Calc 1881 Ed of part by K Klemm Gutersloh 1894 Sb = Sitzungsbenchte Those of the Ber- lin Ak are usually meant. SBE = Sacred Books of the East Tfansl. by various Oriental Scholars and ed by F Max Muller Oxford ^879- 1904 49 vol’s Scherman, Philosophische Hymnen = Phil Hymnen aus der RV - und AV -Sam- hita verglichen mit den Philosophemen der alteren Upanishad’s. Strassburg 1887 schol = scholia of Darila or of Ke^ava or of both, on Kau9 see Bl’s introd , p xi and p xvi von Schroeder see above, Katha-hss , and below, Zwei Hss Siebenzig Lieder des RV Uebersetzt von Karl Geldner und Adolf Kaegi. MitBeitragenvonR Roth. Tubingen. 187s s m = secunda manu Speyer, Vedische Syntax = his part of the Grundnss, entitled Vedische und San- skrit Syntax 1896 SPP. = Shankar Pandurang Pandit as editor of the Bombay edition of ttie AV It IS entitled Atharvavedasamhita with the Commentary of Sayan&caiya 1895-8. 4 vol’s Suiya - Siddhanta = Translation of the Surya-Siddhanta, a Text-book of Hindu Astronomy, with Notes, etc In JAOS (vi 141-498) 1860 SV = Die Hymnen des S 5 ma-Veda Ed. Th. Benfey. Leipzig 1848 Text, transl , glossary The verses of the Prior Srctka are cited, by the numbers in natural sequence, as i 1 to i 585 , siniilarly, those of the Latter Sraka, as it I to u 1225 — The \erse5 of thcNaigeya supplement to the Prior Srrska CVl General Introduction^ Part /. . by the Editor are cited as SV i 586 to 1 641, and as edited by S Goldschmidt in the Monats- bencht der k Ak der Wiss zu Berlin, session of Apr 23, 186S Cf note to AV. IV 36 1 and to xiu. 2 23 TA = Taittirlya - Aranyaka. Ed. Bibl Ind 1872 There is also a Poona ed TB = Taittirlya - Brahmana Ed Bibl Ind 1859-? There is also a Poona ed TPr. = Taittirlya-Pratigakhya. Ed W D Whitney. In JAOS (ix. 1-469) 1871 Trans = Transactions TS = Taittirlya-Samhita Ed A Weber In Ind Stud,vol’sxi andxii Leipzig. 1871-2 There is also a Poona ed. Vait = Vaitana-Sutra. Ed R Garbe. London 1878 German transl by him Strassburg 1878. Ved Stud = Vedische Studien Von R Pischel und K F Geldner Stuttgart 3 vol’s 1889 1897 igoi. VPr = Vajasaneyi-Pratigakhya Ed A Weber.. In Ind Stud (iv) 1857-8 Skt and German VS = Vajasaneyi-Sarahita Ed. A Weber Berlin 1852 vs (never v , which is used as meaning 5) = verse vss = verses cf , for exam- ple, line 2 of note to iv 12 i. W = Whitney , or^ sometimes the codex W Weber (without further indication of title) = Weber’s Indische Studien. see above, Ind Stud Weber, Omina und Portenta in Abh der k Ak der Wiss for 1858 Berlm 1859 Weber, Rajasuya = Ueber die Kbnigs- weihe, den Rajasuya in Abh der k Ak der WisS. for 1893 Berlin 1893 Weber, Sb • for the meaning in book xviiL, see below, p 813 Weber, Vajapeya = Ueber den Vajapeya m Sb der k Ak. der Wiss for 1892, pages 765-813 Berlm 1892 Weber, Vedische Beitrage Under this title was issued a senes of g articles in Sb der k Ak der Wiss zu Berlin, from 1894 to igoi They are usually cited by Sb and the date For the AV , the most important is no 4 (1895, concluded 1896), treating book xviii , as explained below, p 813 Weber’s Translations of books i-v and xiv and xviii for these, see p. cvii Wh or Whitney, Grammar see above, imder Grammar Whitney, Index Verborum see above, under Index Whitney, O and L S see above, under O and L S Whitney, Roots = The Roots, Verb-forms, and primary Derivatives of the San- skrit Language Leipzig 1885 Whitney’s other contributions relating to the AV for some of these, see Preface, pages xxiii, XXV, xxvi Winternitz or (m book xiv cf below, p. 738) simply Wmt = his Hochzeits- rituell in the Denkschnften der k Ak. der Wiss , vol xl Vienna 1892 Wiss = Wissenschaften WZKM = Wiener Zeitschnft fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes Vienna 1887- ZDMG = Zeitschnft der Deutschen Mor- genlandischen Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847- Zimmer (without further indication of title) = his Altmdisches Leben Berlin 1 879 Zwei Hss = Zwei Handschnften der k k Hofbibliothek in Wien mit Fragmen- ten des Kathaka By von Schroedcr m Sb der k Ak der Wiss for 1895 (38 pages) Vol cxxxni Vienna 1S96 14. Tabular View of Translations and Native Comment Previous translations. — Native commentary. — It may prove useful to have, in convenient tabular form, a list of the most important or compre- hensive previous translations, with dates , and also' a list of those parts of 14 . Tabular View of Translations and Native Coin?7ze7it cvii the text upon which the native commentary nas been published in the Bom- bay edition The dates are taken from the title-pages of the volumes con- cerned , the dates of the prefaces, or of the parts of the volumes concerned, are sometimes considerably earlier For bibliographical details, see the List, pages ci-cvi. The braces at the right show which of SPP’s four volumes contains the text, or the text with comment, of any given book I Translation of the whole text Gnffith, 1895, 1896 see p cu. n Translations of a mass of selected hymns Ludwig, 1878 see p civ Gnll, 1888 see p cu ni b. Books with comment of ** Sayapa." SPP's voL I. Bloomfield, 1897 see p ci ni. a Translations of single books. Book 1 Weber, Indische Studien, iv 1858 Book 1 , entire u f( “ “ xiu 1873 Book u , entire nu cr " “ XVU 1885 Book m , entire. to iv. i( “ “ xvm 1898 Book iv , entire. V i< it Vl 4 1-50 Florenz (see p 281) 00 00 Book VI , entire. vu Henry, Le livre vu 1892. Book vii , entire vm 850 Aufrecht, book xv 1858 Weber, book 1 1862 Weber, book xiv 1872 Muir, select , OST. v *873 Weber, 2d ed , book u *878 Ludwig, selections *879 Zimmer, selections 1885 Weber, book iu 1887 Scherman, selections 1887 Florenz, book vi 1-50 188S Gnll,2ded ,100 hymns. 1891 Henry, book xiii 1892 Henry, book vn 1894 Deussen,Geschichtc,i i Henry, books viii -ix 1895 SPP’s text, vol’s 1 -u 1895 Griffith, books 1 -IX Weber, book x\iii 1-2 1S96 Weber, book xiiii 3-4 Gnffith, books x -xx Ileniy, books x-xiu 1897 Bloomfield, selections 1S9S Weber, books n -v SPP’s text, vol’s ui-iv GENERAL INTRODUCTION, PART 11. ELABORATED BY THE EDITOR, IN LARGE PART FROM WHITNEY’S MATERIAL General Premises (_Contente of this Part. — While Part I. contains much that might be pre- sented m a preface, the contents of Part II are more strictly appropriate for an introduction. The contents of Part I. are briefly rehearsed at p Ixiii ; and the contents of both Parts, I. and II , are given with more detail and in synoptic form at pages x— xv, which see As was the case with the ten text-critical elements of the commentary m Part I , the subject-matter of Part II. also may be put under ten headings as follows : 1 Descnption of the manuscripts 2 Their opening stanza. 3 Whitney’s CoUation-Book 4. Repeated verses in the mss 5* Refrains and the like in the mss 6 Accentuation-marks in the mss. 7. Orthographic method of Berhn text. 8 Metncal form of the Atharvan samhita 9. Divisions of the text lo. Its extent and structure J LAuthorship of this Part. — While Part I is wholly from the hand of the editor, Part II is elaborated in large measure from material left by Whitney. Chapters 2 and 3, however,' although written by the editor, are incorporated into this Part, because the most fit place for them is here, just after chapter i. In the rewritten portions of the other chap- ters, It has not been attempted thoroughly to separate the author’s part from the editor’s; but paragraphs which are entirely by the editor are enclosed in ell-brackets, L J The whole matter has been carefully stated hy me in the preface, at pages xxix-xxx, and these the reader is requested to consult J I. Description of the Manuscripts used by Whitney LThe brief designations of his manuscripts (sigla codicum). — The sigla O* and L, seem to be arbitrary. It is helpful to note thaf Whitney appar- ently intended that all the rest should be suggestive Thus B , P , R , T , nnd D. are the initials respectively of Berlin, Pans, Roth, Tanjore, and Deccan ; small p of course means />a//a-text , and small s means saviJstin- tsxt , and K was the first letter of Bikaner not previously empio} ed as cue cx General Introduction^ Part II. : in part by iVhitney siglum M and W, which designate the mss of the Mill collection and Wilson collection of the Bodleian, were chosen as being initials of Mill ' and Wilson. The letters E I H , as designating the mss of the Library of the India Office in London, were plainly meant to suggest the name East India House, the designation of the London establishment of the Hon East India Company previous to 1858 Observe that Whitney’s “I ” was first used by him to designate E I H ms No 2142 (Eggeling’s No 234), but only until he discovered that that ms was a mere copy of the Poller ms in the Bntish Museum , after that time Whitney collated the Polier original, retaining for it, however, the designation I ” The sigla of the mss used by Whitney before publication are essentially the same as those given by him at the end of his Introductory Note to the AV Pr., p 338, which see J LSynoptic table of the manuscripts used by Whitney. — It will be conven- ient to have, in addition to Whitney’s description of his mss , a synoptic table of them, cast in such a form that the reader may easily see ]ust what ones were available for any given book The following table is essentially the same as one which Whitney made for his own use J SAMHITA-MANUSCRIPTS PADA-^LANUSCRIPTS ~ — ■— / ' " * "East Tan. Bik- “Dec- Berlm Pans Oxford India House ” Kaug Roth jore aner Berlin Haug can” Bikaner hlill A ^ ^ — / ..A. N Wilson Mus 1 P M W E I H 0 R T K Bp® Bp 2® Op D Kp 11 P M w E I H 0 R T K. Bp ®» Op D Kp lU P M w E I H 0 R T K Bp ® Op D Kp IV P M w E I H 0 R. T K Bp ® Op D Kp V P M w E I H 0 R T K Bp ® Bp^* D Kp M P M w E. I H 0 R T K Bp ® Bp 2*” D . Kp Vll P » M ” w E I 0 R T K Bp ® Bp 2*" D Kp vm P « M ” w E I 0 R T K Bp ® Bps*" D Kp IX P " M ” w E. I 0 R T K Bp ® Bps*" D Kp X P " M ” w E I 0 R. T K Bp^ D Kp XI B P M w E I 0 R T K Bp ^ D Kp XU B P M w E I. 0 R T K Bp« D Kp xuu B P M w E I 0 R T K Bp^ D Kp XIV. B P IL w E I 0 R T K Bp^ D Kp XV B P M w E I 0 R T K Bpf D Kp xvi. B P M w E I 0 R T K Bp* D Kp x\'iu B P M w E I 0 R T K Bp* D Kp Xl’Ul B P E. I 0 R T K Bp* Op n Kp XIX B P M w E I 0 R T V D L. Kp XX. B P M w E. I 0 R- T K. Bp<^ Bp.se Op D Kp LBerlin manuscripts of the Atharva-Veda. — A tabular view of the vari- ous numberings and designations of the nine Berlin mss , Weber, Nos 331—339, will be found useful and is given here The left-hand column I. Description of tJie Manuscripts used by W/iitncy cxi gives the sigla used by Whitney, but with some marks (a, b, c, ") added for convenience of reference to or from the preceding table The second column shows which books any given ms contains The third gives the numbers of the mss as they stand in Weber’s Catalogue , and the fourth gives the old numbers assigned to those mss when they formed a part of the collection of Sir Robert Chambers The right-hand column shows what book or group of books was transcribed by Whitney from the original ms. named in the same line. Books Weber-No Chambers-No Copied by tVbitney Bp« l-lX 332 8 Books 1 -IV and vi -ix. Bp^ X-XVUl 335 loS Books X.-XV111 Bp XX 336 114 Book XX. Bp 1 331 117 Bp 53' /V 333 109 Book V Bp 53" Xvi-ix. 334 107 Bp5tf XX 337 116 B' XI -XX. 338 ITS Book XIX B" XI -XX 339 120 V Manuscripts used by Whitney before publication of the text. — The fol- lowing descriptions were written out by Whitney in such form as to require almost no changes J ^ Bp. Under this designation are, for convenience’s sake, grouped two Berlin /^rX is designated as above : it is in five parts : i. books i.— v., on European paper, x 3 in., each book separately paged. The date at the end. fake 1 737 (= ^ ® t S 1 5) may be that of the original from which this copy is made It is wntten in a small but neat and clear hand. 2. Books vi — xvii , 8^ X 3M wnt- ten in a good sizeable hand, by a MamnajI, dated samvat 1690 (a.d 1634) ; the paper is in parts badly damped, so as hardly to bold together, and of two leaves in book xii only fragments remain. It makes great use of the virdmat and of v;? as arufsvdra-sign. It numbers the verses only in •uargasy making no account of the hymns {sukias) ;*nor does it notice the prapd:^kaka division. 3. P>ook xviii , 9^ X 5 in ; in a large regular band; dated gake 1735 (a d. 1813). When collated, it was bound in one volume with pada-ms. of L— iii. before it, and sainhitd of xx. after it. 4. Book xix., bound up with i. {scemhiid i.— v.), and in all respects agreeing with it, save that the (copied ?) date is two yearn later ; both are works of the same copyist. 5, Book xx., bound in {as above noted) after 3. The size is 8^^ X 4)^ in., and it is dated fokc 1735 (A.D. iSlt). ■Op. This designates the /o^iz-text of the Haug or Momch manuscripts, as above described. They include books L-iv., xviii., and xx , in three diviBiailB : i. books i— iiL, bound up (as noted above) with the samktid^ text c^Tcvin. and :cx. The books are paged separately, but all wntten by one hand ; dat at the end is cake IJ 33 (a-D. iSi i) ; size 9 X 4^ in- The hand is lar»e and clear, and the text (corrected by the accentuator) very correct. 2. Book fv. : size 8 x .1 in ; date fake 173 ^ 1814b * ■a. Book* *vni sx., 'bound with the preceding, -and of same ^size ; I. DescHptton of iJie Manuscript used by V/hitney cxv separately paged ; date ^ake 1762 (ad. 1840). From 3cx. are omitted the peculiar Atharvan parts, except h)rmii 2. 0 . and Op. were not collated word by word throughout, because use of them was allowed only for the time of a limited stay in Munich. Books XV .-XIX., and the peculiar parts of xx , also the parydya hymns in the pre- ceding books, and the pada-\.t,y±^ were collated thoroughly; in the met- rical parts of vi -xiv. the comparison was made by looldng through the transliterated copy and noting readings on all doubtful points. LThese mss. are described in the Verseichntss der orie?italischen Hand- schnften aus dcm Nachlasse des Professor Dr. Martin Hang tn Muftchen, Munchen, T. Ackermann, 1876. By the siglum O are designated the mss. there numbered 12, 13, and 14; by Op , those numbered 15 and If The dimensions there given differ in part a little from those given by Whitney, It is worth while to report from JAOS x., p. cxviii, W’s criti- cal remark about this materia] : “ all in good and correct manuscripts, made by and for Hindu scholars (not copies by professional scribes for the use of Europeans).”J R. [This is a complete samhitd-ins , belonging at the time ol its collation (1875) to Roth, and now in the Tubingen Universit}'- Library. It is descnbed by Roth, Der Atkarvaveda in Kaschinir, p 6, and by Garbe, in his Verscickmss^ as No. J2, pi’’. It is bound in two volumes, the one containing books i.-x., and the other, books xi -xx. In the colophons to a number of the books (so viii, ix, x, xiv., xix.) is the date t^ahe 1746 (A.d 1824); but at the end of xx is the date samvat ioz6 (k d, 1870). It was bought for Roth from a Brahman m Benares by Dr Koernle, and Roth judged from the name of the scribe, Patuvardhana that it originated m the Deccan. Whitney says (JAOS. x , p cxviu, = PAOS Nov. 1875) that it has special 'kindred with the Haug mss Roth adds that it IS written and corrected throughout with the most extreme care fulness and is far more correct than the AV mss. are v.'oiil to be.J T. l_This also is a complete samhitd-ms , a transcript made from the Tanjore-mss described on p. 12 of A. C. Buinell’s Classified ind-ex to the Sanskrit mss m the palace at Tanjorc and numbered 2526 and 2527. The transcript was sent to Roth by Dr Burnell and is described by Roth and by Garbe in the places just cited under codex R. Books 1.— iv. of the transcript are unaccented ; the rest are accented. According to Burnell, No. 2526 contains books i — xx , is unaccented, and was written about A.D. 1800; and No. 2527 contains books v.— xx, is accented, and was writ- ten A.D 1827 at Benares. I ffnd no note stating the relation of Roth’s transcript to its Tanjore originals : presumably the transcript of the unac- cented books, i.— iv., was taken from the unaccented No. 2526 ; and that of the accented books, v.-xx., from No. 2S27.J cxvi Gemral Introduction^ Part in part by Whitney D. This is a />ada-manuscnpt belonging to the Deccan College at Poona, collated while m Roth’s possession at Tubingen It is unac- cented in book xviii. It is very incorrectly written, and its obvious, errors were left unnoted It gives a pada-text even for book xix , but not for the peculiar parts of xx. L^he Index to the Catalogue of i888- of the Deccan College mss gives only two complete yada-mss of the AV , to wit, the ms listed as III 5 on p 13, and the one listed as XII 82 on p 174. The Catalogue gives as date of the latter sanivat 1720; and as- date of the former, samvat 1741. In the 'Collation-Book, Whitney gives- at the end of book xx the colophon of his D with the dates samvat 1741, ^ke 1606. This agreement in date seems to identify his D with the' ms. Ill 5 That ms is a part of the collection of 1870-71, made by Buhler; it is booked as consisting of 435 pages and as coming from Broach or Bharuch J L. A /(2-gzuapa;. — The 41 cases of rqjetrtioii involve 52 verses. The list of thrai is givmi on p. 3 of the Index Verba-- nwjf (where six. 23. 2a is a mi spr i n ^ and m given with &e places of first occnrrence. The list is r^>eated her^ bnt without the places of first occnrreuo^ which may always be ascertamet^ from the cominentaiy below. It is: iv. 17.3; v, 6. i and 2; 23, ro-rz ; vL 58. 3 ; 84.4; 94.1-2; 95«r-2; ror.3; viL 23, i ; 75, i ; 112.2; YnL3. r8,22; 9.11; 1x11-15; 8-23; io.4» 20,22; X.E.4; 3,5; 5*4<5-47r 4^9; xLiar/; xra.r.4r; 2-38; xrv. 1.23-24; 2-45; xvtiL r.27-28; 3.57; 4.25,43, 45-47, 69; ^13* 5 ; 23.30; 24.4; 27.14-15; sr-4; 5^-5- Fnrther details rfmc^nrrrrg -fee piatika and the adffitfon. — The praSka embraces the first word, or the first two, for even the first three; when oneortwoof themareencKtiesrsa vL94.r ; ror.3; -^^3.22; ix. r. rsJ; but at xtx. 58. 3 the whole first jeda is given with added. Occa- sionally, in, one or another ms^, the repeated verse or group is given in bill : thus ly OJR. in the cases of r ep e ti t io ns in book" ivrn. Both edi- tKJQS ^ve aS the repeated verses in fuIL ^LOctliis topci W&ita«yk£fcoit^t3»gjkne parydya II (verses 8—17) being in this respect treated as if all one verse with subdivisions Lcf p 512 topj Such, abbreviated passages treated by the Anukramanl as if unabbreviated. — The Anukramanl generally treats the omitted matter as if present, that is, it recognizes the true full form of any verse so abbreviated In CXXl 5. Refrains and the hke in the Manuscripts a few instances, however, it does not do so : such instances may be found at XV. 2, where the Anukr. counts 28 instead of 32 or 4 x 8 J2X xv 5 (16 instead of 7 x 3 ) ; at xvi. 5 (10 instead of 6 x 3) , at xvi 8 (33 instead of 108 or 27 x 4) • cf. the discussions at p. 774, ^ 2, p. 772, ^ 3, p 793 end, p. 794 top. Such treatment shows that the text has (as we may express it) become mutilated in consequence of the abbreviations, and it shows how old and how general they have been. — One and another ms , how- ever, occasionally fills out some of the omissions — especially R , which, for example, in viii 10 writes s 6 *d akramat every time when it is a real part of the verse. -Usage of the editions In respect of such abbreviated passages. — Very often SPP. prints in full the abbreviated passages in both samlutd and pada form, thus presenting a great quantity of useless and burdensome repetitions. Our edition takes advantage of the usage of the mss to abbreviate extensively ; but it departs from their usage in so far as always to give full intimation of the omitted portions by initial words and by Signs of omission. In all cases where the mss. show anything peculiar, it is specially pointed out in the notes on the verses. % 6. Marks of Accentuation in the Manuscripts Berlin edition uses the Rig-Veda method of marking accents. — The modes of marking the accent followed in the different mss and parts of mss of the AV are so diverse, that we were fully justified m adopting for our -edition the familiar and sufficient method -of the RV. That method is followed strictly throughout in books i.-v. and xix. of the Haug ms material described above at p. cxiv under O i and 4, but only there, and there possibly only by the last and modem copyist, L^Vhitney notes in the margin that it is followed also m book xviii of O , and in books ^ "ni. and iv of Op , and in part of Bp In this last ms , which is Chambers, 1 17, of book i , thej method of accentuation is at the beginning that of the Rik, but soon passes over to another fashion, precisely hke that of Bp Lsee next saving that horizontal lines are made use of instead of dots T^e method continues so to the end. Bots for lines as"kccent-marks. — The use of round dots instead of lines ss accent-marks is a method that has considerable vogue It is applied i^niformly in the pada-mss at Berlm (except in Bp as just stated) * a dot below the line is the anuddtiatara-^X^n^ in its usual place , then the ^'&n of the enclitic svanta is a dot, usually not above, but within the ^ksara , and the independent svanta is marked either by the latter method or else by a Imejdrawn transversely upward to the right through the syllable. The dots, however, are unknown elsewhere, save in a cxxii Ge^teral hitroducfion^ Part IL : ht part by Whitney large part of E. (from near the end of vi 27 to the end of xix.) and also in large parts of H Marks for independent svarita. — It was perhaps in connection with the use of the dots that the pecnliar ways of marking the independent svarita arose. The simplest way, used only in parts of the mss., is by a line below, somewhat convexed downwards. Or, again, we find just such a line, but run up into and more or less through the aksara, either below or through the middle. [_From this method was probably developed the method of J starting mth a horizontal bit below and carrying it completely throng the aksara upwards and with some slant to the right and ending with a bit of horizontal above. LCf. SPP’s Critical Notice p. 9-J This fully elaborated form is very unusual, and found only in three or four mss. (in part of Bp^ = Ch. 117, in D. and !«, and occasionally in Kp.); |_its shape is ^iproximately that of the long : cf. SPP^s text of n. 14 and my note to iiL i r. 2 J. Horizontal stroke for svarita.. — A frequent method is the use of the atmddttaiara line below, just as in the RV., but coupled with the denota- tion of the encirtic svarita by a horizontal stroke across the body of the ^llabl^ and of the independent svarita hy one of the signs just noted. Bnt even the independent svarita is sometimes denoted hy the same sign as the aiditic snarifa, to wit, hy a dot or a horizontal line in the syllable itself. The last method (mdependeat svarita by horizontal is seen in the old ms. o^ book xx.. Bp.®, dated ajd. 1477, and in S'. The udStta marked ly vertical stroke ahove^ as in the MSitrilyanL — It is a featore peculiar to E. among our AV. mss. that, from the hym- ning of book vL on, it marks lie vd^a sjrHahle by a parpendicular stroke above^* while the enclitic svarita^ as in other mss., has the horizontal stroke in the aksara;- but just before the end of vi 27, both these strokes are chart g ed to dots, as is also the amcdcdtafara-strdke ^ ; while in xx. the accentuator goes hade to strokes again for all three. that in BBT’s A. and E. the ttddUa is marked by a red ink dot over the proper pliable j AcCent-maiks in tie Bombay efithm. — SPP., in his edition, adopts the RV. method, with the sole exception that he uses the fuHy efeborated peculiar J-sign, g i v e n by the small mm ority of the mss.,* for the inde- pendent svarita, ITo ms., I bdieve^ of those used by us, m a ke s this combinatian of methods ; and it m ay safely be edaimed riiat our procedure is truer to the mss., and on that as wdl as on oliar accounts, the preferable one •fSe^ for examjde, his Critical Noticef P- I 4 j- description of Cp.j Use of a ar^. as avagraha-sigir- — As a matter of kindred cimracter, we may mention tbart for the s^n of ava^nzka or dmsron of a vocable into its oomponent parts, a cirde is used in all our j 9 m£r-tezt^ even 6. Marks of A ccentuahmi in the Manuscripts cxxiii of book XX., excepting in the Munich text of xviii. and xx., as stated on p. 4 of the Index Verborum Lit is used also in SPP's />ada-mss. : see his Critical Notice, pages 1 1-14.J This special AV. sign has been imitated in our transliteration in the Index and in the main body of this work Lcf. page cj ; but it may be noted that SPP. employs in his pada-text the sign usual in the RV. 7. Orthographic Method pursued in the Berlin Edition Founded on the manuscripts and the Pratigakhya. — Our method is of course founded primarily upon the usage* of the manuscripts; but that usage we have, within certain limits, controlled and corrected by the teachings of the AV. Prati^akhya That treatise an authority only to a certain point. — The rules of that treatise we have regarded as authority up to a certain point ; but only up to a certain point, and for the reason that in the AVPr , as in the other corresponding treatises, no proper distinction is made between those orthographic rules on the one hand which are universally accepted and observed, and those on the other hand which seem to be whoDy the out- come of arbitrary and artificial theorizing, in particular, the rules of the varna^kratna"^ or dirgJia-pdtha. L^^I Whitney’s notes to AVPr iiu 26 and 32 and,TPr. xiv. i.J Its failure to discriminate between rules of wholly different value. — Thus, on the one hand, we have the rule LAVPr. iii. 27 : see W’ s notej that after a short vowel a final « or « or k is doubled before any initial vowel, a rule familiar and obligatory^ not only in the language of the Vedas but in the classical dialect as well ; while, on the other hand, we have, put quite upon the same plane and in no way marked as being of a wholly different character and value, such a rule as the following: The rule Liii. 31 J that after r or // an immediately following consonant IS doubled ; Las to these duplications, the Pratigakhyas are not in entire accord, Panini is permissive, not mandatory, and usage differs greatly, and the h stands by no means on the same footing as the r : cf. V'^s Grammar, § 228 ; his note to Pr lii. 31 ; and Panini’s record, at viii. 4. 50-51. of the difference of opinion between ^^akatayana and ^akalya.J Another such rule is the prescription that the consonant at the end of a word is doubled, as in irisUtpp, vidyjitt, godhnkk; this is directly con- travened by RPr., VPr., TPr. — Yet another is the prescription that the ^ LFor this chapter, pages cxnu to acxvi, the draft left by ‘Wbilncy was too meagre and nnSc- ished to be printed- I have rewritten and elaborated it, using freely his own statements and ^guagc ^ given in his notes to the PratipLkhyas-J * Cf. p' 832^ Y ^ below. * Nearly all the mss. and SPP. violate it at iL i- 22- cxxiv General Introduction^ Part II.: in part by Whitmy first consonant of a group is doubled, as in aggnth, vrkksah, etc. LSee- W’s notes to these rules, at in 26 and 28 l_“The manuscripts of the AV , so far as known to me, do not, save in very infrequent and entirely sporadic cases, follow any of the rules of the vaniakrama proper, except- ing the one which directs duplication after a r ^ and even in this case, their practice is as irregular as that of the manuscripts of the latet litera- ture.” So Whitney, note to iii. 32 J Items of conformity to the Prati^akhya, and of departure therefrom. — Without including those general euphonic rules the observance of which was a matter of course, we may here state some of the particulars in which the authority of the Prati9akhya has served as our norm Transition-sounds : as m tdn-t-sarvdn — Pr. 11. 9 ordains that between «, n and f, s respectively, k, t be in all cases introduced : the first two thirds of the rule never have an opportunity to make themselves good, as the text offers no instance of a conjunction of n with g or of n with s ; that of final n with initial j, however, is very frequent, and ^he / has always been introduced b}*^ us (save Lby madvertencej in viii 5. 16 and xi. 2 25) — The usage of the mss. is slightly varying exceedingly irregular,” says W in his note to li 9, p. 406, which seej : there is not a case perhaps where some one of them does not make the insertion, and perhaps hardly one in which they all do so without variation Final -n before c- and 3-: as in pagyan janvidni. — Pr. ii 10 and 1 1 pre- scribe the assimilation of -n before a following palatal (i e its conversion- info -ft), namely, before g- (which is then converted by 11 17 into c/i-), and before a sonant, i e before j- (since jh- does not occur) In such cases we have written for the converted -n an anusvara; there can hardly arise an ambiguity f in any of the instances few instances may be given : for i 33. 2* ; 11 25. 4, 5, iv 9 9^ ; 36 9*; v 8 7; 22 14*; vi 50 3 ; viii 2 9*; xii 5 44, for-« f-, 1 19 4*^ , ill II. 5 ; iv 8 3 ; 22 6, 7; xviiL 4 59 The reader may consult the notes to those marked with a star. — SPP seems to allow himself to be governed by his mss , this is a wrong procedure: see notes to vm 29,1 19 4; iv 9 9 J fLBut see xiii I 22 J Final -n before c-; as in ydhg ca — Rule ii 26 virtually ordains the insertion of g Owing to the frequency of the particle ca, the cases are numerous, and the rule is strictly followed in all the Atharvan mss and so of course in our edition. This is not, however, the universal usage of the Rik; cf for example ii. i. 16, ctsvidil ca tdng ca, and see RPr iv 32 Final -n before t-: as in tans ie — The same rule, ii 26, ordains the insertion of s. As in the other Vedas, so in the AV., a j is sometimes inserted and sometimes not , its Pr. (cf li 30) allows and the mss show a variety of usage. Of course, then, each case has been determined on 7. Orthographic Method purstied in the Berlin Edition cxxv the authority of the mss., nor do there occur any instances in which this IS wavering and uncertain LThe matter is fully discussed in W’s note to li 26, and the 67 cases of insertion and the 28 cases of non-insertion are given on p 417 Cf also note to AV. i ii 2 J Final -t before c- : as in asinac charavas, — By the strict letter of rules ii 13 and 17, the f- is converted into ch- and the preceding final -/ is then assimilated, making -cch- In such cases, however, we have always fol- lowed rather the correct theory of the change, since the -t and g- by their union form the compound -ch-, and have written simply -ch-, as being a truer representation of the actual phonetic result The mss , with hardly an exception, do the same. |_The procedure of the edition and of the mss. is, I believe, uniformly similar also in cases like rchdt, gacha, yacha, etc J Abbreviatioii of consonant-groups ; as in pahkti and the like. — By li 20 a non-nasal mute coming in the course of word-formation between a nasal and a non-nasal is dropped : so panti ; chmtam and rtindht instead of chinttam zxvdrunddhi ; etc The mss observe this rule quite consist- ently, although not without exceptions , and it has been uniformly fol- lowed in the edition. At xn. 1.40, anuprayuhktdnt is an accidental exception ; and here, for once, the mss happen to agree in retaining the k. LCf. the Hibernicisms stren'th, len’ih, etc^J Final -m and -n before 1-: as in kan Ivkavi and sarvdh lokdn — Rule « ^^35 prescribes the conversion of -w and of -n alikO into nasalized -I In either case, the resultant combination is therefore, according to the pre- scription of the Pr , nasalized -I + or two Vs of which the first is nasal- ized Thus kam lokam becomes ka -f- nasalized I lokain, a combination which we may write as kal lokam or as kanl lokam or as kaii lokam. Lit is merely the lack of suitable Roman type that makes the discussion of this matter troublesome. In ndgarl, the nasalized I should properly be written by a / with a nasal sign over it In Roman, it might well be rendered by an I with a dot as nearly over it as may be (thus 7 ) ; in prac- tice, a h is made to take the place of the dot alone or else of the dot + 1 , so that for the sotitid of “nasalized /” we find either nl or simply h J I^or the combination resultant from -m /-, the mss are almost unani- mous in writing Lnot what the Pr. ordains, but ratherj a single / with nasal sign over the preceding vow'el, as in kan lokam at xi 8. 11 , this usage is followed by the Berlin text ^ For the resultant from -11 1 -, the mss. follow the Pr , not without excep- tions, and write doubled I with nasal sign over the preceding vowel, as m sarvdh lokdn, x 6 16, etc , asmtn lake, ix 5 7, etc. ; this usage also has hcen followed in the Berlin text (but not with absolute uniformity) — It would probably have been better to observe strictly the rule of the Pr. and to write both results with double / and preceding nasal sign. cxxvi General Introduction^ Part //. ; in part by Whitney Visarga before st- and tbe like : as in ripu stejia steyakrt, viii. 4. 10 = RV. vu. 104. 10 Our Pr l_see note to ii. 40 J contains no rule prescribing the rejection of a final visarga before an initial sibilant that is followed by a surd mute The mss in general, although with very numerous and irregularly occurring exceptions, practice the rejection of the and so does the Rik RPr iv 12 , TPr. ix. i ; VPr iii. 12 J; and the general usage of the mss has been followed by us |_For examples, see x 5 1-14 : cf. also notes to iv 16 i {ya sidyat SVF.yas tdyat), 1. 8 3, etc.J The kampa-figures i and 3. — Respecting the introduction of these figures between an independent circumflex and an immediately following acute accent in the sainhitd^ our Pr is likewise silent The usage of the mss is exceedingly uncertain and conflicting : there is hardly an instance in which there is not disagreement between them in respect to the use of the one or of the other ; nor can any signs of a tendency towards a rule respecting the matter be discovered. There are a'few instances, pointed cut each at its proper place in the notes, in which a short vowel occurring in the circumnexed syllable is protracted before the figure by all the saifihitd-mss * Such cases seemed mere casual irregularities, however, end we could not hesitate to adopt the usage of the Rik, setting i after the v'ov’el if it were short in quantity, and 3 if it were long. L^his matter is mscussed with much detail by W. in his notes to APr. hi 65, pages 49ii-9, and TPr. xix. 3, p 562 J *[.See APr., p 499, near end, and notes to A V vi 109 I and - X 9 J Tne method of marking the accent. — With respect to this important matter, v/e have adapted the form of our text to the rules of the Rik rather than to the authority of the mss As to the ways of marking the accent, a wide diversity of usage prevails among the Atharvan mss., nor is there perhaps a single one of them which remains quite true to the same method througnout. Their methods arc, however, all of them in the main identical Vi^ith that of the Rik, varying only in unimportant particulars [."The details have been discussed above (see p. exxi), and with as much fulness as seemed worth while J 8. Metrical Form of tlie Atbarran Saihliita Predominance of anustobli. — The two striking features of the Atharva- Veda as regards its metrical form are the extreme irregularity and the predominance of ar.xtsUtbh stanzas The stanzas in gdyatri and trts{ubh are correspondingly rare, the AV. in this point presenting a sharp con- trast with the Rig-Veda. The brief bits of prose interspersed among metrical passages are given below, at p. loi i, as are also the longer pas- sages in Brahmana-lBce prose. Lio Kashmirian recension, the latter are even more extensive than in the Vulgate : see p. Ixxx. J 8. Metrkal Pmi>i <)f tfw AiJiarvan SaipJlita cxx\ai Extreme metrical irregiilarity. — This is more or less a characteristic of all the metrical parts of the Vedic texts outside of the Rig-Veda (and Sama-Veda). In the samhitas of the Yajur-Veda, m the Brahmanas, and in the Sutras, the violations of meter are so common and so penading that one can only say that meter seemed to he of next to no account in the eyes of the text-makers. It is probable that in the Atharvan saihhita the irregular verses outnumber the regular Apparent wantonness m the alteration of RV. material. — The corrup- tions and alterations of Rig-Veda verses recurring in the AV. are often such as to seem downright wanton in their metrical irregularity. The smallest infusion of care as to the metncal form of these verses would have sufficed to prevent their distortion to so inordinate a degree To emend this irregularity into regularity is not licit. — In very many cases, one can hardly refrain from suggesting that this or that slight and obvious emendation, especially the omission of an intruded word or the insertion of some brief particle or pronoun, would rectify the meter.. It> would be a great mistake, however, to carry this process too far, anc by changes of order, insertions, and various other changes, to mend irreg:u- iarity into regularity. The text, as Atharvan, never was metrically regu- lar, nor did its constructors care to have it such ; and to make it so woijld be to distort it. 9. The Divisions of the Test [.Sunimary of the various divisions. — These, in the order of their extent, are : pra-^dthckas or ‘ Vor-lesungen * or ‘ lectures,’ to which there is no corresponding dmsion in the RV. ; kan.(^ or * books,’ answering to the mandalas of the RV. ; and then, as in the RV., anu-vdkas ot * re-cita- tions,-’ and suktas or * hymns,’ and rcas or * verses’ The verses of the long hymns are also grouped into ♦ verse-decads,’ corresponding to thd Vargas of the RV. Besides these divisions, there are recognized also the divisions called artlM-suIiias or * sense-hymns ’ and patydj'a-siiktas or ‘period-hymns’; and the subdivisions of the latter are called par}dyas. In the parya.ya^x^Taxi%f the division into ganas (or sometimes danrla^ias c P- 628) IS recognized, and the verses are distinguished as avasdnarcas and S^^’Svasdnarcas (see p. 472). A great deal of detail concerning the divi- sions of the books (the later hooks especially) may be found in the special introductions to the several books, j LThe first and second and third gnmd drvisions 0* dooks i.— xviii. A <^tical study of the text reveals the fatt that the first eighteen books are divided (see p, xv) into three grand divisions; the first (books i-vii.) contains the short hymns of miscellaneous subjects; the second (books ’riit'-xiL) contains the long hymns of miscellaneous subjects; and the cxxviii General Introduction^ Part II. : in part by Whitmy third consists of the books (xiii— xviii) characterized each by unity of subject These divisions, although not clearly recognized in name (but cf. page civil, below) by the text-makers, are nevertheless clearly recog- nized in fact, as is shown by the general arrangement of the text as a whole and as is set forth in detail m the next chapter, pages cxl-clxi. Concerning their recognition by the Old Anukr., see the paragraphs below, pages cxxxix f. In this chapter will^be treated the divisions commonly recognized by the native tradition J The division into prapS^akas. — The literal meaning of pra-pathaka is * Vor-lesung ’ or ‘ lesson ' or * lecture ' This division, though noticed in all the mss , is probably a recent, and certainly a very secondary and unimportant one It is not recognized by the commentary, and it does not appear in the Bombay edition ' No ms gives more than the simple statement, “such and such •&. prapdthaka finished”, no enumeration of hymns or verses is anywhere added There are prapdtkakas,2.u^ they are numbered consecutively for the whole text so far as they go, that is, from book i to book xviii inclusive The prapdtkaka-dWxsion is not extended into books xix and xx Prapathakas : their number and distribution and extent. — First grand division (books i -vii ) • in each of the books i -iii there are 2 prapd^hakas ; in each of the books iv -vL there are 3 , and in book vii. there are 2 : m all, (6 + 9 + 2=) 17 — Second grand division (books viii — xii ) : in each of the five books viii-Xii there are 2 prapdthakas m all, 10 — Third grand division (books \m -xvm ) • each of the first five books, xiii-xvii, forms I prapdthakai while the sixth and last, book xviii , forms 2 in all, /• — Sum for the three divisions, (17 +10 + 7=) 34 — In book iv the division is very uneven, the first of the 3 prapdihakas containing 169 verses or over half the book ; while in xii , on the other hand, in order to make an even division of the 304 verses as between the 2 prapdthakas, the end of the first is allowed to fall in the middle of a hymn (just after 3 30), thus giving 148 verses to the first and 156 to the second comparing the verse-totals of the books of the first grand division with the number of prapdthakas in each book, an attempt towards a rough approximation to equality of length among them will appear The like is true in the second grand division ; and also in the third (note espe- cially book xviii ), so far as is feasible without making a prapdihaka run over more than one book J Their relation to the anuvflka-divisions. — The prapdthaka-^x^^xoxi^ mostly coincide -with the ajttivdka-^wxsxons Exceptions are as follows : prapdihaka 1 1 begins with v 8, in the middle of the second aurvaUt of book Y. ; 19 begins with xnii 6, in the middle of the third trnvrla of bonk viii ; 21 begins v.ith ix 6, m the mrld’e of the thirci annvdka CXXIX 9 . Tlie Divtstons of the Text of book IX ; 23 begins with x 6, in the third anuvdka of book x ; 25 begins with xi 6, in the third nnuvdka of book xi ; and 27 , as already noted, begins in the middle of the third hymn (and conterminous aimvdka) of book xii The division into kdn^s or < books.* — [_The word kdnda means literally ‘ division ’ or ‘ piece,’ especially the ‘ division of a plant-stalk from one joint to the next,’ and is applied to the main divisions of other Vedic texts (TS , MSjCB, etc) The best and prevailing rendering of the word is ‘ book ’ As to the length of the kdndas and their arrangement within their respective grand divisions, see p cxliii, below J The division into kdndas is of course universal, and evidently fundamental The division into anuvdkas. — The anu-vakas^ literally ‘re-citations,’ are subdivisions of the individual book, and are numbered continuously through the book concerned. They are acknowledged by the mss in very different manner and degree There is usually added to the antt- vdka a statement of the number of hymns and verses contained in it. Land those statements are reproduced in this work m connection with the comment J L^^'rom these it appears that the anuvdka-(\\v\s\or\s are sometimes very unequal thus the last annvdka of book vi , where the average is 35 verses, has 64 J L^^ course of the special introductions to the books, there is given for each of the books vii — xix (except xiv and xvii ) a table showing the number of hymns and the number of verses in each annvdka. see pages 3S8 and so on. For xiv and xvii also the facts are duly stated, but not in tabular form, which was need- less.J The enumeration of verses is often made continuously through the annvdka (cf p 388, end) LTheir number, and distribution over books and grand divisions. — The pertinent facts may be shown by a table with added statements In the table, the first couple of lines refers to the first grand division ; the second, to the second , and the last, to the third Books 1 u m V M \u contain respectively 6 6 6 S 6 13 10 inuvakas Books Mil IX X XI Xll * contain respectively 5 5 5 5 5 anu\akas Books Xlll * XIV * x\ XM XVII * XMU * contain respectnely 4 2 I 4 anuvakas Thus the first grand division has 55 aniuakas, the second has 25, and the third has 15 bam, 95 Moreover, book xi\ contains 7, and xx con- tains 9 In the colophon to book xvn , neither printed edition has the note (7 ‘ nJtvdkak , but it is found (cf p 812) in the mss Each of the books viii -\i has ten h}mns (p 472), and so each annx.dka there consists of just two hymns In book xii , of five hymns the annvdta is cxxx General Introduction^ Part //. .* in part by Whitney coincident with the hymn. The like is true in books xiii , xiv , xvii , and xviii (p 814) In the table, these five books are marked with a star. But furthermore : if, as seems likely (see p cxxx, below), books xv. and xvL are to be reckoned each as a boox of two hymns (and not as of 18 and 9 respectively), then all the books from xii on, to xviii , are to be starred, and regarded as having their miuvdkas and hymns conterminous J j_It is noted at p 898, ^ 2, that in book xix there appears an attempt to make the aituvaka-dimsions coincide with the sense-divisions or divi- sions between the subject-groups I do not know whether the same is true in books i-xviii, not having examined them with regard to this point ; it is true in the case of the last amivdka of book ix (= RV i 164 = AV IX 9 and 10), where, as the RV. shows, the true unit is the anuvdJui and not the AV hymn On the other hand, Whitney observes (at p 194) that an aimvaka-Ai’^^idTi falls in the middle of the Mrgara- group, and (at p 247) that another falls between v 1 5 and 1 6 with entire disregard of the close connection of the two hymns J LTheir relation to the hymn-divisions in hooks xiii.-xviii. — In these books and in xii , the anuvdka is, as noted above, admittedly conterminous with the hymn everywhere except m the two 7>i2?j^'«-books, xv. and xvi In the colophon to xiv i, a ms. of Whitney’s speaks of the hymn as an t^Lnuvdka-sukta ; and it is possible that, for book xiv , at least, the author of the Anukr did not recognize the hymn-divisions (see p 739)* That they signify very much less in books xiii -xviii. than they do in the earlier books is very clear (see the third paragraph of p cxxxi, and the third of p clx) ; so clear, that it is not unlikely that they are of entirely second- ary origin, J j_It IS at the beginning of book xii that the aniivdka-A\v\€\oxi^ begin to coincide with the hymn-divisions ; and it is precisely at the corresponding point in the Anukr (the beginning of paiala viii ) that the author of that treatise apparently intends to say athd 'mivdkd ticyante. From book xn on, therefore, it would seem that the samhita was thought of by him as a collection of anuvdkas^ or that the subordinate division below the kanda which was alone worthy of practical recognition, was in his opinion the anuvdka and not the sukta.\ LIf this be right, then it would seem as if, in the series of books xii.— xviii , the books xv and xvi ought not to be exceptions In them, also, the groups of individual parydyas or parydya-^o\rgs should be con- terminous with the anuvdkas. Book xv, will fall, accordingly, into two groups of 7 and 1 1 parydyas respectively , and book xvi into two groups of 4 and 5 This method of grouping the parydyas receives some support from the fact that hymn xix. 23 refers to book xv as ‘'two amtvakas ” (see note to xix. 23. 25), and from the fact that the Paficapatalika. CXXXl 9. Tlie Divisions of the Text makes similar reference to book xvi. (see p 792, ^ 4, to p 793), and speaks of our xvi 5 as adya, that is, * the first ’ of the second group (p, 793) Moreover, the treatment of books xv and xvi. by the makers of the Paipp text (see p 1016, line 12) would indicate that the amivdka is here the practically recognized unit subordinate to the kanda As for the bearing of this grouping upon the citation of the text concerned and upon the summations, cf. p cxxxvii, top, and p. cxlv, table 3, both forms J [The division into suktas or < hymns.’ — The hymn may well be called the first considerable natural unit in the rising scale of divisions Of the hymn, then, verses and padas are the natural subdivisions, although single verses or even stock-padas may also be regarded as natural units Book and hymn ^ and verse are all divisions of so obviously and equally funda- mental character, that it is quite right that citations should be made by them and not otherwise However diverse in subject-matter two succes- sive suktas may be, we rightly expect unity of subject within the limits of what is truly one and the same sukta It is this inherent unity of subject which justifies the use of the term artha-sukia (below, p cxxxiii) with reference to any true metrical hymn , and our critical suspicions are naturally aroused against a hymn that (like vii 35) fails to meet this expectation The hymn, moreover, is the natural nucleus for the second- ary accretions which are discussed below, at p cliii J LThe hymn-divisions not everywhere of equal value. — It is matter of considerable cntical interest that the hymn-divisiohs of diflerdnt parts of our text are by no means of equal value (cf p clx) Thus it is far from certain whether there is any good ground at all for the division of the material of book xiv into hymns (the question is carefully examined at pages 738-9) And again, the material of book xviii is of such sort as to make it clear that the hymn-divisions m that book are decidedly mechanical and that they have almost no intrinsic significance (seep 814, ^ 6, p 827, ^ 2, p 848, ^ 8) The familiar Dirghatamas-hymn of the Rig-Veda has been divided by the Atharvan text-makers into two (ix 9 and 10), and doubtless for no other reason than to bring it into an ^approximate uniformity in respect of length with the hymns of books vni-xi (p clvi) As Whitney notes, hymns xLx 53 and 54 are only two divided parts of one hymn : so 10 and ii ,* 28 and 29 J LThe division into rcas or ‘verses.’ — This division is, of course, like the division into books and hymns, of fundamental significance It is main- tained even in the non-metrical passages , but the name is then usually modified by the prefixion of the determinative aiasaua, so that the prose 'seises in the/'fyj^'^^z-hvmns a^c ca'ded avasanaycus (p 472) J ' pi’’! of is ‘.un'ei-t f'lr xiu ’ . totnf' ri orit.icaUo" ^l{ ^ lo. llie prtcf dinp p^ragr\ph J cxxxii General Introduction^ Part II. : in part by Whitney LSubdivisions of verses : avasanas, padas, etc. — Concerning these a few words may be said Avasdna means ‘stop,’ and so ‘the verse-division marked by a stop’ The verse usually has an avasdna or ‘stop’ in the middle and of course one at the end Occasionally, however, there are, besides the stop at the end, two others • and the verse is then called tr)>- avasdna Moreover, we have verses with more than three stops, and sometimes a verse with only one {ekdvasdna) — The next subordinate division is the pdda or ‘ quarter ’ As the name implies, this is commonly the quarter of a four-lined verse or verse with two avasdnas, but some- times, as in a verse with an odd number of pddas (like the gdyatn), a pada may be identical with an avasdna The division into padas is recog- nized by the ntual, which sometimes prescribes the doing of a sequence of ceremonial acts to the accompaniment of a verse recited pada by pada {pacchas) in a corresponding sequence — Even the pada is not the final possible subdivision, as appears from KB xxvi 5, ream vdrdharcam vd pddam vd padain vd varnam vdy where the verse and all its subdivisions receive mention J Wumeratioii of successive verses in the mss. — In this matter, the mss differ very much among themselves, and the same ms differs in different books, and even in different parts of the same book , so that to give all details would be a long, tedious, and useless operation A few may be given by way of specimen In book^ 111 and v the enumeration m our mss is by hymns only LSometimes it runs continuously through the anuvdka • above, p cxxix J In vi it is very various * in great part, 2 hymns are counted together; sometimes 4 , also 10 verses together, or 9, or 8 In book vii , some mss (so P and I ) number by decads within the annvdka, with total neglect of real sTiktas, and the numbering is in all so confused and obscure that our edition was misled m several cases so as to count 5 hymns less in the book than does the Anukr., or than SPP’s edition The discordance is described at p 389 and the two num- berings are given side by side in the translation LGroupings of successive verses into units requiring special mention. — The grouping of verses into units of a higher degree is by no means so simple and uniform in the mss as we might expect It is desirable, accordingly, to discriminate between d^cdiA-suktas and artlia-suktas and pa^ydya-suktas The differences of grouping are chargeable partly to the differences of form in the text (now verse, now prose) and partly to the differences in length m the metrical hymns J Decad-sGktas or ‘ decad-hymns.^ — With the second grand division begins (at book viii ) a new element m the subdividing of the text* the metrical hymns, being much longer than most of those in the first division, are themselves divided into verse-decads or groups of ten verses, five or 9. The Divisions of the Text cxxxiii more odd verses at the end of a hymn counting as an added decad The numbers in the final group thus run from five to fourteen • cf pages 388, end, and 472, ^ 5. Book xvii divides precisely into 3 decads p 805 The average length of The CLecdid-suktas is exactly ten verses m book x (35 decads and 350 verses, p 562), and almost exactly ten in book win (28 decads and 283 verses p 814) In the summations, these decads are usually called suktas and never by any other name (as da^atayas), while the true hymns are called artlia-suktas LAlthough known to the comm and to some mss in book vii (p 388), the decad-division really begins with book viii ; and it runs on through book xviii (not into xix . p 898, line 6), and continuously except for the breaks occasioned by the parydya-\\'jmxis (p 471, end) and paiydya-hooks (xv and xvi pages 770, 793) In book vii , this grouping is carried out so mechanically as to cut in two some nine of the short sense-hymns of the Berlin edition The nine are enumerated at p 389, line 8 , but m the case of five of them (45, 54, 68, 72, 76), the fault lies with the Berlin edition, which has wrongly combined the parts thus separated J Lin the summations, as just noted, the decads are usually called suktas , and they and the parydyasuktas are added together, like apples and pears, to form totals of “hymns of both kinds” (p 561, line 8) The summa- tions of the deca.d-si7ktas and paiydya-suktas for books viii -xvm are duly given below in the special introduction to each book concerned, and these should be consulted , but for convenience they may here be summarized Book viu IX \ XI xiL Jnu xiv xv x\i x%u x^^u Becads 24 21 35 27 23 14 14 3 2S Paryajas 67 37^ 1S9 J Artha-suktas or ‘ sense-hymns.’ — LThis technical term might be ren- dered, more awkwardly, but perhaps more suitably, by ‘subject-matter h)^mns ’ It is these that are usually meant when we speak of “ hymns ” without any determinative The comm very properly notes that hymns 47 3.nd 48 form a single artJia-sTikia, and that the next two form another The determinative aitha- is prefixed in particular to distinguish the sense-hymns from the paiydya-kymns (p 61 1, 5[ S)> and there is little occasion for using it of the short hymns of the first grand division J The verses of the ariha-snkta are sometimes numbered through each separate component decad or sukta, and sometimes through the whole ajtha-sukia. the two methods being variously mingled In books xii — \iv and .wii and xviii , as already noted, the artha-suktas and anuvdkas arc coincident, the aiss specifying their identity LParyfiya-stUctas or < period-hymns.* — In the second and third grand divisions are certain extended prose-compositions C2\\cd} pa tyaya-sfik fas { cxxxiv Ge7, 'al Introduchoit^ Part II. : in part by Whitney They are divided into what are called paiydyas, or also parydya-suktas, but never into decads l_The term paiydya-sukta is thus somewhat ambiguous, and has a wider and a narrower meaning as designating, for exanlple, on the one hand, the whole group of six patydyas that compose our IX 6, or, on the other, a single one of those six (e g our ix. 6 1-17) To avoid this ambiguity, it is well to use parydya only for the narrower meaning and parydya-sukta only for the wider. The hymn ix 7 is a parydya-sukta consisting of only one parydya For the word pary-dya (root i literally Unt-gang, circuit, TreptoSo?) it is indeed hard to find an English equivalent : it might, with mental reservations, be rendered by ‘ strophe ’ , perhaps ‘ period ’ is better , and to leave it (as usual) untrans- lated may be best J |_The pafydya-hymns number eight m all, five in the second grand division (with 23 parydyas), and three in the third grand division (with 33 paiydyas). They are, m the second division, viii. 10 (with 6 paiydyas), IX. 6 (with 6) and 7 (with i) , xi 3 (with 3) ; and xii 5 (with 7) , and, m the third division, xiii 4 (with 6) ; book xv (18 parydyas) , and book xvi (9 parydyas) The parydya-suktas are marked with a p in tables 2 and 3 For further details, see p. 472 J Lit will be noticed that two books of the third division, xv and xvi , consist wholly of parydyas , and, further, that each book of the second division has at least one of these hymns (ix has two such, and contigu- ous), except book x Even book x has a long hymn, hymn 5, consisting mostly of prose, but with mingled metrical portions , but despite the fact that the Anukr divides the hymn into four parts, which parts are even ascribed to different authors (p 579), it is yet true that those parts are not acknowledged as parydyas. Moreover, the hymn is expressly called an artha-sukta by at least one of Whitney’s mss J LDifferences of the Berlin and Bombay numerations in books viit and xix* — As against the Berlin edition, the Bombay edition exhibits certain differences in respect of the numeration of hymns and verses These are rehearsed by SPP in his Critical Notice, vol. 1, pages 16-24 Those which affect book vii are described by me at p 389, and the double numberings for book vii are given by Whitney from vii 6 3 to the end of vii The Bombay numbenngs are the correct ones (cf p 392, line 4 from end) Other discrepancies, which affect book xix, are referred to at p 898 J LDifferences of hymn-numeration in the paryaya-books. — These are the most important differences that concern hymns They affect all parts of a given book after the first parydya of that book They have been carefully explained by me at pages 610-11, but the differences will be more easily apprehended and discussed if put in tabular form The table harmonizes 9* TJie Divisions of tJie Text cxxxv the hymn-numbers, without going into the detail of the difference of verse- numbermgs, which latter, however, are not seriously confusing Hymns of the Bombaj ed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 [Since the two editions differ, the question arises, Which is right ? The fourth paragraph of p 61 1 (which see) leaves it undecided, but states the real point at issue plainly I now believe that the methods of both editions are at fault and would suggest a better method To make the matter clear, I take as an example th.Q paiydya-sukia xi 3, which consists of a group of three Suggested method Berlin method Bombaj method XI 3 I 1-31 M 3 1-31 \t 3 I-31 XI 3 2 1-18 \i 3 32-49 XI 4 i-iS XI 3 31-7 XI 3 50-56 XI 5 1-7 The four sets of numbers in the first column relate to the four text- divisions . the first set (xi ) to the book ; the second (3) to the paijdya- sfikta or group of paiydyas , the third (r, 2, 3) to the individual paiydyos of that group , and the fourth «-«8. 1-7) to the verses of the patydyas J [In the Berlin text, on the one hand, we must admit that each of the three component parydyas of xi. 3 is duly indicated as such by Upograpli- ical separation and that the pafydya-numhers (i and 2 and 3) arc dul} given in parenthesis That text, however, practically ignores the dj as, at least for the purposes of citation, b}-- numbering the verses of all thice continuously (as verses 1-56) from the beginning olparydya i to tlie end ®f 3 Thus only the group oi paiydyas is recognized , and it is numbered as if coordinate w’lth the m ilia-suktas of the book J [In the Bombay text, on th 35 . and 44 The citations are indeed to be found below, scattered over pages 92, 103, 113, 123, 131, and 141 , but it will be better to combine ^ {.Another and whollj different matter is the norm assumed for the itrsc totals cf the iid' vnduil hjmns of each book (sec p achin) thus Iwok i is the book of four \c'»cd hjmns J cxl General Iniroduciion^ Part //. . tn pari by W/iiiney them here (with addition of the “obscure” clause of p 141, ^ 8) into what appears to be their proper metrical form, with attempted emendation at the points ^ in which the verse was obscure to Whitney trinqammmttah sadrccsu kdryds iisro (iaqd 'si an daqa panca ca rcah caturdaqd 'niyd , aimvdka^ag ca sainkhydm vidad/iyad adhikdm mmiitdt ‘Among the six-versed [hymns] (1 e in book 111 ), the verses are to be (made - le) accounted [respective!}] as three, ten, eight, ten, and five, with thirty as their fundamental determinant , and the last as fourteen * and one is to treat the number (amivdka by aniivdka i e 'l for each anuvdka as an ovetplus over the norm ’J Lin the section headed “ Tables of verse-norms ” etc , it was shown that, while the Pancapatalika’s norms for books 1 -vii concern the anu- vdkas, Its norms for books viii -xii concern the hymns This distinction is observed also by the coram m making his decad-divisions (see p 472 * 1 28) These facts are in entire accord with the explicit statements of the Pafica- patalika . to wit, on the one hand, with that of the verse just translated , and, on the other, with the remark cited at the end of viii i (p 475, end), suktaqaq ca ganand pravartate, * and the numbering proceeds hymn by hymn ' Here sukta^as is in clear contrast with the annvdkacas of our verse, and the remark evidently applies to the remaining books of the text that come within the purview of the Paficapatalika, that is (since it Ignores books xix -xx ), to books viii -xviii or to the second and third grand divisions J [Thus, between the first grand division on the one hand and the second and third on the other, our treatise makes a clear.distinction, not only by actual procedure but also by express statement But this is not all As between the second and the third, also, it makes a distinction in fact . for, while a norm that concerns the verse-totals of artha-suktas (and not of anuvdLas) is assumed for the second, no norm is assumed for the third (cf p 708, line 12) and the verse-totals for each artha-sukta or parydya- siikia are stated simply hymn by hymn J 10. Extent and Stnictiire of the Atharva-Veda Samhita Limits of the original collection. — It is in the first place clearly appar- ent that of the twenty books composing the present text of the Atharva- Veda, the first eighteen, or not more than that, were originally combined ^ The mss read ■with double sandhi, -sa^ for inth confusion of sibilants, sanikh)d (but one has indeed ~}am ) , and adhtkamm , ivith omission of a needed twin, conso- nant (cf p S32) As to the use of /rr, cf below, p 52 end, and p lS6, ^ 3 lo. Extent and Structure of the A thaj'va-Veda Samhita cxli together to form a collection There appears to be no definite reason to suppose that the text ever contained less than the books i-xviii It is easy to conjecture a collection including books i -xiv. and book xviii , leaving out the two prose pai yaya-hQQ\i% xv and xvi and the odd little book xvii. with the queer refrain running nearly through it , but there is no sound reason for suspecting the genuineness of these prose books more than of the prose hymns scattered (see below, p loii) through nearly all the preceding books , and in the Paippalada recension it is Vulgate book xviii that is wanting altogether, books xv-xvii. Lor rather, books xv.-xviii cf p loi 5J being not unrepresented Books XIX. and xx. are later additions. — That these are later additions is in the first place strongly suggested by their character and composi- tion. As for book xx , that is in the mam a pure mass of excerpts from the Rlg-Veda, it stands in no conceivable relation to the rest of the Atharva-Veda , and when and why it was added thereto is a matter foi conjecture. As for book xix , that has distinctly the aspect of being an after-gleaning , if its hymns had been an accepted part of the mam col- lection when that was formed, we should have expected them to be dis- tributed among the other books ; and the text is prevailingly of a degree of badness that sets it quite apart from the rest; while its pada-t^^t must be a most modem production. L^^o*" the cumulative evidence m detail respecting book xix , see my introduction, pages 895-8 J Other evidences of the former existence of an Atharva-Veda which was limited to books 1 — xviii are not rare That the y>/(7/^?^//<7/'^r-division IS not extended beyond book xvm may be of some consequence, but probably not much The Old AnukramanI stops at the same point More significant is it that the Kaugika-sutra Ldoes not, by its citations,^ imply recognition of the text of book xix as an integral part of the savi- hitdy and that itj ignores book xx completely It is yet more impor- tant that the Pratigakhya and its commentary limit themselves to book' 1 -xviii In the Paippalada text, the material of book xix appears in great part as we are bound to note, and quite on an equality with the rest Of book XX , nothing Lor practically nothing * see p 1009J so appears It is also noteworthy that Paipp. (as mentioned above) omits book xviii , but from this need be drawm no suspicion as to the appurtenance of xvin to the original AV — The question of the possible extension of individual hymns anywhere does not concern us here, Lbut is discussed on page clni J * are live \erses which, although occurring m our xix., arc yet ated b) Kfiuf in full, ns if they did not belong to the Atharv.an text recognized b) Kau 9 . Moreover, there arc cited by Kauf SIX fratnas which, although ansnenng to sir hjmns (between yr and 6S) of our xix, tway jet for the most part be regarded as lalftija mauirSt 2* or a detailed discussion of the ii^ttcr, see pages SplJ-y J cxlii General Introduction, Part IL: in part by Whitney LThe two broadest principles of arrangement of books i.-xviii. — Leaving^ book XX out of account, and disregarding also for the present book xix as being a palpable supplement (see pages 895-8), it is not difficult to trace the two principles that underlie the general arrangement of the material of books 1 -xviii These principles are J [1. Miscellaneity or unity of subject and 2. length of hymn The books 1 -xviii fall accordingly into two general classes i books of which the hymns are characterized by miscellaneity of subject and in which the length of the hymns is regarded , and 2 books of which the distinguish- ing characteristic is a general unity of subject and in which the precise length of the hymns is not primarily regarded, although they are prevail- ingly long 1 The first class again falls into two divisions i the short hymns , and 2 the long hymns J LThe three grand divisions (I. and 11 . and III.) as based on those princi- ples. — We thus have, for books 1 — xviii , three grand divisions, as follows I the first grand division, consisting of the seven books, 1 -vii , and com- prehending the short hymns of miscellaneous subjects, more specifically, all the hymns (not parydyas p cxxxiv) of a less number of verses than twenty 1 , n the second grand division, consisting of the next five books, viii -Ml , and comprehending the long hymns of miscellaneous subjects, more specifically, all the hymns (save those belonging to the third division) of more than twenty verses ; and m the third grand division, consisting, as aforesaid, of those books of which the distinguishing characteristic is a general unity of subject, to wit, the six books, xiii — xviii — There are other features, not a few, which differentiate these divisions one from another , they will be mentioned below, under the several divisions J LThe order of the three grand divisions. — It is clear that the text ought to begin with division I , since that is the most characteristic part of it all, and since books i — vi are very likely the original nucleus of the whole collection Since division I is made up of hymns of miscellaneous sub- jects (the short ones), it is natural that the other hymns of miscellaneous subjects (the long ones) should follow next Thus the last place is natu- rally left for the books characterized by unity of subject. This order agrees with that of the hymn-totals of the divisions, which form (cf tables 1, 2, 3) a descending scale of 433 and 45 and 15 J LPrinciples of arrangement of books within the grand division. — If we have rightly determined the first rough grouping of the material of books 1 —win into three grand divisions, the question next m logical order is, ' LThis •it'iierrsil is true viihoct n^diHcat.on, if ve trc'i b'cts - '.no r*. earh a ti' a hi-n I*; or ps in rnau i-t cxpla r».d and rt p catx, a”d imp’rcd n the second form of J, p c\'*. cf p cxxxiii, bne 13 J lo. Extent a7id Sh'uctw'e of the Athai'va-Vcda Sanihita cxliii What governs the arrangement of the books within each division ^ This question will be discussed in detail under each of the three divisions (cf pages cxIlx ff , clvii, clix) , here, accordingly, only more general state- ments are called for Those statements concern the verse-norms of the hymns for each book, and the amount of text J [The normal length of the hymns for each of the several books. — For the first grand division these norms play an important part in determin- ing the arrangement of the books within that division, as appears later, p cxlix For the second grand division it is true that the Pailcapatalika assumes a normal hymn-length for each book (p cxxxix) , but that seems to have no traceable connection with the arrangement of the books within that division (p civ). For the third, no such norm is even assumed (p cxl, near end) J [The amount of text in each hook — Table. — This matter, in its relation to the order of the books, I must consider briefly here for the three grand divisions together, although it will be necessary to revert to it later (pages clii, clvii, clix) Since our sainJiitd is of mingled verse and prose, it is not easy (except with a Hindu ms , which I have not at hand; to esti- mate the precise amount of text to be apportioned to each separate book If we take as a basis, however, the printed pag-e of the Berlin text, and count blank fractions of pages, the 352 pages are apportioned among the 18 books as follows Book 1 has 13 pages u 16 III 20 IV 27 V 28 VI 40 vn 27 Division I 171 From this it appears that, for division I , the amount of text is a continu- ously ascending one for each of the books except the last (book vii ) , and that, for division III , it is a continuously descending one for each of the books except (m like manner) the last (book xviii ) ; and that, although the verse-totals of the Bombay edition for the books of division II form ^ series (see p clvii, line ii) which ascends continuously (like that of 1 ) for all books except (once again) the last, the books of division II arc, on the whole, most remarkable for their approximate equality of length J ■Arrangement of the hymns within any given book. — While the general Sliding principles of arrangement of the books within the diMsion are thus in large measure and evidently the external ones of \crsC'nonns and ^^ount of text, it is not easy to see what has directed the ordering of the Book viii has 22 pages IX 21 X 27 XI 25 XU. 22 Division II 1 17 Book xui has 13 pages XI v 12 x\ 10 XVI 5 xvii 3 XMIL 21 Division III 64 cxliv General Inirodtiction^ Part IT. • in part by W I nine) Table i. First grand division, books i.-vu , seven boolrs Book Vll Versi > j n irnis J Book VI 2 3 Book 1 4 Book ll 5 Book in G BfKlk IV 7 I’ook V S conmns Sum of h\ inns Sum of Versus 56 hs of I IS 50 56 26 hs of 2 \bS 26 52 10 122 Iis of 3 iss 132 .3^6 11 12 SO lis of 4 \-S3 51 212 3 8 1 22 llS of > VbS 34 170 4 2 5 13 hs of fl \ss. 24 144 3 1 j G 21 hs of 7 %ss 36 252 3 4 G 10 2 hs of 8 sss 26 200 1 1 2 3 4 hs of P vss 11 00 2 3 2 hs of 10 s-ss 7 70 1 1 G lis of 11 S’SS 8 88 2 5 hs of 12 i-ss 7 84 1 0 <> hs of 13 \ sr 4 52 > u lis of 14 \S5 n 0 42 3 hs of 15 s ss 0 J 4o 1 ll of 10 s'ss 1 10 2 lis of 17 vss 2 .34 1 h of 18 \ss 1 18 118 142 36 36 81 40 31 hjnins 433 286 454 163 207 230 324 37G % trees 2,030 Table 2. Second grand division, books viii -xii , five books Book Book Book Book Book Sum of Sum of vifi ix X. xi xU connins hvmns verses 1 h of 21 \-ss 1 21 1 2 lis of 22 \ss 3 GG 1 h of 20 vss 1 23 1 2 hs of 24 vss 3 72 1 1 1 lis of 2 j i-ss 3 75 3 1 P 1 3 hs of 2fl vss 8 208 1 2 hs of 27 vss 3 81 2 1 hs of 28 \S3 3 84 1 1 hs of 01 vss 0 62 1 h of 02 vss 1 32 Ip 1 hs of 00 vss 2 60 I 1 - hs of 04 vss 2 68 1 h of 05 vss 1 36 1 Ju of 07 vss 1 37 1 h of OS vss 1 38 2 hs of 44 vss 0 88 1 h of 50 vss 1 60 1 h of 50 vss 1 63 1 ll of 55 vss 1 65 1 P h n' 50 vss 1 60 1 h of GO vss 1 60 1 P h of C2 vss 1 02 1 h of 00 vss 1 03 1 P h 0 ' 73 vss 1 73 ~io ~10~ 10 10 6 hjmns 45 250 ,302 350 310 '.304 verses 1 628 10. Extent and Structure of the At/iaf'va-Veda Sa^nhita cxlv Table 3. jRohjta Wedding Book Book xiil XIV. Third grand division, books xiu.-xvlil., six books VrStya Paritta Sun Funeral Book Book Book Book Sum of Sum of rv xvi xvU xvlii contabs hymns \erses 2 1 2 1 2 1 8 1 4 1 1 4 2 18p 188 189 141 1 3 1 1 2 > 1 1 1 1 9p 1 4 93 80 288 hs of 3 VBS. 2 6 bs of 4 •VBS 2 8 hs of 6 vss. 2 10 hs of C VBS. 4 24 hs of 7 vss. 3 21 b of 8 vss 1 8 hs of 0 vss. 3 27 h of 10 vss 1 10 hs of 11 -ns 6 66 h of IS vss 1 12 hs. . of 18 ■vss 2 28 h of 26 vss 1 26 b of 27 ‘VSS 1 27 h of 80 vss 1 80 h of 46 vss 1 46 h of 56 •vss 1 66 hs of 60 vss 2 120 h of 61 vss 1 61 h of 64 vss 1 64 h of 73 •vss A 78 h of 75 vss 1 76 h. of 80 VBS. 1 80 hymns verses 88 1 874 LSuch is Whitney's table ; and it is well to let it stand, as it furnishes the best argument against treating the paiydyas of books xv. and xvi. each as a single hymn (cf. p. cxxxvi, top). Treating them as explained at p clx, it will appear as follows. Table 3, second form Rohlte Weddbg Vrity* Pantta Sun Funeral Book Book Book Book Book Book Sum of Sum of xUi. xiv XT. XTl zvll xvUL coniams hymns verses 1 h of 26 ‘VSS. 1 26 1 h. of SO VSS 1 SO Ip h of 32 VSS. 1 32 1 h. of 46 vss 1 46 Ip b of 60 vss. 1 60 Ip h of 60 ■VIS 1 66 1 1 hs of 60 VSS. 2 120 Ip 1 hs oteivas. 0 122 1 h, of 64 vss 1 64 1 h of 78 Tss. 1 78 1 h of 76 vss. 1 76 1 h of 6t TSS. 1 89 Ip b. cf 01 TSS. 1 01 4 2 2p 2p 1 4 hymns 16 874 J 188 189 141 OS 80 283 verses cxlvi General Introduction^ Part 11: in part by Whitney several hymns within any given book- It is clear that the subject has not been at all considered , nor is it at all probable that any regard has been had to the authorship, real or claimed (we have no tradition of any value whatever respecting the “ rishis ”) Probably only chance or arbi- trary choice of the arranger dictated the internal ordering of each book LOn this subject there is indeed little that is positive to be said ; but (in order to avoid repetition) I think it best to say that little for each grand division in its proper place under that division • see pages cliv, clvii, and clx J ^Distribution of hymns according to length in the three grand divisions. — Tables i and 2 and 3» — The distribution of the hymns according to their length throughout the books of the three grand divisions is shown by Whitney’s tables i, 2, and 3, preceding The numbers rest on the numera- tions of the Berlin edition, and due reference to the differences of numera- tion of the Bombay edition is made below at p cxlvii A vertical column is devoted to each book and in that column is shown how many hymns of I verse, of 2 or 3 or 4 and so on up to 89 verses, there are m that book, by the number horizontally opposite the number of verses indicated in the column headed by the word contains ” To facilitate the summation of the number of hymns and verses in the Atharva-Veda, the last column but one on the right gives the number of hymns of i vs , of 2 vss and so on, in the division concerned, and the last column on the right gives the total number of verses contained m the hymns of i vs , of 2 vss. and so on (the total in each line being, of course, an exact multiple of the num- ber precedmg in the same line). Accordingly we may read, for example, the sixth Ime of table i as follows . “Book vii contains 10 hymns of 3 verses and book vi contains 122. The sum of hymns of 3 verses in the division is 132, and the sum of verses in those hymns is 396 ”J LTables i and 2 and 3 for divisions I. and II. and III. — These ought properly to come in at this point; but as their form and contents are such that it IS desirable to have them stand on two pages that face each other, they have been put (out of their proper place) on pages cxliv and cxlv J LGrouping of the hymns of book zix. according to length. — Table 4. — Apart from the two hymns, 22 (of 21 verses) and 23 (of 30), which arc in divers ways of very exceptional character, it appears that ev'cry hymn of this book, if judged simply by its verse-total length, would fall into the first grand division, as being of less than 20 verses ^ This fact is of crit- ical interest, and is m keeping with the character of book xix as an aflcr- glcaning, and in particular an after-gleaning of such material as would properly fall into the first grand division (cf. p S95, ^ 2) The table: ’ k^nd so would hjmns zz and 23, if judged Ly Ibeir ac'uul length J 0 I o. Exte7it aitd Structure of the A tharva-Veda Samhita cxl vii x'able 4. The supplement, book xix., one book In book XIX. there are 15 4 2 9 684 3 1 12 2 hymns, Containing respectively I 2 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 verses In book XIX there are 2 I I I I hymns, Total 72 hjmns Containing respectively 14 IS 16 21 30 verses Total 456 verses J LSummary of the four tables. — Table 5 — Extent of AV. Samhita about one half of that of RV. — The totals of hymns and verses of tables 1-4 are summed up in table 5. From this it appears that the number of hymns of the three grand divisions of the Atharva-Veda Samhita is 516 or about one half of that of the Rig-Veda, and that the number of verses IS 4,432 or considerably less than one half If the summation be made to include also the supplement and the parts of book xx which are peculiar to the AV., the number of hymns amounts to 598 or about three fifths of that of the RV , and the number of verses amounts to 5,038 or about one half of that of the RV. Table 5 follows : Tuble 5. Summary of Atharvan Ii3mui8 and verses Grand division I , books i.— vii , Grand division II , books viu -xil, Grand division III , books xm -xviii , contains contains contains 433 45 3S hymns and hymns and hymns and 2030 1528 874 verses verses verses Totals for the three grand divisions 516 hymns and 4432 verses The supplement, book xix , contains 72 hymns and 456 verses Totals for books i — xix 5S8 hjmns and 4SSS lerses The Kuntapa khila of book xx contains 10 hjmns and 150 verses Totals for books i -xix. and khila 598 hj’mns and 503S verses J LThe numbers of tables 1-5 rest on the Berlin edition The differ- ences between that and the Bombay edition do not affect the amount of text, but only the verse-totals Even the verse-totals are not affected, but only the hymn-totals (p 389, I 10), by the differences in book vii For the parydya-hymns, the verse-totals of the Bombay edition amount 1 88 more (see p cxxxvii) than those of the Berlin edition. For the ombay edition, accordingly, the grand total must be raised (by 1S8) 5.038 to 5,226 J I First grand division (books i.-vii.) : short hymns of miscellaneous sub- general considerations of length and subject are indeed su cieni for the separation of books 1 — w’lii into three grand divis’ons nbove, the first division shows yet other signs of being a minor CO eciion apart from the other two In the first place, the hymns that compose it arc mostly genuine charms and imprecations, and near cn the cxiviii Gemral Introduction^ Part II. : in part by Whitney whole a general aspect decidedly different from that of books vni -xviii , as is indeed apparent enough from the table of hymn-titles, pages 1024-37; they are, m fact, by all odds the most characteristic part of the Atharva- Veda, and this is tacitly admitted by the translators of selected hymns (see p cvii), their selections being taken in largest measure (cf p 281} from this division In the second place, the books of this division are sharply distinguished from those of the others by the basis of their inter- nal arrangement, which basis is in part that of a clearly demonstrable verse-norm, a norm, that is to say, which, for each separate book, governs the number of verses in the hymns of that book^J LEvidence of fact as to the existence of the verse-norms. — A most per- vading implicit distinction is made by the Major Anukramanl between this division and the next in its actual method of giving or intimating the length of the hymns In division II , on the one hand, the number of verses is stated expressly and separately for every hymn In division I,, on the other hand, the treatise merely intimates by its silence that the number for any given hymn conforms to the norm assumed for that book, and the number is expressly stated only when it constitutes a departure from that norm. Thus for the 142 hymns of book vi , an express state- ment as to the length is made only for the 20 hymns (given at p 281, lines 17-18) which exceed the norm of three ^ — For convenience of reference, the norms may here be tabulated : Books viu VI Norms r 3 1, il ui iv V. 4 5^7 LExpress testimony of both Anukramanis as to the verse-norms. — The Major Anukr. (at the beginning of its treatment of book 11. : see p 142) expressly states that the normal number of verses for a hjmn of book i. is four, and that the norm increases by one for each successive book of the first five books : pmvakdndasya caturrcaprakrtir tty evam utiaroiiara- kafjdesu sasthain yavad chdikddhikd etc. Than this, nothing could be more clear or explicit Again, at the beginning of its treatment of book iii , it says that in this book it is to be understood that six verses arc the norm, and that any other number is a departure therefrom : oira 1 LThat books 1 -v« are distinctly recognized as a separate unity by the Major Anukr appears also from the fact that for the nght or ■wrong study of its first five fotalas (m which books are treated), speaal blessipgs or curses are promised in a passage at the beginning of the s ** The fact was noted by Weber, rerzeichntis, ■vol. u., p. 79; and the passage was printed by bur' on p 81 J * LAl L i, and also at v 9 and to (these two lur prose pieces), the treatise states the num when it is normal This is not unnatural at i. i, the beginning, and considering the prevalU^ departure from the norm in book v., it is not surprising there. On the other hand, the alons at ii. 36 and n. 121 are probably by inadvertence 1 10. Extent and St'i'uctu7'e of the Atha^'va-Veda Sa^Jz/nta cxlix saarcnf'^'nkrtir anya vikrtir tit vtjdniydt At the beginning of book iv. it has a remark of like purport : brahma jajndnam zti kande sapiarcasukta- prakitir (so London ms. : cf. p 142 below) anyd vikrtir ity avagachct. Moreover, it defines book vi as the trcasuktakdndavi (cf. pages 281, 388), and adds to the definition the words tatra ircaprakitir ztard vikrtir iti Cf Weber’s Vcrseichniss der Berliner Sansknt-kss., vol 11 , p 79 J [In the recognition of the verse-norms, as in much else (p Ixxii, top), the Pancapatalika serves as source and guide for the author of the Major Anukr Thus the older treatise calls book ii. * the five-versed ’ (see the citation at p. 45), and book 111 in like manner ‘the six-versed’ (seep cxl) Cf also the statements of the next paragraph as to book vii.J LOne verse is the norm for book vii. — The absence of any book in which two-versed hymns are the norm, and the frequency of two-versed hymns in book vii , might lead us to think that both one-versed and two-versed hymns are to be regarded as normal for book vii (cf p 388, line 13); but this IS not the case (cf line 24 of the same page). The Major Anukr. speaks of book vn. as ‘ the book of one-versed hymns^’ ekarcasiiktakdndam , and Its testimony is confirmed by the Old Anukr , as cited by SPP. on p 18 of his Cntical Notice, which says, ‘among the one-versed hymns [1 e. in book vii ], [the anuvdkas are or consist] of hymns made of one verse,’ rk-suktd ekarcesu F urther confirmation of the view that one (not one or two) IS the true norm for book vii is found in the fact that the Anukr. is silent as to the length of the hymns of one verse (cf. p. cxlviii), but makes the express statement dvyrcam for each of the thirty^ hymns of two verses J LArrangement of books i,-vii. with reference to verse-norms. — If we examine table i (p cxliv), m which these books are set in the ascending numencal order of their verse-norms, several facts become clear It is apparent, in the first place, that this division is made up of those seven books in which the number — normal or prevalent — of ver-ses to a h>mn runs from one to eight , secondly, that the samhitd itself begins with the norm of four; and, thirdly, that the number two as a norm is missing from the senes. Fourthly, it is indeed apparent that every book shows departures from its norm , but also — what is more important in this con- nection — that these departures are all on one side, that of e.xcess, and never on that of deficiency J ^ L'rhis IS the true number The number 26, g!\cn at p cxliv in table i, rests on the actual hjTnn-diMbions of the Berlin text On account of the discordance, the 30 hjmns ma) here be named i, 6 1-2, 6 3-4, 13, iS, 22, 25. 29, 40-4=. 47-49. 5-. 54 = "itli 55 ‘ 61. 04, 6S 1-2, 72 ',^3^ yg 112-114, 116 (They are \ei7 con\enientf) shown in the table, p 1021 J Note on the other hand the silence of the Anukr, as to our 45, 54 i, 6S 3* and 72 3 Its silence means that our 45 r (ueer, Trask anva) and 45 2 (Athamn) and 54 i (Brahman) form three one-\‘ersed hjmns, a fact which is borne out b\ the ascriptions of quasi nuthorship, and that 6S 3 and 72 3 form t\\ o more J cl General Introduction^ Part II. : in part by Whitney |_We may here digress to add that, if we compare table i with those following, it appears, fifthly, that in book vii are put all the hymns of the three grand divisions that contain only i or 2 verses; sixthly, that neither in this division, nor yet in the other two, nor even in book xix , is there a hymn of 19 verses, nor yet one of 20 ^ From table i, again, it appears, seventhly, that this division contains a hymn or hymns of every number of verses from 4 verses to 1 8 verses (mostly in books i — v.) and from I verse to 3 verses (exclusively in books vi. and vii.) J [.Excursus on hymn xix. 23, Homage to parts of the Atharva-Veda. — It is worth while at this point to recall to the reader’s mind this remark- able hymn m its bearing upon some of the questions as to the structure of our text see pages 93 1-4, and especially ■’[[ 6 of p. 93 1 As our sam^ hitd begins with four-versed hymns, so does xix 23 begin with homage “ to them of four verses ” (p 931, line 29), and not with homage “ to them of one verse ” Again, grouping all hymns of four verses or more in this division according to length, there are 15 groups (not in the least con- terminous with books) each containing a hymn or hymns of every num- ber of verses from 4 to 18, and to these 15 groups the first 15 verses of xix, 23 correspond (p. 931, line 27) Again, of the fact that books 1 -xviii contain not one hymn of 19 verses nor yet one of 20, account seems to be taken in that the form of verses 16 and 17 differs from that of the 15 preceding (p 931, line 37) Again, as m our series the norm two is lacking, so also is lacking in xix 23 a dvyrcebhyah svdlid (but cf p 93 1> line 28, with p 933, line 2). Finally the verses of homage ‘^to them of three verses” and “to them of one verse” (xix 23 19-20) stand m the same order relative to each other and to the verses of homage to the 1 5 groups as do books vi. and vii to each other and to the books containing the hymns of more than three verses, namely bool^s i — v. — Cf. further pages clvii and clix.J l_We now return to the arrangement of the books within the division by norms. — The norms of books 1.— vii. respectively, as the books stand in our text, are 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 3, i. From this point of view, the books fall into two groups . group X contains books i — v., and its norms make a sim- ple continuous ascending numerical scale beginning with four (4, 5i > group Y contains books vi. and vii , and its norms make a broken descend- ing numerical scale beginning vith three (3, i). Here several questions arise as to group Y : first, why is its scale inverted, that is, \\hy does not book vn. precede book \'i. ^ second, why does not group Y (and in the reversed order, vii , vi.) precede group X, so as to make the whole series begin, as is natural, with one instead of four, and run on in the text as it does in the table at p exHv ? and, third, w'hy is the scale broken, that * Ltn the Kontapakhila there arc iw> hymns of jo J 10. Extent and Stinicture of the Athai'va-Veda Sa7hhitd di IS, why have not the diaskeuasts made eight books of the first division, including not only one for the one-versed hymns, but also another for the two-versed ?J [With reference to the last question, it is clear that the amount of matenal composing the two-versed hymns (30 hymns with only 60 verses . seep cxlix,note) is much too small to make a book reasonably commensurate with the books of the first division , it is therefore natural that the original groupings of the text-makers should include no book with the norm of two J [Exceptional character of hook vii. — The first two questions, concern- ing group Y or books vi and vii , are closely related, inasmuch as they both ask or involve the question why book vii does not precede book vi By way of partial and provisional answer to the second, it is natural to suggest that perhaps the scrappy character of the one-versed and two- versed hymns militated against beginning the Vedic text with book vii And indeed this view is not without indirect support from Hindu tradition . for according to the BrJiad-Devata, viii. 99, the ritualists hold that a hymn, in order to be rated as a genuine hymn, must have at least three verses, ticddhamam yajnikdh suktam dhuJf It may well be, therefore, that the diaskeuasts did not regard these bits of one or two verses as real hymns, as in fact they have excluded them ngorously from all the books 1 — vi From this point of view our groups X and Y have no significance except for the momentary convenience of the discussion, and the true grouping of books i.-vii should be into the two groups, A, containing books i -vi , and B, containing book vii J [The exceptional character of book vii is borne out by several other considerations to which reference is made below. Its place in the sai}i- hitd IS not that which we should expect, whether we judge by the fact that its norm is one verse or by the amount of its text (p cxliii) If we consider the number of its hymns that are ignored by Kaugika (see pp 1011-2), again we find that it holds a very exceptional place in division I Many of its hymns have a put-together look, as is stated at P cliv ; and this statement is confirmed by their treatment in the Paip- palada recension (p. 1014, 1 15). Just as its hymns stand at the end of its grand division in the Vulgate, so they appear for the most part in the very last book of the Paippalada (cf p 1013, end) As compared with the great mass of books i -vi , some of its hymns (vii 73, for instance) are quite out of place among their fellows J ^ Lt'or the productions of modem hymnolo^, one hardlj errs m regardmg three verses as the standard minimum length, a length convenient for use, whether in reading or singing, and for remembering A two-versed h}Tnn is too short for a dignified unity Possibl) similar con- siderations may have had ,^'alidity with the ancient text-makers J clii Gemral Introdtiction^ Part //. : in part by Whitney LBook vii. a book of after-gleanings supplementing books i.-vi It is very easy to imagine group A, or books i -vi , as constituting the original nucleus ^ of the samlntd (p cxlviii, top),, and group B, or book vii , as being an ancient supplement to that nucleus/] ust as book xix is unquestionably a later supplement to the larger collection of the three grand divisions (cf p 895) This view does not imply that the verses of book vii are one whit less ancient or less genuinely popular than those of books i -vi., , but merely that, as they appear in their collected form, they have the aspect of bemg after-gleanings, relatively to books i-vi This view accords well with the exceptional character of book vii. as otherwise established and as just set forth (p cli).J [.Arrangement of books with reference to amount of text. — If these con- siderations may be deemed a sufficient answer to the first two questions so far as they relate to book vii., there remains only that part of the second question which relates to book vi One does not readily see why the samhitd might not have opened with book vi , the book of the vaned and interesting three-versed hymns, so that the norms would have run in the order 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 (i) , and, since this is not the case, it may be that some other principle is to be sought as a co-determinant of the order of arrangement J [.If we consult the table on p cxliii, we see that, in division I , the scale of numbers of printed pages of text in each book (13, 16, 20, 27, 28, 40, 27) is a continuously ascending one for each book except the last (book vii ) The like is true if we base our companson on the more pre- cise scale of verse-totals for each book (153, 207, 230, 324, 376, 454, 286), as given at the foot of table i, p cxliv.J |_These facts, m the first place, strongly corroborate our view as to the exceptional character of book vii By the pnnciple of norms, it should stand at the beginning of the division , by the principle of amount (judged by verse-totals), it should stand between books 111 and iv That it does neither is hard to explain save on the assumption of its posteriority as a collection In the second place, these facts suggest at the same time the reason for the position of book vi in the division, namely, that it is placed after books i — v because it is longer than any of those books J l.R&um6 of conclusions as to the arrangement of hooks i.-vii. — Book vii , as a supplement of after-gleanings, is placed at the end of the grand division, wthout regard to amount of text or to verse-norm Books r-vi arc arranged pnmarily according to the amount of text,^ in an ascending scale. For them the element of verse-norms, also in an ascending scale, 1 |_If asked to discnmmate between the books of that nucleus, I should put books vi and i and iu first (cf p clui, ^3) , at all events, book v stands in marked contrast with those three J - b'V^cther this amount is judged bj verse-totals or by pages, the order is the same.J 10. Extent and Structure of tfie Atharva-Veda Samhita cliii appears as a secondary determinant. It conflicts with the primary deter- minant in only one case/ that of book vi , and is accordingly there subordinated to the primary one, so that book vi (norm * 3) is placed after books 1 -V. (norms * 4-8) J LDepartures from the norms by excess. — The cases of excess are most numerous in book v. (see p. 220), and concern over of all the hymns. On the other hand, the cases of conformity to the norm are most numer- ous in books VI. and 1. and concern about f of the hymns in each book. For books 11,, iv., vii., and iii respectively, the approximate vulgar fraction of cases of conformity is |, and |. For each of the seven books, in the order of closeness of conformity to the verse-norm, the more precise frac- tion is as follows for book vi , it is .859 ; for i , it is .857 ; for ii , it is 61 , for IV , it IS .52 , for vii , it is .47 , for 111 , it is .42 ; and for v , it is 06 J LCritical significance of those departures. — From the foregoing para- graph it appears that the order of books arranged by their degree of conformity (vi , i , li ), agrees with their order as arranged by their verse-norms (3, 4, 5), for the books of shorter hymns. This is as it should be ; for if the distinction of popular and hieratic hymns is to be made for this division, the briefest would doubtless fall into the prior class, the class less liable to expansion by secondary addition.J We are not without important indications 2 that the hymns may have been more or less ^tampered with since their collection and arrangement, so as now to show a greater number of verses than originally belonged to them Thus some hymns have been expanded by formulized variations of some of their verses , and others by the separation of a single verse into more than one, with the addition of a refrain L^^t others have suffered expansion by downright interpolations or by additions at the end , while some of abnormal length may represent the luxtaposition of two unrelated pieces J Illustrative examples of critical reduction to the norm. — L^he instances that follow should be taken merely as illustrations To discuss the cases systematically and thoroughly would require a careful study of everj^ case of excess with reference to the structure of the hymn concerned and to its form and extent in the parallel texts, — m short, a special investigation.^J ^ L'^hat the two orders, based on the one and the other determinant, should agree throughout fjooks J -V. IS no doubt partly fortuitous , but it is not vetwjsttange The ^•anallon in the num- ber of hymns for each book (35, 36, 31, .}0, 31) is confined to narrow limits . and if, as is prob- ttblojtlie departures from the norm were originally fewer and smaller than now, the \crsc totals for each book would come nearer to being precise multiples of those ascending norms J ‘ LCf p 281, ^ 2 J * LA vet) great part of the data necess.ary for the conduct of such an inquiry maj be found already con\cnienUy assembled m this work in \Yhilney’s ctiUcal notes, for, although div General Introdnction^ Part II: tn part by W/iitney Thus m i 3 (see p 4), verses 2-5 are merely repetitions of verse i (and senseless repetitions, because only Parjanya, of the deities named, could with any propriety be called the father of the reed cf i 2 i) , while verses 7 & 8 have nothing to do with the refrain and are to be combined into one verse we have then four verses, the norm of the book Once more, in ii. 10 (see p 51), no less evidently, the verse-couples 2 & 3, 4 & 5, and 6 & 7 are to be severally combined into three single verses, with omission of the refrain, which belongs only to verses i and 8 so that here we have five verses, again the normal number So, further, in 111 31 (see p 141), as it seems clear, 2 & 3, without the refrain, make verse 2 , 4 with the refrain is verse 3 , and 5 is a senseless intrusion , then, omitting all further repetitions of the refrain, 6 & 7 make verse 4 , 8 & 9 make verse 5 , and 10 & 1 1 make yerse 6, six being here the verse-norm In book VI , a number of hymns which exceed the regular norm are formular and would bear reduction to hymns of three verses instances are hymns 17, 34, 38, 107, 132 (_The cases are quite numerous in which the added verse is lacking in one of the parallel texts Thus m book vi , hymns 16, 17, 34, 63, 83, 108, 121, and 128 (see the* critical notes on those hymns and cf p 1014,1 16) appear in the Paippalada text as hymns of three verses each J Besides these cases, there are not a few others where we may with much plausibility assume that the verses in excess are later appendixes or interpolations* such are 1 29 4—5 , 11 3 6, 32 *6 , 33 3ab4cd, 6; 111 15*7-8, 21 6, 8-10 (see note under vs 7), 29 7-8; iv 2 8 , 16 8-9, 17 3; 39 9-10 1 VI 16 4, 63 4, 83 4, 122 3, 5 , 123 3-4 In book vin, moreover, the put-together character of many of the longer hymns is readily apparent (cf hymns 17, 38, 50, 53, 76, 79, and 82 as they appear in the table on p 1021). But such analyses, even if pushed to an extreme, will not dispose of all the cases of an excess in the number of verses of a hymn above the norm of the book : thus lii 16 corresponds to a Rig-Veda hymn of seven verses , IV 30 and 33 each to one of eight ; and v 3 to one of nine It will be necessaiy to allow that the general principle of arrangement l_by verse- normsj was not adhered to absolutely without exception bArrangement of the hymns within any given book of this division. In continuation of what was said in general on this topic at p cxliii, we may add the following The “ first ” hymn {purvari), ** For the retention of sacred learning,” is of so distinctly prefatory character as to stand of scattered through those notes, they may yet be said to be “ assembled in one rrork, and more '^conveniently” than ever before The investigation is likely to jneld results of interest and value J lo. Exie^it and St}'ucture of tJie Atharva-Veda Samhita civ right at the very beginning of the text, or removed therefrom only by the prefixion of the auspicious gam no devtr abhistaye (p cxvi). It is note- worthy that books ii , iv , v., and vii begin each with a “ Mystic ” hymn ; that the five kindred hymns “ Against enetnies ” are grouped together at 11. 19-23, as are the seven Mrgara-hymns at iv 23-29 Hymns 111 26-27 are grouped in place and by name, as dtgyukic , and so are the “two Brahman-cow” hymns, v 18 and 19, and the vdtgvdnanya couple, vi 35 and 36 The hymns “To fury” make a group in the AV (iv. 31-32) as they do in the RV . from which they are taken J [Second grand division (books viii.-xii.) : long hymns of miscellaneous sub- jects, — As was said of the first division (p cxlvii), there are other things besides length and subject which mark this division as a minor collection apart from the other two the verse-norms do not serve here, as in division I , to help determine the arrangement, the norms assumed by the Panca- patalika (p cxxxix) being for another purpose and of small significance , and the reader may be reminded of the fact (p cxxxn) that the grouping of verses into decads runs through this grand division It is a note- worthy fact, moreover, that the material of division II appears distinctly to form a collection by itself, m the Paippalada recension, being massed m books xvi and xvii The Vulgate books viii -xi are mostly in Paipp xvi and the Vulgate book xii is mostly in Paipp. xvii This is readily seen from the table on p 1022 J [Their hieratic character: mmgled prose passages. — More important differential features are the following In the first place, if it be admitted that the first division is in very large measure of popular origin (p cxlvii), the second, as contrasted therewith, is palpably of hieratic ongin * witness the hymns that accompany, with tedious prolixity, the offering of a goat and five rice-dishes (ix 5) or of a cow and a hundred rice-dishes (x 9) , the exfoliation of the mrdj (viii 9), of the cow (x. 10), of the rice-dish and the prana and the Vedic student (xi 3—5) and the 7 icc/ns(a (xi 7} , the hymn about the cow as belonging exclusively to the Brahmans (\n 4) ; the prevalence of “ mystic ” hymns (cf viii 9 ; ix 9-10 , x 7-8 , xi 8) , the priestly riddles or brahmodyas (cf x 2, especially verses 20-25) , and the taking over of long continuous passages from the Rig-Veda, as at ix 9-10 In no less striking contrast with division I , in the second place, is the presence, m every book of division II , of an extensive passage of prose (vui 10, ix 6, 7 , x 5 , xi'3 ; xii 5) This prose is in style and content much like that of the Brahmanas, and is made up of what are called (sa\e in the case of x. 5) ‘periods’ or patydyas' see pages cxxxiit and 472 It is evident that we are here in a sphere of thought decidedly different from that of division I J clvi General Introductimi^ Part II.: hi part by Whitney LTable of verse-totals for the hymns of division II. — The following table may be worth the space it takes, as giving perhaps a better idea of the make-up of the division than does the table on p cxliv. Opposite each of the five prose /<2^/^^-hymns is put a p, and opposite the hymn X 5 (partly prose) is put a p Disregarding the hymns thus marked, the verse-numbers are confined, for books viii -xl, within the range of vana- tion from 21 to 44, and from 53 to 63 for book xii. Hymn in vui m IX in X. in XI in xii I has 21 24 32 37 63 2 28 25 33 31 55 3 26 31 25 56 P 60 4 25 24 26 26 53 5 22 38 sop 26 73 P 6 26 62 P 35 23 7 28 26 P 44 27 8 24 22 44 34 9 26 22 27 26 10 33 P 28 34 27 General make-up of the material of this division. — Whereas division I contains a hymn or hymns of every number of verses from one to eighteen and none of more, division II consists wholly of hymns of more than twenty verses, and contains all the hymns of that length occurring in books 1 -xviii except such as belong of right (that is, by virtue of their subject) to the third division ^ The forty-five hymns of this division have been grouped into books with very evident reference to length and num- ber, as shown by the table just given * the five longest have been put together to form the last or twelfth book, while each of the four preced- ing books contains an even quarter of the preceding forty or just ten hymns Disregarding ix, 6 and xi 3 {patydya-hymns), books viii -xi con- tain all the hymns of from 21-50 verses to be found in the first two grand divisions, and book xii contains all of more than 50 in th*e same divisions Anything more definite than this can hardly be said respecting the arrange- ment of the several books within the second division From the tables it appears that no such reference to the length of the hymns has been had in division II as was had in division I None of the books viii —xii is without one of the longer, formular, and mainly non-metrical pieces (marked with p or p m the table above) ; and this fact ma)'^ point to an inclination on the part of the text-makers to scatter those prose portions as much as possible among the poetical ones ^ LSee the tables, pages cxli\-cxl\ — Book xix. contains two hymns, mostly prose, of which the subdivisions number 21 and 30 (cf p cxlvu); and among the Kuntipa-hymns are three of 20 or more verses J 10. Extent and Structure of the Atharua-Veda Sa7hhita clvii [Order of books within the division : negative or insignificant conclusions. — If we consider, first, the amount of text in pages ^ for each book, namely 22, 21, 27, 25, 22, the series appears to have no connection with the order of the books, on the contrary, the books are, on the whole, remarkable for their approximate equality of length The case is similar, secondly, with the hymn-totals of the Bombay edition, 15, 15, 10, 12, and 1 1 Thirdly, the verse-totals for each of the five books, according to the numeration of the Berlin edition, are 259, 302, 350, 313, and 304 (see above, p cxliv), a sequence in which we can trace no orderly progression. On the other hand, fourthly, if we take the verse-totals of the Bombay edition, to wit, 293, 313, 350, 367, and 304,^ we see that the first four books, viii -xi , are indeed arranged, like books 1 — vi (p. clii), on a con- tinuously ascending arithmetical scale Furthermore and fifthly, if, for the verse-totals of each of the five books, we make the (very easy) substi- tution of the average verse-totals of the hymns of each book, we ojjtain again a series, to wit, 293, 31 3, 35 o, 36.7, and 60 s, which progresses con- stantly in one direction, namely upward, and through all the five books J Arrangement of the hymns within any given book of this division. — [From the table on p clvi it would appear that the individual hymns are not disposed within the book with any reference to length It may, how- ever, be by design rather than accident that the only hymn with the small- est number of verses in this division is put at the beginning, and that the longest is put last J The arrangement m this division, like that in the first, shows no signs of a systematic reference to the subjects treated of, although (as in division I : p civ, top), in more than one instance, two hymns of kindred character are placed together * thus viii i & 2 ; 3 & 4 ; 9 & 10 ; ix 4 & 5 ; 9 & 10 ; x 7 & 8 ; 9 & 10 ; xi 9 & 10 , xii 4 & 5. - [Possible reference to this division in hymn xix. 23. — Such reference, I suspect, must be sought in verse 18, if anywhere, and in the two ^ords Tfiahat-kdnddya svdhd, ‘ to the division of great [hymns], hail ! ’ See P 93 i» ^ 7, and the note to vs 18 J [Postscript. — Such was my view when writing the introduction to xix 23 Even then, however, I stated (p. 932, line 12) that verses 21 and 22 were not accounted for. Meantime, a new observation bears upon vs. 21 J [Immediately "after the passage referred to at p. cxlviii, foot-note, the Major Anukr., at the beginning of its treatment of book viii , proceeds : * Now are set forth the seers and di\anities and meters of the mantras of ' [As pnnted m the Berlin edition (see above, p cxlui) From a nS^ari ms. vmttcn in "a hand of uniform site, I might obtain different and interprctable data J ® [This series differs from the Berlin sequence b> a plus of 34 and ll and 54 In the first and second and fourth memt^rs respectively t see p cxaxvu, and cf pages 5 * 15 , 54^ J clviii GencraL introdtiction^ Part II. . tn part by Whitney the sense- hymns of the ksndra-kandas {> or -kanda ?). To the end of the eleventh kanda, the sense-hymn is the norm ’ etc. atha ksndra-kanda- ' Hhasukta-viantrdnani rsi-ddivata-chandahsy ucyante. iaio ydvad ekddaca- kdnda-ntant arthasukta-prakiiis tdvad vihdya par^’dydn virdd vd (viii lo) pi'abhi'tin tit etc What pertinence the word ksiidra may have as applied to books viiL-xi I cannot divine; but it can hardly be an accident that the very same word is used m the phrase of homage to parts of the AV. at XIX 22 6 and 23 21, ksndrtbhyah svdhd, and that this phrase is followed in h 22 and in the comm’s text of h 23, by the words parydyiktbhyah svdhdy that is, by an allusion to the parydyas, just as in the text of the Anukr Apart from vss 16-18 of xix 23, vss 1—20 refer most clearly to the first grand division ; and vss 23-28 refer just as clearly to the third The allusion to the second ought therefore certainly to come in between vs 20 and vs 23, that is it ought to be found in vss 21 and 22 .We have just given reason for supposing that vs 21 contains the expected allusion The meaning of ekdnrcdbliyah of vs 22 is as obscure as is the pertinence of ksudribhyah , probably ekdnrcdbhyah is a corrupt reading If I am right as to vs. 21, the mystery of vs 18 becomes only deeper. J Third grand division (hooks xiii -xviii.) ; hooks characterized hy unity of subject. — The remaining six books constitute each a whole by itself and appear to have been on that account kept undivided by the arrangers and placed in a body together at the end of the collection The books in which the unity of subject is most clearly apparent are xiv (the wed- ding verses), xviii (the funeral verses), and xv. (exfoliation of the Vratya) LThe unity of books xiii, and xvii , although less striking, is yet sufficiently evident, the one consisting of h)aims to the Sun as The Ruddy One or Rohita, and the other being a prayer to the Sun as identified wuth Indra and with Vishnu In book xvi , the unity of subject is not apparent,^ although it seems to consist in large measure (seep 792) of “Prayers- against the terror by night.”J Book xvi is not so long that wo might not have thought it possible that it should be included as a parydyasnkfa in one of the books of the second division , and book xvii , too, is so bnef that it might well enough have been a hymn in a book [_Hindu tradition assigns at least four of the books of this division each to a single seer; the whole matter is more fully set forth at p 1038 However much or little value we may attach to these ascriptions of ^ j_In one of the old drafts of a part of his introduc^orj’ matter, Whitne • Unt I rs-e understand the character of the ceremonies in connection with -rhich boot. 'ft'as uisd, it maj not be easy to dlsco^er a parijcular conor.n.ty in it Witn refe.^i ce to that remarh, I ha.c said, at p 79:* 'Fhc study of the ritnal applications tf tlie booh distinctly fails, ir try opinion, to TCI cal any prtirradng conmnn tv of or ol use J ® Lrerfcsps, ua o£ -i PiUj term, rre insy desipiste look tm a Paritta-J lo. Exteiit and Structure of the Atharva-Veda Sahzhita clix quasi-authorship, they are certainly of some significance as a clear mark of differentiation between this division and the other two J LDivision III. represented in Paippalada by a single book, book xviii An Item of evidence important in its relation to the Vulgate division III as a separate unity is afforded by the treatment of that division in the Kashmirian recension : the Vulgate books xiii.-j^iii , namely, are all grouped by the makers of the Paippalada text into a single book, book xviii , and appear there either in cxtenso or else by representative citations The relations of the Vulgate division to the Paipp. book are set forth in detail at p 1014, which see.J LNames of these books as given by hymn xix. 23. — It is a most signifi- cant fact, and one entirely in harmony with the classification of books xiii -xviii. on the basis of unity of subject, that they should be mentioned in hymn xix 23 by what appear to be their recognized names. It is therefore here proper to rehearse those names as given in verses 23-28 of the hymn (see pages 931, ^ 5, and 933) They are: for book xiii , * the ruddy ones,’ rdlniebhyas, plural ; for xiv., ‘ the two Suryas,’ suryd- dhydm, or the two [anuvdkas] of the book beginning with the hyhin of Surya’s wedding, for xv.',ythe two [amivakas] about the vrdtya,’ vratyd- bkydm (accent!), for xvi , 'the two \anuvdkas] of Frajapati/ /rd/d/a/yd- bhydm, for xvii , ‘the Visasahi,’ singular; and for xviii, ‘the auspicious ones,’ viaugahkdbhyas, euphemism for the inauspicious funeral verses J LOrder of books within the division. — The verse-totals for the books are, by the Berlin numeration, 188, 139, 141, 93, 30, and 283, and, by the Bombay numeration, 188, 139, 220, 103, 30, and 283 (above, p. cxx.wii). But for the disturbing influence of the numerous brief par} coincident with the anuvdka-dwisxovi Book xiv. is divided into two hymns by both editions, not without the support of the mss ; but the Major Anukr. seems rather to indicate that the book should not be divided (for details, see pages 738-9) : the hymn-division is here at any rate question- able Book xviii, properly speaking, is not a book of hymns at all, but rather a book of verses The Paftcapatalika says that these verses are ‘disposed' {yihitas) in four annvdkas (see p 814, ^ 5, and note the word paraht masculine) • from which we may infer that the anuvdka-^xh^^on is of considerable antiquity; but the significance of the coincident hymn- division is minimized by the facts that a ritual sequence runs over the division-line between hymns i and 2 (see p 814, ^ and p 827, ^2) and that the division between hymns 3 and 4 ought to come just before 3. 73 (and not just after : see p 848, ^ 8) Even with book xiii the case is essentially not very different : see the discussions in Deussen s lo. Extent and SttnicUire of tlie Atharva-Veda Samhita clxi Gcschtchie, i i 215-230 Book xvil consists of a single anuvdka (it is the only book of which this is true, p. 805), and although m the colo- phons the mss apply both designations, anuvdka and art/ia-sfikta, to its 30 verses (which the mss divide into decads), it is truly only one hymn J [The _pajydjya-hooks, books xv and xvi remain These, as appears from the tables on pages 771 and 793, consist each of two anuvdkas with 7 and II and with 4 and 5 parydyas respectively. When writing the introduc- tions to those books, I had not seriously considered the proper grouping of the paiydyas (cf p 770, lines 29-30) The discussion at p cxxx, above, seems now to make it probable that the pa^'dya-groups should be assumed, as everywhere else from book xii -xviii , to be conterminous with the anuvdkas The bearing of this assumption on the method of citation IS treated at p. cxxxvi, above. The effect of this assumption upon the summations is shown in table 3, second form, p cxlv, and in the table on p clx.J i Cross-references to Explanation of Abbreviations and so forth LAs such explanations are often sought at the end of the matter paged with Roman numerals (or just before page i of the pages numbered with Arabic), it will be well to give here cross-references to certain matters most frequently sought for, as follows : PACKS For explanation of abbreviations, see ■* . . xcix-cvi For explanation of abbreviated titles, see . xcix-evi For explanation of arbitrary signs, see ... c For key to the designations of the manoscripts, see . cix-cx For synoptic tables of the manuscripts, see . cx-cxi For description of the manuscripts, see cxi-cxvi 'For table of titles of hymns, see volume VIII., . . ' 1024-1037J * ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH WITH A CRITICAL AND EXEGETICAL COMMENTARY. Book I. The first book is made up mostly of hymns of 4 verses each, and no other ground of its existence as a book needs to be sought. It contains 30 such hymns, but also one (34) of 5 verses, two (i I and 29) of 6 verses, one (7) of 7, and one (3) of 9. There are conjectural reasons to be given in more than one of these cases for the exceptional length. Hymns of 4 verses are also found in books vi. and vii. (12 in vL, and ii in vii.), also 9 in xix. The whole book has been translated by Weber, Indtsch^ Stiidicn, vol. iv. (1858), pages 393-430 I. For the retention of sacred learning. \Atharvan — vScaspatyam caUtrrcam dttu^lul/hatn 4 4p vtrSd uroh-haftl The hymn is found also near the beginning of Paipp i, MS (iv 12 i end) has the first two verses It is called in Kau? (7 8 , 139 10) tnsaptlya, from its second word ; hut it IS further styled (as prescribed in 7. 8) bnefly pafva * first,’ and generall} quoted by that name. It is used in the ceremony for “production of wisdom ” {rnedhajatiana . 10. i), and in those for the welfare of a Vedic student (11. r) , further, with \anons other passages, in that of entrance upon Vedic study (139 10) , and it is also referred to, in an obscure way (probably' as representing the whole Veda of which it is the beginning), m a number of other ntes with which it has no apparent connection (12 10 J 4 * I ; 18. 19; 25. 4, 32. 28), finally (13 i, note), it is reckoned as belonging to the varcasya gana And the comm. Lp 5, endj quotes it as used bv a part(ts/a (5 3) in Puspsbhtseka of a king The VSit takes no notice of it Translated Weber, iv. 393 ; GnfiSth, 1 i. I. The thrice seven that go about, bearing all forms — let the lord of speech assign to me today their powers, [their] selves {iamt) I'pp reads paryatiit in and ianvam adJiyBdadhBtu tne for d. MS combines irtsttptas in a, and iam d 'dyd in d. The s of our tnsapta is presenbed in PrSt li 9S , vBcas p^ is quoted under Pr5t 11 71. Truaptis 13 plainly used as the designation of an indefinite number, =r * doiens ’ or wore*.’ Supposing frtt/d to signify one’s acquired sacred knowledge, portion of 1 I- BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 2 it perhaps refers to the sounds or syllables of ^which this is made up. If, on the other hand, (^rtita (as in vi 41. i) means ‘sense of heanng,’ the tnsaptas may be the healthy hearers, old and young (so R ). R prefers to regard tanvds as gen smg tanvd me = ‘to me’ , the comm, does the same , Weber understands accus. pi Read m our edition bdla (an accent-sign dropped out under -la) As an example of the wisdom of the comm , it may be mentioned that he spends a full quarto page and more on the explanation of trisapt&s. First, he conjectures that it may mean ‘ three or seven ’ ; as the three worlds, the three gitnas, the three highest gods , or, the seven seers, the seven planets, the seven' troops of Manits, the seven worlds, the seven meters, or the like Secondly, it may mean ‘ three sevens,’ as seven suns (for which is quoted TA i 7 i) and seven pnests and seven Adityas (TA 1 13 3 , RV. ix.ir4 3), or seven rivers and seven worlds and seven quarters (TB li 8 38), or seven planets and seven seers and seven Marut-troops Thirdly, it may sigmfy simply thnce seven or twenty-one, as twelve months + five seasons + three worlds + one sun (TS vii 3 los), or five mahdbhutas -f five breaths -h five jRanen- drtyas -h five kannendt tyas -f- one antahkara 7 ia At any rate, they are gods, who are to render aid LDiscussed by Whitney, Pesigruss an Roth, p 94. J 2 Come again, lord, of speech, together with divine mind; lord of good, make [it] stay {iii-ratn) ; in me, in myself be what is heard. Two of our mss (HO) have ramaya in c. Ppp begins with upa neha, and has asospate m c, which R prefers But MS. rather favors our text, reading, for c, d, vdsupate vl ramaya mdyy evd ianvdm mdtna; and it begins a wth upapriht. The comm explains (rutam as upddhyayad vidhtto *dhftam veda^dsirSdtkam ; and adds “ because, though well learned, it is often forgotten ” 3 Just here stretch thou on, as it were the two tips of the bow with the bow-string , let the lord of speech make fast Igii-yaiti) ; in me, in my- self, be what is heard. Ppp reads, m a, b, tanil ubhey aratnf With the verse is to be compared RV. x. 166 3 Prat 1 82 prescnbes the pada-xtsAm'g of artnTotva, and iv. 3 quotes abhl vl tanu LThat is, apparently (a), ‘ Do (for me] some stretching [or fastening],’ namely, of my sacred learning, as also in c. J 4 Called on is the lord of speech ; on us let the lord of speech call ; may we be united with (sam-gani) what is heard ; let me not be parted with what is heard. Ppp has, for b ff , upahilto 'ham vdcaspatyu sotnsrUna rSdhasi sSmriena vt rildhast — badly corrupt For similar antitheses with see AB 11.27? VS 11 10 b, II a In AA (n 7 i) is a somewhat analogous formula for the retention of what is heard or studied (adhltd) ^rutam me md pra hdsir attend 'dhltend 'hordirSnt sat» dadhdmi The Anukr notes the metrical irregulant) of the second pada. 2. Against injury and disease; with a reed. [Atfiarian — cStidramasatr ; fSrjanyart Snuttubbi'm 3 Sp ttrdjinStrta giyatri) ‘Ihe h\mn is not found in the PJiipp ms^ but ma> ha%c been among the contents of the missing first leaf In the quotations of the KSui; it ts not distinguishable from the following hjmn, but the comm is doubtless right in regarding it as intended at 14- 7 » 3 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I -1 3 where it, with i 19-21 and sundry other hymns, is called sdmgramika or ‘battle-hymn,’ used in rites for putting an enemy to flight, and it (or vs i) is apparently designated hy ^rathamasya (as first of the sdingrdmtka hymns) in 14 12, where the avoidance of wounds by arrows is aimed at, it is also reckoned (14 7, note) as belonging to the apardjtia gaiuij further, it is used, with 11 3, in a healing ceremony (25 6) for assuag- ing wounds, etc , and, after hjmn i has been emplojed in the npakarjnan, it and the other remaining hymns of the anuvdka are to be muttered (139 ii) The comm Lp 16, topj, once more, quotes it" from Naksatra |_error, for Qanh, says Bloomfield J Kalpa 17, 18, as applied in a viakaqdntt called apardjtia Translated Weber, iv 394 , Gn/fith, 1 3 , Bloomfield, 8, 233 — Discussed Bloom- field, AJP vii. 4675 orJAOS xiii p cxiii, YXortva^ Bezzenberger's Bctirage^xw 178 ff 1 We know the reed’s father, Parjanya the much-nourishing, and we know well its mother, the earth of many aspects Vtdmd IS quoted in PraL iu 16 as the example first occumng in the text of a lengthened final a 2 O bow-string, bend about us , make thyself a stone , being hard, put very far away niggards [and] haters A bow-stnng is, by Kau? 14 13, one of the articles used m the nte With b com- pare 11 13 4 b Pada d is RV £1 16. 5 d ‘ Niggard ’ is taken as conventional render- ing of drdit The comm reads vrius, RV -wise 3. When the kine, embracing the tree, sing the quivering dexterous rb/n^) reed, keep away frorh us, O Indra, the shaft, the missile That IS, apparently (a, b), ‘ when the gut-string on the wooden bow makes the reed- arrow whistle ’ cf RV VI 67. lic,d ^Thecomm explains rb/iufn2isurubhdsamdrta/n('), and dtdyum as dyoiatndnam, which is probably its etymological sense [Discussed, Bergaigne, Bel vid 1 278 n, 11 182 J 4 As between both heaven and earth stands the bamboo (? tHjaiia), so let the reed-stalk {mtiflja) stand between both the disease and the flux {dsrdvd) The verse seems unconnected with the rest of tlie hymn, but to belong rather with hymn 3 The comm glosses iejana with venu For dsrdva, cf 11 3 , m 44 2 , the comm, explains it here by vidtrdtlsdra ‘difficulty (?) of urinating’ or ‘painful urina- tion’ [_' diabetes,’ rather?] Bloomfield understands it to mean “ diarrhcna,” and bases upon this questionable interpretation his view of the meaning of the whole hymn, uhich he entitles “ formula agamst diarrhoea ” 3. Against obstruction of urine: with a reed. \Atkarvan — tiavarcam parjattyamtirddtbahudevatyan SnustuhhMtn r-J painjSpar if Of this hymn, only vss 7-8 are found in Paipp (in xix.), without the refrain It is doubtless intended at Kaug. 25 10, as used m a nte for regulating the flow of urine , vss 8-9 are specified in 25 12 The “reed” implies some primitive form of a fislula ftritiarta, the zmsityanfra (one of the nddiyanirdnt) of the later ph}5iaans — nho, howcier, do not appear to haic made frequent use of iL Translated Weber, iv 395 , Griffith, i 4? Bloomfield, 10, 235 — CL Bergaignc- Hcnry, J^Tartiel, p 130 1 * 3 - BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 4 1 We know the reed’s father, Parjanya of hundredfold virility , with that will I make weal {^dm) for thy body , on the earth [be] thine out- pounng, out of thee, with a splash ! The last pada is found also at TS m 3. lo* , kal iti, again at xvui 2 22 2 We know the reed’s father, Mitra of hundredfold virility ; with that will etc etc 3. We know the reed’s father, Varuna of etc etc. 4 We know the reed’s father, the moon of etc. etc 5 We know the reed’s father, the sun of etc. etc. 6 What in thine entrails, thy (two) groins Q gavim), what in thy bladder has flowed together — so be thy urine released, out of thee, with a splash I all of it The comm reads m b (with two or three of SPP’s mss , which follow him) sarngn- tarn. He explains the gavlnyctu as “ two vessels {nodi') located in the two tides, affording access to the receptacles of unne ” 7. I split up thy unnator, like the weir of a tank — so be thy etc, etc The comm (with the same mss as above) has in b variant Ppp reads vfirani vefaniyS yantyah [_< I pierce or open up thy urethra ’ — with a metaUic catheter, says the comm J 8 Unfastened [be] thy bladder-onfice, like [that] of a water-holding sea — so be thy etc. etc. Ppp gives, for b, samudrasyo *iadhtr eva 9. As the arrow flew forth, let loose from the bow — so be thy etc. etc. Instead of par&’^patat in a, we should expect parH^pdiat^ the c for other correspondences, see under the "verses Translated . Weber, iv.396 , Griffith, 1 6 5 TRANSLATION AND NOTES, BOOK I - 1 * 5 I The mothers go on their ways, sisters of them that make sacrifice, mixing milk with honey 2. They who are yonder at the sun, or together with whom is the sun — let them further our sacnfice The verse is found furthei, without variant, in VS (vi 24 e) 3 The heavenly waters I call on, where our kine drink ; to the rivers {siiid/m) IS to be made oblation LCf note to X 9 27, below J 4 Within the waters is ambrosia {arnha), in the waters is remedy, and by the praises {prd^cisii) of the waters ye become vigorous (vdjin) horses, ye become vigorous kine. The second half-verse is here rendered stnctly according to the accent, which for- bids taking the nouns as vocatives , SPP reads in c, with all his mss and the great majority of ours bhdvatha (our two Bp give bhav-') , the accent is to be regarded as antithetical RV. gives prdqasiaye at end of b, and ends the verse with c reading divd bhdvaia vajUiah Other texts have the verse VS (ix 6 a), TS. (1 7 7*), and MS. (1 II i) , all lack a fourth pada, and have at end of h prdgasttsuj for c, VS. has dfz/d bhdvata vSjUiah., TS. d^vd bhavailia vdjtna/i, and MS. dgvd bhavata vdjtnah 5. To the waters; for blessings. \StndkudvJpa — (etc , as 4) ] The first three verses occur, without vanants, m PSipp xix. The whole hymn, with the first three verses of the one next following, are, also without vanants, RV x.9 1-7 (vs 5 IS here put before 4 , 6, 7 are also RV 1 23 20 a, b, c, 21), and they likewise occur m other texts thus, 5 1-3 m SV (11 11S7-1189), VS. (xi 50-52 et al), TS (iv I 51 et al ), MS (u 7 5 ct .al ), and TA (i\ 42 4et al ), everywhere with the same text [_for other references, see MGS , p 147J , as to 5 4 and the verses of 6, see under the verses Hymns 5 and 6 together are called qambhinnayobhfi^ Kau9 9 i , for their uses m connection with the preceding hymn, see under that hymn Both appear also m the house-btiilding ceremony (43. 12), and this one alone in dar^apjlniamtlsa- or j> 89 4J- ^ (doubtful) rendering of the second half-\crsc takes it as addressed, like the first, to t c patient ; the comm regards it as said to Varuna, which is not impossible. [See Cci ncr, ZDMG Iti 733 J Ppp reads amuPcatr at the beginning, and 1 as a laiura in p ace of c, d [Reeder apa-ci bj ' regard ’ ?J II TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK 1. -1 II II. For successful childbirtli, [Aiharvan — sadrcam pSt(S7tam pSnktam s anustubh , ^ upziggarbha kakttmmaty anustubk , 4-6 pathydpankh ] Verses 2-4 occur together m Paipp. i , 5 and 6 in xx , but at different points In Kaug. (33. i) It is quoted at the beginning of a long and intncate ceremony (filling the wbole section) for safe delivery, the first of the sirfkartnant or ‘ women’s ntes ’ ; its details have nothmg to do with the text of the hymn, and cast no light upon the latter’s difiiculties. The Anukr add to the author’s name anetia inantroktan aryaviadidevdn ndrTsukhaprasavayd 'bhtsiiiye 'stam ca sarvdbhtr aprarthayat. Translated Weber, iv. 404 ; Ludivig, p. 478 , Gnffith, 1. 14 and 473 , Bloomfield, 99,242. — Discussed . Roth, Ueber d^n Atharva-veda^ P IS I. At this birth, O Pushan, let Aryaman [as] efficient (vedhds) invoker utter vdsa( for thee ; let the woman, rightly engendered, be relaxed ; let her joints go apart in order to birth The translation of c implies emendation of the text to stsrtavt Roth formerly preferred sisrtdm nary rtdpi aj&tah ‘ let a timely child come forth, O woman ’ , Weber leaves sisratdvi as pi with indefinite Subject, and understands'the two following words as a parenthesis • “ be the woman properly constructed ” , Ludwig renders as if sisrtdm j Roth now (as in BR.) would emend only sisrtdm, and understand it of the ‘flow ’ of water preceding birth , but that would be rather srn, and sr without a prefix in such a sense seems very unhkely [_cf, however, sArann dpah, RV iv 17 3J. RtApiajdtd might also be possessive, ‘ rightly engendenng ’ The comm takes sfitdu as from sdtt Lnot siiti, fern , nor sfUu, fern note accent and gender IJ, and meaning the ceremony at birth , vedhds as = Dhatar ‘ the creator ’ , rtaprajdtd as = jlvad-apatydj and stsratdm (to the plural form of which he finds no objection) as ‘'may she be relieved [vinthsrtd') of the pangs of birth.” The metncally irregular verse (9 + 10 lo + 1 1 = 40) IS a paiikti solely m virtue of the ^aggregate J number of its syllables .2. Four [are] the directions of the sky, four also of the earth . the gods sent together the foetus ; let them unclose her m order to birth Or ‘unclose it,’ which SPP reads m text and comm (the latter omits the word itself m the p^plirase) with the minority of his mss , but against all of ours , Weber and Roth prefer idm. The word and its predecessor are quoted in the Prat (”•30), as the earliest example in the text of a combination of n and t without inserted s , but the form of the quotation {samdtrayautddtudfn') prevents our seeing whether its authors read tarn op’ tdm^ the comm gives tdtn In d, tlie comm gives the false form ^rtiavantu. The text in Ppp is confused, but does not appear to intend any variants from our reading 3 Let Pushan (?) unclose [her 01 it] , we make y6ni go apart ; do thou, sfisand, loosen ; do thou, btskala, let go The translation implies a very venturesome emendation in a, pusa for sdsd (all the authorities have the latter) Pushan, referred to in vs. i as pnncipal officiating deity, nught well be called on to do in particular what all the gods were begged to do in 2 ^ tL LBut see Bloomfield’s comment] The comm gives three different etj mologics for sdsa root sii + suffix-j«, root sfl + root sail:, and su-usas Sdsand and biskald possibly names of organs , for the latter, Ppp has pttskale, probably an alteraUon 1. II BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 12 to a more familiar word , the comm understands susani and btskali (of course, equally possible) , the former, from roots su and san^ is name of an accouching goddess ; the latter (for which are given three diverse but equally absurd et}'mologies) is another deity. The Anukr apparently intends the verse to be read as 6 + 8 7 + 8 = 29, instead of admitting the obvious resolution tn-dm in c The supplying of gdrbham as omitted at the beginning would make a good anustubh. 4, Not as it were stuck {ahata) in the flesh, not m the fat, not as it were in the marrows, let the spotted slimy (^) afterbirth come down, for the dog to eat , let the afterbirth descend SPP reads in a pivast^ with the comm and a small minontj of his mss , three of ours (H O Op ) have pibast Ppp has a very different text (preserved in the ndgari copy, though lost in the original text) iidt *va snavasu na parvasi( na keihcsu (ke^esu) na nakhesu caj then our c, d, without vanant , then ndt 'va pause (judnsc?') na plvast ndi 'va kasiyoq valid yutavij then our e, and with this ends the hjmn as given m book 1. The comm reads in a mdnsdna for mdnsi ud, and resorts to vanous devices to get rid of the difficulty thus caused , two of our mss (O Op ), and one or two of SPP’s, give the same Some of our mss are very awkward about combining ycrayw and ditave, in part omitting the w, or (I ) reading -yuit- PCS (1 162) has the verse, but in different order first our c, d, without vanant , then our a, b, in the form nai *va indnsena plvan 11a kasmtnf cand "yatanij then our e But for its support of ^ivalam^ we might be tempted to emend to kS^ialavi, the comm has the worthless explanation jalasyo 'paristfiiia^dtvdlavat dntardvayavdsambaddham Further may be compared HGS 11 3 I. (_MP , at 11 II 1 9, 20, has the -V erse with variants J 5 I split apart thy urinator, apart the ySni, apart the [two] groins, apart both the mother and the child, apart the boy from the afterbirth ,' let the afterbirth descend Ppp (xx ) has for A, b vi ier^ldmt tagarim v yoni vt gavenydu j for d, vi garbhatn ca jardyujah j and TS (111 3 o') presents a version nearly accordant with this,T)Ut with takarim, gavlnydfiy and (at the end) jarayu ca: neither has our refrain 6. As the wind, as the mind, as fly the birds, so do thou, O ten months [child], fly along with the afterbirth ; let the afterbirth descend. Ppp has the v^rsxon yaikd vdto yathd dagha yaihd sasadroyajattia • a’d te garbha ejatu ntr ditu da^atndsyo bahir jardyund saha For ‘ do thou fly’ might be given do thou fall,’ the verb having both meanings |_Ten (lunar) months cf. Webers second Wffjt-jc/'rc-essaj, p Abh. der Berliner Akad , 1861.J b^f RV.v' 78 8 J This anuvdka ^2 J has 5 hjmns, 25 verses , and the old Anukramani, as quoted, sajs paTica pare tu (apparentl> the vidyat quoted at the end of an 1 belongs rather here than there). 12. Against various ailments (as results of lightning?). ^Bhryyatiprai ~} 3 itmaTtdfanadrt’atdkant j 3 ^*am y enustubn ] Found also m PSipp 1 It is reckoned (KSug 26 l, note) as bclorging. with rmnv other hv-rins, to a /akmanS^ara or fakinandifisXxoyxng gana, and is used (26 0 accompanj the dnnklng of various things m a healing ceremony (comm savs, against 13 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I -1 12 disease arising from hurtful changes of wind, bile, or phlegm), and also (38, i) m one a^mst bad weather {dtirdina\ or (Ke^.) for the prevention of ram The third verse further is added to the Mrgara h^mins in connection with lavation in another healing nte (27 34). Translated Weber, iv 405; Griffith, 1 15, Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii p cxiii ff. (= PAOS May 1886) , AJP vii.469lf , SBE xlii 7,246 — Bloomfield regards it* as addressed to “lightning, conceived as the cause of fever, headache, and cough ” See his elaborate comment Weber made it relate to fever, puerperal or infantile (on account of jardyujd, i a). 1 First bom of the afterbirth, the ruddy (ttsriyd) bull, born of wind and cloud (?), goes thundering with rain; may he be merciful to our body, going straight on, breaking ; he who, one force, hath stridden out threefold. The translation implies emendation in b to vdtdbhrajds or -jas, as suggested by 3 c , it is proposed by Weber, and adopted by Bloomfield, being a fairly plausible way of getting out of a decided difficulty Weber renders, however, “ with glowing wind- breath ” ; R , “ with scorching wind ” (emending to -bhrajjds) The comm reads vdiavrajas (a couple of SPP’s mss, which usually follow him, do the same), and explains it as “ going swiftly like the wind,” or, alternatively, “ having a collection of winds ” The ‘ bull ’ is to him the sun, and he forces this interpretation through the whole hymn. Neither he nor Kau^ nor the latter’s scholia see any\vhere any intima- tion of lightning , yet this is perhaps most plausibly to be suspected m the obscurities of the expression (so R also) The first words in a are viewed as signif3ang ‘jilst escaped from its fcetal envelop (m the cloud) ’ Ppp is wholly defaced in the second half-verse; in the first it offers no variants, merely combining -jas prath- in a, and read mg -bhraja si- in b Emendation in d to ydsydi* kam would improve both meter and sense Tredha m d must be read as tliree syllables (as in RV ) to make the verse a jagatl j_At OB \i 59 b, vaia-d/irajds is suggested — by R ?J 2 Thee, lurking {gn) in each limb with burning {(^ocis), we, paying homage,' would worship (yidh) with oblation ; we would worship with oblation the hooks^ the grapples, [him] who, a seizer, hath seized thfis man’s joints yds, at beginning of d, is abbreviation for ‘when he’ or ‘with which he ’ [_Rcn- der, rather, ‘ hath seized his (accentless) joints ’ The patient is m plain sight of the exorcist Emphatic pronoun is therefore needless , so ettamvs 3 J Some of our mss , by a frequent blunder, read in a ^tgry-. The prolongation of the final of asya m d IS noted by the comment to Prat iv 79 Ppp has a very different (and corrupt) text ^t(^rtydno yo grhita parasya grbhiti • aiiko iavt anko kavisd yaj 57 nt hrdt ifitomanasdyo jajdna The definition of this verse and the next as irtsiubh seems to have been lost from the Anukr , which reads simply dvitlyd before antyd 'jiusiubh 3 Release thou him from headache and from cough — whoever hath entered each joint of him , the blast (^ qusmd) that is cloud-born and that is wind-bom, let it attach itself to forest-trees {vdfiaspdiz) and mountains Ppp has srjatdm for sacaiStn in d. The comm takes kdsds in a as nomin , explain- ing It as hrtkaiithamadhyavaril prasiddhah ^Icsmarogavi^esak j vaiajas to him 'is L 12- BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA kattsthydd vdyor uipannah |_For qirsakti, see Knauer, T 7 idhgepfiamsclie Forschun- geti^ Anzeiger,\\\ 225 , Bloomfield, AJ P xvii 416; V>o\\i}iva^^Berichte der saclisischcn Ges , 1897, xlix 50, who takes it as ‘ a stiff neck with head awry ’J 4 Weal [be] to my upper member (gdira), weal be to my lower, weal to my four limbs , weal be to my body Ppp has a quite different text in a, b, both times for t;ie, and pardya for ava- rdyaj for c, qa»t te prsitbhyo majjabhyah ca, in d, iava for mama the address to a second person is decidedly to be preferred This is found also in the corresponding verse m VS (xxiii 44) and TS (v 2 12*), with readings in part agreeing further with those of Ppp qdm ie pArebhyo gatrebhyah qdvi asiv dva? ebhyah qdm asihdbhyo majjdbhyah qdm v asiu taitvdl idva. but TS has for d qd 7 n 11 te ia 7 i 7 'ive blaivat 13. Deterrent homage to lightning. \Bhrgvangiras — vdidyutam dttustubham 3 4-p vtrdd jagatt , 4. inslupparS brhatJgarhkS pankti ] The hymn occurs m Paipp xix., and vs r also in xv. It is used by Kaug (38.8,9) in a charm against lightning, with vii ii , and it also appears (139 8), with 1 26 and vii. 1 1 and several other hymns, in the ceremony of introduction to Vedic study Translated Weber, iv 406 , Gnffith, 1 16 I Homage be to thy lightning, homage to thy thunder , homage be to thy bolt (dqman), with which thou hurlest at the impious one {duddq) The version of this verse in Ppp. xix is like ours , in xv , d reads dftrdt pradi- jassast (^pratyasyast?) The first half-verse is found also m VS. (xw\i 21 a, b) The irregular combination dildaqe (p dtdiodaqe') is noted by Prat 11 60 The comm regards Parjanya as addressed, but then proceeds to give another interpretation of the verse, based on the absurd assumption that na77ias = a 7 i 7 /a 77 t, which appears also in numerous other places To him, also, dq77ia7i is a 7 /icghatidma 7 t In our edition, an accent-mark is omitted over the -q 77 ta- of dq 77 ia 7 ie 2 Homage to thee, child of the height {pravdt), whence thou gather- est (sa77i-uh) heat [tdpas) , be merciful to ourselves , do kindness { 7 )idyos) to our offspring {iokd) Ppp has qam 7ias for vidyas in d The first half-verse forms in VS (xvx\ i 21c,) one verse with our i a, b , but VS has [for a 7 td 77 tas te bIiagava/771 astit , andj for ydtah S7'dh « from whence thou stnvest after the sk},’ v\hich indu^tes Unt our reading is corrupt [Pischel discusses pravdt (= * stream ’) at length, I ed blu n 63-76, see 68 j 3. Child of the height, be homage to thee; homage v\e pay to th> missile {licit') and heat {tapiis ) , we know thy highest abode that is m secret; thou art set as nav'el withm the [cloud-]ocean [The te in b is superfluous J Ppp rectifies the meter of a b) omitting ri'a f > other pndas arc more or less corrupt . uas/uis te 1 ete iipttsydi m b (uhicn end-V there < g^trd/iarx o tidina par- in c; m/ntilsa 7 db/tt/i nt the end The comm tales {Aprs ail;ccuve The verse is scanned bj the Anukr as 12 + rc - 1 1 + 1 1 = 46 svllab.*^ TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I -1 14 IS 4. Thou whom all the gods did create, the bold one, [[the gods]J making an arrow for hurling — do thou, besung in the council (vzddi/ia), be merciful to us , to thee as such be homage, O goddess Dhrsmnn m b might qualify {sum directly The comm supplies he a^ane ‘ O thun- derbolt’ as addressed He reads virla m c Ppp reads for a, tvd deva ajana- yatita vtgvesdm krwvdnd aqandya insvat; and for d mitrasya varunasya prasrstau The Anukr seems to scan asio-fii io-f9 = 4o syllables LRead in c 7nrdaya and in d ut& tdsydi ? — For vtddtha, see discussions of Bloomfield, JAOS xix ^ 17, and Oeldner, ZDMG hi 757 , and the literature cited by Foy, KZ. xxxiv. 226 J / 14. Imprecation of spmsterhood on a woman. \Bhrgvangjras — vartaiam vo' ta ydmyatn vd dmtstuhham i kakuinmaft , y 4.-p vtrdj'\ Found in Paipp i Used by Kau^ (36 15-1S) in an incantation against a woman , the details of it cast no light on those of the hymn ; and the comm defines its purpose simply as striydh punisasya vd ddurbhdgyakaranaj/t Translated Weber, iv 408 , Ludwig, p 459, Zimmer, p 314 (these misapprehend Its character) , Gnffith, 1 17, Bloomfieldj-JAOS. xiii p cxv = PADS May, 1886, or AJP vii 473 fi , or SBE xhi 107, 252 1 Her portion {bhdga), splendor have I taken to myself, as from off a tree a garland , like a mountain with great base, let her sit long with the Fathers Ppp has for a aham te bhagam d dade, its b is defaced , in c it gives viahdmiildt 'va The comm renders bhagatn by bhdgyain, here and m the other verse, recognizing no sexual meaning Ptfrsu he renders “ m the later [2 c, d] to be specified houses of father, mother, etc and all the translators understand it m the same way , but it is questionable whether the plural of pttar would ever be used in this sense , and the repeated mention of Yama later indicates that there was at least a double meaning m the expression Perhaps a girl remaining unmamed was called “ bride of Yama,” 1 e as good as dead, and her stay at home compared to that in the other world j^Cf Antigone, 816, “I shall be the bnde of Acheron,” 'Ax^/wm J The Anukr appears to ratify the abbreviated reading -btidhne 'va me, it counts si\ s\llables in d. 2 Let this girl, O king, be shaken down to thee [as] bride, O Yama; be she bound in her mother’s house, also m her brother’s, also in her father’s Ppp has yai for esd at tlie beginning The comm foolishlj interprets tdjan as indicating Soma, because Soma is first husband of a bride (he quotes RV \ S5 40 . cf AV xiv 2 3 ff), and takes ya//ta as liis epithet, as being her constrainer (;:ijd~ Jnakn) For la-dhil compare in 1 1 7 , at TS \ 2 53 it is used uith piftsti [Docs not itt-d/iil co\ertly suggest indhuvana, which in its obscene sense, may be as old as the Veda?J 3 She is thy housekeeper O king , uc commit her to thee , she shall sit long with the Fathers, until the covering in of her head Ihc translation of d implies the cb\ious emendation to sawopjd* vdiioh *^PP cvtii admits into Ins text on the aull ority of the comm , but against every kromi Ppp 1 14 - book I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA l6 however, gives samopya. The comm explains it ny satftvapanai bhftmau savipatanai, and as equivalent to maranaparyantavt ‘ till death ’ ; that this last is the virtual sense is extremely probable. That 'dap has not the sense ‘ shave ’ in the compound (cf. AQS VI lo 2) IS shown by the inappropnateness of the prefixes sam + « to that sense, and the frequency of the combination in the other sense ^See Bloomfield, 255, a qlrsnih kd^am dpiat^ ‘ till she shed the hair from her head.’J Ppp has further tina 7 n u part dadhmasi in b The comm gives kulapd (for -pas our pada-iext kulacpdh) in a. The resolution qlr-sn-ah m d would make the verse a full anustubhj the Anukr. counts only 14 syllables in the second half. 4. With the incantation {brdhinan) of Asita, of Ka^yapa, and of Gaya, I shut up {apt-nah) thy portion ipulva ?), as sisters do what is within a box {-kSga). [_For the names, see Bloomfield, 255, and AJP xvn 403 J Bhaga perhaps has here a double meaning. Three of our mss (E I H ) with one or two of SPP’s, read in c attiaskogdf/i^ against Prat 11. 62, which expressly prescribes h. The comm treats antah and kogatn as two independent words , a 7 itd]t kdqe would be a not unacceptable emendation. The Anukr. appears to sanction the abbreviation -kofatn *va. 15. With an oblation: for confluence of wealth. [Aiharvan — sdtndhavam dnustuhkam z. bhunkpathySpankU'] Found in Paipp 1 (m the verse-order 1,4, 3, 2) Used by Kaug. only m a general nte for prosperity (19 4), to accompany a douche for persons bnnging water from two navigable streams and partaking of a dish of mixed grain; it is also reckoned (19 i, note) to pusfika mantras, or hymns bringing prosperity. Translated . Weber, iv. 409 ; Ludwig, p. 371 ; Gnffith, 1. 19. I. Together, together let the rivers flow, together the winds, together the birds {patairin ) ; this my sacrifice let them enjoy of old ; I offer with a confluent (savisrdvyd) oblation The verse is nearly identical with xix 1. 1, and in less degree with h. 26. 3 From XIX. 1;3 c it may be conjectured that we should read pradfgas m C. (_^f we do read pradivas, why not render it by * continually ’ ?J Ppp. has not the second half-verse, but instead of it vs. 3 c, d. For b Ppp gives som v 5 t& dtvyB- uta The comm accents sdm-sam in a. There is perhaps some technical meaning in samsrd'iyd ‘confluent or ‘ for confluence ’ which we do not appreciate, but it is also unknown to the comm , who explains the word only etymologically The verse is an dstSrapaBkti (strictly vtrSj 8+8 11+11= 38), and its definition as such is perhaps dropped out of the Anukr text (w'hich reads adyd dviifyd bhurtk etc.). 2 . Come straight hither to my call, hither ye confluents also ; increase this man, ye songs ; let every beast {pagte) there is come hither ; let what wealth {nty{) there is stay {stkd) tvith him. Tht pada mss all gi\e yal in e- Ppp has in a, b idam kavyd upetane dan, and, for c, asya •'•ardha^ ato rayim The last plda is nearly RV x. 19 3 d. Render * with this man let ’ etc. J The omission of evd in a would make the verse regular 17 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I. -1 l6 3 . What fountains of the streams flow together, ever unexhausted, with all those confluences we make riches {dhdiia) flow together for me. Ppp has in a, b nadlbhyas savisravanty ucch&mas sarain aksika The comm gives the verse twice, each'time with a separate explanation 4 . What [fountains] of butter {sajpis) flow together, and of milk, and of water, with all those confluences we make riches flow together for me Ppp reads iamsrdvSs for sarptsas in a. The comm supphes first avayavds *6 omitted subject in the verse, but afterwards utsdsas from vs. 3, which is of course right. 16. Against demons: with an amulet of lead. \C5iana — agiiindram^ vdrunam, dadhatyam dnustubham ‘ 4 . kakummafi'\ Found in Paipp i. Kaug. does not include the hjrnin among the cdtandm (8. 25), but a Parig (ib , note) reckons it to them (m accordance with the Anukr ) Kaug ( 47 * 23) uses it once in a rite of sorcery (for the death of one’s enemies : comm ), and Its commentator (47. 13, note) in another. Translated ; Weber, iv 409 ; Grill, i, 75 ; Griffith, i 20 ; Bloomfield, 65, 256 1. What devourers, on the night of new moon, have arisen troop- wise (?) — the fourth Agni is the demon-slayer ; he shall bless us Vrdjam in b is obscure ; ‘ troopwise ’ is the conjecture of BR ; the cbmm reads instead bhrdjam^ and absurdly explains it as bhrdjamdndm or -nam ‘shinmg,’ and qualifying ciAct the night or the “hearty” man whom the demons have nsen'to injure I Ppp has turyas for iurtyas in c } what is meant by it is not clear ; the comm gives three different explanations ; fourth after the death of his three brothers and predeces- sors (quoting for these TS n. 6 6«) ; as the house-fire apart from the three sacnficial , or as the dtigirasa fire, as distinguished from the sacrificial, the household, and that of battle — thus teaching us nothing but his own ignorance and perplexity. Gnll follows Weber m understanding the word to mean “ powerful ” For d, Ppp. has san nah pdiu Mhyah, 2. The lead Varuna blesses ; the lead Agni favors; Indra bestowed on me the lead ; it, surely, is a dispeller of familiar demons. Ppp. combines mat 'ndra ^ in c, and has for d amfvdyas iu chtam (for cdtanam'). The comm ascribes the mention of Varuna to the fact that nver-foam Is one of the articles declared (Kaug 8 18) equivalent to lead, and here intended bj'’ that name. LCf. Bloomfield, JAOS. xv 1 58, J 3 This overpowers the viskandha; this drives off (bad/i) the devour- ors , With this I overpower all the races (Jdtd) that are the ptgdct's The first half-verse is nearly repeated below, as ii. 4. 3 a, b The short a m the re uplicabon of sasake in c, though against the meter and in part against usage, is read y all the mss., and m the comment to PrSt. in 13 Ppp has in a viskandam (but ^mpare h 4.3^ where -dhant) The comm, explains the (more or less fully personified) isorder as a disturbance caused by raksas or pt(dcc and obstructing motion pfoftbattdhaka') ♦ cf. below ii 4 and ui 9 i 16- book I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. iS 4. If our cow thou slayest, if [our] horse, if [our] man {pj'misa), we pierce thee there with lead, that thou be no slayer of our heroes Ppp. has for c slsena vidhyamas ivd The 5 hymns of this anuvaka [_3 J, as of the next, have just the norm, 20 verses, and the quotation from the old Anukr, (given at the end of hymn 21) is vin^akav aio ^nyau At the end of the present hymn is read vtnqatyd ktiru, which is perhaps the statement as to the assumption of a norm The fast prap&thaka ends here 17. To stop the vessels of the body. \Brahman — yosiddevaiyam. dimstubham / bhurtj 4 j-/ drst gdyain^ Found m Paipp xix. (in the verse-order 3,4, 1,2) Used once by Kaug. (26 10 * the quotation appears to belong to what follows it, not to what precedes), in a remedial nte, apparently for stopping the flow of blood (the comm sajs, as result of a knife wound and the like, and also of disordered menses) Translated. Weber, iv 4115 Ludwig, p 508; Gnll,^6, 76, Griffith,! 21, Bloom- field, 22, 257 — Cf HiUebrandt, Veda-Chrestoinathte, p 46 1 Yon women i^yosif) that go, veins with red garments, like brother- less sisters (Jdvti) — let them stop {stJid), with their splendor smitten Ppp makes yositas and jamayas change places, and has sarvas (better) for htrds in b The comm, takes yositas as gen smg, and hence naturally understands rajova- hananddyas to be meant in the verse , he renders hiras by sirasj and he explains that brotherless sisters pttrkule samtanakarmane pitidaddn&ya ca tisihantt The Anukr refuses to sanction the contraction -tare 'va in c. 2 Stop, lower one ' stop, upper one ! do thou too stop, midmost one 1 if the smallest stops, shall stop forsooth the great tube (d/iamdui ) The accent of tlsthati seems to show ca to be the equivalent of cet here 3. Of the hundred tubes, of the thousand veins, have stopped forsooth these midmost ones ; the ends have rested (ravi) together In d, emendation Xa duty as ‘the end ones’ would be an improvement, but Ppp- also has antds sakam antd 'ramsaia^ its c is corrupt {asthu mbaddhdtndva) , ana it inserts te after ^atasya m a. 4 About you hath gone {krain) a great gravelly sandbank {dliatiu)^ stop [and] be quiet, I pray (su katn). The comm secs m dhanu onl} the meaning “bow,” and interprets it “bent h>^c a bow ” namel}, a vessel containing the urine , in stkaids he secs an allusion to tV menses, or to gravel m the bladder Kauq (2G 10) speaks of sprint Img on dust an*^ gravel as a means of stanching the flow of blood , more jirobabl^, as Wtbt’' gesied, a bag filled wnth sand wns used m neither case can the menses lf< hid n Ppp reads siktHtrayi lur 7 siktraf carasiktdatn The third pnda is id''n*ir>l itiI i R\ . I 191 6d ; the comm (as Si) ana to the latter) fads to rccognic the roo’ r/; he renders h prercyefa, as jf root /r were in Question. 19 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I -1 I8 i8. Against unlucky marks. [Dravinodas — vdtndyakani dnusUibham i uparistddvirddbrhatT , 2 mcrjjagatJ , j virdddstdrapankUtrtsUtbh ] Verses 1-3 are found in Paipp xx (but vs 2 not with the others) Used by K^^ (42. 19) in a charm against unlucky signs in a woman Translated Weber, iv 41 1 ; Ludwig, p 498 , Geldner, Ved Stud i 314 , Gnthth, 1.22 , Bloomfield, 109, 260 — It may be mentioned that Geldner takes the whole hjmn as relating to a domestic cat 1. Out we drive {iiiv-su) the pallid sign, out the niggard, then, what- ever things are excellent {bhadrd), those we lead together (?) for our progeny. The translation implies m d the very venturesome emendation of drdtun to sdvij the former appears wholly impracticable, and has perhaps stumbled into d from b , Geldner conjectures instead tva Ppp is defaced, and gives no help The comm reads laksjnatn, and explains laldinyam as accus sing masc lald 7 ne bhavam Ula- hasthauagatam j to yam in c he supplies cthnant |_making c a separate sentence and supplying bhavantu^ It would also be possible to make the cesura after prajaydi, and read ndgaydtftast (so R ) In our edition, dele the accent-mark under ia- of iant in c 2. Savitar has driven out the trouble (? drain) in her feet, out have Varuna, Mitra, Aryaman [driven] [that] in her hands , out hath Anumati, bestowing (in) upon us , the efods have driven this woman forward unto good fortune All the mss. give in a sdvisak, which SPP very properly retains, though the coram and Ppp have -sat (see my Skt Gr *, § 1 5 1 a) , *sdvtsak (p rapdihaka ends here. 17. To stop the vessels of the body, [Brahman — yosiddevatyam dnustubham i bhurtj , 4 - 3 -p drn gdyatri^ Found in Paipp xix (m the verse-order 3,4, 1,2) Used once by Kau5 (26 10 the quotation appears to belong to what follows it, not to what precedes), m a remedial rite, apparently for stopping the flow of blood (the comm says, as result of a knife wound and the like, and also of disordered menses) Translated Weber, iv 41 1; Ludwig, p 508, Gnll, 16, 76, Griffith, 1 21 , Bloom- field, 22, 257 — Cf HiUebrandt, Veda-Chresi 07 }iathte^ p 46 1 Yon women (^yosit) that go, veins with red garments, like brother- less sisters ijdini) — let them stop {sihd), with their splendor smitten. Ppp makes yosttas and jSmayas change places, and has sarvds (better) for litr&s mb The comm, takes yosUas as gen sing , and hence naturally understands rajova- haiianadyas to be meant in the verse ; he renders htrcLs by sirds; and he explains that brotherless sisters pitrkuh saifitdnakarmane pindaddndya ca tisihanU The Anukr refuses to sanction the contraction -tare 'va m c. 2 Stop, lower one ' stop, upper one ' do thou too stop, midmost one ^ if the smallest stops, shall stop forsooth the great tube {dhamdnt) The accent of tisthati seems to show ca to be the equivalent of cet here 3 Of the hundred tubes, of the thousand veins, have stopped forsooth these midmost ones, the ends have rested {ram) together In d, emendation to dntyds ‘ the end ones ’ would be an improvement , but PpP also has anids • sakam anid 'ramsata j its C is corrupt (asthil nibaddhdmdvd') , an 1 inserts te after gatasya m a. 4. About you hath gone {kravi) a great gravelly sandbank {dhanu)t stop [and] be quiet, I pray {su kam) The comm sees m dhanu only the meaning “ bow,” and interprets it “ bent ^ bow ” namely, a vessel containing the urine , in sikatds he sees an allusion to c menses, or to gravel m the bladder Kau? (26 10) speaks of sprinkling on dust an gravel as a means of stanching the flow of blood , more probably, as Weber first su^ gested, a bag filled with sand was used in neither case can the menses be had m Ppp reads szkldmayl bund sihirag carasthidain The third pada is idcnlic.'il wh | RV I 191 6d , the comm (as Sayana to the latter) fails to recognize the root r/, an he renders \t prerayaia, as if root fr were in question 19 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I -1 l8 i8. Against unlucky marks. [Dravtnodas. — vStndyakam anustubham i uparistadvirSdbrhati ; s mcrjjagati , j viraddstdrapankUtrisUtbh ] Verses 1-3 are found in Paipp. xx. (but vs 2 not with the others) Used by K^ti^ (42 19) in a charm against unlucky signs in a woman Translated Weber, iv 411 ; Ludwig, p 498 , Geldner, Ved Stud i 314 , Gnttith, i. 22 , Bloomfield, 109, 260 — It may be mentioned that Geldner takes the whole hymn as relating to a domestic cat I Out we drive {inr-su) the pallid sign, out the niggard , then, what- ever things are excellent {bhadrd), those we lead together Q) for our progeny. The translation implies in d the very venturesome emendation of dratim to sdm , the former appears wholly impracticable, and has perhaps stumbled into d from b , Geldner conjectures instead tvd Ppp is defaced, and gives no help The comm reads laksmavt, and explains laldmyam as accus sing masc. laldine bhavam Ula- kasthdnagatam j to yd,nt in c he supphes ctJindnt [_making c a separate sentence and supplying bhavantu^ It would also be possible to make the cesura after prajdydi, and read 7 idgaydmast (so R ) In our edition, dele the accent-mark under id- of ia/n in c 2. Savitar has dnven out the trouble (^ dram) in her feet , out have Varuna, Mitra, Aryaman [driven] [that] in her hands ; out hath Anumati, bestowing (ra) upon us , the eods have driven this woman forward unto good fortune All the mss. give in a sdvtsak, which SPP very proper^ retains, though the coram and Ppp have -sat (see my Skt Gr *, § 151 a) , 'sdvtsak (p as-) would be an improve- ment, and may be understood For c, d, Ppp yad ddityd/na^/ait 7 ardnd pruasuva savitd sdubhagdya The comm gives two etymological guesses at araiiU/t (which is his reading, instead of -7117/1), both worthless, and descnbes ra/dtid as accented on the final. The separation of this verse from the others in Ppp indicates that it probably has nothing to do with “ marks ” It is rather unusual for the Anukr to take notice of the occurrence of a iTtsi/ibh pada in a jagatl verse Ld, no less than c, is tristubh, pro- nounce devdsdvtsuh J 3 Whatever in thy self, in thy body, is frightful, or what in hair or in mien ■ — all that do we smite away with four] words ; let god Savitar advance {sud) thee ‘God Savitar’ or ‘the heavenly impeller,’ everywhere equivalent. Ppp begins ^ai id "ima 7 i tanvd ghora/zi, and has for c, d tat te vidvd/i tipabadhayesd/zt pra tvd^uvd savitd sdubhagdya The metrical descnption of tlie verse (ir -hn 10 -f 10 = 42) by the Anukr. is unusual and questionable 4 . The antelope-footed, the bull-toothed, the kme-repelling, the out- blowing, the hcked-out, the pallid — these we make disappear from us Designations either of the unlucky signs or of the vomen marked vith them — probably the former The comm prefers the latter, except for the tv.o last, vliich he blunderingly takes from the stems -d/:ya and -//lya, and makes them qualify tals;/ a 1. 18- book I. THE ATHARVA-VLDA-SAMHITA 20 understood He explains gosedhd. (p goosedhani) as “going like a cow,” and villdha as a lock “on the edge of the forehead, licked as it were the wrong way” — or what is called a “ cowlick ” LSkt Hkapaksa\ Botii pditions give at the beginning r^yap-, instead of the true reading f^yap-^ which the comm, (with three of SPP’s mss) has , the mss bungle all the occurrences of this word In part of our edition the in is broken off from vi^sadathn ig Against enemies. \Btahman — dtfvaryatn dnustubhatn s puraitadlTka^ ) 3 pothy&pankti ] The hymn is found also in Paipp i With the two that follow it (and others^, it is reckoned by KaU9 (14 7) among the sSingrSintkdni or battle-hjmins, or likewise (ib , note) to the aparajtia (‘ uncoiiquercd ’) * without them, but with vi. 13, it is used in several of the charms to ward off the effects of jiortents (104 3 , 105 i , 1 13. 3) In Vait (9 21), vs 3 appears alone in the c&tnrmdsya or seasonal sacnfice, accompanying the release of the two puroddqa baskets ' Translated Weber, iv 413 , Gnffith, 1 23, Bloomfield, 120, 262 — Cf Bergaigne- Henr)', Manuel^ p 134 1 Let not the piercers find us, nor let the penetraters find [usj , far from us make the volleys {(^aravj/a) fly, dispersing, O Indra Ppp combines mo *bht~ in b The rendering of qaravyd follows the comm., here and to vs 3 {yarasamhatt') 2 Dispersing from us let the shafts fly, those that are hurled and that are to be hurled ; ye divine arrows of men (manusyd-), pierce my enemies The comm inserts an “ and ” in c * “ divine and human arrows-” , this is possible, but opposed by the accent Ppp has for c, d. devd manusyd rsayo 'imtrdn no vt viddhatUj the comm also reads vidhyatu, 3 Whether one of our own or whether a stranger, fellow or outsider, whoso assails {abJn-dds) us — let Rudra with a volley pierce those my enemies « » Ppp’s version is somewhat different yas samdno yo *saindno'mikro no jighdnsati rudraq qavyd idn amttrdn vi viddhata With a, b compare RV vi. 75 19 a, b yd nah 3 v 6 dranoydq ca nisiyo jighdnsati (= SV 11 1222 a, b, which combines yvd 'ratio') , the latter half of this verse is our 4 c, d Two or three of our mss (P M O p m ) fol- low RV in omitting after svd Ap iv 16 r has nah sapatno yo 'rnno mario 'bhiddsati devdh, with a wholly different second half The comm, absurdly explains nistyas as ntrgatavlryo mkrstabalah qatruh 4 Whatever rival {sapdtna), whatever non-rival, and whatever hater shall curse us, him let all the gods damage {dhiirv ) ; incantation (brdhmaii) is my inner defense. Ppp has as first half-verse sabandhuq cd ' sabandhuq ca yo na tndrd 'bhiddsati The second half-verse is found, without variant, in RV (and SV see under vs 3) The comm explains sapatna well as jildtirilpah qatruh SPP follows the very bad example of a part of his mss by reading dvtsan ch~ (instead of -ah or -an) in b |_cf 1 33 2 , 11 4 6, and see Prat. 11 10, 17, and especially ii — The ^a«/a-text reads dvisdn] translation and notes, book I -L 20 ii 20. Against enemies and their weapons. — sdumyam dnustubham i trisUibh'\ The first three verses are found m Paipp. xix , and vs. 4 in n see below. For the use of the hymn by Kaug with 19 and 21, see under 19 And vs i is used alone (so the comm ) in the /i^rvffw-sacnfices (KaU5 2. 39), on viewing the cooked oblation. Translated Weber, iv 413 Gnffith, 1 24. 1 Let there be the dddrasrty O god Soma ; at this sacrifice, O Marut§, be gracious to us * let not a portent find us, nor an imprecation , let not the wrong that is hateful find us. The first pada is rendered on the assumption that the sdman of this name, as described m PB xv 3 7, is intended , it might be used of the person intended to be benefited ‘ let him be one not getting into a spht (1 e. hole, or difficulty) ’ • this is the sense distinctly taught in PB , the comm says na kaddctd apt svastrlsamlpam prd- PnoUt (tnadlyah qairnli) ’ The verse occurs in TB. (111 7. 5** . and repeated without change m Ap 11 20 6), with bhavata in a, mrdatd (without the anomalous accent) in b, and vrjdnd in d. Ppp. begins with addrasur bh-, adds ayam after soma in a, and has in d the easier readmg pr& 'pad duchunS for vidad vrjtnd The second half-verse occurs again as v 3 6 c, d. Though connected with vss. 2, 3 in Paipp. also, this v^rse does not appear to have anything onginaUy to do with them. 2 What missile (sdnjya) weapon of the malignant {aghayd) shall go up today, do ye, Mitra-and-Varuna, keep that off from us The first half-verse in Ppp \syo *dya sdinyo vadho jtghSsath nam updyatl, which is nearly our vi.99 2 a, b The half-verse occurs also in PB. (1.3.3 a, b) and A^S. (v 3 22 a, b), both of which have SQittmyas , PB elides yo *dyaj A^S. gives at the end -Trait Aghdydnam would be the proper accent (and this the comiu has), unless the word were imderstood as feminine 3- Both what [is] from here and what from yonder — keep off, O Vanina, the deadly weapon ; extend great protection (^dnnaii ) ; keep very far off the deadly weapon. The pada text marks the pada-division in the first half-verse before instead of after the second ydt. Ppp reads in b ydvayah The second half-verse is found again at the end of ^the next hymn — which is perhaps an additional indication that this hymn properly ends here The Anukr ignores the metncal irregulanty of the verse (9 -f 8 • 7 + 8 =: 32). j_Read m a tidydd, and in cyacha nah J 4- Verily a great ruler {qdsd) art thou, overpowerer of enemies, unsub- dued, whose companion {sdkkt) is not slain, is not scathed {jyd) at any time This verse is the first m RV x 152, of which the remaining verses constitute the next hjmn here ; in Ppp it occurs with them in 11 , far separated from the matter vhich precedes it R\r and Ppp both read for b aimtrakhddd ddbhttiahj and accents In d jtyaie kdifa The comm paraphrases (dsds by (dsako iityanidj he ta ^sjTydte as from root jt, which is of course equalh possible 1 21 - BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 22 21. Against enemies. \Atharvan — Stndram Snustubham ] As just pointed out (under 20 4), this hymn and the last verse of the preceding make one hymn m RV (x 152) -and m Paipp (11); the latter has a different verse- order (3, 2, I, 4), but no vanous readings For other correspondences, see under the several verses For the ritual use of the hynm with the two preceding, see under 19, it is further reckoned (Kaug 16 8, note) to the abhaya (‘free from fear or danger’) gana It is the first hymn applied (with vii 55) in the svasiyayana or ‘ for well-being ’ ceremonies (50 i), and is, according to the comm , referred to as such m 25 36 Verse 2 IS also used, with others, by Vait (29 5), m the agntcayana or building of the fire-altar. Translated Weber, iv 414 , Griffith, 1 25 1 Giver of well-being, lord of the people (I'/f), Vrtra-siayer, remover of scomers, controlling, let the bull Indra go before us, soma-drinker, producing fearlessness The comm renders vimrdkds by vt^esena mardhayttd qatriinarn^ although he explains mrdhas in vss 2, 3 by samgrdmdn j the word is plainly a possessive com- pound |_accent 1 no genitivej, expressing in form of epithet the action of 2 a and 3 a RV xt.'&id&Ya.e^vtqds pdtts The verse occurs further m TB (hi 7 ii 4 )andTA (x 1.9), both have viqds, and, in d, svastidas for somapas. 2 Smite away, O Indra, our scomers {mrdh ) ; put {yam) down them that fight {prtany) [us] ; make go to lowest darkness whoso vexes us. RV reverses the order of c and d, and reads ddharam-j and with it agree precisely SV (11 1218) and VS (viii 44 a et al ) , while TS (1 6 124) and MS (iv 12 3) have for c adhaspaddm tdm Itn krdht LCf MGS li 15 6 h and p 155 J 3 Smite away the demon, away the scomers , break apart Vrtra’s (two) jaws , away, O Indra, Vitra-slayer,' the fury of the vexing enemy RV and SV. (ii 1217) have the same text ; TS (i 6 I25) reads qdirun for rdksas, nuda tor jahi, and bhdmtid for vrtrahan 4 Off, O Indra, the mind of the hater, off the deadly weapon of him that would scathe, extend great protection ; keep very far off the deadly weapon RV reads manyds for mahdt in c, TjiAyavayd lor ydv- in d TS (111 5 8, only a, b) supphes in the first half-verse the missing verb, jahi, putting it in place of vadhdm. Unless We resolve qdrma into three syllables, the anustubh is defective by a syllable LAdd nah afteryac/tafj The 5 h)m:ms of this anuvdka j_4. J again have 20 verses, the norm see at the con- clusion of the preceding anuvdka (after hymn 16) 22. Against yellowness (jaundice). {Brahman — sauryam uta mantroktahartmadevatyam Snustubham ] Found in Paipp L Used by Kaug (26 14) in a remedial rite (against heart disease and ]aur!dice {kdmala, Kec. kdmtla, the comm ]) 23 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I. -1. 23 Translated* Weber, iv.415; A Kuhn, KZ xiu 113; Griffith, i 26? Bloomfield, 7,263 — Cf also Zimmer, p. 3 88; Bloomfield, AJP. xii 437; Bergaigne-Henr}*, //c/rwtV, p 134 Kuhn adduces analogous old Germanic charms. I. Let them (both) go up toward the sun, thy heart-bum {-dyoia) and yellowness ; wnth the color of the red bull, rvith that we enclose {paii.-dJid) thee. Ppp reads in a udeidnij its c is yo rohitasya gor varnas^ wmch construes better with d The abbreviated writing hrdyot- for hrddyoi- (see my Skt Gr §232 a ^and Roth, ZDMG xlvui ro2j) betra3*s the /firr/zr-text into dividing (cf idd yam^ IV 19 6 , so even the RV pada~\x:y± has jaraiovisam from jaraddvisavt at v 8 2) SPP has properly fn his text the unabbrewated form hrddyo- U'doayatam in the AV Index Verborum is an erratum for ltd ayaidm the comm takes the form, doubt- less wrongly, as 3d smg mid instead of 3d du active Kaug follows the indication of c, d, and of 3 a, b, by prescribing the use of products of a red cow, hair and skin etc , in the healing rite 2 With red colors we enclose thee, in order to length of life ; that this man may be free from complamts {-rdpas)^ also may become not yellow Ppp has a different second half-verse yathd tvatn arapd 'so atho *lidt lio bJiava The thwd pada is iv 13 4 d (or RV. x 137 5 d) The comm explains rapas as = papa 3. They that have the red one for divinity, and the kine that are red — form after fonn, vigor {ydyas) after vigor, with them we enclose thee The translation imphes the easy emendation in a to rdhinfdevaiyds^ in accordance With the universal use of devatya elsewhere The ‘ red one ’ is perhaps tlie red star (or lunar astensm) Rohinl, our Aldebaran, Ppp reads rohitdr devatyd, and in b rohiiilr utUj m d It has ietia tvd. 4 In the parrots, in the ropandkds, we put thy yellowness ; likewise in the hdndravas we deposit thy yellowness. Not one of our mss gives at the beginning the true reading gtikestt, as found in RV • 50 12 Land Ppp J (and TB iii 7 6**), but it is presented by the comm , and by three of SPP’s authorities RV and TB have me for te both times, and accent Jiandra- visu The names are understood by the comm as those of birds ropandkd ~ kdstha- ^itka, apparently a kind of parrot, and hdridrava — gopltanaka, apparently d yellow water-wagtail fPpp prapandkd^a \ 23, Against leprosy: with a healing herb. [Atharvan {fveialaksmavtndfandyd 'nenS 'stknfm osadhtm astStit) — v5tiasj>atyam dtiustubham ] Found m Paipp 1 , but defaced, so thatTor the most part companson is impossible. Also, With vs 3 of the next hymn, m TB. (11 4-4"*) Used by Kaug (26 22-24), m company with the next following hymn, m a remedial nte (against white leprosy, ^'^‘takusfha, schol and comm ) Translated . Weber, iv 416 , Ludwig, p 500 , Gnll, 19, 77 , Griffith, 1 27 . Bloom- ficld,i6,266, furthermore, vss 1,2 by Bloomfield. ATP xi 325 - Cf Beigaigne-Henry, Manuel, p. 135. 1 . 23 - BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 24 1 Night-bom art thou, O herb, O dark, black, LandJ dusky one, O colorer {rajanl), do thou color this leprous spot and what is pale {pahid) According to the comm, the herb addressed is the haridra {Cufcuma longa) R ■wTites “ The rajanl is known to the lexicographers, and has later as principal name parpatl\zu Oldenlandia djeing red, OB ], Madana 46 47, Dhanvantan (ms ) 1 27 In Bhavapr 1 194 (where, according to my old and good ms , ralljanl is to be read instead of -««), It IS noted that this remedy is fragrant, and comes out of the north. It has a dark aspect The species not to be determined, because the later identifications are entirely untrustworthy ” [_See Dhanvantari, Ananda-S^rama ed , p 17 J The causative stem rajaya (the meter calls for rdj-') is found only here. 2 The leprous spot, what is pale, do thou cause to disappear from hence, the speckled ; let thine own color enter thee ; make white things {ptkld) fly away. TB has na (nah f) for and a^nuidm for vtfalUm in c, and in d (velatn for (^nklam. The comm pHhak ior prsat in b, and has the usual support of a small minority of SPP’s mss 3 Dusky is thy hiding-place, dusky thy station (dst/idna ) ; dusky art thou, O herb ; make the speckled disappear from hence TB has the easier reading ntldyanam in a The comm again gives prthak in d ; he holds that the plant here addressed is the indigo («f/f). 4 Of the bone-bom leprous spot, and of the body-bom that is in the skin, of that made by the spoiler {dust) — by incantation have I made the white (fvetd) mark disappear. Ppp has in c (fhtlsySj TB reads instead krlydySj the comm, explains dtlst as qatriltp&ditd krtyd Ppp has at the end anenagam. 24. Against leprosy. {Brahman — Ssurfvanaspatidevatyam Snustubham 2 mcrtpathySpanktt ] Found in Paipp 1 , but not in connection with the preceding hymn For the use of 23 and 24 together by Kaug., see under hjTnn 23 Translated Weber, iv 417 , Ludwig, p 509 , Grill, 19, 77 , Gnfiith, 1 28 , Bloom- field, 16, 268. 1 The eagle {suparnd) was bom first ; of it thou wast the gall ; - then the Asura-woman, conquered by fight {ytidJi), took shape as forest-trees Ppp reads at the end vanaspatih, which is more m accordance with the usual con- struction of rilpatn kr (mid ) and the like Ppp has also jtgkansiid ioryudha jtid in c. R suggests the emendation tad asurl {ya'sSx^ jtghatsttam rtl-, ‘that, attempted to be eaten by the Asuri, took on vegetable form ’ i e became a healing plant The comm still regards the indigo as addressed. He coolly explains jtid by its opposite, y/Zar/fl/i" All our mss have m d the absurd accent cdkre (emended m the edition to cak re ) . SPP reports the same only of two pada-mss 2 The Asura-woman first made this remedy for leprous spot, this 25 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I -1. 25 ettacer of leprous spot , it has made the leprous spot disappear, has made the skin uniform {sdrupd). Ppp has again (as in 23 4) anenaqat me, in d it reads suniparn 3 Uniform by name is thy mother, uniform by name is thy father; uniform-making art thou, O herb ; LsoJ do thou make this uniform. Found also, as noted above, in TB. (11 4 4*), which has for c sarilpd ’jy osadJie. Ppp. reads throughout It inserts between this verse and the next * jam yad agnijam extra ktldsa jajiltse tad astu sukrtas tanvo yatas tvd 'pi nay&mast. 4. The swarthy, uniform-making one [is] brought up off the earth ; do'thou accomplish this, we pray; make the forms nght again. All our mss have at the beginning qama, and dso very nearly all'SPP’s 5 but the latter very properly admlte qyd- into his text, it being read by the comm with: a couple of mss that follow him, and being 'found in Ppp. also Ppp. once more has surilp-, it corrupts b into prthxvydbhydJ^bhavamy and gives sddaya at end of c. The phrase xddxn il sii is quoted in Prat 111. 4 and iv. 98, which prescribe the protraction and Imguah- zation, and words of the verse are repeatedly cited in the commentary to other rules 25. Against fever {iaktndn). \Bhrgvangjras — yaksmanSfanSgntddwatsm trdisjuhham vtrddgarhhS; 4 pure 'rtusi: ] Found in Paipp i Used by Kaug in a remedial rite (26. 25) against fever, in con- nection wth heating an ax and dipping it in hot wa^er to make a lotion ; and reckoned (26. 1 , note) to the takmandqana gana. Translated Weber, iv 419 , Grohmann, Ind Stud ix 384-6, 403, 406 , Ludwig, P* 511 , Zimmer, p 384 and 381 , Griffith, 1 29^ Bloomfield, 3, 270 ; Henry, /owr/m/ •dstatxguc, g.x. 512 — Cf Bergaigne- Henry, p. 136, I. As Agni, entering, burned the waters, where the maintainers of duty {dhdn/ta-) paid acts of homage, there they declats to be thy highest birth-place ; then do thou, O fever {takmdti), complaisallt» avoid us. The comm explains pada a in accordance with the ceremonial act founded on its mechanical interpretation ; c Lcf RV 1 163 4 d J shows that it is pat- of the heavenly waters that is intended Satnvtdvdit (occurring nowhere else) he renders “ fuUy know- mg thy cause, the fire (or Agni) ” the translation takes it as equivalent to the not uncommon samvtddna Adahat he quietly turns into a future “ shall bum thee, O fever ” ! Ppp reads aduliai instead, and m c combmes to id "huh. \ Cf Cjrohmann’s interpretation, 1 c , 403, 404 J 2 If thou art flame {arcis) or if heat {qocis), or if thy ‘birth-place eeks the shavings (?), hriedu by name art thou, O god of the yellow one; then do thou, O fever, complaisant, avoid us The ;&m/rt-reading qakaJyaoesl in b is assured by Prat in 52, but the meaning r extremely obscure Ppp has the better reading qdkalycsu ‘ among the shavings ’ , jamiram rather requires a locative. The comm guesses it as loc of qaLalyes from qakalya explained as a " heap of shavings,” and root is ‘seek,’ and so an epithet of fire , I 25- BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAiMHITA 26 BR conjecture “ following the shaving, 1 e glimmering” Ppp reads in a for ^octs The name at the beginning of c is of quite uncertain form , the ms readings are Jirudu, hrtidru, /trudu, /tiidu, rudu, hrudbhu, hrudu, iildhu \JirudJiu\ , SPP adopts in his text the same form as we, and, it is to be hoped, on the authonty of his oral reciters, which in such a case must be better than mss , Ppp has (in both verses) kudu, which is a word occurring also elsewhere, and meaning “ram ” , the comm reads rud/tu, explaining it as = rohaka or pnrusacarlre nipddaka ‘ producing in the human bodj ’ LHeniy, Journal Asialtgue, 9 x 513, suggests that the problematic word may be connected with the Assyrian hufafu and the Hebrew /latilf, and so go back to a proto- Semitic *^harudu, ‘gold ’ J Haldvy, however, 1 c , 9 xi 320 ff , suggests that it may be rather a Sanskntization of xKwpln, ‘greenish-yellow,’ and compares the relations of vaidurya, Prakrit velurya (veruliya) /SijpiJXXcop Cf further, Barth, Revue de Plnstotre des 1 eligtons, xxxix. 26 J 3 If heating {gokd) or if scorching {abJngokd)^ or if thou art son of king Varuna, hrudu by name etc etc Ppp has for b the more sensible version rudrasya prauo yadt -mruno (r>a 'runo?') 'st 4 Homage to the cold fever, homage I pay to the fierce {rfad) heat {qocii ) , to the one that befalls on every other day, on both days, to the third-day fever be homage Ppp reads in b duraya krnva vayavt /t*, and in c ubhayebhyag ca haias The com- pound ubhayadyus is noticed in PraL iv 21 LAs for rhythmical fevers — tertian, quartan, etc , see Grohmann, 1 c , 387, 388 J 26. For protection from the wrath of the gods. \Brahman — indrddibahttdevaiyam. gayatram z 2'P ^dmuT trtstubh , 4 pddamert (y, 4. eidvasdna)"] Found m Paipp xix , but vss 3-4 elsewhere than 1-2 The hymn appears to be called (so schol and the comm ) apanodauam ‘thrusters away’ in Kaug (14 14), and quoted and used as such in 25 22 and (ivith iv 33) in 42 22 ; it is further applied (with 27 and vi 3, 76) at the beginning of the svastyayana ntes, on going to bed and getting up agam (50 4), and (wuth 1 13 and other hymns) in the nte of entrance on Vedic study (139 8) Translated Weber, iv 420 ; Griffith, 1 31 1 Far be that from us — may [your] missile {Jieti) be, O gods ; far the bolt (dginaii) which ye hurl The last pada is identical wnth RV 1 172 2 c , the other two padas (for which Ppp has ho variants) sound in part like a misunderstood echo of the RV text • ard sa vah sudanavo mdruta rnjaft qdT^tJi For c Ppp has dre mantdm (or maridvtj for maru- idm ?) aqastih The comm foolishly supplies an “ O our enemies ” in c , aqmd he explams zs yantrddtvtntrmukiah pdsdJiah The Anukr ignores the defectiveness of b 2 Be yon Rati (‘ liberality ’) a companion {sdkht) for us , a companion [be] Indra, Bhaga, Savitar of wondrous favors 27 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I -1 27 Rati seems to be made a persomficatioa here, as m in 8 2 and vii 174 below , the comm makes it equal to Mitra or Surya Ppp has a very differentliext sakhe *va 710 ratir astu sakhe 'ndras sakhd savtid sakhd bhagas satyadhanjid no ^stu , which is better as regards both sense and meter The irzpadd of the Anukr is probably a mis- reading for dvtpaddj the mss agree with it m using no avasdna-sign in the verse, and SPP very properly follows them , the pada~mss mark a cesura after rdtth The comm makes cttraradhas — bahnvtdhai/i dha/taz/i yasya 3. May ye, issue (iidpdt) of the height, sun-skinned Maruts, yield us breadthful protection The mss all read at the end and SPP retains it in ms text , the comm has saprathas, in accordance with our emendation. LCf Lanman, Noun-Iitflectton^ p 560 J The comm further has yacchdia in c 4 Do ye advance [us], be gracious ; be thou gracious to our selves {tanu), show kindness (vidyas) to our offspring (tokd) Ppp fills up the deficiency of a, reading su mrdatd snsudatd 77 trdd no aghdbhyah stokdya tanve dd (perhaps defective at the end) The mss , supported by the Anukr , make no division of the verse before f 7 tdyas, and SPP follows them , the meter, how- ever, IS plamly gdya/rf The name given by the Anukr is not used by it elsewhere , It doubtless signifies, as in the VS Anukr., 7_+ 7 + 7 = 21 svUables, the resolution ‘bht-as being refused m b and c. 27. Against various evils. \_Atharvan {svastyayanakdmaJi) — cSztdramasam ute ' ftdrdntdawaiam d/wstubham I pathyapankti ] Found m Paipp xix. For the use of the hymn with its predecessor by Kaug , see under 26 , it is also reckoned to the svasiyayana gana (25 36, note) , and vs 4 appears by Itself near the beginning of the svastyaya 7 ia ceremonies, in the same rite as hymns 26 and 27 Translated Weber, iv 421 , Ludwig, p 517, Griffith, 1 32 — Griffith sajs the sloughs are to make the travellers invisible to highway robbers, and cites an old Enghsh analogue 1 Yonder on the further shore are she-adders, thrice seven, out of their sloughs {-jardyu ) , with the sloughs of them do we wrap up {dpt vya) the (two) eyes of the malignant waylayer. Jardyu m the sense ‘ cast-off skm of a snake ’ appears to be quotable only here ; tbe comm regards the word as so applied by a figure jardyuvat garirasya vcstakas tvacah Ppp reads t/ztds pare in a, and jarjardyuvah in b , the comm has instead ^itrjard tva, explaining as jardrahtia devd iva 2 Let the cutting one (krt') go asunder, she who bears as it were a club {pinakd ) , asunder [go] the mind of her that returns to life {pimar- ) , unsuccessful [are] the malignant ones. Ppp has no variants to cast light on this very obscure verse , it adds at the end '^pe Jas panpazitht/io po phdyttr arsatu The comm reads punarbhavd in c , he 1. 27- BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 28 supplies “ the army {scfia) of our enemies ” as the missing- noun iti the verse, and explains the epithet as “ reassembling after dispersal ” He paraphrases krntad wth chtndatl LSPP’s pae/a-rezding is ptmahobhuvaJi, against Index Verborum, p 184 (corrected p 383), and against Ski Gr. §352 a, which should be corrected by p 411 of Lanman’s Noun-InJlcction.\ 3. The many have not been able together; the few have not ventured on [it] ; like the sprouts (J ddga) of a bamboo (vcnu) round about, unsuc- cessful [are] the malignant ones. The first half-verse in Ppp is defaced, but apparently its text agreed with ours, except that at the end stands abht dhrsnuvavi As the second half is wanting, these two padas probably form one verse with the two reported above, under vs 2 The comm reads dadrqtts at end of b, and has udga tva pantos m c, explaining iidga ety- mologically as = qakhd The comment to Prat 111 13 quotes dadhrsus, and that to ii 38 gives adgds among its examples ; neither adga nor udga appears to be quotable from elsewhere 4 Go forward, ye (two) feet ; kick (sphur) forward ; carry to the housed of the bestower ( pr ) ; let Indranl go first, unscathed, unrobbed, in front Ppp has grham and vahantu (y et psd 6 ii) m b, and, for d, jthitvd muktvd pathd The comm reads ajitd in d ; he ingeniously quotes from TS (11. 2 8») “ Indrani is deity of the army ” m explanation of her introduction here L^f Bergaigne, Religion Vidiquey ill r 55 n. J 28. Against sorcerers and witches, \Catana — svastyayanam dnustubham j. vtrdtpathyabrhatJ ; 4. fatkydpanktz ] The hymn is not found in Paipp Though not mentioned as one of the cdtandni by the text of Kaug , it is added io them by the schol (8 25, note)' It is once used by itself m a -witchcraft ceremony (dbhicdnka') for the relief of one frightened, accom- panying the tying on of an amulet (26 26). Translated : Weber, iv. 423 , Griffith, 1 33 1 Hither hath come forth god Agni, demon-slayer, disease-expelier, burning away deceivers, sorcerers, kiinidins. ' In our text, upd is a misprint for itpa (an accent-sign slipped out of place to the left) The comment on Prat iv 3 quotes the first three words as exemplifying the dis- connection of prefixes from a verb 2 Bum against the sorcerers, against the kimldiiis, O god ; bum up the sorceresses that meet thee, O black-tracked one. In c the comm , with two or three of SPP’s authorities that follow him, reads krsnavartmane (treating it as a vocative) 3. She that hath cursed with cursing, that hath taken malignity as her root (? miird), that hath seized on [our] young to take its sap — let her eat [her own] offspring. 29 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK 1 . -1. 29 The verse is repeated below as iv 17 3, and has there a parallel in Ppp. The comm first takes infiram as for tnulam (as rendered above), but adds an alternative explanation as miirchaLar,ain^ adjective to agham; he has ddade in place of -dhe Jdtdvi is metncally an intrusion, but completes the sense. 4 Let the sorceress eat [her own] son, sister, and daughter Q napti)', then let the horrid-haired sorceresses mutually destroy {vi-/ian) One another ; let the hags [ardyt) be shattered asunder The comm explains napti as naptrt or pdutrasya (^putrasya ?') apatyanlpd sam- tail He xtz^sydtndhdnl (for -tils') in a, and atha m c. The 7 hymns of this anuvdka {^5 J have 28 verses, as determined by the quoted Anukr paflcame 'st&u. 29. For a chief’s success: with an amulet [ VastMa — sadrcam abhivartamantsuktam dnusiubham ] Found (except vs 4) in Paipp 1 , and (with the same exception, in RV , chiefly x. 1 74 |_. namely, AV verses i, 2, 3, 6 correspond respectively with RV. verses r, 2, 3, 5 See Oldenberg, Die Hymnen des-RV^ i 243 J. Kaug. uses the hymn m the ceremony of restoration of a king, with prepanng and binding on an amulet made of the nm of a chanot-wheel (16 29* the comm, says, vss 1-4); the last tivo verses are specifically prescribed for the binding on The comm* quotes the hymn as employed by the Naksatra Kalpa (19) in a maJid 0 nti called tnahendrl. Translated . Weber, iv 423 , Griflith, i. 33. I With an over-rolling amulet {^nani)^ wherewith Indra increased — therewith, O Brahmanaspati, make us increase unto royalty {rds(rd). Abht, literally ‘ on to,’ so as to overwhelm. Our version spoils the consistency of the verse by reading -v&vrdhd and vardhaya in b and d for RV. (x. 174. i) -vdvrU and vartaya^ which Ppp. also gives (Ppp vartayah) Ppp. further has imam for asmdn in c. RV reads havisd for manind in a. The long f of abhlvarta (p. abhtov-) is noted by Prat. in. 12. 2. Rolling over our rivals, over them that are niggards to us, d^i thou trample on him who fights — on whoever abuses (durasy-) us. RV. (x 174 2) has in d trasydiij Ppp , by a not infrequent blunder, reads duras- yatu. Pada a lacks a syllable, unless we resolve patndn into three syllables 3 Thee hath god Savitar, hath Soma made to increase, thee have all existences iphuid) [made to increase], that thou mayest be over-rolling. The connection is again spoiled in our text by the substitution of avlvrdhat m b for avtvriat (which is read by RV x 174 3), with the former it is impossible to render the prefix ab/n This timf Ppp gives abhlbhrqat instead, doubtless a mere corruption 4 The over-rolling, overcoming, rival-destroying amulet be bound upon me unto royalty, unto the perishing {pardbhu) of rivals The verse is Avanting in both RV. and Ppp Its excision, with the following verse 1 29 - book I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 30 (which, however, Ppp has), woula leave the hymn of normal length, and composed of four out of the five verses of RV x 174 L, of the fourth of which the excision is called forj 5 Up hath gone yon sun, up this spell {vdcas) of mine, that I may be slayer of foes, without rivals, nval-slayer RV X 1 59 I a, b IS to be compared (b reading icd aydm mdrnakd bhdgaJi) , Ppp appears to mix the versions of b, giving, ungrammatically, ayam with vacas l_Cf also MP i 16 I J 6 A rival-destroying bull, conquering royalty, overpowenng — that I may bear rule over these heroes and the people {jdna) RV (1 1 74 5) has instead of a our 5 d (found also as x. 6 30 c, and xix 46 7 b); in c It reads [_Cf MP 1 16 5 J 30. For protection: to all the gods. \Atharvan (ayuskdmali) — vatfvadevam traistubham 3. (okvaragarbhd vtradjagatt'\ Found in Paipp 1 , but damaged and only in part legible The hymn belongs, according to the comm , to the dyusya (‘for length of life') garta, although not found among those mentioned (Kaug 54 li, note) as composing that gauaj it is used in ceremonies for long life by 52 18 and 59 i , also, with i 9 and other hjTnns, m the reception of a Vedic student (55 17), and m dismissal from Vedic study (139 15) And vss 3, 4 appear in Vait (4 4, 15) m connection with different parts of the parv(in- sacnfices The comm further quotes it from Naks Kalpa 17 and 18 m tivo mahSi^diiti ntes, styled airavati and vdiqvadevT, and from Pangista 5 4, in the puspabhtseka ceremony Translated Weber, iv 424 , Ludwig, p 430 , Griffith, 1 34 1 O all ye gods, ye Vasus, protect this man ; likewise ye Adityas, watch ye over him ; him let not one related {sdiidbht) nor one unrelated — him let not any deadly weapon of men {pdimiseya) reach Ppp has la b the false form jdgrata The comm paraphrases -mlbki in c by garbhd<^aya |_For the syntax, cf Caland, KZ xxxiv 45^ J 2 Whoso of you, O gods, are fathers and who sons, do ye, accordant {sdcctas), hear this utterance of mine , to you all I commit this man ; happily unto old age shall ye carry him Ppp has at the end naydtha The comm reads in b uUha 7 n 3 Ye, O gods, that are m the heaven, that are on earth, that are in the atmosphere, in the herbs, in the cattle, within the waters — do ye make old age the length of life for this man , let him avoid the hundred other deaths The intrusion of pa^ttsu and apsi’t in b spoils the meter {_or we may rczd yd “rfdf/ksa dsndhisv apsu ar/db] , Pjip , omitting pa^iisu and nitldr, makes it good The An l^r. requires us to scan the pada as of 14 sjllablcs Pr'u it loi notes the iingualizition m forms of as after dtvs, and the comment cites this passage (a) as example. The comm, has m d I'raaLtc, and rend^ s it as causatne. to loi deatqs, sec Zimmer, p 400 J 31 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I. -L 31 4. Whose are the fore-offerings and whose the after-offerings ; the gods that share the oblation and that eat what is not made oblation of ; you among whom the five directions are shared out — you do I make sitters at the session (sattrd^ of this man. Ppp. reads in d tan no-^smat satrasadhah k- The comm explains ahutadas as baltharan 5 .didevas j in saitra he sees nothing more than simple sadana Both editions read saira-, in accordance with universal manuscript usage 31. To the divine guardians of the quarters. [Brabman, — Sfdpdliyam, vdsto^atyam dnushtbham 3 vtrdttrtstubh , 4 pardnustuptnstubh } Found m Paipp. i. The hymn is called in Kang (38 ii) Sfdpdltyam, and is also reckoned by the schol (8 23, note) to the vdsiospatlydni or vdstu garia It is used wth xii I in the ceremony (38. 16) for establishing a house, and again, except vs 3, as dnihandm * establishers ’ in a like rite {38. 1 1 ) , .t appears in one of the j^zj/^r-sacnfices (64 i) with an offering of four dishes (catuk(ardva), and m the portent ceremony (127 6) against obscuration of the “Seven Sages” (the Dipper, or Charles’s Wain) by a comet Verse 2 (32 27, note , but the comm says instead vs i, quoting its pratika) IS reckoned among the anhohugds, and applied m ntes for healing, security, long life, etc.; and vs 4 (50 ii) in one for good fortune in the night In Vait (36.20) the hymn (as dqdpdllyd) accompanies in the a^vamcdha the turning loose of the sacnficial horse. And the comm, quotes it as used in Naks Kalpa 14 in the adbhuta viahd<^Snti. Translated . Weber, iv.425 , Ludwig, p 372 , Gnffith, i 35. I. To the four immortal region-guardians of the regions {d^), to the overseers of existence {bimtd), would we now pay worship {vidh) with oblation. The verse occurs also in TB (11 5 33) and A(JS (11. ro. rS) in the latter, without variants , TB. inserts ivd after dqdn&m in a The comm, paraphrases dqds by pr&cy- ddtdipas^ which is plamly its meaning here. i 2 Ye, O gods, who are the four region-guardians of the regions — do ye release us from the fetters ( pdga) of perdition from every dis- tress idnhas) The comm, reads siana for sthana mb 1 he Anukr does not note b as metrically deficient, doubtless making the harsh resolution ca-tn-d-ro. 3 . Unlamed I sacrifice to thee wuth oblation , unmairaed I make obla- tion to thee with ghee ; the god that is fourth region-guardian of the regions, he shall bring hither to us welfare (subhiitd). At the beginning, dqrdmas is read by half the mss (including our E I O Op K Kp ) and by the comm , SPP gives Asr~ in his text, as we in ours Aqlotias m b in our edition is an erratum for dqlonas Ppp has for a, b agronas te havisd vtdhenta tnaqrd- mas te ghrt-j the comm also reads Ppp gives in c the word perhaps means simply ‘ [any] one of the four ’ The Anukr appears not to sanction the resolu- tions to tn-d which would fill out a and b The pada-mss mark the division between c and d after devas, as the sense, but not the meter, demands i 31- BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 32 4 Well-being {svasti) be to our mother and father, well-being to kme, to creatures (jdgat), to men {puntsa ) , all welfare [and] beneficence Q suviddtra) be ours , long may we see the sun F or jagate m b Ppp has uta^ with manifest advantage to both meter and sense , and It reads purusebhyas (with our H s m ), and m d drqeva Many of the samhtiS- mss (including our H K ) give no after ptiri in a The comm gives three different mterpretations (taking it always, however, from vtd and not from da) for the ambigu- ous suviddtra. The Anukr appears to read no in c, and jt-dg and su-rt-am m d Lrather, fydg and sdryam^ so as to make ii + il" ii + 8?J [^As Xojagai^ see Zimmer, P ICO I 32. .Cosmogonic. [Brahman — dydvSprihtvtyam dnustubham 2 kakummait) Found m Paipp 1., next after our hymn 31 Used by Kaug in a women’s nte (34 i), against barrenness, and again (59 3) in a ceremony for prospenly, to heaven and earth , and the first verse (so the comm) further (6.17), as alternate to x.5 23, with conducting water mto the joined hands of the sacnficet’s wife, in the parvan- sacnfices Translated Weber, iv 426 , Ludwig, p. 533 , Gnffitb, t.36. 1 Now, ye people, take knowledge, he will speak a great mystery (? brdJmtaii ) , that is not on earth nor in the sky whereby the plants breathe With a, b IS to be compared the very similar line xx. 127 i a, b iddm janh dpa ^ruta nard^ansd stavisyatCj which makes it probable that the ungrammatical vtddtha means vidata or vedatha (accent is unmotived), and suggests also vadisyate, passive , the former seems confounded with the noun viddtha, of which vtddthe, or, as Ppp reads, viddtham, ould make fairly good sense * wiU now be spoken at (or to) the council ’ Ppp rezAs yatas ioryena in d \_Fot prdndnti, see Prat, iv 57 J 2 In the atmosphere is the station of them, as of those sitting weaned- the station of this that exists ibhietd ) . that the pious know — or they do not ‘ Of them ’ (asdm, fern ) m a the comm explains to mean " of the plants,” and then, alternatively, “of the waters” , doubtless the latter is correct, the waters being that “whereby the plants live” (i d) Ppp reads in a antariksam, which means virtually the same as our text the reservoir of the waters is the atmosphere or is in it (not in heaven nor earth, i c) The analogy of vii 95 2 suggests gdvdm as wantmg at tht beginning of b the waters are ordinarily as quiet as cows that lie resting a compan son from the usual Vedic source Weber suggested that sthama be read twice ; and this R favors The Anukr ignores the deficiency in the pada. For d, Ppp has mdus krd bhesatodanah. 3 What the (two) quaking firmaments {rddasi) — and the earth — fashioned out, that at present is always wet, like the streams of the ocean. In b the translation implies emendation to dtaksatdm, as favored by the Ppp read- ing there remains the anomaly of letting the verb agree with rddasT 33 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK I * OD (Ppp has rodhasi) ; perhaps we ought to read bhumcs ' out of the earth.’ The comm , with a disregard of the accent which is habitual with him, take^ tddcsl and its epithet as vocatives, and then supplies dyajts, wcative {_JAOS xi 66 J, in b to help make a dual subject for the verb 1 FoTd.'P^^.h^svtdurasscvavartasT {_Forc,cf n 6 33 J 4 The one hath covered all ; this rests upon the other ; both to the heaven and to the all-possessing earth have I paid homage The first pada is translated according to the Ppp version vi^vam anya 'iht vavaraj which is quite satisfactory , Weber had suggested abhi‘*va "ra The pada- readmg is abhtovara, and the word is quoted under Prat 111. 1 2 as an example of a compound showing protraction of the final vowel of the first member TB (iii 7 loi) and Ap (ix 14. 2) have the verse, and both have any a 'bhtvSvrdhi The comm. gi\es abhivaras, and explams it in three ways, as abhiio varanam chSdanavi^ as abhtz'f /an:, and as abhitah sambhajanayuktam For b, Ppp has znqvan: anyasySm adhi (ra/ant For viqvdvedase m c (Ppp viqvavedhasc j TB. Ap viqzrdkarniane) the comm, also gives two interpretations, from vtd ‘ acquire ’ and from vid ‘ know.’ 33. To the waters: for blessings. *• [Qamtdit — cdndratnasam Spyam uta ir&tstubham J Found m Paipp 1, and also m TS (v 6 i), MS (li 13 i), and the Mantrapatha |_i 2 2-5 J (Wintemitz in Denksch d Wtenet Akad xl.44) [^See also MGS i 2 ii and p 1 58 J Reckoned by Kaug to the apdm siiktdni ‘ hymns of the waters’ (i 21 ii, and 7 14, note), also *0 both the qdntt ganas (9 1,4) , appears further^ with several other hymns, m a nte for good-fortune (41 14) , and in the goddna ceremony to accompany bathing after the shaving (54 5), also m the feet-washing of a guest (90 9), against the portent of the appearance of water in a waterless place (121 i), and against that of the causeless breaking of water-j’ars etc (136 8) And the comm quotes it as employed by Pangista v a m the puspdbhtseka nte Translated . Weber, iv. 428 ; Wintermtz, Hochzeitsrituell, Wtenrr Denkschr xl. 44 ; Griffith, 1 37 I. Of golden color, clean {pict), purifying, in whom [was] born Savitar, in whom Agni , who, of beauteous color, assumed Agni as embryo — let those w'aters be weal, pleasant to us ^ for dadhtrd, better, ‘ conceived ’ ? J TS and MS. read in b jd/dh kagydpo yasv indraJij and Ppp agrees with them , MP has agnfk instead of ittdrah In c TS MS give virupds for suvarndSj and TS omits yds, and hence has dad/ure (nn~ accented) , MS. puts^oj after agnitn MP. offers ie for nos in d. [^As to savt/r — ka^yapa, cf Bloomfield, AJP. xvii. 403. J 2 In the midst of whom goes king Varuna, looking down at the truth-and-falsehood of men ; who, of beauteous color, etc etc The first half-verse is found also in RV. (vn. 49 3 a, b), without difference of read- ing , MP. agrees through the whole verse Lexcept in d, /e for nas^ , TS. MS have a wholly different c The comment to Prat 11 ir gives avapai;yad jandndn: .as example of the gener.al requirement that final « be assimilated to a follomng initial palatal, and half or more of our mss. so read , but SPP., as ekewherc, gives -an j- {_cf note to X 19 4j 1 33 - BOOK I. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 34 3. They of whom the gods in heaven make [their] draught {bhaksd ) ; they that come to be abundantly in the atmosphere ; who, of beauteous color, etc etc. Again TS. MS. have a difiEerent c (^yah prthivivi ^iyaso 'nddnii qukrali) Onr O. has at end of c ’virupah (as TS MS. in i c). MP. substitutes nivist&s for bhiivanti in b The comm renders bJtaksdm by upabhogyam 4. With propitious eye behold me, O waters; with propitious body touch my skin ; they that are ghee-dripping, clean, purifying — let those waters be weal, pleasant to us. The first half-verse appears again below as xvi. 1.12. It alone is found in TS and MS , but our c is RV vii 49 3 c, and the two other texts have it after our 2 a, b [all reading madku- iax ghrta-^ MP. reads qivina ivd cdksusd paqyantv dpah^zxvd. in b spr^aiitu and te AB ^vm 6 10) quotes the whole verse in its TS. and MS. ver- sion Our Bp. K read -^cyutas in c ; Ppp has -^caias. The Anukr. ignores the redun- dancy of one syllable (or more) in b 34, A love-spell; v^th a sweet herb. \^Atkarvan — pancarcavi. madughamamsuktam. -vSnaspatyam dnusiubham ] Verses 1, 2, 5 are found in Paipp. iL, vs 3 in vi , and vs 4 in part in viii It is used by Kau9. in a ceremony for supenonty in disputation (38 17) * the ambitious dis- putant is to come into the assembly frohi the north-east, chewing the sweet plant ; again, twice in the nuptial ceremonies, once with tying a madttgha amulet on the finger (76 8), and once (79 10) op crushing the amulet at the consummation of the marriage. The comm further declares it used at the disputation in the aqvamedha sacrifice , but he quotes no authority for it. All these applications are evidently imposed upon the hymn, not contained in it- Translated : Weber, iv. 429 ; Gnll, 52, 78 ; Griffith, i 38 ; Bloomfield, 99, 274, — Cf. HiUebrandt, Veda-chresiomathte, p 46 I. This plant is hxm&y-i^hddhii^hom ; with honey we dig thee ; forth from 'honey art thoU engendered; [soj do thou make us possessed of honey. The comm calls the plant madhuka, and uses that form of the name also in the quotations from Kaug (instead of madugha, madhugha, etc. , the mss vary greatly m their readings). 2 At the tip of my tongue honey, at the root of my tongue honeyea- ness ; mayest thou be altogether in ray power {krdtu), mayest thou come unto my intent {ciitd) The second half-\erse agrees nearly with that of iii 25 5 and vi 9 2, in both of which the yd/Jt 3 , here unexpressed, helps the construction (though the accent of dsas does not absolutely need it, being capable of being view'ed as antithetical) Ppp has for a jrbxtdya ’gr^ /m madhu, and for c, Hya/bS mSm kdmtny aso (our 5 c) yavi v&cd tnPm anvdyasi The comm explains madhfttakam by mndhurarasabahulam jalama- dhnlakavrksapuspnnt yaihd j he understands the plant to be addressed in c, d — which IS plainly wrong 35 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK I - 1 * 35 3. Honeyed {inddimmant) [is] my in-stepping, honeyed my forth-going ; with my voice I speak what is honeyed ; may I be of honey-aspect Vadani might be a better reading in c. The first half-verse resembles R V. x. 24. 6 a, b (///. m. parayanam mddhimat piinar ayanam). Ppp. has for second half-verse vacd madJiwnad ubitydma akso me madhttsamd^u The comm, takes madhu and samdrqas m d as two independent words. 4. Than honey am I sweeter (fudd/m), than the honey-plant more honeyed ; of me verily shalt thou be fond (? van), as of a honeyed branch. The majority of our mss. (not Bp. I. E D.) read here madht'tgltaf in b, as do also the Prat mss. in both places (u. 5 c ; iv. 16 c) where the verse is quoted J but at vL 102. 3 all read -du - ; SPP. reads -du- (as does our text), and makes no report of discordance, among his authoriUes j the comm, has -du-, and derives the word from madhudugha. All &e mss , and both text^ give the unmotived accent vdnds in c ; the comm. e:q)lains the word by sambhqfes. He again regards the plant as addressed in the second half-verse. Ppp. (in viii ) has a and b, with \aham for asmi andj madhuman for madugkSt:' 5. About thee with an encompassing {paritatmY) sugar-cane have I gone, in order to absence of mutual hatred ; that thou mayest be one lov- ing me, that thou mayest be one not going away from me. The second half-verse is foimd repeatedly later, as ii 30. i d, e and vL 8. 1-3 d, e. The /n/iweading in d is dpa^d, and the word is quoted under Prat in. 34 as one of the cases of irr^ular hiatus to which the rule refers. Disr^arding this, SPP. alters the padaAsxX to dpmtgaky against all our pada^aas, and most of his, for no better reason than that fee comm, seems to read so. Our Bp. (both copies) accents here apoog^, as also at vi. 8. 1, 3, but not at ii. 30, i. The comm, allows this time that the address is to a woman j_Ppp. has for '\ydLyaJtsattakam avidvise yatJd na vidvdvadvi na viblidva kadd cana. As for the rite, cf. Paraskara’s Gihjm-sutra, iii. 7*, and Stenrieris note.J 35 > For long life etc. : witii a gold amulet. {Atiarvair. — kStranyam ; SindrdgTtauf uta vdifvadcvam. JSgatamz 4. anxt^itbgccrbhS irtstzfbbJ} Not foxmd in Paipp |_Of vss. i and 2, Sdnroeder gives the Katha version, with vanants, Tubingtr Katha-hss^ p. 36. J Used by Kang., with L 9 and v. 28, in two cere- monies for fortune and for power (i 1. 19 ; 52. 20) ; and fee comm, considers it involved S 7 -, 3 t» m fee ttpoKayana. The comm, further quotes it from fee adi^d inahd- idnti in Naks. Kalpa 19 ; also from Parigista 4- 1 and 13. r. Translated t Weber, iv.430 ; Ludwig, p. 457 ; Griffith, L39. I. ^Vhat gold the descendants of Dafcsa, well-wflling, bound on for Catanika, that I bind for thee> in order to life {dyits), splendor, strength, to length of life for a hundred autumns. It would rectify tlie meter and improve fee sense (considering that dfrgkdy/tivd foUows) to omit dyusc in c ; fee Anntr. notes fee redundancy of fee p 5 da (14 syllables). ^ S (iAjvIv. 52) has the first half-verse, with a different second Iialf ; and so has a RV. i. 35 BOOK I THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA- 36 khila to RV x 128 (9, Aufrecht, p 685). The Kaug. speaks Kii yugmakrsnala as the amulet : probably a pair of beads of gold like krsnala bemes. The comm, quotes AB vm 21 5 for ^at^Ika 2 Not demons, not pigacds overcome him, for this is the first-bom force of the gods ; whoso bears the gold of the descendants of Daksa, he makes for himself long life among the living. VS (xxxiv 51) has the verse, reading tdd for enam and taranti for sahanie m a, accentmg btbhdrti m c, and giving devisu for jivisu in d ; and it repeats d with mantis- yhu instead , and the RV. khila (8, as above) follows it very nearly (but caranii m a, and daks&yand htr- m c) The Anukr; ignores the metrical irregularities of a and h 3. The waters’ bnlliancy, light, force, and strength, also the heroic powers (vifyd) of the forest trees, do we maintain in him, as in Indra India’s powers (tndriyd) ; this gold shall he, being capable, bear. The comm explams ddksamdna in d by vardhamana Omission of the superfluous indnyant m c would rectify the meter ; the^^z^fo-text marks the division wrongly before asmin instead of after it , Lthe Anukr. hkewise reckons asmin to d and descnbes the pada as one of 14 syllables JJ 4 With seasons of summers (? sdtnd), of months, we [fill] thee, with the milk of the year I fill [thee] , let Indra-and-Agni, let all the gods, approve thee, not bearing enmity. Emendation to ivd *ham at the end of a would rectify both meter and consttnction. Between c and d the pada-\.'^\. wrongly resolves t£ *nu into dnn (as again at viii 2. 21), and the pada-xs\s>% put the sign of pada division before instead of after tej apparently the Anukr. makes the true division [after U, accendessj The comm , too, understands id The combination -bhis tvd is quoted as an example under Prat ii 84. The concluding anuvaka [6 J has again 7 hymns, with 31 verses ; and the quoted Anukr of the mss says ekddaqa co *itare par 3 sytth Some of the mss sum the whole book up correctly as 35 hymns, 153 verses Here ends also the ptrap&tkaka Book 11. LThe second book is made up mostly of hymns of 5 verses each. It contains 22 such hymns, but also five hymns (namely, 3, 4, 14, 15, and 32) of 6 verses each, five hymns (namely, 5, 17, 27, 29, and 33) of 7 verses each, and four hymns (namely, 10, 12, 24, and 36) of 8 verses each. Compare page i. The possibilities of critical reduction to the norm are well illustrated by hymns 10, 12, 14, 27, see, for example, the critical notes to ii. 10. 2. The whole book has been translated by Weber in the Moitats- beruhte der Kbn. Akad der TVzss. zu Berlin^ June, 1870, pages 462-524, This translation was reprinted, with only slight changes, in Indisclie Sludten, vol. xiii. (1873), pages 129-216. The following references to Weber have to do with the reprint. J I. Mystic. [Veiia. — brahmatmadSwatam trdtsiubham j jngotT'\ Found m Paipp. ii , and parts of it m other texts, as pointed out under the sever^ verses. (_Von Schroeder g^ves what may be called a Katha-recension of nearly all of it in his Tubinger Katha-hss , pp 88, 89 J Used by Kaug (37 3) in addressing vanous articles out of whose behavior afterward signs of success or the contrary, and the like oracular responses, are to be drawn (the comm gives them m a more expanded detail) And Vait (29 14) applies vs 3 in the upavasaiha rite of the agntcayana Translated Weber, xiii 129, Ludwig, p 393 , Sc)\Gxm2L.n, Philosophtsche Hymncn, P 82 , Deussen, Geschtchie, 1 ' 253 , Gnffith, 1 41 I Vena (the longing one ?) saw that which is highest in secret, where everything becomes of one form ; this the spotted one milked [when] born , the heaven-(i-z;) Called by Kaug (8 2^, with vi iir and viii 6 (and the schol add iv 20 see ib., note), mdirttdfndnt * mother-names ’ (per haps from the alleged author) ; they are employed in a remedial rite (26 29 “ against seizure ^by Gandharvas, Apsarases, demons etc ” comm ), and several times (94. 1 5 95 4> 96 4 I 101.3, 1 14 3-, 136 9) in charms. against various portents {adbhutdm) And verse i is allowed by Vait (36 28) to be used in the agvamedha sacrifice as altei native for oneg^ven in its text (27). Further, the comm quotes the mdtrndman h)Tnn from the ^anti Kalpa (16) as accompanying an offenng in the sacrifice to the planet ^P'ahayajJld) ; and from the Naks Kalpa (23) in the iantrabhiitd mahdgdntt. Translated., -Weber, xiii. 133 , Griffith, i 42; verses 3-5 also by Weber, Abh. Ber ItnerAkad 1858, p 350 (= Omtnaund Portenta) — Cf. Hillebrandt, Ved Mythol i 433 1 The heavenly Gandharva, who is lord of being (hkdvand), the only one to receive homage, to be praised (id) among the clans (vip) — thee being such I ban {yu) with incantation, O heavenly god ; homage be to thee , m the heaven is thy statioi Ppp reads in c deva dtvya The comm understands ydumi in c as “join” (sam- yojaydmt) |_BR vi 138, ‘festhalten ’ J RV i 24 11 a, idi tvd ydmt brdhmand, sug- gests emendation The combmation^yrfj-^ in a is bj PraL 11 70 2 Touching the sky, worshipful, sun-skmned, deprecator of the seizure (Jidras) of the gods — gracious shall be the Gandharva, who is lord of bemg, the only one to receive homage, very propitiou*' 11 2 - BOOK II THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 40 Ppp begins with dtva sprsto, and inverts the order of c and a. The comm explains suryatvac by sfiryasamanavarna, and haras by krodha The Anukr does not heed that c IS z.jagati pada 3. He hath united himself {sam-gam) with those irreproachable ones (f ) , in {dpt) among the Apsarases was the Gandharva, in the ocean IS, they tell me, their seat, whence at once they both come and go. Ppp combmes jagma "bhth in a, and has in b apsarabhis for -rasUj its second half- verse reads thus samndra sam sadanam ahus tatas sadya upacaryantl Weber takes sa 7 n jagtne in a as ist sing The comm gives two diverse explanations of the verse, the first taking the Gandharva as the sun and the Apsarases as his rays 4 O cloudy one, gleamer {dtdyut)^ starry one — ye that accompany {sac) the Gandharva Vigvavasu, to you there, O divine ones, homage do I pay All those addressed are m the feminine gender, 1 e Apsarases Ppp has natttatitt for na 7 na it in c The Anukr [_if we assume that its name for the meter (as at 1 2 3 , IV 16 9) means ii-fii-fiij passes without notice the deficiency of two syllables in a 5 They that are noisy, dusky, dice-loving, mmd-conf using — to those Apsarases, that have the Gandharvas for spouses, have I paid homage Ppp reads in a ta/nts-, and Uvo of our mss M ) give the same Ppp has also akstka 77 tas in b Our W I combine -bhyo akara 77 t m d The verse is not bhurtj (as the Anukr calls it), but a regular aiiustubh On account of the epithet “ dice-loving ” m b, Weber calls the whole hymn “ Wurfelsegen ” (‘ a blessmg for dice ’) 3. For relief from flux: with a certain remedy. [Angtras — sadrcaTTi bhdtsajySyurdha7iva7tta7nddtvatam dTtustubhatTt 6 y-p svarddttparis- idnTtiahdbrhati ] This h5min in Paipp also follows the one that precedes it here , but in Paipp vss 3 and 6 are wanting, and 4 and 5 are made to change places , and vs i is defaced Kaug employs it only once (25 6), in a healing nte for various disorders and wounds {jva- rdtTsdratt77tittratiddivra7ies7i, comm ), with 1 2 Translated Weber, xiii 138, Ludwig, p 507, Grill, 17, 79> Gnffith, 1 43, Bloom- field, 9, 277 I What runs down yonder, aiding (^), off the mountain, tliat do I make for thee a remedy, that thou mayest be a good remedy At the end, dsait would be a very acceptable emendation . ‘ that there may be ’ Avatkd (p avai':>kd77i quoted in the comment to Prat 1 103 , 11 3'^, iv 25) is obscure, but is here translated as from the present participle of root av (like ejatkd, V 23 7 Lcf abht77tadyaikd, QB , viksiTiatkd, VS J) , this the comm favors {vyadht- parihdre 7 ia raksaka77t) , Ppp has in another passage twice avataka77t (but evidently meant for avaikaTTi avatakaTTi ma77ia bhesajam avataka7h parivdcana7/t\ In a. our P M read -dhavast 41 TRANSLATION aND’ NOTES BOOK II -n. 3 2 Now then, forsooth I how then, forsooth ? what hundred remedies are thine, of them art thou the chief {uttavid), free from flux, free from disease (dtogana) In b, me ‘ are nune ’ is an almost necessary emendation Yet Ppp also has ie ad ang&q (a^amyad bJiesajant ie sahasram vd ca yam tCj and, in d, arohanauij cf also vi 44 2 The obsCnre first pada is here translated as if uttered exclamatonly, perhaps accompanying some act or mampulation Asrdva is rendered by the indefinite term ‘flux,’ its specific meaning being uncertain , it is associated with roga also in 1 2 4 , the comm explains it as ailsdrdttmiliranddfvranddt |_Cf Zimmer, p 392 J 3 The Asuras dig low down this great wound-healer; that is the remedy of flux ; that has made the disease {rSga) disappear The /flfl’fl-text in b is aruhosranain, and the word is quoted under Prat. 11 40 as an example of the assimilation of a final h to an initial sibilant , there can be no question, therefore, that the proper reading is arussraua or arnhsranaj >et the abbreviated equivalent (see my Ski. Gravt § 232 a) arusrdna is found m nearly all the mss , both here and in vs 5, and SPP adopts it in his text The comm gives two discord- ant explanations of the word vranasya pdkasthdnam vranamukham |_‘ place where it gets npe or comes to a head ’ ?J, and aruh srdyait pakvavi bhavaiy a 7 iena At the end, the comm has aflfamai (as our text in 4 d) 4 The ants {upajikd) bring up the remedy from out the ocean , that IS the remedy of flux , that has quieted i^am) the disease The comm explains tipajtkds as valvtfkamspddtkd vamryahj Ppp has instead upaclkds, elsewhere is found upadtkd (see Bloomfield in AJP vii 482 ff , where the word IS ably discussed) , (_cf also Pali itpacikd\ The Ppp form, upaclkd, indicates a possible et3Tnology, from upa 4- ct , Ppp says in book vi yasyd bhilinyd upaclkd (mst -kdd') grham kruvaid "imane . iasyds ie vt^vadhdyaso vtsadilsa 7 iam ud bJmre The earth which ants make their high nests of, and which contains their moisture, bas always been used as having remedial properties The “ ocean ” here (cf udaka m vi 100 2), if not merely a big name for the reservoir of water beneath the surface, is a tank or pool Ppp has an independent second half-verse a 7 -uspd 7 tam asy dtharva 7 w rogasihdnam asy dtharva 7 ta 77 t 5. This IS a great wound-healer, brought up from out the earth that IS the remedy of the flux ; that has made the disease disappear Ppp reads aruspd 7 iam (or ~syd-') in a, and m b prihivyd *bhy 6 Weal be to us the waters, propitious the herbs , let Indra’s thun- derbolt smite away the demoniacs {raksds ) , far away let the discharged arrows of the demoniacs fly ■ In a all the mss read apds, which SPP rightly retams in his text , other examples of the use of this accusative form as nominative occur in the text (see the l 7 idex Verbo- rum') , the comm has dpas, as our edition by emendation We may safely regard this unmetncal “ verse ” as a later addition to the hymn , so far as regards the number of syllables (12 124- 14 = 38), it is correctly described by the Anukr , as the name 77 iahd- brhatl is elsewhere used in the latter, but apparently by no other similar treatise. BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 42 il 4- 4. Against various evils: with a jangidi amulet. \Atharvan — sadrcam cdudravtasavt uta jangidadevatSkam dmistubkajn : i vtrSt prastdrapankU 3 Found also (except vs 6 and parts ol i and 2) in Paipp, li Accompanies in Kaug. (42 23) the binding on of an amulet “ as described in the text ” (/// j/ianirokiam), against various evils (the comm says, “ for thwarting witchcraft, for protecting one’s self, for putting down hindrances ”). Translated Weber, xiii 140; Griffith, i 45; Bloomfield, 37, 280; in part also by Grohmann, Ind. Stud ix. 41 7-418. — As to the see Zimmer, p. 65 ; also Weber and Grohmann, U cc. 1. In order to length of life, to great joy, we, taking no harm, all the time capable {daks), bear the jangidd, the viskaTidha-^^o^mig amulet. Ppp has I a, b with 2 c, d as its first verse ; very possibly the two half-verses between have fallen out in the ras ; it has in b rsyambko rkscunand (for raks-) s-. The comm has raksamands also; it is the better reading. The comm gfives no further identification of jaiigida than that it is “ a kind of free ” (adding vdr&nasydm prasid- dhah, ‘ familiarly known at Benares ’ !) ; he defines viskandha in tiie same manner as above, to i 16 3 2. From jambhd, from vigard, from viskandha, from scorching {abhi- ^cand), let the jahgttM, the amulet of thousand-fold valiance {^iryd), protect us about on every side Jambhd is perhaps ‘convulsion,’ or lockjaw; at Ppp xi 2 10 it is mentioned with hanugraha; below, at viii. 1. 16, it is called samhanu ‘jaw-dosing’; the comm, gives two discordant and worthlessly indefinite eacplanations. Vizard should signify some- thing crushing or tearing to pieces ; Ppp. id. 2. 3 names it with vijrmbhaj the comm, says ^arfravt^randf, Ppp has of this verse (see under vs. i) only the second hal^ and combines ntanis sahasraviryas pari nos ph. 3. This one overpowers the viskandha ; this drives off the devourers ; let \h\sjahgii^, possessing all remedies, protect us from distress. The first half-verse we had above as L 16. 3 a, b, with iddm for aydm. Ppp. b^ns this time also with idam, has sdte {mate?) for sahate, and for b reads avam rakso 'pa b&dhatej it gives viskandham with our text. 4. With the amulet given by the gods, the kindly jangii^, we over- power in the struggle {yjyaydmd) the viskandha [and] all demons. - Ppp. reads for d dhydyase sdmahe. The comm, explains vydyame first by satitca- rane, and then by samcaranapradeqe. 5. Let both the hemp and the jangidd defend me from the viskandha: the one brought from the forest, the other from the juices {rasa) of ploughing. That IS, from cnltivated ground. The “hemp” is doubtless, as the comm, defines it, that of the string by which the amulet is bound on. Ppp has at the b^inning kka- naq ca tvdja-; and its second half-verse is corrupted into aranyad abhy abhrtas kr^'d *nyo rasebTtyah. 43 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. -ii. 5 6 Witchcraft-spoiling is this amulet, likewise niggard-spoiling , like- wise shall the powerful jangtdd prolong our life-times The absence of this verse in Ppp. indicates that the hjTnn originally consisted of five verses, in accordance with the norm of the book The verse is very nearly xix. 34 4 Emendation to arattdiisanas (as in xix.) in b would rectify the meter, the Anukr takes no notice of its irregularity At the end, two of our mss (El) and three of SPP’s read iarsat. [_For his sdJtasva/t^ see note to i 19 4 J 5. Praise and prayer to Indra. {Bhrgu Atkarvaua — sapiarcam Jt ft dram triUstubham j^2 upartstSd br/tatT {/. mcfd , 2 vtrSj ) , j vtratpathyabrhalT ; 4. jagaft purovtrdj ] .V Verses i , 3, and 4 are found m Paipp li , and 5-7 elsewhere m its text (xiii ) Verses 1-3 occur also in SV (li 302-4) and (ix 5 2) ; and the first four verses form part of a longer hjmn in A^S (\t 3 i). KB. (xvii i) quotes by way of pratTka vs r a, b (in their SV and form), and speaks of the peculiar structure of the verses, as composed of twent} -five syllables, wth nine syllables interpolated (three at the end of each of the first three five-syllabled padas) cf. Roth, Ueb. d A F, *856, p ir ff, and Weber, notes to his translation At TB 11 4 3'® may be found RV x. 96 I treated in a somewhat similar w'ay (four syllables prefixed to each y/rg<7//-pada ) ; the first five verses of RV x 77 itself are another example, [yet others are AV. vii. H (15) i>2j v 6 4 a, c, RV 1 70 ri as it appears at A^S vi 3 i ; cf further RV X. ai, 24, 25J [_I suspect that these interpolations were used as antiphonal responses J The hymn is used once in Kaug (59 5), among the kdviya ntes, or those intended^ to secure the attainment of various desires , it is addressed to Indra, by one desinng strength (balakdmd) In Vait (16 ri), it (not vs. I only, according to the comm) accompanies an oblation to Soma in the agfttsfof/ta sacnfice, and again (25 14) a soda- ^tgraha And the comm quotes it from Naks Kalpa 17 and r8, in a mahaqafiit to) Indra None of these uses has about it anj'thmg special or characteristic Translated Weber, xiii 143 , Gnffith, 1 46. — Verses 5-7 discussed, Lanman’s Reader^ p 360-1 I. O Indra, enjoy thou — drive on; — come* O hero — with thy two bays, — drink of the pressed [soma] — intoxicated here — loving the sweet [draught], fair one, unto intoxication Ppp omits the three interpolations (as Weber reports certain Sutra-works to assert of the Atharvan texts in general), and reads ttidra jusasva ySht ^ilra pib& suiaq (a Jiadliof cakdna cdrtttn madathah The second interpolation in Aaiyam ; yaksmanS(anadarvatavi anustitbham 3 pathySpankfi , 4 vtrSj , J ntcrtpaihySpanktt'l Verse i occurs m Paipp 1 It is reckoned (Kaug 26 i, note) to the iakmandgana gana, and isTised in a healing ceremony (agamst knlagataknsthaksayagrahanyddtrogds, comm ), accompanying \anous practices lipon the diseased person, which are evidently rather adapted to the words of the text than represented by them (26 41-27 4), and, according to the comm , are rather alternative than to be performed successively. Translated Weber, xm 149; Ludwig, p 513, Gnffilh, 1 50, Bloomfield, 13, 286 I Arisen are the (two) blessed stars called the Unfasteners (vtcH) , let them unfasten {vt-muc) of the ksetrtyd the lowest, the hfghest fetter The disease ksetrtyd (lit’ly, ‘ of the field ’) is treated elsewhere, especially in 111 7 (mentioned also in 11 10, 14.5; iv 18 7). The comm defines it here as ksetre para- ksetre putrap&utr&dtgarlre ctktisyah (quoting for this interpretation Pan v 2 92) ksayakusthndtdosadiisitapitrm&trddtqarlrdvayavcbhya dgatah ksayakusfhdpasmdrd- dirogah — apparently an infectious disorder, of \anous forms, appearing m a wliole family, or perhaps endemic The name vtcridu ‘ the two unfasteners ’ is given later to the two stars m the sting of the Scorpion (X and v Scorpionis sec Silrya-Stddhdnta, note to viii 9), and there seems no good reason to doubt that thej are the ones here intended , the selection of two so inconspicuous is not any more strange than the appeal to stars at all , the comm identifies them \yith Mula, which is the asterism composed of the Scorpion’s tail. The verse is nearly identical wth 111 7 4, and its first half is vi 49 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II -ii 8 121 3 a, b Ppp has for c, d snksetnyasya muhcatSth samgranihya Jirdayasya ca. L“ Their [the two stars’] healing virtue would doubtless be connected with the meteoro- logical conditions of the time at which their heliacal rising takes place.” — Sury^- stddkSntat 1 c , p. 337. J 2. Let this night fade away {apa-vas)\ let the bewitchers (f , abhikfi- van) fade away ; let the ksetnyd-QScicing {-nd^ana) plant fade the ksetriyd away. The night at time of dawn is meant, says the comm (doubtless correctly) He gives two renderings of ahktkrtvarls * one, from root kr, abktio rogaq&ntim kurvSnftb, the other from kr{ ‘ cut,’ kartana^tlap ptqacyah. Accordmg to ICaug the hymn accom- pames a dousing with prepared water outside the house Q bahts) , ivith this verse it is to be done at the end of the night 3. With the straw of the brown, whijtish-jointed baiiey for thee, with the sesame-stalk (? -piflfi) of sesame, let the i^/n^rf-effacing etc. etc The comm, understands arjund- va. a as a tree so named, “with a sphnter of it” to him ttlasahitamafijarf With this verse “ what is mentioned in the text’^ IS directed by Kaug. (26. 43) to be bound on, and also- (so the comm imderstands the connection) a clod of earth and stuff from an ant-hill etc. 4 Homage to thy ploughs {Idhgald)^ homage to thy poles-and-yokes : let the ksetnyd‘^^2i citi), the, priests {brahmdn) and the plants ; all the gods have found thy gathenng upon the earth In a, our Bp has ctti/n, and Op cUdm (both cUim m c) , Ppp. reads cdtavi m both aandc, either word is elsewhere unknown The comm denves ^rf// either from the false root civ ‘ take, cover,’ or from ctt ‘ observe,’ and fabncates his alternative explana- tions accordingly If it comes from ci, there is hardly another example of a like forma- tion Ppp has for a cdtam te devd 'vidafk, and, in c, d, cdtam tebJiyo tu mdm avtdatn bhd- 5 Whoso made, he shall unmake; he verily is best of healers; he himself, clean, shall make for thee remedies, with the healer. The application of the pronouns here is more or less questionable Ppp reads su TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -11 lO SI forjtf in a, and has a more intelligible second half-verse sa eva tubhyam bhesajam cakSra bhtsaj&ti ca; our blitsdjd in d is probably to be emended to -jdm |_‘ the clean one of the healers ’ ?J The comm understands sa at the beginning either as “the great sage Atharvan ” or as the creator of the universe , and ntskarat as grahavtkarasya famanam or niskrttm karotu Weber renders the latter “ shall put it to rights ” 10. For release from evils, and for welfare. [Bhrgvangiras — astarcam ntrrtidyS,vdprthvoySdtnd.nddtvaty(im i iristubh , 2 j-p.astt, S~Sf 7 » ^ 1’P dkpti , 6 y-p atyasU (/vd 'ham tvam th dvdv dumthdit pdddu) ] Found in Paipp u (with vs 8 preceding 6 and 7, and the refram added only to vs 8). The hymn occurs further in TB (n 5. 6 and parts of it m HGS (11 3 10; 4- 1) ^And Its ongmal structure is doubtless clearly reflected by the MP. at 11 12 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Cf note to our verse 2.J It is, hke the two next preceding, reckoned (Kaug 26 i, note) to the takmanSqana gana^ and it is einployed (27 7) in a heahng ceremony, per- formed at a cross-roads, while chips of kdmpila are bound on the joints of the patient, and they or he are wetted with bunches' 'of’^grass According to the comm , the nte is intended against ksetnya simply ^ Translated Weber, xui 156, Ludwig, p 513, GnfBth, i 52; Bloomfield, 14,292 I. From ksetnyd, from perdition, from imprecation of sisters (jaini-), from hatred {dnik) do I release thee, from Vanina's fetter; free from guilt {-dgas) I make thee by [my] incantation , be heaven-and-earth both propitious to thee. TB HGS have for a only ksetnydi tvd nirrtydi tv5, in c brdhmane and karomt, and m d tmd instead of Siam Ppp has at the end 'thivt *ha bhutdm 2 Weal to thee be Agni, together with the waters ; wpal [be] Soma, together with the herbs • so from ksetriyd, from '^perdition, etc. eta The repetition (with evd 'ham prefixed) of the whole first verse as refram for the following verses is not made by TB and HGS except after our vs 8, and there only to pafStj and m Ppp. it forms (complete) a part only of the same verse 8 (though this stands before our vs 6). Its omission from vss 2-7, and their combmation into three whole 4-pada verses [^and the omission of padas e and f from vs 8 J, would reduce the hymn to the norm of the second book, and is recommended not only by that circum- stance, but by the [wordmg m vss 2-3, the construction m vss 4-5, the concurrent tMtlmony of TB and MP , and also of HGS so far as it goes, and by thej plain requirements of the sense also [Cf the analogous state of things m in 31 and the note to m 31 1 1 J For a, b TB HGS substitute fdm^ te a^ih saha 'dbhir asiu (dm dyavdprthivi sahdtt 'sadhlbhth; and Ppp differs from them by having dHlbhts instead"; of adbhis, and gdvas for dy vl (also saho 'sa-') The comm reads ivd for tvdm in vss 2-7 at the begmmng of the refram- This refrain is scanned by the Anukr as 7 + 7 + 11 11 + 11=47, nnd the addition in ys 2 of 9 + 8 makes 64 syllables, a true 53 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -il 12 iiv To counteract witchcraft: with an amulet. — krtyapraiikaranosultam ; hrtySdusanadevatyam i 4p- virddgdyatrJ ; 3~j p parosmh {4. ptplltkamadhyd ntcrt) ] LThe hymn is not metrical J Not foun^ m Paipp , nor elsewhere Reckoned as^ first of the kriydpraiiharana (‘ counteraotvon of witchcraft’) (Kaug 39.7 and note) , used in a charm for protection against w itchcraft (39 i ), with binding-on of a srakiya amulet, and again later (39 13 , the comm sa}s, only vs 1), m a similar rite The comm quotes it further from Naks K (17, 19), in a fnahd^dnii called bdrhaspatl Translated Weber, xiii 163, Griffith,! 54 — Discussed by Bloomfield, AJP vii, 477 ff , or JAOS. xin , p cxxxii (^PAOS Oct 1SS6). r Spoiler’s spoiler (dust) art tJiou, missile’s missile art thou; weapon’s weapon (incni) art thou ; attain {dp) the better one, step beyond the equal {savtd) The body of the verse is addressed to the amulet, the refrain more probabu to it? wearer (so, too, Weber) , but the comm, assigns the latter also to the amulet, and quotes to show it TS 11 4 i"*, w’hich rather supports the contrar} opinion He chlls vieni a vajrandmati, denvmg it from root r/tt ‘ damage ’ LSee Geldner’s discussion of vieni (‘ hurt done to another in vengeful anger '), Fcstgruss an Bohthngk^ p 31,32 J 2 Sraktyd art thou , re-entrant {pratisard) art thou , counter-conjur- ing art thou attain the etc etc The comm s-ii's that srakH is the idakaAxt^, and sfakfya means made from 'it J prattsara is something by which sOrcenes are turned back (upon ttieir perfornier)> it seems to mean virtually a circular amulet — [_such as a bracelet? Yox re-entrant, Whit- ney has mterlmed revertent {sic), better, perhaps, fevciting, trans or intrans J 3 . Conjure {abkt~car) against him who hates us, whom we hate . attain the etc etc. 4 Patron {suH) art thou ; splendor-bestowing art tho*!! ; body-pro'tect- ing art thou ; attain the etc etc The comm , without explaining wh}, glosses siiri with abhijiia ‘knowipg.’ S> Bright {qukrd) art thou ; shining {bhrdjd) art thou ; heaven {svdP) art thou ; light art thou attain the etc etc The comm thinks svhr to be jvarSdtrogoipddanena ittpakah, or else “ tlie common name of sky and sun ” The Anukr scans vsias6-f6-t-6 12 = 305 and the other verses as 8 8 12 =28, exceptmg vs 4, which 139-1-6 12 = 27 (restoni% the a of ast m b) 12. ^Against such as would thwart my incantations. J \Bharadvdja — astarcam ndnddevatyam trSif^ubham 3 jagafi , 7, 8 anuslubk ] Found in Paipp li , but m the verse-order 1, 3, 2, 4-6, 8, 7 The hjmn is called by (47 12) bharadvcijapravraskam ‘ BharadySja’s hewer-off ^ \_ or ‘ cleaver ’J (from expressions m the verses), and is to accompany the cutting of a staff for use m rites of 11 . 12 - BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAIvIHITA. 54 witchcraft (as at 47 14, 16, 18 ; 48 22) , and its several verses are applied through an extended incantation (47 25-57) against an enemy, the details of it throw no light upon -their interpretation Translated* E Schlagintweit, die GoitesurtJietle der Indter (Munchen, Abh dfr bayer Akad der Wiss.), p 13 £E ; Weber, xiii 164; Ludwig, p 445; Zimmer, p 183, GnU, 47)85, Griffith, 1 55, Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii , p ccxxi f (= PAOS. Oct. 1887) or AJP XI. 334-5, SBE xlii 89,294 — The first four mterpreted it as accompanymg a fire-ordeal ; but GnU and Bloomfield have, with good reason, taken a different -view The native mterpreters know nothing of any connection with an ordeal, nor IS this to be read into the text without considerable violence 1. Heaven-and-earth, the wide atmosphere, the mistress of the field, the wonderful wide-going one, and the wide wind-guarded atmosphere — let tnese be inflamed {iapya^ here while I am inflamed. AU pada-m%s read at the end iapydmane Ut, as if the word were a dual fem or neut. a most gratuitous blunder , SPP’s padaAsxX emends to -ne Ppp reads in d iesu for id ihd (which is, as in not infrequent other cases, to be contracted to ti '/idj the Anul^ at least takes no notice of the irregularity here ; but it also ignores the value of b) The comm naturaUy explains the “ wide-goer ” as Vishnu , he does not attempt to Account for the mention of “ the wide atmosphere ” twice in the verse, though sometimes giving himself much trouble to excuse such a repetition. The last p 5 da he paraphrases by “just as I am endeavoring to destroy the hateful one, so may they also be injurers of [my] enemy, by not giving him place and the like ” ; which is doubtless the general meaning 2 . Hear this, O ye godff that are worshipful {yajMyd) ; Bharadvaja sings (fans) hymns {ickthd) for me ; let him, bound in a fetter, be plunged {ni-yiij) in difficulty who injures this our mind That IS, probably, our design or intent, the comm, says (inappropnately) idatnpHr- vam sanm 5 ,rgap 7 avrtfa 7 )i 77 td 7 tasa 7 tt 1 e. seduces us to evil courses All the mss chance to agree this time in omitting the visarga Or yajhiydh before sthd m a But ^!Ppp. reads iu instead of stha, and in b ukiy&Tii (onsaiu, as it often changes -it to -iuy but here the imperative (or Weber’s suggested (attsai') would improve the sense [Pro- nounce devaah andjreject sthdj the meter is then in order — 12 + 12. 12-fiiJ 3 . Hear this, O Indra, soma-drinker, as I call loudly to thee with a burning {guc) h^rt ; I hew (yra^) him [down], as a tree with an ax, who injures this our mind Or (in b) ‘ call repeatedly ’ ; the comm sa3rs puttah putiah Ppp has in c vrqcdst The comm paraphrases kulit^etta with vajrasadrqeTia paraguTtd. [An orderly ir^stubh is got by adding tvdm after sotTtapa J 4 With thrice eighty sa77ta7z-singers, with the Adityas, the Vasus, the Angirases : — let what is sacrificed-and-bestowed of the Fathers aid us — I take yon man with seizure {Jtdras) of the gods IsidpuridTtt in c has probably already the later meaning of ment obtained by such sacred acts ; the comm saj's iadubhayajattiiaTh sukrtam Haras he calls a krodha- TtHtnaTt. He understands the ‘ three eighties ’ of a to be the tnplets (irca) in g 3 yairf, 55 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. ~u 12 usnth, and brhait, eighty of each, spoken of in AA i 4.3 — simply because they are the only such groups that he finds mentioned elsewhere , the number is probably taken indefinitely, as an imposing one 5 O heaven-and-earth, attend {a-didhi) ye after me ; O ail ye gods, take ye hold {d-rabh) after me ; O Angirases, Fathers, SQma-feasting (somyd), let the doer of abhorrence {apakdmd) meet with {a-r) evil. Ppp reads in a dldhyatdm ^cf. Bloomfield, AJP. XV11.417J, and in d pSpasSrtcchtiv ap- The comm, does not recognize dldkl as different from dfdt, rendering ddipte bhavaiam [^In a, the accent-mark under -vt is missing J 6 Whoso, O Manits, thinks himself above ns, or whoso shall revile our incantation {brdhman) that is being performed — for him let his wrong- doings be burnings {tdptts)\ the sky shall concentrate its heat {sam-iap),i upon the. brdhman-hzte.v. The verse is RV. vi 52. 2, with sundry variants. At the beginning, RV. has the better reading dtrvSj- in b, krxydmSnam nimts&t, for d, brahtnddvisam abhi tdm qocqiu dy&iih, Ppp follows RV. m d (but with ^oca for (ocatu ) ; in c it reads vrajanSm. The comm, renders vrjittdnt falsely by varjakdnt b&dhak&ni 7. Seven breaths, eight marrows : them I hew [off] for thee with [my] incantation ; thou shalt go to Yama’s seat, messengered by Agni, made satisfactory. M. ThcLlast pSda js xviii 2. i (RV,x. 14. 13) d. All our mss and about half of SPP’s have m a majHds (for majjhds ) , yet SPP adopts in his text the reading ma»yds, because given by the comm , which explains it artificially as for dhamanyas, and signi- fying “ a sort of vessels situated in the throat ” , no such word appearsv to be kpQwn elsewhere in the language, and some of the mss have in other passages of the text tnattyas for majflds Our Bp gives dyd at beginning of C, the word' is translated above as [dyds\^ subjunctive of t with doubled subjuncbve-sign (see my Ski Gram. § 560 e), or of Its secondary root-form ay , the comrti takes it from yd, which makes him no difficulty, since m his view imperfect and imperative are eqmvalent, and he declares it used for ydht Ppp reads for cyamasya gacha sddanam [In many parts of India today jh and ny are phone^cally equivalent Cf SPP’s mss for ix. 5 23 J 8 I set thy track ip kindled Jatavedas ; let Agni dispose of (? vis) the body , let speech go unto breath (? dsti). The verse is m part obscure , the comm sets it in connection witli one of the details of the Kauq ceremony ' “ I set or throw m the fire the dust from thy track combined with chopped leaves i e I roast it in the roaster , let Agni, through this dust ent^nng thy foot, pervade or bum thy whole body ” , be takes dsu as simj^ly eqmvalent to prana, 3 nd explains sarvendnyavyavabdra^tlnyo bliavaitt, become incapable of Acting for the senses 1 e become mere undifferentiated breath — which is perhaps the true mean- LQoite otherwise A Kaegf — citation in Bloomfield, p 294 J The Anukr appar- ently expects us to resolve & at the beginning mto a-a Pnn has in a 5 dadSmt, and for d imam gachatu ie vasu. The last two verses are so discordant in style 2nd content, as well as in meter, with 11 12- BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHtTA. 56 the rest of the hymn that we can hardly consider them as properly belonging to it Their omission, with that of the borrowed RV. v^e (our 6),' would reduce the hymn to the norm of this book. 13, For welfare and long life of an infant. \Atharvan — bahudevatyam utd "gneyanr iratstubham ' 4. anustubh , s vtr 3 ^aga(i'\ ' ^ Verses 1,4, 5 are found in Paipp xv Though (as Weber points out) plainly having nothing to do virith the goddtia or tonsure ceremony, its verses are applied by Kaug to parts of that nte. Thus, it accompanies the preparations for it (53 i) and the wetting of the youth’s head (53 13), vss 2 and's, the putting of .a -new garment on him (54 7); vs 4, making him stand on a stone (54 8), vs 5, taking away his old garment (54 9) And the comm quotes vss 2 and 3 from Pangista 4. i as uttered by a purohita on handing to a king m the mormng the garment he is to put on, and vs 4 from ibid. 4, as the same throws four pebbles toward the four directions, and makes the king step upon a fifth Translated • Weber, xiii. 171 ; Zimmer, p.322 ; Griffith, 1. 57 1 Giving life-time, O Agni, choosing old age gbee-f rented, ghee- backed, O Agni — having drunk the sweet pleasant {cdni) ghee of the cow, do thou afterward defend {raks) this [boy] as a father his sons. The verse occurs also inAanous Yajur-Veda texts, as VS. (xxxv 17), TS (1 3. 14'+ et al.), TB. (1 -2 i”), TA (11 5 i), MS. (iv 12 4) LMP. 11. 2. ij, and in several Sutras, as ACS fii. 10 4), QGS (1 25), and HGS (1 3 5), with considerable variations TS (with which the texts oFTB , TA , and ACS agree throughout) has in a havho jusa- nds, which is decidedly preferable to jardsam vrndnds [, which is apparently a mis- placed remmiscence of RV. x 18 6 or AV xii 2 24 J; at end of h, ghrtdyomr edhtj and, in d, _putrdm iox putran VS has for a aytismdn agne havlsd vrdhdnds, and agrees with TS etc in b, and also m d, save that it further substitutes tvian for tmdin MS reads diva for ague in a, and^/( 5 a:«« avti’ta7}t ior pltvd rnddhu of c [thus making a good tnsiubh padaj, and ends d with putrdm jardse vta e 'tndfn Ppp agrees through- out with MS , except as it emends the latter’s corrupt reading at the end to jarase naye 'mam, and HGS. corresponds with Ppp save by having in a. [_MP follows HGS.J (^GS gives in a Jiavtsd vrdhdnas, m b agrees with TS. etc , and has in d pite *va putram iha r-. The last pada is jagatT LThe Anukr counts ii-J-ii 10-1-12=44 as if ro-f 12 were metrically the same asir-hiilorasif the “ extra ” syllable m d could offset the_ deficiency in c I The impossible cadence of c is curable by no less radical means than the adoption of the Ppp. reading. All this illustrates so well the woodenness of the methods of the Anukr. and its utter lack of sense of rhythm, that attention may well be called to itj 2 Envelop, put ye him for us with splendor , make ye him one to die of old age ; [make] long life ; Brihaspati furnished (J>ra-yain) this garment irnto king Soma for enveloping [himself] The verse is repeated below, as xix 24 4, It is found also in HGS (i 4. 2) [_MP. iL 2 6J, and a, b m MB (1 i 6). "HGS m a omits nas, and reads v 5 sas 3 t 'nam for varcase *mam, and in b it has qatdyusam for jardmrtyum , MB. agrees with this, only making the verse apply to a girl by giving enam and fatSyusfm. There appears to be a mixture of constmehons in a : pdri dhaita vdreasd is right, but dhattd requu-es rather vdrease, Emendmg to krnuid would enable jardmrtyum to be construed with tmam TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK II. 57 -ii. 14 in a L; bat cf. ii. 28. 2J Verses 2 and 3 are apparently lost out of Ppp , not originally wanting 3 Thou hast put about thee this gjarment in order to well-being ; thou hast become protector of the people (?) against imprecation; both do thou live a hundred numerous autumns, and do thou gather about thee abundance of wealth. The translation implies emendation of grsifttam in b to irsfffidm, as given by Ppp. and by PGS. (i 4 12) and HGS (1 4.2) in a corresponding expression to xix. 24 5 below [_MP , 11 2 8, reads aplttam J Such blundering exchanges of surd and sonant are found here and there , another is found below, in 14 6 b j_so our ii. 5 4, Ppp.^ All the mss , and both editions, read here grs-, and the comm explains it hygavam, and, with absurd ingenmty, makes it apply to the asserted fear of kine, on seeing a naked man, that he is going to take from them the skin which formerly belonged to him, but was given to them instead by the gods ; the legend is first given m the words of the comm himself, and then quoted from 111 i 2. 13-17 For comparison of the Sutra-texts m detail, see under xix. 24 5,6. In c, our O Op read jivas. [^Cf. MGS i 9 27 a and p J52, s:v, partdJtoisye. With c, d cf. PGS u 6 20 J The first pada is properly jagatl (pi-astdye) See p. 1045;^ 4. Come, stand on the stone ; let thy body become a stone ; let all the gods make thy life-time a hundred autumns The second pada is nearly identical with RV vi 75 12 b; with a, b compare also AGSri. 7 7 and MB. i. 2 i, similar lines used in tlie nuptial ceremomes a, c, d compare MGS'i 22 12 and p 149 J Ppp has for a, b tmam apnSHam S. ttstlid ‘(me *va tvam sthtro bhava pra mrnl/n durasyatah sahasva prtanSyatahj which differs but httle from the AGS verse The Anukr apparently expects us to resolve vi-^u-e in c 5 Thee here, of whom we take 'the garment to be first worn, let aU the gods favor ; thee here, growing with good growth, let many brothers be bom^^after, L[after thee,]J as one well bora. This verse makes it pretty evident that in vs 3 abo the garment is the first that is put on the child after birth But the comm , ignormg the gerundive -vdsyam, thinks It a “formerly worn” garment that is “taken away” , and Kaug misuses it correspond- ^gly HGS (1 7 17) has a corresponding verse, omittmg vdsas in a, combining "vt^ve av~ in b, and reading stthrdas for suvrdJiS, in c j_Nearly so, MP, 11 6 15 J fin Ppp the text IS defective , but savttS is read instead of suvrdhd Some of our sam- htm-xQ&& (p M.W I H.) lengthen to -vasyhn before Mramas in a. The verse is very -uregular m the first three padas, though it can by violence be brought mto instubh dimensions ; it has no jagatl quality whatever. 14. Against saddnv&s. XCSiana.' — ^adfcam, fSlSgmdevatyam uta ■mantroktadevatSkam Snushibbam t a bhunj} 4. uparistSdvtrddb^hafi'^ All the verses are found in Paipp , vs 4 in v , the i^t ^in the verse-order 5,6, 2, 3) hi li It b reckoned by Kang to the catattam (S' ^5), and also among the hymns of fhe brkachanti gana (9 i) , it is used in the women’s rites (strlkaf/nant') to proven 11. 14- book II THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 58 abortion (34 3) , also in the rite for expiation of barrenness in cattle (vaga^amana j 44.11), and m the establishment of the house-fire (72 4), with sprinkling of the entrance, and finally in the funeral ceremonies (82. 14), with the same action. The comm further refers to the use of the cdtana and mdirndman hymns in Naks K. 23 and (Janti K 15 All these uses imply simply the value of tlie hymn as exorcising evil influences or the beings that represent them, and do not help us to see agamst what it was onginally directed Weber suggests rats and worms and such like pests ; perhaps, rather, troublesome insects * as usual, the indications are so indefinite that wide room for conjecture is left open Translated . Weber, xiii. 175 ; Ludwig, p. 522 ; Grill, i, 89 ; Griffith, i. 58 ; Bloom- field, 66, 298. See p 1045.J 1 The expeiier, the bold, the container, the one-toned, the voracious — all the daughters {napti) of the wrathful one, the saddnvasy we make to disappear. By the connection, the obscure words in the first half-verse should be names of indi- vidual saddnvdSy but dhtsdnam (the translation implies emendation to -ndin) is mascu- line (or neuter), and dhrsniitn (for which Ppp reads dhtsnyani) not distinctively feminine Nissdla (SPP’s text reads, with the samhttd-ras,% generally, mhsd- p mh- osSlatn) IS taken by the letter of the text, as if from nth-sdlay = mh-sdray; the comm, gives first this denvation, but spoils it by addmg as alternative “ originating from the sdloy a kind of tree.” R. suggests nthsdlam “ out of the house,” adverb The comm shamelessly denves dhtsanam from dhrs, and explains it as “a seizer with evil, so named”, he also takes -vddya as = vacana All our pada-mss commit the gross blunder of dividing jtghat 12, 13 , the others deal with wind and atmos- phere, cow and ox, Mitra and Varuna, Indra and Indra’s might (indriyd), hero and heroism, breath and expiration, and death and immortality {amriani ) , after bibher is added in vs i evd me ^pdna tnd risayd, and,' at the end of the hymn, tlie same, but With rtsa for rtsaydr* In Kauq (54 j i), the hymn is used, with vi 41, at the end of the goddna ceremony, on giving food to the boy ‘ It is also counted by the schol (ib , note) to the dyusya gana The comm makes no reference to i\\& goddna nte, but declares the use to be simply by one desiring long life (dyuskdma) Translated Weber, xiti 179, Griffith,! 59 t As both the heaven and the earth do not fear, are not harmed, so, my breath, fear not [MGs . at 1 2 13, has evam me prdna md bibha tvam tne prdna md rtsak J 2 As both the day and the night do not fear etc etc The comm here applies for the first time the term parydya to these sentences, corre- spondent but with elements in part different. 3 As both the sun and tne moon do not fear etc etc 4 As both sacrament {brd/iman) and dominion (ksaird) do not fear etc etc That IS, the Brahman and Ksatnya castes (brdhmanajdtt and ksainyajdit, connnaj. ^ the words might properlv enough be translated BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAIVfHITA. 6 o 11 . 15- 5 As both truth and untruth do not fear etc. etc. 6. As both what is • {bhutd) and what is to be (b/idvya) do not fear etc etc The comm, paraphrases bhilidm by satt&m prSptam vastujSiam j the past would seem to be a better example of fixity than the futtme ; but neither is “ untruth ” (vs. 5) to be commended as an example. |_Weber, would read ca 16. For protection. {Brahman. — prSnSpSndyttrdevaiyam. ekSvasSnam i r~p dsurf trtstubh ; s i-p. Ssury u^h ; 3 i-p Ssuri trtstubh ; 4,3 z-p Ssurt gdyairt"] j_Not metrical. J Foimd (except vs 5) in Paipp. n (m the verse-order 2, 1,3,4). The hymn, with the one next following, is used by Kaug (54. 12) immediately after hymn 1 5 , and the comp, adds, quoting for it the authonty of Paithinasi, to accompany the offenng of thirteen different substances, which he details Both appear also in Vait. (4 20), in the sacrifices, on approaching the dliavarttya fire; and vss. 2 and 4 further (8. 7,9) in the dgrayana and cdtumid^a sacrifices Translated: Weber, xiii 179; Gnffith, 1. 60. 1. O breath-and-expiration, protect me from-death : hail {svdha)\ The first extension of the notion of prdna ‘ breath,’ lit ‘forth-breathing,’ is by addi- tion of apdna, which also is lit ‘ breathmg away,’ and so, when distinguished from the generalized prana, seems to mean ‘ expiration ’ The*comm here defines the two thus : prdg ilrdhvamukho *mii cestata tit prdnahj apd 'mty avdiimukha^ cestata tty apdnah. For svdhd he gives alternative explanations, foUormg Yaska. The verse (without svdhd) IS found also m Ap. xiv 19 3 “ Trtstubh" in the Anukr. is doubtless a mis- reading for pankii, as the verse has ii syllables, and i and 3 would have been defined together if viewed as of the same meter 2. O heaven-and-earth, proteqt me by listening {tipagruti ) : .hail I The pada-rs\^% read iipa^grufyd (not -^dh), and, in the obscunty of the prayer, it is perhaps best to follow them [_‘ by overhearing ’ the plans of my enemies ?J , otherwise, ‘ from being overheard ’ [_by my enemies ?J woidd seem as suitable ; and this is rather suggested by the Ppp reading, upagrttis (lor -teh?). Ppp has after this another verse dhatidyd "yuse prajdydt mdpdiant svdhd 3. O sun, protect me by sight . hail ' Ppp has ‘(protect my) two eyes’ Our O Op , with some of SPP’s mss, read suryas for -ya 4 O Agni Vaiqvanara, protect me with all the gods : hail • Ppp makes as it were, one verse out of our 4 and 5, by readmg agne vtgvambkara vigvaio md pdKl Svdhd The comm gives several different explanations of vdtgvdnara ‘belonging to ah men,’ one of them as vtgvdn-ara = jantiin pravtsfnk > 5 O all-beanng one, protect me v/itb all bearing {bhdras)\ hail f The sense is obscure* at xii. r 6 the epithet ‘ ail-beaiing’ is, verj'- properly, applied to the earth, but here the word is mascuIiD'=. Tfce comm, understarids Agni to be meant (and tins the Ppp reading fai-ors); but he relies for this solely on BAIL 1.4 7 6i TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK -II. -iL 1 8 (which he quotes), and that is certainly not its meaning there. Weber conjectures Prajapati LThe BAU. passage is i. 4. i6 m Bbhtlingk’s ed See Whiteey’s criticism upon it at AJP xi. 432 I think nevertheless that fire may be meant — see Deussen’s Sechztg Upantshad ’s, p. 394. J It does not appear why the last two verses should "be called of two padas 17. ‘ For various gifts. \Brahman — saptarcam pr5ndpan5yurdevaiyam, ekSvasSnam J-6 Jp Ssuri trtstubh ; 7 Ssury usnth ] LNot metncal.J Paipp has a similar set of phrases in u For the use of the hymn by KSug. and VmL, see under hymn 16 It is also, with 15 and others, reckoned by the schoh to Kaug. (54 11, note) to the dyitsya gana. Translated Weber, xm 180; Gnffith, i.6i I. For<^e art thou , force wayest thou give roe ; hail 1 The Ppp has no phrase corresponding to this. Some of our mss , as of SPP’s, read ds instead of diS/t before svahd^ in this hjmin and the next, where they do not abbreviate the repetition by omitting both words. The comm regards them both as addressed to Agni, or else to the article offered (Jtilyatna.tiadravyatn) LCf. MGS. 1 2. 3, and p. 149 and citations J 2 Power art t^iou ; power mayest thou give me ; hail * Ppp has sahoda. agnes saho me dliB svdhS • / 3. Strength art thou , strength mayest thou give me: haill Ppp* gives baladd agntr balam me svdha. 4 Life-time art thou , life-time mayest thou give me * hail I The correspondmg phrase in Ppp is dyUr asyd dyur me dha. svdha 5 Hearing art thou , hearing mayest thou give me : hail I There are no phrases m Ppp answering to this and the two following verses ; but others with varcas and iejas as the gifts sought 6 Sight art thou ; sight mayest thou give me : hail ' 7 - Protection {pampdna) art thou , protection mayest thou give me : hail ! * ' . The anuvaka |_3 J has 7 hymns, with 42 verses ; the Anukr, says • asfonam tasmSc chatardham trilye Here ends also the third prapapiaka 18. For relief from demons and foes. \Catana {saptttnaksayakSmaJi) — dgtieyam dvStpadam, sSmnlbdrkatam'] LNot metncal J -Ppp has some similar phrases m 11 The hymn belongs to the cRtanam (Kaug 8 25 the comm regards only the last three verses as cRtana, because vs 3 IS the one whose pratika is cited in the Kaug text , but it ^s perhaps more likely that arayaksayaitainn^ an oversight for bhrdtrvyaks-') ; it is used by itself also in one of the Witchcraft ntes {dbhtcRrtk&nt'), while adding fuel of reeds to the fire (48 i) Translated Weber, xiii iSo, Gnffith, i 61 ii 1 8- BOOK II THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIHITA. 62 1 Adversary-destroying art thou; adversary-expulsion mayest thou give me : hail ! ‘ Adversary ’ is lit ‘ nephew ’ or ‘ brother’s son ’ {bhratrvya). The Ppp phrases are after this model bhratrvyaksinam ast bhrdtrvyajavibhanavi ast svahd, and concern successively ptqacas, sadanvds, and bhrdirvyas The Anukr supports the comm in regarding the hymn as addressed to Agni, and agrees with Kau? in regard to the accompanying action, sapng sapatnaksayanlh savitdha ddhdyd 'gmm ^rdrthanlyam aprdrthayat [_Instead of “destroying” W has interlined “ destruction ”J 2 Rival-destroying art thou; rival-expulsion mayest thou give me: hail * 3 Wizard- (? ardya-) destroying art thou ; wizard-expulsion mayest thou give me . hail ! 4 Ftfdcd-destToy'mg art thou ; pzfdcd-expvdsion mayest thou give me : hail ! 5 Saddnva-destToying art thou, saddnvd-expulsion mayest thou give me * hail ’ Read in our edition saddnvdcat- 19. Against enemies: to Agni (fire). \Atharvan — dgneyatn ' 1-4 mcrdvisamSgSyatfi , y bhurtgvtsamd'[ LNot metncal J This hymn (but not its four successors and counterparts) is found in Paipp 11 , aiso in MS. (152 in verse-order 1,4, 3, 2, 5) and Ap (vi 21 i in verse-order 3, 4, i, 2, 5) , further, in K Its first pratika (but regarded by the schol and by the comm as including all the five hymns) is used by Kaug (47 8) to accompany t\\& purastad hovias in the witchcraft rites The Anukr. has a common description of the five h5Tnns, 19-23, zs paiica silktdnt pailcarcdnt pahcdpatydni (?or -catapdty-') triphdgdyatrdny ekdvasdndm l_The mss blunder, but padcdpatydnt is probably right , see note to Kau5. 47. 8 J Translated Weber, xiu 181 , Griffith, i 62 I . O Agni ! with the heat that is thine, be hot against him who hates us, whom we hate MS leaves (in all the verses) the a of asman unelided, and both MS and Ap msert ca before vaydm. 2 O Agni ! with the rage {hdras) that is thine, rage against him who hates us, whom we hate Prdti hara has to be strained in rendering, to preserve the parallelism of the expres- sion |_Or, ‘ wth the seizing-force that is thine, force back him ’ etc ?J 3 O Agni ' with the gleam {arcis) that is thine, gleam against him who hates us, whom we hate. 4- O Agni ! with the burning (^ocis) that is thine, bum against him who hates us. whom we hate 63 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II. -ii. 24 5 O Agni ! with the brilliancy that is thine, make him unbril- hant who hates us, whom we hate ^ Ppp has jyoits for iejas^ zndprait daha for aiejasam krnuj for the latter, MS and Ap. x^^Aprait titigdht (also K , Utyagdht') The meter is alike m the four hjTnns 19-22 , the Anukr restores the a of asman, and in vss 1-4 scans 6 + 7 + lo = 23, and, in vs 5, 6 + 9 + 10 = 25 20. The same: to Va3ru (wind). This and the three following hymns are mechanical vanations of the one next preced- ing, differing from it only by the name of the deity addressed, and in hjmin 23 by the pronouns and verbs being adapted to the plural deity They are wanting in the other texts The comm does not deign to explain them in detail, but prefixes a few intro- ductory words to the text of this one For the Anukr descriptions of the meter, and for the use by KauQ , see under hymn 19 It would be space wasted to write out the trans- lation m full LThey should all be regarded as non-metrical J They are briefly treated (not translated) by Weber, xiii 182, and Griffith, 1 62 I. O Vayu ! with the heat that is thine etc. etc. 2-5. O Vayu • with etc etc. 21. The same: to Sfirya (sun). 1. O Surya! with the heat that is thine etc etc 2~5 O Surya ! with etc etc ' 22. The same: to the moon. I. O moon 1 with the heat that is thine etc etc 2-5 O moon I with etc etc 23. The same; to water. I. O waters ! ivith the heat that is yours etc etc 2-5 O waters * with etc etc Here the meter, owing to the plural verbs, is different, the Anukr calls that of vss ‘1-4 (6 + 8 + 10 = 24) savtavtsamS, z gcLyatrl *ot uneven members,’ and vs 5 (6 + 10 + to = 26) the same, with two syllables m excess \ svarad-vtsamA\ 24. Against kimidins, male and female. [Brahman — astarcam dytiiyam pSnktam ] l_Not metrical J Part of the hymn is found in P5ipp 11 , but in a veiy corrupt (ion- dition see under the verses below Kaug makes no use of it that is charactenstic, or that casts any light upon its difllculties, but prescribes it simply as to be employed m 3' certain ceremony (19 9—13) for prosperity (according to the comm , for removal of a bad sign), called “ of the sea ” (sSmudra the comm says, offenng in a fSpefastha ^>■6. m the midst of the sea) , it is also reckoned (191, note) to the mattiras called ' for prospenty ’ The words that precede the refrain in each verse are apparently 11. 24- . BOOK II THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 64 the names of kimldtns The Anukr says that Brahman in each verse praised with verses the deity mentioned in it; and gives a long descnption of the meters that is too confused and corrupt to be worth' quoting in fulL Translated Weber, xui 182 , Griffith, i 62 ^ 1 O qerahJiakay qerabha f back again let your familiar denions go ; back again your missile, ye kimidlm ! whose ye are, him eat ye; who hath sent you forth, him eat ye , eat your own flesh. Ppp reads qarabhaka seragabha punar bho yanti yadavas punar halts kimldtnah yasya stha dam alia yo va praki tarn uitam tndsdhsd manyaia The comm in the last phrase gives sd instead of svd, and has much trouble to fabricate an explanation for It (as = iasya, or else for sd hetiK) Qerabhaka he takes as either sukhasya prdpaka or garabkavat sarvesdm ktnsaka, but is confident that it designates a “ chief of ydiu~ dkdnas ” Of the refrain, the first part seems metrical, and the second prose, m three phrases , and it may be counted as8 + 8*6 + 7 + 5 (or 7) = 34 (or 36) the prefixed names add 7 syllables (vss i, 2), or 5 (vss 3,4), or 3 (vss 6-8), or 2 (vs 5) LBloom- field comments on dhdit and the hke, ZDMG xlvui 577 J - 2 O gevrdliaka^ givrdfial back again let your familiar etc etc 3. O wrokd, anumroka ' back again let your familiar etc etc 4 O sarpd^ anusarpa ' back again let your familiar etc etc 5 O junii f back again let your familiar demons go ; back agam your missile, ye s\iQ-ktmid{ 7 ts ; whose ye are etc etc 6. O upahdt f back again let your familiar etc etc. 7 O drjuni ! back again let your familiar etc. etc 8 O bharuji ' back again let your familiar etc etc. To represent all these verses, we find in Ppp gevrka gevrdha sarpdn sarpa mrokdn tnro jyarnyatro jarjilnvapaprado punar vo yantt yadavak punar jutis ktmfdtnah yasya stha dam atta yo na prdhl tarn utvas sd tndnsdny attd It has not seemed worth while to try to translate the names, though most of them contain intelligible ele- ments Lsee Weber, p 184, 186J, and the comm forces through worthless explanations for them alL In vs. 8 he reads bharuci, and makes an absurd derivation from roots bhr and adc (“ gomg to take away the body ”) |_In the first draft, W notes that the four feminme names of vss 5-8 might be combmed to one tnstubh pada, which with the common refram would give us the normal five “ verses ”J 25. Against k^nvas: with a plant. \Catana — vSnaspaiyam anusiubham ^ bhury ] Found in Paipp iv Both Weber and Gnll regard the h}Tnn as directed against abortion; but no suffiaent indications of such -value are found m its language, tliough some of the native authon ties intimate their discover}^ of such Kaug (S 25) reckons it to the cdtana hjTnns ; and it is employed, with 11 7 and other hymns, in a remedial cere- mony (26 33-36) against vanous evnls, specially accompanying the smeanng of the designated plant vnth sacrificial dregs (sampdia) upon the patient Translated. Weber, xiii 187, Gnll, 20,92, Gnffith, 1.64, Bloomfield, 36,302 I. Weal for us, woe (dfam) for Nirrti (‘perdition’) hath the divine 6 f TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -li 2 $ spotted-leaf made , since it is a formidable gnnder-up {-jdntbhaita) of kdnvasy it, the powerful, have I used (bkaj) The comm makes no attempt to identifj the as any particular plant, but simply paraphrases It with ct/raparny osad/it/t R discusses the word as follows “the ^rqmparnf is, i according to tlie commentary to KQS xxv 7 17, the same viitli mSsa- panii^ 1 e. Glyctne debilis , 2 according to other schol , the same with laksviand, a plant having upon its leaves red spots, in \\hich the form of a child is claimed to be seen Bhavapr , 1 208, calls it also ptiti ajanf, and Rajanigh , mi i 14, piitrakandd, or putradd, or pumkandd, indicating a bulbous plant, it is credited with the power to cure barren- ness of women, 3 according to Am K09 and the other Nighantus, it is a leguminous plant, identified by Chund Dutt {Mat medtea') with Uiaria lagopodiotdes Dec , having hair) leaves witliout colored spots The second of these identifications w'ould suit the h)Tnn ” Abhakst might mean ‘ I have partaken of or drunk ’ , but neither Kaug nor the comm know' of such a use of the plant The strange appearance m this h}Tnn of kiinva as name of evil beings is passed by the comm, without a word of notice, he simply paraphrases the word with pdpa (_But see Bergaigne, Rel v^d 11 465, and Hille- brandt, Ved Mythol 1 207.J Ppp reads in b ntrrtayc karat, and in d tvd 'Jiarsatn for abhaksi 2 This spotted-leaf was first bom overpowering, with it do I hew [off] the head of the ill-named ones, as of a bird {^akuni) is mispnnted firkf- J Tlie reading vrfcdmt, without accent (which is given in both editions, on the autliont) of all the mss ) implies that the fourth p 5 da begins with (Oas, the preceding three words being (as is easy) resolved into eight syllables , and the /n^/a-mss also mark the pada-division before (/ras The Anukr, however, regards the verse as a simple auustubk, which it plainly is, giras belonging to c, the accent should therefore be emended to rjrgeanti Ppp reads sadSnvdgknT pt- for e, and, in c, d. tayd Kamhisydm gnag chmadmi gak- The comm explains the ‘ ill-named ” as dadntvisarpakagvii) ddiktist/iu) ogavigcsdi, or vaneties of leprosy 3 The blood-dnnking wizard, and whoso wants to take away fatness, the embryo-eating kdnva do thou make disappear, O spotted-leaf, and overpower One or two of our mss (W I ), and several of SPP’s, read in b jlhlnsatt [^I has fr/j-J Ppp sa/iaszuitl 4 Make them enter the rppuntain, the life-obstructmg {-yopojia) kan- do thou, O divine spotted-leaf, go burning after them like fire LAs to kaitvdn, cf 1 19 40 As to -yopatta, see Bloomfield, AJP xii 423 J This 'erse and the next arc too much defaced in Ppp to admit companson in detail, but its fe\t differs somev/hat from ours The Anukr refuses to sanction the common abbre- viation to agnl) 'va in d 5 Thrust tliem forth to a distance, the life-obstructing where the darknesses go, there have I made the fiesh-eaters go 1 ii 26- book II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAftHiTA, 66 26. For safety and increase of Jdne. [Sazntar — pafavyam irdtstuhham 3 upanstadvtrddbrhaiJ , 4^ y anustubh (4. bhurij')'\ Found m Paipp. 11 Used by Kau? (19 14), with iil 14, iv 21, and ix. 7 [_not vi i r. 3 — see comm to ix 7 = 12J, m a ceremony for the prosperity of cattle Translated Weber, xiii 188, Ludwig, p 371, Gnffith, 1.65; Bloomfield, 142,303, vss I and 2, also by Grill, 64, 92 — Cf. Bergaigne-Henry, Manuel, p. 138. I Hither let the cattle come that went away, whose companionship (j«/w^«f)-Vayu (the wind) enjoyed, whose form-givings Tvashter knows ; in_this cow-stall let Savitar make them fast (m-yam). Or, ‘ whose form® ’ rupadheya being virtually eqmvalent to simple rupa Ppp reads in 'bsakatar_am The “cow-stall” does not probably imply anything more than an enclosure The Anukr passes without notice the jagail pada d. 2. To this cow-stall* let cattle flow-together Lstream together J {sam- sni)\ let Bnhaspati, foreknowing, lead them hither; let Smivall lead hither the van {dgra) of them ; make them fast when they have come, O Anumati Lin the prior draft of 3, Mr. Whitney has ‘ stream ’J Ppp has at the end yacchdiy one ofBPP’s mss ,yacchat The comm gi^es anugate (= he anugamanakdrtni') m d. The value of pra in the common epithet (rendered ‘ foreknowing ’) is obscure and probably mmimaL L^s to the deities here named, see Zimmer, p 352, and Hille- brandt, Ved Mythol 1 422.J 3. Together, together let cattle flow Lstream J, together horses, and together mei^ together the fatness that is of grain , I offer with an obla- tion of confluence For the oblation called ‘of confluence,’ to effect the streaming together of good things, compare 1 15 and xix i. The change -of meter in this hymn need not damage its unity, in view of its occurrence as one hymn in Ppp Ppp reads m h pduntsds, and in c sphditbhis (lor yd sph-') The metrical definition of the Anukr. seems to reject the obvious resolution -vt-e-na in d. 4. 1 pour together the milk (ksird) of kine, together strength, sap, with sacrificial butter ; poured together are our heroes ; fixed are the kine m me \ ratJter, with mej [as] kine-lord. Ppp reads valam in b, combines -ktd 'srndkam in c, and has for d mayt gdva( ca gopatdu The redundant syllable in d (noticed by the Anukr ) would be got nd of by changing m&yt to the old locative mi L, but with better metncal result, by adopting the Ppp readingj With the second half-verse is to be compared A^S. lii 1 1 6 . artstd asmakam -jlrd mayt gdvak iantu gopatdu The comm, says that gavdm in a. means grsiindm ‘ of heifers (having their flirst calf) ’ 5 I bnng (d-hr) the milk 01 Kine ; I have brought the sap of gram ; brought are our heroes, our wives, to this home (dstaka). 6; TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -ii 2/ Ppp. has aharsatH !n b, in c Sftarisam (for Skrt&s) and vlratt, and m d 5 patnlm t 'dam Our Bp gives akSrisam (and H aharSrtsam) in b, and ahutds in c The anuvdka [_4 J has this tune -9 hymns, with 48 verses, the old Anukr says dvy- Unarn ^yaidrdhain^ turtyah 27. For victory in disputAtiOn: with a plant. \Kaptnjala — saptarcam vBnaspatyrun BnustUbkant ] Found m Paipp 11 Kaug. uses the hjmn m the nte or charm for overcoming an adversary m public dispute one is to come to the assembly from the north-eastern direction (because of its name apardjtta ‘unconquered ’), chewing the root of the plant, and to have it m his mouth while speaking , also to bind on an amulet of it, and to wear a wreath of seven of its leaves (38 18-21) Verse 6, again, is reckoned (50 13, note) to the r&udra gana The comm further quotes from the Naks Lerror for t^^antij K. (17, 19) a prescription of the use of the hymn in a ma/idfanit^caHed apardjttd Translated Weber, xui 190, Ludwig, p 461 ; Grill, ist edition, 18, 51 Bloomfield, JAOS. xiii., p xlii (PAOS May, 1885), or AJP vii 479 , Grill, 2d editioi),-23^, 93 , Gnfiith, 1 66; Bloomfield, SBE xhi 137,304 — Bloomfield was ^^first to point out (on the authonty of KauQ ) the connection of_j; 52 ^-with'T 66 f prac/t, and to give the true inter- pretatiOTT of the hymn Gnll fo Jows him in the second edition I. May [my] foe by no means win (/*) the dispute; overpowering, overcoming art thou ; smite the dispute of [my] counter-disputant , ihake them sapless, O herb “ Dispute ” (prdg) is literally ‘ questioning ’ The comm renders the word in a by prastar ‘ questioner,’ but in c gives us our choice between that and pragna * question,’ and m 7 a acknowledges only the latter meaning Pt Atipragas is translated here as genitive , the comm takes it secondly as such, but first as accus pi , the Ppp reading favors the latter sd 'miin prauprdgo jaya rasa kr- With either understanding, the accent is anomalous , we ought to have pratipragas Arasdn also is m fav-or of the plural If we could emend pragavt in c to prdgi ‘ m the disputation,’ it w'ould make things much easier For a Ppp hzs yag catriln satnjaydt Nid m a is simply the emphasized negative 2 The eagle discovered {ami-vtd) thee , the swine dug thee with his snout smite the dispute etc etc Pada b shows that the root is the part of the plant employed If we struck off the impertinent refrain from vss 2-5, and combined the lines into two verses, the hymn would conform to the norm of the second book (as in more than one case above Lp 37J) 3 Indra put {kr) thee on his arm, m order to lay low {sir) the Asuras * smite the dispute etc etc The comm , both here and m the nextierse, understands iM_>'rt(//) sidrTiave z.s-bhyas idrr~‘, though he then explains tarUavu by starUian Pada a i» rendered in accordance with the comm and with Weber , Gnll, ‘ took thee into his arm ’ 4 Indra consumed {vi-ag) the paid, in order to lay low the Asuras : smite the dispute etc etc BOOK II THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAI^IHITA 68 il 27- The comm, reads in a pdtham, and uses that form in all his explanations , pdtdm seems to be given in all the mss , and in Ppp , and both editions adopt it , but the mss are very little to be trusted for the distinction of t and th “ The plant is the Clypca hernandtfolia, whose bitter root is much used - It grows all over India, and is said to be applied to ulcers in the Penjab and in Sindh (W Dymock, Vegetable mat med) ” (R ) Lin his note, Roth gives pdtdm as Ppp form , but in his collation, he gives as Ppp reading in a, b pay am tndro\ vydsndn hantave as- The Anukr apparently expects us to resolve vi-d-gn-dt in a 5 With it will I overpower the foes, as Indra did the sdldvrkds : smite the dispute etc etc The translation implies emendation of the inadmissible sdkse to sdksye, than which nothmg IS easier (considenng the frequent loss of_y after a lingual or palatal sibilant) or more satisfactory, for both sense and meter ; it is favored, too, by the Ppp reading, sakslye No other example of long 5 in a future form of tins verb appears to be quot- able ; but the exchange of a and d in its inflection and denvation is so common that tins makes no appreciable difficulty The comm accepts sdksCy rendering it by abht bhavdmi The Anukr notes no metrical irregulanty in the verse In our text; accent sdldvrkan (an accent-mark out of place) L^o Weber’s note on sdldvrkA^ add Oertel, JAOS. XIX “ 123 f This allusion adds to the plausibihty of W’s suggestion about the Yatis, note to il 5 3 J 6 O Rudra, thou of healing (?) remedies^ of dark {iitla) crests, deed- doer ! smite the dispute etc. etc. Ppp. has for c, dprstam durasyato jahi yo smdn abhtddsatt, which is plainly much better than the repetition of the refrain, and for which the latter has perhaps been sub- stituted m our text The comm draws out to great length a senes of derivations for rudra, and gives two for jaldsa, and three different explanations of karmakrt. field discusses ya/- etc at length, AJP xii 425 ff J 7 Do thou smite the dispute of him, O Indra, who vexes us , bless us with abilities {^dkti) , make me superior in the dispute Ppp reads prstam for pr&qam tvam in a, and ends b with -ddsate The comm has prdgam instead of prd^t in d and is supported in it by two of SPP’s authonties The prdqam in a he explains by vdkyam, and that in his d \>y prastdram 28. For long life for a certain person (child?). \_Qambhu — jartmSyiirdSrvatam irdtsUibham i jagati, y bkurtj ] Found m Paipp (vss 1-4 in i , vs 5 in xv) Used by Kaug in the goddna cere- mony (54 13), as the parents pass the boy three times back and forth between them and make him eat balls of ghee , and the same is done m the cftdd or cdula (hair-cuttmg) cere- mony (54. 16, note), the schol also reckon it to the dyusya gana (54 ii, note) Translated Weber, xm 192, Gnll, 48,94, Griffith, i 67, Bloomfield, 50, 306 I For ]ust thee, O old age, let this one grow, let not the other deaths, that are a hundred, harm him ; as a forethoughtful mother m her lap a son, let Mitra protect him from distress that comes from a friend (ynitriyd). '' 69 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -11. 28 Ppp has m b tvat for t^atam yc, and combines in d mitre 'nam The omission of either imim or anyi would rectify tlie meter of b The comm most foolishl} takes jariman first fromyr 'sing,’ and explains it as he stilyamana ague I then adding the true ety- mology and sense The '■'•jagatV' is quite irregular I2 -h 13 il -f 12 = 48 {_Bloom- field cites an admirable parallel from RV iv 55. 5 , but m his version he has quite overlooked the verb-accent J 2 Let Mitra or helpful (? riqadds) Varuna in concord make him one that dies of old age; so Agni the offerer {IiStar), knowing the ways^ (vaynna), bespeaks all the births of the go'ds All our pa(ia-ms,% read m a ij^add instead of -ddh , SPP properly emends to -dd/i This wholly obscure word is found independently only here m AV , its rendenng above is intended only to avoid leavnng a blank , the comm gives the ordinary etymology, as hinsakdnam attdj Gnll, emending to arigadas, brings out an ingenious but uncon- vincing parallelism with Gr iptKvS-^s , and, as noticed by him, Aufrecht also would under- stand arigadas ‘ very prominent ’ Ppp reads for a mitraq ca ivd vai unag ca 1 isdddu, and has at the end of d -mdni vakit 3 Thou art master (ff) of earthly cattle, that are born, or also that are to be bom, let not breath leave this one, nor expiration, let not fnends slay iyoadJi) this one, nor enemies All the mss , and the comm , read at end of b janitrds, which SPP accordingly retains, while our text makes the necessary emendation to jdnitvds, which Ppp also has Ppp fomits vd in b ,J elides the initial a of apdno and amiti dh after mOj and it puts the verse after our vs 4 Pada b lacks a syllable, unnoticed by the Anukr Lread jdtiiios ? J 4 Let father heaven, let mother earth, in concord, make thee one that dies of old age ; that thou mayest live m the lap of Aditi, 'guarded by breath and expiration, a hundred wmters Ppp reads fe for ivdva. a, and dlrghani dyuh for samviddne in b , also rtyd tox\adites la c The Anukr takes no notice of the irregulant} of the meter (94-11 io-‘-i2 = 42 a poor iristubhf'), the insertion of ca zlttr pri/iivt m a, and emendation tb jivdst m c, would be easy rectifications Lin order to bring the cesura of a in the right place, read dydus and tvd each as one syllable and insert a ca also after pita Thus all IS orderly, ri-}-ii 11 + 12 The accent-mark over pr- is gone J 5 This one, O Agni, do thou lead for life-time, for splendor, to dear seed, O Varuna, Mitra, king * like a mother, O Aditi, yield (yam) him refuge , O all ye gods, that he be one reaching old age All pada mss read at end of b mitraordjati, as a compound , and SPP so g^v'cs it, the comm understands tdjan correctly as an independent word, but perhaps only as he m general is superior to the restraints of the y>/Trtir-readings Ppp (m w ) \i2s p> lyo for -yam in b The verse is found also in TS (li 3 io^)> TB (11 7 7^), TA (u 5 i) and MS (u 3 4) A .11 these give krdht for naya at end of a , TA MS have ttgmdm djas instead of piiydm ritas in b , TS TB MS read soma idjan at end of b while TA offers instead sdm gjgddhi j all accent jdi adasits in d. and MS leaves asat at the end unaccented In QGS (1 27), again, is a version of the verse, omitting naya m a. read- uIq (with MS) ^li^mam ojas and soma in b, and having adiith garma yam sat in c. LVon Schroeder gives the Katha version, Titbinger Katha-hss , p 72—3 J BOOK II. TH-E ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 70 ii. 29- 29. For some one’s long life and other blessings. \At?iarvan — saptarcam bakudevatyam trSistubham i anustiibh , jp paribrfiafi nicrtprasiSrapatikti ] Found in Paipp , but m two wdely separated parts vss i-»3 in xix , and vss 4-7 in 1 (next following our hymn 28) Used in Kaug. (27 9 ff ) in a curious healing nte for one afflicted with thirst the patient and a well person are set back to back, wrapped in one garment together, and the latter is made to dnnk a certain potion apparently prepared for the other , thus the disease will be transferred to the w'ell person a total perversion of the proper meaning of the hymn. Again, it is used (54. 18) in the and ceremonies and, according to the schok (58 1*7, note), m that of name-giving , and the schol (42 15) further add it in the nte on the return home of a Vedic student And vs 3 accompames m Vmt (22 16) the pounng of the Jffr milk into the clanfied soma in the putabhrt at the agnisiotna sacrifice Lcf. comm and Hillebrandt, Rttual- litteratur^ p 129J Translated Weber, xiii 194; Ludwig, p 493; Griffith, i. 68; Bloomfield, 47, 308 1 In the sap of what is earthly, O gods, in the strength of Bhaga’s self (ianU) — length of life to this man may Agni, Surya — splendor may Bnhaspati impart. Or It might be ‘ in the sap of earthly portion, in strength of body ’ (a, b) ; ‘ what is earthly ’ would refer to some characteristic product of earth applied in the nte , the comm understands the god Bhaga, but his opimon is of no authority. As Weber sug- gests, the exchange of dyusyhm here in c and ayus in 2 a would rectify the meter of both verses in neither case does the Anukr. note an irregularity Ppp has here Qyur astnSt, but follows it with somo varca dJiatd. brJv- Some of our mss , with two or three of SPP’s, accent dyusyam The comm takes devds in a for a nommative 2 Length of life to him assign thou, O Jatavedas , progeny, O Tvashtar, do thou bestow on him ; abundance of wealth, O Savitar (‘ impeller ’), do thou impel to him ; may he live a hundred autumns of khee The construction of a dative with adht-m-dhd in b seems hardly admissible , BR, l_iii 91 7 J. in quoting the passage, reads asmd, apparently by an intended emendation, \shich, however, does not suit the connection , asmin is the only real help 3 Our blessing [assign him] refreshment, possession of excellent progeny, do ye (two), accordant, assign [him] dexterity, property {dtd- vina ) , [let] this man [be] conquering fields with power, O Indpa, putting {kr) other rivals beneath him The verse is difficult, and, as the parallel texts show, badly corrupted Aqir nas (for which Weber ingeniously suggested aqTrtie) is supported by dqir nas in MS (u' 123) and dqir me in TS (111 2 85) and K(^S (x 5 3) , and all these versions give It a verb m b, dadhaiu, instead of the impracticable dual d/iattam, with which our sdee- tasdii IS m the same combination The alteration of this to the savarcasafn of TS MS , or the suvarcasam of Kd 'ngaiidsy agniata sam caksfinst sam etc Both here and in vs 5 bhdga might possibly have its other sense of gciitialta, or imply that by double meaning, but the comm , w'ho would be likeh to spj out any such hidden sense, sa)s simpl) bhdgydnt (_In a, aqvvid is mispnnted — W’s implications are that if vaksaiJtas were toneless it might be taken as a case of antithetical construction and that there would be no need to join it witli cdd J 3. What the eagles [are] wanting to say, the free from disease [are] wanting to say — there let her come to my call, as the tip to the neck of the arrow {ktihnald) The first half-verse is very obscure, and veiy* differently understood by the transla- tors , the rendering above is strictly literal, avoiding the violences which they allow themselves , the comm giv es no aid ; he supplies st7 Tvisaya//i vdkya7n toya/, and explains a77a7777vds hy arogi7io ‘d/pfdh SPP understands drpiaJi) kd7/ttja7idli Ppp has an independent text yas siipa7 7/d 7 aksd/ta vd 11 a vaksa7ia vd trdtd7iptia7/i 77/a7iaki ^nkye 'va guli/iahl/n yathd — too corrupt to make much of The Anukr. declnles to sanction the contraction /^alye 'va in d 73 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II •li 31 4 What [was] within, [be] that without, what [was] without, [be] that within , of the maidens of many forms seize thou the mind, O herb In the obscufe formalism of a, b the comm thinks mind and speech to be intended [_ Why not r^/tis and fif/as 'Of all forms,’ i e , as often elsewhere, ‘of eveiy' sort and kind ' l_Ppp reads abahyam for bahyant yad bdhyam J 5 Hither hath this woman come, desiring a husband , desinng a wife have I come , like a loud-neighing {kianci) horse, together with fortune have I come That IS, perhaps, ‘ I ha\e enjojed her frvors ’ None of the mss fail to Z-ccfa^ydilid in c. 31. Against worms. \K 5 rwa — mahtdevatyam uta cdndt am dnusiubbam s upartstddvtrddbrhaii , 3 arsJ trtslubh , 4 pids^tiktd hrhati , j prdgitktd tnstuhh'\ Found also in Paipp 11 Used by Kau^ (27 I4ff) in an extended healing nte against worms, the detail of the ceremonial has nothing to do with that of the h}mn, and does not illustrate the latter Translated Kuhn, KZ xnii 135 ff., Weber, xiii 199, Ludwig, p 323, Gnll, 6,98, Gnffith, 1.71 , Bloomfield, 22, 313 — Cf Zimmer, pp 98, 393 , Mannhardt, Dcr Baum- kultiis der Gcnnaneiiy p I2ff , K Mullenhoff, Daikmahr dcutschei Pocstc aus dcm S bts 12 Jahrhnitdert 3 , 1. 17, iSi , and especially the old Germanic analogues adduced by Kuhn, 1 c Griffith cites Harper's Maqasme, June, 1893, p 106, for modem usages in vogue near Quebec 1 The great mill-stone that is Indra’s, bruiser {idrJuina) of every -tyorm — with that I mash {pis) together the worms, as kMlva-gra.ms with a mill-stone Our mss and those of SPP , as well as Ppp , vary, in this h}mn and elsewhere, quite indiscriminately between kHmt and Irmt, so that it is not at all worth while to report the details, SPP agrees with us in pnnting ever} where krftm Tw'o of cftir mss (O Op ), with one of SPP’s, read dhrsdt in a Ppp gives at the end khalvdn z 7 'a The comm explains krimln by qarirdvtargatdn sarvan ksudrajautiin 2 The seen, the unseen one have I bruised, also the kurfim have I bruised ; all the algdndits, the ^ali'mJis, the worms we grind up with our spell {vdcas) The distinction of -Iga- and -Id- in the manuscripts is very imperfect, I had noted only one of our mss as apparently having al^Andiln, here and in the next verse , but SPP gives this as found in all his authorities,' including oral ones , and the comm presents It, and even also Ppp , so that it is beyond all question the true reading The comm explains it here as etanudmnak krimtvtqesdn, but in vs 3 as qomiamattsadusakafi jaiitfin — which last is plainly nothing more than a guess Instead of kuritru/n in b, he reads kurlram, with three of SPP’s mss , and Ppp , other mss differ as' to their distribution of K and ft m the syllables of the word, and two of ours (Op Kp ) give kururam Tivo of SPP’s authorities give vdrcasd in d, Ppp farther has adraham for airhazn both times, and qalfildn in c. The omission of krftnTn in d would ease both sense and meter LAs to sarvdn ch-, cf lii ii 5, iv 8 3, and PrSt 11 17, note J BOOK II. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 74 11 '31- 3 I smite the algdndiis with a great deadly weapon , burnt [or] unburnt, they have become sapless , those left [or] not left I draw down by my spell {^dc)^ that no one of the worms bfc left It seems hardly possible to avoid amending at the end to uchtsyaiai, passive Ppp. reads in b dunadduna^ and its last half-verse is defaced. 4 The one along the entrails, the one in the head, likewise the worm in the ribs, the avaskavd, the vyadhvard — the worms we gnnd up with our spell iydcas) The comm , and tivo of SPP’s mss , read m \} pdrsneyam *in the heel’; and SPP. admits into his text after it krimln, against the great majonty of his mss and against the comm , none of ours have it, but three (O. Op. Kp.) give krimfm, which looks hke an abortive attempt at it For vyadhvaram in c, Ppp has yaradi, all the mss. have vyadhvardm j unless it is to be emended to vyadvardtn (cf vi 50 3, note), it must prob- ably be denved from vyadh ‘ pierce ’ , but the /fl4iz-reading vioadhvardm points rather to vt-adlivatij the comm takes it from the latter, and also, alternatively, from vt and a-dhvaraj avaskavd is, according to him, avaggatnanasvabkdva , it seems rather to come from -dsku ‘ tear ’ The expression pr&gukta ‘ as heretofore defined ’ is not used elsewhere in the Anukr , it is used by abbreviation for uparistddvtrad (vs. 2); but why the two verses were not defined together, to make repetition needless, does not appear, Lind, again, krimln is a palpable intrusion J 5 The worms that are in the mountains, in the woods, in the herbs, in the cattle, within the waters, that have entered our selves {tanu) — that whole generation {jdmman) of worms I smite Two of SPP’s mss agree with the comm m reading id lor yi at beginning of c , and the comm has further /anvas for ianvam Ppp inserts before vanesti, and (with an avasdna before it) also before osadhisuj for second half-verse it gives ye ^stnSkam tanno (1 e ianvd) sthaina cakrtr (1 e cakrur or caknre') indras ian hantu mahatd vadh- ena Pragiiktd in the Anukr apparently repeats this time the superfluous arsl of vs 3 The anuvdka [_5 J has 5 hymns and 29 verses, and the extract from the old Anukr says tato pardidt or pardtiie, 32. Against worms. [JiSttva — sadrcam ddttyadevatyam dnustubham x 3-p bhttrtg gdyatrJ , 6 4P ntcrd usnth ] This hymn occurs m Paipp 11 (with vs 3 put last), next before the one that here precedes it Kau5 apphes it (27 21 ff ) in a healing ceremony against worms in cattle [_The matenal appears in Ppp in the order i, 2 ab, 4 cdab, 5 ab, 6, 3 abc 5 d The expression of Kaug 27 22, “ with the words fe hatdii (vs 5 d) at the end of the hymn,” suggests the reduction of the hjTnn to the norm of the book, 5 vss (see p 37) This IS borne out by Ppp , where the matenal amounts to 5 vss and ends with our 5 d But what the intruded portions are it is not easy to say The parts missing in Ppp are our 2 cd, 3 d, 5 c J Translated Kuhn, KZ xiii 13S , Weber, xiii 201, Ludwig, p Grill, 7, 100, Griffith, i 72, Bloomfield, 23, 317 — Cf Hillebrandt, Veda ■where many of the names ir the \e’'se occur RV ("also MP ) has the fi»^*t half-verse, 77 TRANSLATION AND NOTES, BOOK II -11 34 as 163 3 a, b, reading hrdayat for uddiat For b, c, Ld,J Ppp substitutes our6 b, c ^d, but with panyor m c and vrhamasi at the endj The Anukr again rejects all resolu- tions, Avhich would make the verse a fair anusiubh, and counts 7-1-8 7-1-7 = 29 * 5 From thy (two) thighs, knees, heels, front feet, hips, fundament (? b/idfisas), I eject for thee th&ydksma of the rump In the translation here is omitted bliasada/n, the pure equivalent of bhasadydm, and hence as superfluous in sense as redundant in meter [^Is 'oai pr dp ada *t6el?J The verse is nearly RV x 163 4, which, however, omits bhasadydm, and reads, after qrdntbhyam, bhasadSt, indicating the whole region of anus and pudenda Ppp ‘ends the verse (like 2 and 4) with* vrhamast Several of our mss , with two or three of SPP’s, carelessly begin with un't- MP has in b janghabhy&ni for p^rsmbhyar/t, and in d dhvansasas^ The verse seems to be scanned by the Anukr as 8 -f 7 8 -f 1 1 = 34. 6 From thy bones, marrows, sinews, vessels, (two) hands, fingers, nails, I eject for thee the ydksina Pant IS distinctively ‘palm,’ at^d might properly be so rendered here Nearly all our samhtta-To&s , with most of SPP’s, omit the vtsarga before snavabhyo Ppp has a different a, c, d . hasiebhyas te tnansebhyas yaksmam prsttbhyo majjabhyo nadyam virvahamast The Anukr scans as7-b7 9-f8=3r 7 What \ydksina is] in thine every limb, every hair, every joint — the ydksma of thy skin do we, with Kagyapa’s ejector (ylbarhd) eject away (yisvafic) The first half-verse corresponds to RV x, 163 6 a, b, which (as also MP ) reads thus dngad-augal Idmno-lotnno jatdm pdrvant-parvantj and Ppp agrees with it, except m ha\ing baddham for jdianij Ppp also omits d. In d our P M , with some of SPP’s mss, read vibar-, as does also the comm \ytvarfiafnj In our edition, an accent-mark has fallen out under -fleam in e. 34. Accompanying the sacrifice of an animal. {Aiharvan — fdfuyatyam , pafubhagakaranam trStstubkain'\ Found m Paipp ui , and also in the Black-Yajus texts, TS (111 i 4‘-3), and K (xxx 8, m p^) Used by Kauq (44 7) in the va^a^amana ceremony, accompanjung the anointing of the vagdj m the same, vs 5 accompanies (44 15) the stoppage of the victim’s breath , and the same verse appears in the funeral rites (81 33), with verses from xvni 2 and 3, m connection with the lighting of the pile This hymn and the one next following are further employed among the karnyant, wnth invocation of Indra and Agni, by one who “desires the world” (59 2i “desires over-lordship of all the world,” comm ) In Vait (10 16), the hymn (so the comm ) is said on the release of the victim from the sacnficial post in Xhe pagubandha Translated Weber, xiii 207, Ludwig, p 433 , Griffith, 1 75 — See also Roth, Ueber den AV p 14 I The lord of cattle, who rules over (ff) the cattle, the four-footed, and who also over the two-footed — let him, bought off, go to [his] sacri- ficial portion, let abundances of wealth attaclj themselves to {sac) the sacnficer U- 34 - book II. THE- ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 78 In the TS version, this verse comes second (the verse-order being 5, i, 3, 4, 2) Both TS. and K have at the begmning yhdm, which Ppp supports by reading esdm, and which rectifies the meter of a this gives qmte a different application to c, and a differ- ent cast to the meaning of the verse TS has also ca ior yds in b, aydm (^ydtft) for sd me, and it ends (better) with ydjamdnasya sa 7 itu K (Weber) has for b catuspada uiaye dvtpddah, and for c niskriids te yajntyatit bhdga»t yaniu, and Ppp differs from it only slightly, adding vd after uia in b, and ending c ivith yajniyd ydnti lokam Apparently it is the lord of cattle who is to be bnbed to content himself with his sacri- ficial share, in lieu of taking the whole The Anukr does not heed the irregulanties of meter m a, b LThe Ppp form of b seems to be catuspaddm uta vd ye dvipadah .'J 2. Do ye, releasing {pra-^nuc) the seed of being, assign progress {gdtii) to the sacnficer, O gods ; what hath stood brought hither {upd- krta), strenuous {^amdiid)y let it go upon the dear path of the gods TS. (and K. ?) rectifies the meter of a (whose irregularity the Anukr. ignores) by read- - ing pram 7 tilcdmdnds ; it also \v 3 Sjlvdin for prtydm in d. Ppp. ^ves gopd for retas in a, •md in lb makes dhatta and devds change places, in d it reads etp. Pnydm may qualify the subject in d ‘ let it, dear [to the gods], go ’ etc Upakrta and (Ofamdtid have their usual technical senses, ‘ brought to the sacrifice ’ and ‘ effinent in the performance of religious duty’, the latter is explained by the comm alternatively, as “being put to death ” or “ leaping up " (root faf) ! Devds is, according to him, first “ the breaths, sight etc. ' then “ the gods, Agm etc ” |_E. Sieg discusses pdtnas, Gurupnjdkaumudt, p 9S J 3. They who, giving attention to {anu-dhi) the one being bound, looked after [him] with mind and with eye — let the divine Agni at first (dgre) release them, he the all-working, in unison with (sath-rd) progeny TS. and MS. (1 2 15) have badhydmdnds for didhyands, and TS. follows it with abhydiks-j and in c combines agufs tdtij MS also has ian Both read in 6 . prajdpaits for viqvdkarmd, and TS ends with samviddnds Ppp has in c rnumukta devds, and, for d, prajdpaits prajdbhis satnvtddHdm it then adds another verse : yesdfn prdno na badhnanti baddham gavdm pagtlndjn uta pdurusdudvi ttidras tdm (1 e tan agre pra etc ) The comm, reads in a vadhya 7 ndnam, which is better ; he explains samra- rdnas yyj saha ^abddyamdnas, as if from the root rd ‘bark’! Companson with the next verse seems to show the other animals, comrades of the victim, to be aimed at m the verse Weber’s notes, p 209, and esp his reference to ^B 111 7 45 — MS has idn, p tan • see above, page xc J 4 The cattle that are of the village, all-formed, being of various forms, manifoldly of one form — let the divine Vayu at first release them, Prajapati, in unison with progeny TS and K. have dranyas ‘of the forest’ in a, for grdmyas, and TS combines vayds tan in c, and ends again with -vtddnah. TA (111 ii) has two versions ^vss 29,32), of which the second precisely agrees with TS , while the first has grd 7 nyas, like our text (and agiiis iapi in c) Ppp is quite different . ya dranyds paT^avo vi^varUpd uta ye ku 7 ~updh 7 iiU 77 iJtkta devah pratdpatts prajdbhts sa 77 iv 7 dd/td/ 7 i 5. Foreknowing, let them first {pUrva) receive the breath {praitd) coming to [them] forth from the limbs Gro to heaven; stand firm with thy bodies , go to paradise (svargd) by god-traveled roads 79 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK II -II 35 Ppp has d€v 5 s for pilrve in a, t&bhyam for dwa/n m c, and at the end ~bhig (tvebhth TS reads grhnantt in a , and TS. K MS (n 5 10 c, d) invert the order of c and d, and give the better reading dsadhlsu for divam gacha {_cf RV.X16 3 J , MS also has hut&s for svargam. The comm makes pilrve mean « the gods previously stationed m the atmosphere ” ; perhaps it is ‘ before the demons get hold of it’ 35. To expiate errors in the sacrifice : to Vi9vakannan. \Angtras — vStf^akarmanam irdtstubham 1 brhattgarhhS , 4,y bhunj'\ Found (except vs 5, and in the verse-order 2, 3, 1,4) m Paipp 1. The same four verses are found in TS. (lu 2 8»-3 in the order 2; 4, 3, i), and the first three m MS (n 3 8 . in the order 1,3,2) The hymn is used by Kaug (38 22) in a nte intended, according to the comm , to prevent faults of vision (drsttdosamvSranaya/ Ke9ava says “ to pre- vent rain,” vrsitntv&ranayaj perhaps his text is corrupt), accompanying the eating of something in an assembly Its eniployment (59.21) with the hymn next prec^ng was noticed under the latter The comm (diffenng in his reading and division of the rules from the edited text of Kaug ) declares it to be used m all the sava sacrifices, to accom- pany pttrasf&d homos (59 23-4 ^ uHarena savapurasiaddhomSti) , and-vs 5 is used (3.16) wth ^ purastdd homa in the parvan sacrifices. In VaiL the hymn appears (9 7) m the cdturmdsya sacrifice, with t^vo oblations to Mahendra and Vigvakarman respectively, and again (29 22) in the ag 7 ttcayana In all these applications there is nothing that suits the real character of the hymn Translated, Weber, xiii 21 r , Ludwig, p 302 (vss 1-4), Griffith, u 76, I They who, partaking [of soma] {bhaks), did not prosper {rdh) in good things, whom the fires of Jthe'sacrificial hearth were distressed about {anu-tapya-) — what was the expiation {avayd) of their ill-sacrifice, may Vigvakarman (‘the all-worker’) make that for us a good sacrifice The translation implies emendation of dih~uiis in c to -tes, and of tin in d to tarn; iam is read by the comm , as well as by TS and MS , and SPP even admits it into his text, though nearly all his mss', aS" well as ours, read tan Our P and M read dvrdhus at end of a , TS has dnrhiis, iksldnd Qtis TS elides the a of aim mb, it begins c with tydm for ya^ and ends it with diinstySi, thus supporting our emendation Both TS and MS give krtiotii in d, and MS puts it after vtfvdkarmd The pada- Kiss read in c avaoya, but SPP. alters his pada-t^xt to ava-yak^ on the authonty of the comm , it IS a'^matter of indifference, as the concluding element, in spite of the native grammarians, is doubtless'ffie foot^ Ppp gives durisfd svistam in c, d. The various readings, here and in the following verses, are in good part of the kind which show that the text-makers were fumbhng over matter which they did not understand The coram is no better off Here, in a, he is imbertain whether to take «ada-\.^t snosdddh (as if nom of susddas)^ and makes no note upon the word — probably by an oversight, as of our pada- mss only Op has such a reading , the comm, understands susddds, and explams it by sukJtena sthdtuth yogyah ‘ comfortable to dwell in ’ ; which is not imacceptable. The comm also has in a maghavdn, and m d abhiradhayantl (= abhtvardhayantt, or else putrapaqvadtbhih samrddhd, bJiavantf). Ppp has at the beginning yathd khamram maghavan cdrur esu, and, in c, d, yath vayam justd bhagasyd 'stu sampr-. All our sa 7 nhttd-jas,s save one (H ), and half jof SPP’s, give esdh pr- in a-b; but the comment to Prat ii 57 quotes this passage as illustration of the loss of its final vtsarga by esds Kaug (34. 14) evidently mtends an allusion to this verse in one of its duections rnrgd- kkardd •vedydm mantroktdm ‘the articles mentioned in the text on the sacrificial hearth from a wild beast’s covert,’ but the comm does not explain the meaning The Anukr ignores the redundancy of a syllable in c. justd lyam and reject ndri? — The use of sdmprtya in dual and plural is natijral* its extension to the singular is rather illogical (cf. TS iv 2 4), unless we assign intensive value to sam (‘ very dear ’) J 5. Ascend thou the boat ot Bhaga, full, unfailing ; with that cause to cross over hither a suitor who is according to thy wish. Ot prat ikdmyd may perhaps mean ‘responsive to thy love.’ Ppp has in a 5 ruha, |n b anuparas-, and for e, d irayo pdsd htiath yas patis patikdmyah The comm understands- upa- m c as an independent word With this verse, according to the comm , the gul is made to ascend a properly prepared boat 6. Shout to [him], O lord of riches ; make a suitor hither-mmded , turn the right side to every one who is a suitor according to thy wish. Circumambulation with the right side toward one is a sign of reverence. A krandaya in a iA> perhaps a real causative, ‘ make him call out to us ’ , the comm takes it so. His explanation Lp^^® 332 J of the accompanjung nte is “ offenng nee in the night, one should make the girl step forward tO the right” 7 Here [is] gold, bdellium , here [is] duksd, likewise fortune ; these have given thee unto husbands, in order to find one according to thy wish Auksd (cf duksagandki, iv. 37.3) seems to be some fragrant product of the ox , or It may perhaps come from uks * sprinkle,’ but not through uksan The mss vary here, as everywhere dse, in an indiscriminate manner between guggulu and gdlgulu j here the majority of ours have -Ig-^ and the great majority of SPP’s have -gg- , but -gg- is. 83 TRANSLATION AND NOTRS BOOK 'll. -iu 36 accepted (as elsewhere) m our edition, and -Ig- m the oth,er , Ppp reads -lg~^ the comm gg- Ppp further vayam ukso atho bhaga^ and, in o-d, adhuh paiik- The comm defines gtcggulu as “ a well-known kind of article for incense,” and for duksa he quotes from Kegava (kdugtkasHirabhdsyakdrds) the couplet given m Bloomfield’s Kaugika on P 335 reading surabhfn gandhdn ksfram) The comm , p 332, explains that with this verse is to be performed a binding on and fumigation and anointmg of the girl with ornaments, bdelhum, and duksa respectively. {^BR , iv 947, suggest praitkdmyaya J 8 Hither let Savitar conduct for thee, conduct a husband that is according to thy wish ; do thou assign [him] t9 her, O herb The second nayatu is a detriment equally to sense and to meter ; the Anukr counts it to a, and the7>a reading kakudhtj it also has m a vr^iutam, and for d ato vasunt vt bhajdsy ugrak A number of the mss (including our O Op ) read in a rdjyaya, as, indeed, they generally disagree [m threefold wise J as to the accent of this word P M W have in a vrsaiSm The comm renders vdrsman by qarire, qrayasva by assva 3 Unto thee let thy tellows come, calling [thee] , Agni shall go along as speedy messenger , let the wives, the sons, be well-willing , thou, for- midable, shalt see arrive (^prait-paq) much tribute Ppp has in a, hyanlu bhuvanasya jctla 'gnir dilto ^va jarase dadhatt, and combines in c j&y&s p~ The comm finds m b an incomplete simile “ thy messenger, unassail- able like fire, shall ” etc BOOK III THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 90 iii. 4- 4. Let the (two) Alvins thee first, — let Mitra-and-Vanina both, let all the gods, the Maruts, call thee ; then put (kf) thy mind unto the givmg of good things ; from thence, formidable, share out good things to us With c compare RV. 1 54 9 d, which rectifies the meter by reading krsva. The second half-verse is quite different in Ppp. . saJatSftam madhyamesthe 'ha masyd. (cf. 11 6 4 c , 111 8 2 d) sve ksetre -savife vi rSja. The third pada is made bhurij by the change of krsva to krnusva. 5 Run forth hither from the furthest distance ; propitious to thee be heaven-and-earth both ; king Vanina here saith this thus ; he here hath called thee ; Ltherefore {sd) J do thou come to this place. Ppp has babhutdm for ubhe Siam at end of b, and ahvat svenam ehi at end of d. SPP reports all h,\s ^ada-itfoS as reading aka instead of dka in c ; no such blimder has been noted in ours His u*.. of the comm also appears to have dhvat in d, but doubt- less only by an oversight of the copyist gander the next verse it gives ahvat m an iden- tical phrase of exposition). MS (ILa ii , p 24 3) gives pratlka reading a prihi paramdsyd.h pardvdiah, while no corresponding verse is found in its text — or else- where, so far as is known, unless here 6 Like a human Indra, go thou away ; for thou hast concurred {sam- jiid) in concord with the castes (?) ; he here hath called thee in his own station ; he shall sacrifice to the gods, and he shall, arrange the people {vi^as). The translation of this obscure and cntticult verse implies much and venturesome emendation in the first half, namely, in «, indra tva manusydh, and in b vdmSts. Weber also takes manusyaszs meant for a nom sing., and renders xt “menschenge- staltet”, the other translators understand manusyh vi^as, as does the PeL Lex The Ppp version, tndro idam mamisya pre 'hi, suggests -syak, and is decidedly better m preht (to be resolved into pr-e-ht, whence perhaps the corruption to pareht)', the repeated vocative indraotndra (so the pada-Vsyd) is not to be tolerated. For b, Ppp has sam ht yajHiyds tvd vaT^nena samviddnah, which is too corrupt to give us aid , the emendation to vdmdis is a desperate and purely tentative one, as there is no evi- dence that vdTma had assumed so early the sense of ‘caste.’ Weber suggests that varuna here is equal to varana ‘ elector ’ , Zimmer takes it as virtually for devdts both entirely unsatisfactory. Ppp ends the verse with so kalpaydd dtqah. To the comm there is no difficulty , the repeated vocative is out of reverence (Jddardrtham') , manu- syds is a Vedic irregulanty for -sydn, or else quahfies prajds understood; the plural varundis is plur. tnajesiaiictts for varttnena j kalpaydt, finally, is svasvavydpdresu myunktdm The Anukr passes without notice the pada d, it being easy to read the verse into 44 syllables 7 The wealthy roads, of manifoldly various form, all, assembling, have made wide room for thee ; let them all in concord call thee ; to the tenth [decade of life] abide here formidable, well-willing Pathyd revatls, divinities of good roads and welf^e, are explained by the comm as patho 'napetd mdrgahttakdnnya etatsamjiid devatdhj or else pathyds is paiht sSdh- avah, and revails is dpas. Both editions read m d va(e 'hd, but the comm , with -SPP’s qroiriyas V. and K., read vase 'hd, and the translation imphes this Ppp offers -Ill 5 91 TRANSLATION ^AND NOTES BOOK III. \ no variants for the verse Many of our satn/nid-mss (P M W E I.H.) retain the final visarga of samvid&ndh before hv- me, SPP does not report any of his as guilty of such a blunder j_V and K recognize vaqihd as a variant J Ppp appends another verse yadi jarena havtsd datvd gatnaydmasi atrd ta tndras kevalir vt(o bahhrias karat (cf RV x 173 6 c, d) 5. For prosperity: with a parni-amulet. \Atharvan — astakam sSumyam dnusiubkatn i purd nustup trtstubh , 8 vtr3diirobrhatt'\ Found (except vs S) m Paipp 111 Used by Kau? (19 22), with viii 5 and x 3, 6, to accompany the binding on of an amulet for gener^ prosperity (JejobalayurdJianddi-' pustaye^ comm ). And the comm quotes it from Naks K |_comm should say Q^anti K. — BloomfieldJ as employed m a 7 nahd(dntt named dfigtrasf. j_In the prior draft, W wnles “ For success of a king with ” etc as title of this hymn Its place in the collection, next after in 3 and 4, and its second vs , seem to justify that title J Translated Weber, xvu. 194 ; Gnfiith, 1 86, Bloomfield, 114,331 — Vss 6 and 7, Zimmer, p 184, with comment r Hither hath come this /^ZT/^f-amulet, strong, by strength slaughter- ing our rivals ; force of the gods, milk of the herbs, let it quicken me with splendor unremittingly Ppp has for i/nayi rdstratn jtnvatv aprayucchan Apraydvan m d, which is read by all the mss (hence by both editions) and the comm , is unquestionably to be emended (as suggested by BR , v lor 5) to -ydvam Grain » § 995 b, root yu , cf yuch \ , the word is quoted m the Prat text (iv 56), but not in a way to determine its fond (apra~ ydvddi-) As the later verses show, pama is to be understood here as the tree of that name {Butea frondosa comm pald^avrksa) The comm raises no objection to dpra- yivan, and explains it as either fndm vihdyd 'napaganid san (with irregular exchange of case-forms), or else apraydtar, 1 e sarvadd dhdryamdna 2 In me [maintain] dominion, O /<2^-amulet, in me maintain wealth ; may I in the sphere of royalty be familiar Q mjd), supreme Compare the nearly corresponding vi 54 zj^which suggests emendation of ntjds to yujds L‘ may I be supreme above [any] ally or fellow-king ’ {yujds as abl ) J Ppp has rdstram for ksatram in a, and its d reads yajd bhiiydsavt ■uttard, supporting the emen- dation Our Bp reads in c -vargrd, as some of the mss do m the other occurrences' of this obscure word : the comm explains it by dvarjane svddhltil-karane ‘ appropriation,* and mja by ananyasahdya [BR give ‘ bestandig ’ for ntja J 3 The dear amulet which the gods deposited hidden in the forest-tree — that let the gods give to us to wear, together with length of life (dyus) Ppp has for b vdjtm devdh priymn utdhtm, and its second half-verse is tarn ma tndras sahd "yusd mantm daddtu bhartave 4 The pamd, Soma’s formidable power, hath come, given by Jndra, governed (faj) by Varuna ; may I, shining greatly. Wear it in order to length of life for a hundred autumns The translation implies emendation in c of the unmanageable prtydsam to bhrtydsant, an ob^ous improvement, adopted also by Weber, and supported by the reading of Ppp*, 111 . 5 - BOOK III, THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAIflHITA 92 tain ahatn btbharmij the ,'too, though reading priy-, glosses it with bhrtydsam dharayeyam In b, Ppp. has sakhyas for qtstas. The comm finds m sdmasya par- nds in a allusion to the ongm of the parna-tree from a leaf (pama) of soma, and quotes for it TS 111.5 7*. Rdcamdnas in c he uses as qualifying idm The metrical definition of the verse is wanting in the Anukr mss , we may call it a mcrt tristubh LSee Weber’s note onparnd.^ 5 The par 7 id-zmv\tt hath ascended me, in order to great unharmed- ness, so that I may be superior to patron {aryamdn) and to 2\\y {sainvid). Samvid is here taken as correspondmg noun to the common adjective samvtdand (the Pet Lex, “possession”; Weber, “favor”), the comm makes it sarndnajUdnit or samabalatj and aryaman^ accordmg to him, comes from arln yamayati, and means adhtkabalah purupradatd ca. Ppp. combines tnahyd 'rtst- in b, and has for d manusyS adJu samgatah (or sammatdK) All the mss, and SPP’s text, read uttards in c; our Uttar as is a necessary emendation. [_As to aryamdn, cf Weber’s note J 6. They that are clever charior-makers, that are skilful smiths — sub- jects to me do thou, O parnd, make all people {jdnd) round about Ppp heginsyat taksano rath-, and its second half-verse is sarvdns tva *nrna randhayo 'pastim krnu medtnam The comm renders dhlv&nas by dhivard vidtstkah ‘ fisher- men,’ and gives the technical definition of the caste of rathakSras Weber (p. 196 £f) ' treats with much fulness of these and other caste matters Upastln the comm, explains, nearly enough correctly, by sev&rtham samffie vtdyaffuiniln ubdsInSn vd 7 They that are kings, king-makers, that are charioteers and troop- leaders — subjects to me do thou, O parnd, make all people roimd about. Our Bp reads in b grSmaonydh, emended to onydh, Kp has gr&manydhj Op and D (and, so far as appears, all SPP’s ^a^fe-mss ) gr&manycih j the word is divided by the RV pada-\&yX (^Smaonth), as m all reason it should be , and its division seems favored, if not required, by our Prat ui 76 Ppp. has a quite different text upasttr astu vatgya uta giidra utd "ryah for a, b, with c, d as in its version of vs 6 (but with ta7i rna j_intending toLn parnaf^ instead of tvd 'nrnd). Weber, on authonty of a rs-, and ends d with samvtsfvaht |_The samhttd-xnss all combine tva rs- in b , see note to Prat, ui 46 J 5 Let perdition bind them, with unreleasable fetters of death — my foes, O aqvatihd, whom I hate and who [hate] me Ppp has avimokydts m b, and (as m vs i) begms d with ydnq cd 'ham Several of our mss (P M W E ) have at the begmmng the senseless readmg stmdtu 6 As, O apjatthd, ascending them of the forest-trees, thou dost put them beneath thee {ddJiara), so the head of my foe do thou split apart and overcome ill 6- BOOK III THE A,THARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA 94 Ppp. (as we saw above) has the second half of this verse, wnth vanants, as its 3 c, d. What the vanaspatyd is, as distinguished from vdnaspdti^ is as obscure as the similar relation of rtti and drtavd |_iii 10 9 notej; possibly ‘ they of that sort, they and their kind’; our translation marks, rather mechanically, the distinction The comm, says that here vanaspaii means “ the place where trees grow,” and vdnaspatya the trees themselves — which is an explanation quite after his kind 7 Let them float forth downward, like a boat severed from its mow- ing {bdndhand) ; of them, thrust forth by the expelling one, there is no returning again. Ppp reads in c nurbadhaj our Op. has vdtbadhd pra^nuttdndm Astu in d, for asti, would be an improvement The comm gives a double explanation of bandhana, as either place or instrument of fastening ^The vs recurs at ix 2 1 2, with say aka- for 'odibadlid W’s collation of Op gives /rao, not_^r^fo!J 8 I thrust them forth with mind, forth with intent and incantation ; forth with branch of tree, of agvatthd, we thrust them. Ppp has in a prat 'nan nudamt (which makes the meter easier), and at the end cor- respondingly the active nuddmastj for b it gives /ra qrtyena brdhmand. The linguah- zation of the first « of enan is noted m Prat lii 80, and the comment on that rule quotes the instance m c, but not that in a. According to Kaug the thing “ mentioned in the text ” (perhaps an effigy of the person aimed at, in the “ vitals ” of which something has been buried by the preceding rule) |_having been put upon a boatj is w-ith this verse and IX 2 4 pushed forth with a branch, and with vs 7 made to float aw'ay 7. Against the disease k§etriyd. \Bhrgvangiras — saftarcam yaksmand^anadirvatam uta bahudrvatyam dmtstubham 6 Sburij'] Found in PSipp lii , with few vanants, but with vs 5 at the end. Used by Kaug (27 29) in a healing ceremony (its text does not specify the disease) ; and reckoned (26 T, note) to the takmana^ana gana And the comm quotes it as employed by the Naks l_C^anti?J K (17, 19) in the niahdqdnti called kautn&rl Translated Weber, xvii 208 , Gnil, 8, 105 , Gnffith, 1 89, Bloomfield, 15, 336 I. On the head of the swift-running gazelle (Jiaruid) is a remedy; he . by his horn hath made the kseinyd disappear, dispersing. Vtsand is divided (ytosana) m the pada-\Q.xt, as if from vt + sd ^ unfasten’ — which is, indeed, m all probabihty its true denvabon, as designating primarily a deciduous horn, one that is dropped off or shed , and in this peculianty, as distinguished from the permanent horns of the domestic animals, perhaps lies the reason of its application to magical remedial uses The verse occurs also in Ap^S xin 7 16 bvrhere most mss have raghttsyafo] For the ksetriya, see above, 11 8 See p 1045 J 2 After thee hath the bull-gazelle stridden with his four feet ; O horn, do thou unfasten {visa) the ksetnyd that is compacted {^) m his heart ’ Ppp has a different d . yadt kunctt ksetriyath krdt. The word-play in c, between •Otsdnd and vt-sa^ iSoTjvious; that any was intended ivith vtsilclna in i d is very ques- tionable. This verse, again, is found in Ap(JS ib , but with considerable vanants anu 95 TRANSLATION AND NOTES., BOOK III - 111 . 7 ivH harino inrgah j>adbJaq catttrbJnr akravilt visaiie vt syat 'tarn giantJum yad asya guJphttath hrdij here it is a “ knot ” that is to be untied b} means of the horn One of our mss (O.) has in c padbhis, like ApQS The comm , followed by a couple of SPP’s mss , further agrees with ApQS by reading gulphtiatn in c, and explains it as giilphavad grathttavi The occurrence of the rare and obscure guspita Lmispnnted -giishiam^ m QB m 2 2 20 is also m connection with the use of a deer’s horn 3 What shines down yonder, like a four-sided roof (cliadis), therewith we make all the ksetnyd disappear from thy limbs In our edition, tina in C should bo as read by nearly all the samhii&-vci%s (all save our PM), and by SPP. The sense of a, b is obscure to the comm , as to us , he guesses first that it is “ the deer-shaped thing extended m the moon’s disk,” or else “a-deer’s skin stretched on the ground”, c/tadls is “the mat of grass with which a house is covei'ed ” Weber takes it as a constellation ; Gnll (mistranslating paks-a by “post”), as the gazelle himself set up on his four legs, with his horns for roof 1 If a constellation, it might be the Arab “ manzil ” % 1;, tt Aquarii, which its shape and name connect with a tent see Silrya-Stdd/tanfa, note to viii 9 (under 25th astensm), this is not very far from the stars mentioned in the next verse LX and v ScorpionisJ 4 The two blessed stars named Unfasteners {vtcri), that are .yonder in the sky — let them unfasten of the ksetnyd the lowest, the highest fetter The verse is nearly identical with 11 S i above, which see [_b recurs at vi 121 3 b, V Schroeder gives the Katha version of a, b, Ziuei /iss , p 15, and Tubtuger Katha-hss , P 75 J Ppp makes it m part jet more nearly so, by beginning witli ud ag&tdm bhaga- vatt, but reads in c vt ksetriyam tvH *J>Uy ana<^c Lcf our 6b), and its end and\part of vs 6 (which next follows) are defaced 5 The waters venly [are] remedial, the waters disease-expelling, the waters remedial of everything , let them release thee from ksetnyd. The first three pad^ are RV x 137 6 a,b,c, save that RV has sdrvasya in c, but VI 91 3 below represents the sarhe \erse yet more closelj 6 If from the drink {J dsutl) that was being made the ksetnyd hath come upon iyt-aq) thee, I know the remedy of it , I make the ksetnyd disappear from thee The word is of doubtful and disputed sense, Weber sajs “infusio seminis” l_as immediate cause of the “ Erb-ubel,” wdiich is Weber’s version of ksetnyd \ , Gnll, “gekochter Zaubertrank ” , the comm , dt avfb/ifttam an/ia/n ‘liquidized food ’ 7 In the fading-out of the asterisms, in the fading-out of the dawns also, from us [fade] out all that is of evil nature, fade out (apa-vas) the ksetnya Ppp has iato 'sasRm at end of b, and in c dwayat for durbhiitam' Emendation of (ismdt m c to astnut (as suggested by Weber) would notably improve the sense. The second pada has a syllable too many, unless we make the double combination v 5 s 6 *sds 3 m iii. 8- BOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. 96 8. For authority. ]Atharvan — ndtiram uta vdtfvadrvam, trdtstubham 2,6 jagafi, 4. 4-p vtrddbrhatJgarbhd , g anustubh ] Verses 1-4 found m Paipp 1., but defaced The hymn is used by Kaug (55. 17-18 also 55. 1, note), with 1 9, 30, etc , in the ceremony of reception of a Vedic student, and, accordmg to the schol. (10 19, note), in that for the generation of wisdom (the comm, says, as belonging to the dyusya gatia) Verses 5 and 6 are the same wuth vi.94 1,2, and It IS VI 94, rather than these verses here, that is used in Kaug 12.5 (the comm blunderingly prescribes the use under both passages) Verse 4 has the same prataka as XIV I 32 and one or the other of the two verses is taught in Vait (22 i) as used “ by Kaugika ” m the agtitstomaj but our Kaug. has no such use, and it is doubtless XIV I 32,33 that he prescnbes (79 i7fE) in the nuptial ceremonies; but the comm, reports the use here, as if it referred to vss. 4 and 5 The comm further regards the hymn as emplojed by the Naks K (18), in the dirdvatl nte, and by Pangista 5 3; m both cases as an dyusya hymn Translated Weber, xvii 212; Gnffith, 1. 90. I Let Mitra come, arranging with the seasons, umting Q sam-veqaya^ the earth with the ruddy ones {usr(yd ) ; then to us let Varuna, Vayu, Agni, assign great royalty of union (? samve^a). The verse is very obscure, and probably corrupt, though found almost without van- ant (only tat for atka in c) in Ppp also The epithet samve^d (found only here) seems fashioned to correspond to the participle sanivegdyan in b ; but Weber renders the ppl by “umlagemd” and the epithet by “ruhsam”, the comm , by “pervadmg” (yydpnuvatt) and “ smtable for abiding in ” {samveqdrham avasthdnayogyatn) The comm takes usriyds as gdvas, 1 e ktrands ‘ rays.’ R ventures heroic emendations . “ Let Mitra come after ordenng of the time, enlivenmg {samhdpayan or something equivalent, since ‘ puttmg to rest ’ is no result of the action of Mitra’s rays) the earth with his rays , but let Varuna make wind and fire (ydyum agntw), make our great realm go to rest,” The first pada is redundant, unless we make the double combmation mttrd rtdbhih [_BR take kalp~ as * sich nchtend nach ’J 2. Let Dhatar, Rati, Savitar enjoy here {tddin ) ; let Indra, Tvashtar, welcome my words {vdcas ) ; I call the divine Aditi, mother of heroes- that I meiy be midmost man of my fellows The first pada is also vii 17 4 a, and VS vui 17 a. The plural verb m b seem? to imply that all the deities mentioned in the hne are to be regarded as its subjects Madhyamestha (like maddyamagi, iv 9 4), probably the one whom the others gather about as chief ; the comm has nothing valuable {samrddhakdmah san svasavidndth sevyaK) The comm taker rati in a as = Aryaman Ppp has grhnantu for haryantu in b The meter of d would be rectified by reading syam (or dsam, as is p>erhaps assumable in this stage of the language) for dsdnt The verse as it stands (ii + 12 11 + 12 = 46) IS lU descnbed as a jagatl 3 I call, with acts of homage, Soma, Savitar, all the Adityas, in the contest for preeminence ; may this fire shine for very long, kindled by [my] fellows who gainsay not. / 97 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III -ili. 8 The translation implies in b emendation J_cf in i8 4J to aharnuttaratvi (against ail' the mss and both editions), as proposed by BR , 1 891 , the comm also takes it as two 'words, and renders uttaraivd by yajamdnasya ^rdisthye Ppp reads devan for adtiyUn in b The comm has dTdayat in samJutdj our/iZiib-texthas it, and PraL m 22 and IV 89 deal with its conversion to did&yat in samhitd 4 May ye be just here; may ye not go away {pards ) ; may an active herdsman {gopd), lord of prospenty, drive you hither ; do ye, with [your] desires, [attend] upon (?) his desire, let all the gods copductyou together hither The translation implies emendation ind of -yantu to -nayaniu, as called for by both meter and sense, and also the addition of a verb, sta or tia, at end of c, for a hke reason If, as seems very probable, the verse is ongmally addressed to kme, kSminls in c is quite natural , if not, we may regard vt(as as understood the sense is ‘ be your desu-es sub- ject to his ’ Ppp has tf different reading asmSt vas kdmd. upa k&mtnlr vtqve devd iipasatyam tha The comm regards kdmtnfs as addressed throughout, and explains It finally as meanmg stnyah gdvah (perhaps the text is defective or incorrect , the general explanation of the verse implies striyah) The comm r^ds puras for paras in a, and in b .divides fryas, denving it from root fr, and rendenng it mdrgaprerakas \_pada has {ryas\ The Anukr calls for ii-fii .9-fii=42 S5dlables, and strictly requires at the end -t-antUj but no inference as to a difference of_reading is to be“ drawn from this [Ppp combmes in b vdjat — Weber says **asmdt diesem, dem Hausherm, kdmdya zu Liebe , oder gehOrt asmdr-za kdmdya selbst? 5 We bend together your -minds, together your courses (vratd), together your designs ; ye yonder who are of discordant courses, we make you bend [thqra] together here This and the following verse, not found with the others in Ppp., occur again below as VI 94. 1, 2 Lcf also 11 30 2J, and vs i occurs in Ppp xix., with the other matenal of our sixth book ; they" are so far discordant in subject with the preceding verses that we may fairly call them out of place here This one exists in MS (11 2 6), with atuxmsata for namdmasi, and si?td for sihdna. A RV kkt/a to x.-i9i has jdnatdm in a for sam vratd, dkutis m b, and, for c, d, asduyo vtmand janas-tam samdvariaydmast The first half-verse, further, nearly accords with VS xil 58 a, b, TS iv 2 5* a, b, MS il 7 II a, b (they have vdm for vas, and, for b, sdm u citt&i^ & *karam) Nearly_all our samhiid-ra&s read -idk before sthdna, nor is there anything in the Prat to prescribe the omission of the vtsarga m such a situation, while the comment to li 40 expressly quotes the passage as an example of the assimilation of it to a following imtial sibilant The comm reads stana instead of sthana Three of our mss (P MJE ) read at the end -naydmast 6 I seize [your] minds with [my] mind; come .ye after my intent with [your] intents ; I put your hearts in my control : come with [your] tracks following my motion {ydtd). The comm ronds g^hndmt in a, and three " f^'ur of SPP’s mss follow him , he also makes m b a compoimd of anuctttebkts Qmte ^ number of mss (including our P M W H.S mi) very strangely combine at the end -mdnar dta MB has a somewhat similar verse at i 2 21 How heedless the Anukr is of metncal irregulanty is well iii 8- BOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAKIHITA. 98 illustrated by c, where the desirable alteration of vdgesu io~vd^e, and the abbreviation of hfdaydm to the equivalent -y& (both suggested by Weber) would leave a good tristubk pada ; there is no jagatl character to any part of the verse. LThe combination -mcLnareta looks as if it had blundered in from the end of b J 9. Against viskandha and other evils. \ydtnadeva — dySvaprthtviyam uta vdtfvadevam Snustttbkam 4 4-p ntcrd brhati ; ^ 6 bhurtj ] Found m Paipp lu (with vs. 6 at the beginning) Used by Kaug (43 i) in a charm against demons and the hindrances caused by them Translated Weber, xvii.215 ; Griffith, i 91 ; Bloomfield, 67, 339 1 Of the karqdpJia^ of the vi^aphd, heaven [is] father, earth mother : as, O gods, ye have inflicted {ab/n-kr), so do ye remove {apa-ki) again The whole hymn contains much that is obscure and difficult, and the comm gives no real^ help anywhere, being as much reduced to guessing as we are Ppp begms .^vith karsabhasya visabhyasya, which rather favors Weber’s opinion, that tlie ap/ia of the two names is a suffix, related with abha; probably two varieties of viskandha are intended, though none such are mentioned in the later medicine The comm finds ^apha ‘hoof’ m both, one — kr^a^aphasy a (vyaghradeh')^ the other either vtgata- qaphasya or ^tspasia^aphasya SPP reads in b dy&uh which is doubtless prefer- able to our dyatis p - , it is read by the majonty of his mss and by part of ours (H I K ) ; Ppp also has it Ppp further omits abht in c, and reads apt for apa in d 2 Without claspers they held fast {dJidrayd)\ that was so done by Manu ; I make the viskandha impotent, like a castrater of bulls. Ppp begins with aqlesaptdno *dh - , some of the mss (including our O ) also give aglesntdnas, and it is the reading of the comm.; he gives two different and equally arti- ficial explanations , and, what is surpnsing even in him, three diverse ones of vddJiri, without the least regard to the connection , one of the three is the right one Ppp adds ca after vadhri in c. Weber plausibly conjectures a method of tight tjnng to be the subject of the verse , castration is sometimes effected in that way 3 On a reddish string a khrgala — that the pious {vedhds) bind on; let the binders (?) make impotent the flowing (>*), puffing (?) kdbavd. All obscure and questionable Ppp’s version is for a, siltre ptquhkhe khugtlam; in h, y ad for tadj fore, qravasyavi qustna k&babam (the nagari copyist writes The comm also has m c ^ravasyatn, and three or four of SPP’s mss follow him , the translation assumes it to be for srav- The comm explains khrgalam by tanutranam ‘ armor,’ quoting RV 11 39 4 as authonty , (ravasyarn by bdlarfipam annatn arhati (since qravas is an annandman '); ^dsmam by ^osakam Lsee Bloomfield, ZDMG. xlvin 574J , kdbava as a hindrance related with a kabu^ which is a speckled {karbura- varnd) cruel animal , and bandhuras is either the amulet bound upon us, or it is for -rds, “ the amulet, staff, etc , held by us ” 4 Wherewith, O flowing ones, ye go about {car), like gods with Asura-raagic (^•mdyd), like the ape, spoiler of dogs, and with the binder ( ?) of the kdbavd. 99 TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III. -Ill lO Or (ravasjfti is ‘ quick, lively ’ (Pet Leioc the comm , “ seeking either food or glory.” Ppp reads m c, d dnsanam vandharS. kSbkavasyain ca The comm explains bandlmrU by sambaddhA dhrt& khadgidtrilpH hetih The verse is scanned by the Anukr asp + p 9 + 8 = 35, the usual abbreviation of tva to *va would make b and c good anusfubh padas. j_Read (ravasyaf, voc , in a ?J 5 Since I shall bind thee [on] for spoiling, I shall spoil the kabavd , ye shall go up with curses, like swift chariots The translation implies emendation of bJiartsyavit (our edition) ox bhatsyami (SPP’s and the comm.) to bhOiitsyamt^ from root bandk, which seems plainly indicated as called for ; the comm eJqilains bhats- first as badhndmi, and then as dlpay&fntj the great majority of mss give bharts-. Ppp. is quite corrupt here * justl tvd k&mcchd 'bht josaytivd bhavatn. The comm hai at the end cansyatha (two or three of SPP’s mss agreeing with him), and he combines in c udSgavas into one word, “harnessed with speedy horses that have their mouths raised for gomg ” 6. A hundred and one viskandhas [are] distnbuted over the earth; thee have they first taken up, of them the viskandha-s'^^Vixng amulet. That' IS, ‘an amulet that spoils those vtskattdhas^ (Weber otherwise) In c, for the jahants of all the mss and of both editions, we ought of course to have jahnts, this the comm reads such expansions of r with preceding or following consonant to a syllable are not rare m the manuscnpts Ppp has a different second half-verse lesdm ca sarvesdm tdam ash vtskandhadiisanam The second pSda iS found, jn a different connection, as MB. 11 8 4 b. The comment on Prat 11.104, lu quoting this verse, appears to derive vtskandha from root skand The verse is made bkurtj only by the false form jaharus, |_FQr “ loi,” see note-to 111 1 1 5 J 10. To the ekastakt (day of moon’s last quarter). \Atharvan — trayodafarcam dstakyam dnustubham 4,£,6,X2 trtstubk , 7 2 (11 13 10), K (xxxix lo), QGS (ill 12 3), and MB (n 2 15) For dsv itardsu, TS and ^GS have antdr asyamj MS , also Ppp , sd 'psv dntdsj MB , se 'ydtTt apsv anias All of them, with Ppp., mvert the order of c and d , and they have a different version of our c irdya (but Ppp iT^ta') endm ttiahtmanah sacante (^GS. -ntd 77 i), but MB. viqve hy asydttt mahttTtdno attiahj while, for jtgdya m d, TS and (JGS give jajdna, and MS. and Ppp iTtimdya, (^GS following it with navakrjj and MB reads pratha 7 nd for our navagdt QGS , moreover, has in a vyuchat These vanants speak ill for the tradi- tion. The comm gues four diverse explanations of navagdt. gomg in company with each new or daily nsing sun , pervading the new ongmatmg kmd of imng creatures ; going to a daily ongmatmg new form , or, finally, gomg to the nine-fold divisions of the day , and the comment to TS. Lreported by WeberJ adds a fifth, “ newly mamed”; if the last IS the meaning, jajdna is better with it than jigdya: “ as soon as wedded to the new year, she bears the days that follow.” The meter is really redundant by a syllable in a \ tyd{vdf\ L^urther, MB has in a esdt *va sd yd p'Urvd vy-j and Ppp ends d with janitrlm. — BR., v. 1 538, give ‘ erst-gebareod ’ for navagdt J 5. The fotest-tree pressing-stones have made their sound, making the oblation of the coigplete year {partvatsarina) ; O ,so 1 q dsfakd, may we, having good progeny and good heroes, be lords of wealths. lOI TRANSLATION AND NOTES. BOOK III -lil 10 “ Stones ” • i.e. probably, blocks of wood used instead of stones Lsee HiUebrandt, Ved. Mythol. i iba, r6i J , or the wooden mortar and pestle (so the comm ) Ppp. reads ^for c ek&stakayl (= -kayat') havtsa vtdhema Some of the mss combine havih kr- m b , the comment to Prat ii. 63 requires havis k-, which both editions accept Some of our mss (P M W Op ) give in c supraj&sas HGS. (11 14 4) and MB (11 2. 13) have a corresponding- verse • HGS begins with ulukhalSs, combines havth k- and reads -rlnam in b, and has suprajcL viravantas in c , MB gives for h dulilkhaWi savtpra- n/adantt grdvdnas, ends b with -rfndm, and has for d jyog jlvema bahhrto vaya 7 n te j_It recurs also at MP 11 20 34 and MGS 11 8 4t> J The first pada is jagatl, unnoted in the Anukr. j_As to asiakd, cf Zimmer, p 365 J 6 The track {padd) of Ida [is] full of ghee, greatly trickling ; O Jata- vedas, accept thou the oblations The cattle of the village that are of all forms — of those seven let the willmg stay (rd7nti) be with me Versions are found in A^S (11 2 17), ApQIS (vi 5 7), HGS (11 17 2), and MB. (11 2 14), and of the latter half m TA (111 11.12, vs 31 a, c) MB agrees with our text throughout, the three others have cardcaram at end of a, and all three havtr tdatn jusasva (for prait etc) mb, HGS begins with tddydt srptarn, and ApQS combines tddyah p- , then, in d, Ap^S , HGS , and TA read thd instead of vidytj and A(JS pustts for ramtiSj HGS ends with ramtir astn pustth The coram reads tidy as in a , he renders sarlsrpam by atyartha 7 ?t sarpat, ra 77 iits by prllts, and specifies the seven village (1 e domestic) animals as cow, horse, goat, sheep, man, ass, camel , but the number seven is doubtless used only as an indefinite sacred one Pada a is agam jagatl, as m vs 5 LPada c is our 11 34.4a, between viT^varttpas and tesd 7 ti ApQS inserts virUpds (a fragment of our 11 34 4 b 1 ) — Prat 11 72 requires tddyds p- J 7 [Set] thou me in both prosperity and abundance , O night, may we be in the favor of the gods O spoon, fly away full , fly back hither well-filled ; jointly enj'oymg all sacnfices, brmg to us food (/j), refreshment (^ 37 ) The first two padas, which seem to have nothing to do with the rest of the verse, are wanting m Ppp What follows them is a complete a 7 nistjibh, and quoted bj its pratika in VaiL (see above) , its first half is found in several other texts VS (111 49), TS (1 8 4'), MS. (1 10 2), K (ix 5), A^S (11 18 13), of these, VS TS A^S rtzAdarvi for darve, as does also the comm , with a few of SPP’s mss Ppp has sa 7 /ipr 7 tcatl tsam m the last half-verse. The comm understands d sthdpaya m a, as m the transla- tion , bJiaja would answer an equally good purpose He explains that the spoon is to go forth with oblation and to return with the answenng blessings Sa 7 /ibJiu 7 ijatl he renders by Jiavtsd sa77iyak pdlaya 7 itl p 7 ^ 7 iaya 7 iil Finally, he points out that, as c is quoted as a pratika, a and b have a nght to the character of a separate \erse , but that m the padcapatalikd the whole is made a verse, wath three avasd 7 tasj tlie statement, but not the title, appears to fit our Anukr , this scans as8-Hio 8-f8 8-f8 = 5o, needlessly counting only I o syllables in b In our ed., read for LCf iv. 15 12 n J 8 Hither hath come the year, thy spouse, O sole ds^akd , do thou unite our long-lived progeny with abundance of wealth Instead of repeating the second half-verse of vs 3, Ppp gives for c, d tas 7 /tdt juho 77 tt havtsd ghrte 7 ia qdji 7 iaq t^ar/tia yaccJiatti Against his usual habit, the comm explains c, d anew, but quite in accordam,e mth his former explanation m. 10- BOOK III. THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAlvIHITA. -102 9, I sacFifice^ to the seasons, the lords of the seasons, them of the seasons {artavd)^ and the winters {hayand)^ to the summers {sdmd), the years,, the months , for the lord of existence I sacrifice. The change of case, from accusative to dative, in d, doubtless intends no jchange of construction The verse, as noted above, is wanting jn Ppp ; it is m part repeated below, as xi.6. 17 According to the comm , the “lords of the seasons” are the gods, Agni etc , the SrJavas |_cf. 111.6 6 note J are “parts of seasons; other unspeafieih divi- sions of time, sixteenths, kasthas, etc.”, and although savtS, savtvaisara, hay ana are synonymous, jet hayana here signifies “dajs and nights,” and samd “half7months ” 10 To thee for the seasons, them of the seasons, the months, the years, the Creator (d/idtdr), the Disposer {ytdhdtdr)^ the /Prosperer {} samrdh), the lord of existence, do I sacrifice All the j as abo's^e noted The second annvaka contain? 5 h}Tnns, 40 verses , and the quotation 'from the Old Anukr is simply da^a ' II. For relief from disease, and for long life. \Brahmatt and Bhrgvangiras — astaream atndragnayusyam, yaksmaudfanadevatyam trdistubkam ^ fakvarlgarbhd jagail, 6 ajiuitubh , 7 usntgbrhatigarbhd yathydpankh , 8 j-av 6 p brhaftgarbhd jagatt'\ ^The first /four verses are 'found m Paipp 1 , with the bulk of the 4-verse hymns; they are also RV x r6i i -4 (RV adds a fifth verse, which occurs below as vni'i 20) The hymn is used by Kaug (27 32, 33) in a general healing ceremony (without specifi- cation of person, or occasioiv, tlie schol and comm assume to add such), andj'^n com- pany with many others (iv 13 i etc etc), m a nte for length of life (58 ii), and it is reckoned to the iakmandqana gana '(26 i, note) and to the dyusya gana (54- ii, note, but the comm , ignpnng these, counts it as one of the anhohiiga gana) In Vait (36 19), vs 8 accompanies the setting free of the horse at the agvatnedha sacrifice , and the hymn (the edition says, .1^ 10 4, the pratikas are the same) is employed, wth 11 33 etc , m the purttsamedha (38 i). — [_Sefc'also W’s introduction to 11 33 J Translated Weber, xvii 231 , Griffith, i 95 , Bloomfield, 49, 341 — In part also by Roth, Zur Ltiteratur u\td Geschuhie des Weda, p 42 1 I release thee by oblation, in order to hying, from unknown ydksma and from xop2\ ydkpna , if now seizure {grd/it] hath seized him, from it, O Indra-and-Agni, do ye release him RV inserts vd 2i\.&r yddi m c Ppp. has, in the second half-verse,^ and Bloomfield’s references , also M Wmtemitz, Mtiilutlungen (Ur Anthropologtschen Gesellschaft tn Wien, vol xvii, p. [38] 1. Just here I fix (m-mt) [my] dwelhng {(did) firm; may it stand in security, sprinklmg ghee ; unto thee here, O dwellmg, may we resort (sam-car) with all our heroes, with good heroes, with unharmed heroes Ppp reads abht instead of upa in d Padas a, b are found in PGS. 111. 4. 4, with itsihatu for -dit, and b in ^GS 111 3, with itstJiaioT the same , HGS (1 27. 2) has the whole verse, with tisthatt in a, anu (for upd) m d, and suvlras before saruav- m c. 2 . Just here stand thou firm, O dwellmg, rich m horses, in kme, in pleasantness, in refreshment, m ghee, in milk ; erect thyself {iit-(ri) in order to great good-fortune Ppp. leaves the a of agvdvati in b unelided PGS (ibid ) has padas b and d, mak- ing one verse of them w.ith 3 C, d, padas a, b are also found m (^GS (ibid.), with con- siderable vanants sthilne for dhricvd, dhruvd for ^Sle, and sllam&vatl for sHnr - , and HGS (ibid) has again the whole verse, with ilrjasvatf payasd ptnvamand. for c The comm , with the usual queer perversion of the sense of silnrid, renders stlt^yi&vatl hy bahubhih pnyasatvav&gbhtr bslddlndm vdnfbhtr yukid Padas b and c are jagatl 3 A ^mer (? dJianint) art thou, O dwellmg, of great roof, of cleansed gram , to thee may the calf come, may the boy, may the kme, streammg in at evening This translation of the difficult and doubtless corrupt first half-verse implies emenda- tion of -chandas to -chadts, and of putt- to piltd which latter is, m fact, the Ppp read- ing In d, SPP adopts the bad reading aspdndatndnds, claiming to find it jn the majonty of his mss , but the scnbes are so wholly untrustworthy m their distinction of sy and sp that the reqmrement of the sense is .sufficient to show that they intend sy here , the- comm reads -syand-, and so does CGS (111 2) m th^ parallel passage end.m muh kraiidaty d kumdra d syandantdm dhenavo mtyavatsdh j PGS (ibid ) has d tvd gigur d krandatv d gdvo dhen(ivo vdgyamdndh L^IGS ii 1 1 I2t> reflects our vs 7 J The comm lets us understand by dharuni either bhogajdtasya dhdrayttrl or praqastdt stambhdtr upetdj and by brhachandds prabhiitdchddand or maJiadbhtg chandobhtr veddir upetdj pilttdhdnya is “having com malodorous from age” — a sign of stores unexhausted The Anukr apparently scans as y-f-S lo-b 11=36 a very poor sort of brhail SPP’s authorities for dsyand-, K and V were men, not mss , none of his living authonties g^ve dspand- The blunder is easy for the eye, not for the ear J 4 This dwellmg let Savitar, Vayu, Indra, Bnhaspati fix, foreknowing ; Ill 12- book III. ^HE MHARVA-VEDA-SAMHITA. I06 let the Maruts sprinkle it with water, with ghee ; let king Bhaga deepen {ni-ian) our ploughing. Ppp reads in a, b vdynr agnts ivastd hotd ni, and has somas (which suits rdjd better) for bhagas in d. In c it begins with the true reading uksantUj this is so natu- rally suggested as emendation of the uchdntu of the mss that all the translators assume It (Weber, strangely mistaking the plain statement of the Ind^x Verborum, accuses us of having wrongly altered uksdntu in our edition to uchdntu /) , uksdntu is also read by the comm , and by two or three of SPP’s mss that follow him , and SPP. veiy properly admits it into his text SPP. also reads after it udna, with the comm., but against all his mss [_except the ^rotriya KJ , there is no instance where udna and udnds are correctly read in any of them (here, our Bp O.Op have utna, P.M.' uivi, the rest* unna our edition gives unna, and Weber has failed to see that it was corrected in the Index Verborum [_under uddn^) The comm, makes d refer to the ploughing of the site of the house : 0ldbhilmeh karsanam mtardm karotu [_*E H.D K.Kp and Ppp have unna; I. has uita , W has -tu tvd J |_For uchantu^ see x. 9 23 n.J 5. thou, self in grass, mayest thou be well-willing; then mayest thou give us wealth together with heroes. Ppp has, for c, d, iinnam vasand sumand yagas tvam raytm no dht subhage suvfram. “ Grass ” m c refers probably to a thatched roof Mana the comm gives two explana- tions for. either ‘J The epithet drsTy added by the Anukr to the metncal definition of the verse, is without meaning as aistinguishing it from vs 9 |_cf 111 14 6, notej 8 Bring forward, O woman, this full jar, a stream of ghee combined ipam-bhi) W 4 th ambrosia (ainrta)\ anoint these drinkers (-*) with ambro- sia , let what is offered-and-bestowed defend it (f * the dwelling?). The well-mgh universal reading of the mss in c is imam patrUy which SPP accord- mgly presents m his text, in spite of its grammatical impossibility (of our mss , E gives pdtrdn, -tren being a misreading of -tfn found also more than once elsewhere , P. has puddUy and W pdirafi)^ we emended imam to tmanj but perhaps imam pdtrfm ‘this drmking- vessel,’ which the comm has, would be preferable, as better suited to sdm afidht, and endm at the end would then refer to it The comm has sam tndht mstead of sdm /indhij he makes ^f« 5 /«'lmply ^dldm The corresponding verse in Ppp (xvii) is quite different aJid corrupt , pilnidth ttdbhtri pra hard *bht kumbham apdm ramant osadhlttdn ghrtasya tmdm pdtrer amrtdtr a sam agfiht sthird virds sumanaso bhavantu this suggests imam pafrdtr amHasya m c ‘anoint this [dwelhngj with ves- sels of ambrosia ’ , but also its separation from the preceding verses makes uncertain its belonging to the same ceremony with them In the ceremonial use, it accompanies the entrance into the new dwelling, the wife first, carrying a water-jar 9 These waters I bring forward, free from ydkpna, ydkstna-e^diCmg ; I set forth prasad) unto {upd) the houses, along with immortal {amHa) fire. The verse, as already noted, is wanting j_m this connectionj m Ppp , and neither Kauq nor the comm specify anything as to its use It appears again below as ix 3 23 Lwith Ppp versionj The comm gives no explanation nor paraphrase of prd slddmi L“ Prepositions ” discussed, Prat iv 3, note J 13. To the waters. \Bhrgu -—sapiarcam vSntnam uia stndhudatvatam amtstubham i mart, y vtradjagati , 6 mert trtstubh ] The first six verses occur m Paipp 111, and also in TS (v 6 i), MS (11 13 r), and K (xxxix 2.) The hymn IS used by Kauq in a ceremony for directing water into a certain course (40 iff), the padas of vs 7 are severally employed m it (see under that verse), it also appears, with other hymns (i 4-6, 33, etc etc ), in a nte for good-fortune (41 14) And the comm describes it as used by one who desires ram Verse 7 is further employed, with a number of other verses, by Vait (29 13), m the agntcayana, accompanying the conducting of water, reeds, and a frog over the altar-site — LBerlin ms of Anukr reads stttdhvabddtvaiam J Translated Weber, xvii 240, Gnfiith, 1 99, Bloomfield, 146, 34S — Cf Bergaignc- Henry, Manuel, p 143 lii. 13- BOOK III THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAWHITA. 108 I. Since formerly (? adds)y going forth together, ye resounded i^ad) when the dragon was slam, thenceforth ye are streams (nadt) by name : these are your names, O rivers. The pada-mss all commit the very gratuitous blunder of writing tah instead of ta at the beginning of d, as if it belonged to stndhavas instead of to namamj SPP emends to /a, and the comm so understands the word The comm takes adds as Vedic substi- tute for amusmin, qualifying dhau. None of the other texts gives any vanous readmg for this verse Pada d sets forth, as it were, the office of the first four verses, m findmg punmng etymologies for sundry of the names of water. 2 When, sent forth by Varuna, ye thereupon {dt) quickly skipped {valg) together, then Indra obtained (ap) you as ye went ; therefore are ye waters {dp) afterward. TS. and MS have in d dpas (nomm.), and this is obviously the true reading, and assumed in the translation , both editions follow the mss (except our in giving apas MS. begins the verse with samprdcyutds , for at in b MS h'ssydt and TS ids In d, Ppp ehdes the a of anu, TS leaves sthafta unhnguahzed The comm reads instead sterna 3 As ye were flowing perversely {apakamdm), since Indra verily hin- dered Tpjav) you by his powers, you, ye divine ones, therefore the name V^ater {ydr) is assigned you Ppp has for c tndro vas saktabJnr devdis TS combines m d var nama The comm apparently takes hikam as a single word (the TS pada-X^ so regards it), quot- ing as his authonty Ndighantuka in 12 , and agam m d, if the manusenot does not do him mjustice, he reads hikam for hitain 4 The one god stood up to you, flowing at [your] will; “the great ones have breathed up {ud-an)/’ said he ; therefore water (ttdakd) is [so] called The name here really had in mind must be, it would seem, udan, but udakdtn has to be substituted for it in the nominative ; none of the other texts offer a different form TS improves the meter of a by omittmg vas, and TS and MS. leave the a of api undided Ppp differs more seriously : eko na deva upatisthat ^andamand upetyah Yathavagam m b might be ‘at his will,’ opposed to apakdnidm in vs 3. The sense of c is rather obscure, the comm understands “saying ‘by this respect on^the part of Indra we have become great,’ they breathed freely (or heaved a sigh of relief i ucchva- sitavatyas') ” — which is senseless R suggests “ Indra put himself m their way with the polite address and inquiry, ‘their worships have given themselves an ainng’,_ and_ conducted them on their way again ” , Weber understands them to sigh under the burden of the god standing “upon” {dpi') them The cornt^, declares dpt to have the sense of adht 5. The waters [are] excellent; the waters verily were ghee; these waters veniy bear Agni-and-Soraa ; may the strong {ftvrd) satisfying savor {rdsa) of the honey-mixed {-pre) come to me along with breath, with splendor. 109 TRANSLATION AND NOTES BOOK III -m 14 TS. reads &sits for &san at end of a, and both TS, and MS , as also the comm , have gan at the end (MS p agan) MS combines differently the material of our vss 5 and ( l . first our 6 a, b with 5 c, d, then our 5 a, b with 6 c, d , and for our 5 a it reads apo devir ghrtaminva u dpas. This last seems also to be intended by Ppp , with its apo devir ghftam tidpaJuis, and it has tiyd instead of U t&s at end of b, and combines -gams, mS in c-d. The comm renders madhuprcSm by madhutiS rasena samprktS- navij the descnption in pada c almost makes us fancy some kind of mineral water to be had m view 6. Then indeed I see, or also hear ; unto me comes the noise, to me the voice of them ; I think myself then to have partaken amhrosia {amrta) when, ye gold-colored ones, I have enjoyed {trp) you. TS has the infenor readings nos for ma at end of b and ydd fox y add m d MS is corrupt mb, its pada-\txX reads vdk. nit asSm, but the editor gives in sam/niS-ttxX. vdr nv SsSm The comm combmes vdg tna Ppp has at the heginmngyad for Sd. The comm takes the opportunity of the occurrence of Iitranya- in d to bring forward an etymology of it which he here and there repeats , it is hita-ramanlya / The verse is improperly reckoned as mcrt [_In the edition amrtustha is a mispnnt for -sya J 7 This, O waters, [is] your heart, this your young (vaisd), ye righteous ones , come thus hither, ye mighty ones, where T-now make you enter The preceding verses have been simple laudation of the waters , this appended one (which IS found neither in Ppp nor in the other texts) adds a practical application, and IS the sole foundation of the employment of the hymn by Kau5" With the first pada a piece of gold is buned in the desired channel , with b a prepared frog is fastened there ; with c the frog is covered with a water-plant , with d water is conducted in 14. A blessing on the kine. \Brahman — nSnSdevatyam uta gosthadevatdkam dnmtuhham 6 drsT trislicbh'] The hymn (except vs 5) is found in Paipp 11 (m the verse-order 2, 4, 6, r, 3) It IS used by Kau^ , with other hymns (11 26 etc ), in a ceremony for the prospenty of cattle (19 14) In Vait (21 26), vs 2 accompanies the driving of kme in the agnt- stoma The VaiL use does not appear to be mentioned by the comm^ and his report of the Kaug use is mostly lost from the manuscnpt (but filled m by the editor) Translated Ludwig, p 469 , Weber, xvii 244 , Gnil, 64, 1 12 , Gnffith, 1 lox 5 Bloom- field, 143, 351 r With a comfortable {susdd) stall, with wealth, with well-being, wich that which is the name of the day-bom one, do we unite you. Ppp reads m b sapusyd for siibhiltyS The obscure third pada is found again below as V 28 12 c, it IS altogether diversely rendered (conjecturall} ) by the translators (Weber, “with the blessing of favorable birth”, Ludwig, “with [all) that which o 5 e calls day-bom”, Gnll, “with whatever a day of luck brings forth”), R suggests “with all (of good things) that the day brings, or that is under the heaven” none of these suits the other occurrence " 2 Let Aryaman unite you, let Pushan, let Brihaspati, let Indra, who IS conqueror of riches , m ray possession gain ye what is good. BOOK III THE ATHARVA-VEDA-SAIflHITA. no In. 14- ‘ In my possession,’ lit ‘ with me ’ (bei mir, chez moi)Ji The comm takes pu^ata posayata; and so do the translators, unneeessanly and therefore madmissibly , or, we may emend to pusyatu,, with vdsu as subject “ Umte ” calls for the expression of with what , this is not given, but the verse may be regarded as (except d) a continua- tion of vs iv The three padas A-c are foiind as a ^aya/rf-versc in-MS- {iv 2 10 . ivith posd iox pusa in b) Ppp. ha'r ihapusyati at beginning of d 3 Having come together unaftnghted, rich in manure, in this stall, b^ing the sweet of soma, come ye hither, free from disease. Three of the padas (a, b, d) again form, with considerable variants, a gdyatrlm MS (ibid ) immediately following the one noted above . MS has dvihruids for dbtbhyusls, purXsinls fot kar-^ and, in place of our d, svdveqa na a gata Ppp gives, as not sel- dom, in part the MS. readings, corrupt . it begins samjandndvt vthriam, has Iiavis for madhu in c, and, for d, svaveqdsa etana The combination of p upa